(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "The Graduate School announcements"

Digitized by tine Internet Arciiive 

in 2010 witii funding from 

Lyrasis IVIembers and Sloan Foundation 



http://www.archive.org/details/graduateschoolan1964univ 



INIVERSITY^ MARYLAND 



BULLETIN 




?, 



JmamtrnMH^A 



1964-1966 



THE UNIVERSITY is the rear guard and the 
advance agent of society. It Uves in the 
past, the present and the future. It is the 
storehouse of knowledge; it draws upon 
this depository to throw Ught upon the 
present; it prepares people to live and make 
a living in the world of today; and it 
should take the lead in expanding the 
intellectual horizons and the scientific 
frontiers, thus helping mankind to go forward 
— always toward the promise of a 
better tomorrow. 



From "The State and the University" 
the inaugural address of 
President Wilson H. Elkins, 
January 20, 1955, 
College Park, Maryland. 



GRADUATE SCHOOL 

ANNOUNCEMENTS 

CATALOG SERIES 

1964-66 



THE 
UNIVERSITY 

OF 
MARYLAND 



UNIVERSITY oj MARYLAND BULLETIN 

Volume 19 December 6, 1963 Number 9 

UNIVERSITY OF MARYLAND BULLETIN is published four times in January, 
February, April and June; three times in November, December and March; two 
times in September, October, May and August; and once in July. Re-entered at the 
Post Office in College Park, Maryland, as second class mail matter under the Act 
of Congress on August 24, 1912. Published thirty-four times. 



The provisions of this publication are not to be regarded as an irrevo- 
cable contract between the student and the University of Maryland. The 
University reserves the right to change any provision or requirement at 
any time within the student's term of residence. The University further 
reserves the right at any time, to ask a student to withdraw when it con- 
siders such action to be in the best interests of the University. 



CONTENTS 



GENERAL 



University Calendar v 

Board of Regents vii 

Officers of Administration viii 
Committee Chairmen, 

Faculty Senate xi 

The Graduate School 1 

Location 2 

Libraries 2 

General Information 3 

Academic Information 3 

Admission 3 

Registration 4 

Graduate Courses 4 

Program of Work 4 

Summer Session 5 
Graduate Work, 

Professional Schools 5 

Oak Ridge Institute 5 

Foreign Students 6 

Graduate Work by Seniors 6 
Candidacy for Advanced 

Degrees 6 
Requirements for M.A. and 

M.S. Degrees 7 

Requirements for Degrees 

in American Studies 9 



10 



10 



Requirements for M.Ed. 

Degree 
Requirements for M.B.A. 

Degree 
Requirements for M.M. 

Degree 12 

Requirements for M.S.W. 

Degree 13 

Requirements for Ph.D. 

Degree 13 

Language Examination for 

Ph.D. Degree 15 

Requirements for Ed.D. 

Degree 15 

Graduate Fees 16 

Fellowships and 

Assistantships 17 

Graduate Prize, College 

Park Branch of AAUW 18 
Student Loan Funds 18 

Commencement 19 

Numbering Courses and 

Counting Credit Hours 1 9 

Grades 20 



CURRICULA AND COURSES 



Aeronautical Engineering 
Agriculture 

Agricultural Economics 
Agricultural and Extension 

Education 

Agricultural Engineering . 
Agronomy — Crops and Soils 

American Studies 

Animal Science 

Art 

Botany 

Business Administration 
Chemical Engineering 

Chemical Physics 

Chemistry 

Civil Engineering 



21 Classical Languages and 

24 Literatures 74 

24 Comparative Literature ... 76 

Dairy Science 78 

29 Economics 80 

31 Education 85 

33 Electrical Engineering 111 

37 English Language and 

38 Literature 116 

39 Entomology 119 
43 Foreign Languages and 

48 Literature 122 

58 Geography 130 

64 Government and Politics 136 

65 History 142 

70 (continued on next page) 



III 



CONTENTS 



CURRICULA AND COURSES (Continued) 



Home Economics 149 

Horticulture 161 

Mathematics 163 

Mechanical Engineering 175 

Microbiology 181 

Music 184 

Philosophy 187 

Physical Education, Recrea- 
tion and Health 191 
Physics and Astronomy 197 
Poultry Science 210 



Psychology 212 

Sociology 219 

Speech and Dramatic Art . 225 

Veterinary Science 233 

Zoology 234 

School of Dentistry 239 

School of Medicine 244 

Interdepartmental Courses 246 

School of Nursing 254 

School of Pharmacy 260 

School of Social Work .... 266 



The Graduate Council 270 

Graduate Faculty 271 



IV 



UNIVERSITY CALENDAR, 1963-64 



Fall Semester 




1963 




September 16-20 


Monday-Friday 


September 23 


Monday 


November 27 


Wednesday 


December 1 


Monday 


December 20 


Friday 


1964 




January 6 


Monday 


January 22 


Wednesday 


January 23-30 


Thursday- Wednesday 




inclusive 


Spring Semester 




February 3-7 


Monday-Friday 


February 10 


Monday 


February 22 


Saturday 


March 25 


Wednesday 


March 26 


Thursday 


March 31 


Tuesday 


May 13 


Wednesday 


May 28 


Thursday 


May 29-June 5 


Friday-Friday 


May 30 


Saturday 


May 31 


Sunday 


June 6 


Saturday 


Summer Session 




1964 




June 22 


Monday 


June 23 


Tuesday 


July 4 


Saturday 


August 14 


Friday 


Short Courses 




1964 




June 15-19 


Monday-Saturday 


August 3-7 


Monday-Saturday 


September 8-11 


Tuesday-Friday 



Fall Semester Registration 
Instruction Begins 
Thanksgiving Recess Begins 

After Last Class 
Thanksgiving Recess Ends 

8 a.m. 
Christmas Recess Begins After 

Last Class 



Christmas Recess Ends 8 a.m. 
Pre-Examination Study Day 
Fall Semester Examinations 



Spring Semester Registration 
Instruction Begins 
Washington's Birthday, Holiday 
Maryland Day, not a holiday 
Easter Recess Begins After Last 

Class 
Easter Recess Ends, 8 a.m. 
AFROTC Day 
Pre-Examination Study Day 
Spring Semester Examinations 
Memorial Day, Holiday 
Baccalaureate Exercises 
Commencement Exercises 



Summer Session Registration 
Summer Session Begins 
Independence Day, Holiday 
Summer Session Ends 



Rural Women's Short Course 
4-H Club Week 
Firemen's Short Course 



UNIVERSITY CALENDAR, 1964-65 



(Tentative) 



Fall Semester 
1964 



September 14-18 Monday-Friday 
September 21 Monday 

November 25 Wednesday 



November 30 


Monday 


December 22 


Tuesday 


1965 




January 4 
January 20 
January 21-27 


Monday 
Wednesday 
Thursday- Wednesday 


Spring Semester 




February 2-5 
February 8 
February 22 
March 25 
April 15 


Tuesday-Friday 

Monday 

Monday 

Thursday 

Thursday 


April 20 
May 12 
May 27 
May 2 8- June 4 
May 30 
May 31 
June 5 


Tuesday 

Wednesday 

Thursday 

Friday-Friday 

Sunday 

Monday 

Saturday 


Summer Session 




June 21 

June 22 
July 5 
August 13 


Monday 
Tuesday 
Monday 
Friday 


Short Courses 




June 14-18 
August 2-6 
September 7-10 


Monday-Friday 
Monday-Friday 
Tuesday-Friday 



Fall Semester Registration 
Instruction Begins 
Thanksgiving Recess Begins 

After Last Class 
Thanksgiving Recess Ends 

8 a.m. 
Christmas x.ecess Begins After 

Last Class 



Christmas Recess Ends 8 a.m. 
Pre-Examination Study Day 
Fall Semester Examinations 



Spring Semester Registration 
Instruction Begins 
Washington's Birthday, Holiday 
Maryland Day, not a HoUday 
Easter Recess Begins After Last 

Class 
Easter Recess Ends 8 a.m. 
AFROTC Day 
Pre-Examination Study Day 
Spring Semester Examinations 
Baccalaureate Exercises 
Memorial Day, Holiday 
Commencement Exercises 



Summer Session Registration 
Summer Session Begins 
Independence Day, Holiday 
Summer Session Ends 



Rural Women's Short Course 
4-H Club Week 
Firemen's Short Course 



VI 



Board Of Regents 

and 

Maryland State Board Of Agriculture 

CHAIRMAN 

Charles P. McCormick 

McCormick and Company, Inc., 414 Light Street, Baltimore, 21202 

VICE-CHAIRMAN 
Edward F. Holter 
Farmers Home Administration, 103 South Gay Street, Baltimore, 21202 

SECRETARY 

B. Herbert Brown 

The Baltimore Institute, 10 West Chase Street, Baltimore, 21201 

TREASURER 

Harry H. Nuttle 
Denton, 21629 

ASSISTANT SECRETARY 

Louis L. Kaplan 

The Baltimore Hebrew College, 5800 Park Heights Ave., Baltimore, 21215 

ASSISTANT TREASURER 
Richard W. Case 

Smith, Somerville and Case, 1 Charles Center — 17th Floor, 
Baltimore, 21201 

Dr. William B. Long 

Medical Center, Salisbury, 21801 

Thomas W. Pangborn 

The Pangborn Corporation, Pangborn Blvd., Hagerstown, 21740 

Thomas B. Symons 

Suburban Trust Company, 6950 Carroll Avenue, Takoma Park, 20012 

William C. Walsh 

Liberty Trust Building, Cumberland, 21501 

Mrs. John L. Whitehurst 
4101 Greenway, Baltimore, 21218 

vii 



OFFICERS OF ADMINISTRATION 



Principal Administrative Officers 

WILSON H. ELKINS, President 

B.A., University of Texas, 1932; M.A., 1932; B.Litt., Oxford University, 1936; 
D.Phil., 1936. 

ALBIN O. KUHN, Executive Vice President 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1938; M.S., 1939; Ph.D., 1948. 

R. LEE HORNBAKE, Vice President for Academic Affairs 

B.S., California State College, Pa., 1934; M.A., Ohio State University, 1936; 
Ph.D., 1942. 

FRANK L. BENTZ, JR., Assistant to the President 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1942; Ph.D., 1952. 

ALVIN E. CORMENY, Assistant to the President, in Charge of Endowment and 
Development 

B.A., Illinois College, 1933; LL.B., Cornell University, 1936. 

Emeriti 

HARRY C. BYRD, President Emeritus 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1908; LL.D., Washington College, 1936; LL.D., 
Dickinson College, 1938; D.Sc, Western Maryland College, 1938. 

ADELE H. STAMP, Dean of Women Emerita 

B.A., Tulane University, 1921; M.A., University of Maryland, 1924. 

Administrative Officers of the Schools and Colleges 

EDWARD W. AITON, Director, Agricultural Extension Service 

B.S., University of Minnesota, 1933; M.S., 1940; Ed.D., University of Maryland, 
1956. 

VERNON E. ANDERSON, Dean of the College of Education 

B.S., University of Minnesota, 1930; M.A., 1936; Ph.D., University of Colorado, 
1942. 

RONALD BAMFORD, Dean of the Graduate School 

B.S., University of Connecticut, 1924; M.S., University of Vermont, 1926; Ph.D., 
Columbia University, 1931. 

GORDON M. CAIRNS, Dean of Agriculture 

B.S., Cornell University, 1936; M.S., 1938; Ph.D., 1940. 

WILLIAM P. CUNNINGHAM, Dean of the School of Law 
A.B., Harvard College, 1944; LL.B., Harvard Law School, 1948. 

RAY W. EHRENSBERGER, Dean of University College 

B.A., Wabash College, 1929; M.A., Butler University, 1930; Ph.D., Syracuse 
University, 1937. 

NOEL E. FOSS, Dean of the School of Pharmacy 

Ph.C, South Dakota State College, 1929; B.S., 1929; M.S., University of Maryland, 
1932; Ph.D., 1933. 

viii 



LESTER M. FRALEY, Dean of the College of Physical Education, Recreation, 
and Health. 

B.A., Randolph-Macon College, 1928; M.A., 1937; Ph.D., Peabody College, 1939. 

FLORENCE M. GIPE, Dean of the School of Nursing 

B.S., Catholic University of America, 1937; M.S., University of Pennsylvania, 
1940; Ed.D., University of Maryland, 1952. 

LADISLAUS F. GRAPSKL Director of the University Hospital 

R.N., Mills School of Nursing, Bellevue Hospital, New York, 1938; B.S., 
University of Denver, 1942; M.B.A., in Hospital Administration, University of 
Chicago, 1943. 

IRVIN C. HAUT, Director, Agriculture Experiment Station 

B.S., University of Idaho, 1928; M.S., State College of Washington, 1930; Ph.D., 
University of Maryland, 1933. 

VERL S. LEWIS, Dean of the School of Social Work 

A3., Huron College, 1933; M.A., University of Chicago, 1939; D.S.W., Western 
Reserve University, 1954. 

SELMA F. LIPPEATT, Dean of the College of Home Economics 

B.S., Arkansas State Teachers College, 1938; M.S., University of Tennessee, 1945; 
Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University, 1953. 

CHARLES MANNING, Acting Dean of the College of Arts and Sciences 

B.S., Tufts College, 1929; M.A., Harvard University, 1931; Ph.D., University of 
North Carolina, 1950. 

FREDERIC T. MAVIS, Dean of the College of Engineering 

B.S., University of Illinois, 1922; M.S., 1926; C.E., 1932; Ph.D., 1935. 

DONALD W. O'CONNELL, Dean of the College of Business and Public 
Administration 

B.A., Columbia University, 1937; M.A., 1938; Ph.D., 1953. 

JOHN J. SALLE Y, Dean of the School of Dentistry 

D.D.S., Medical College of Virginia, 1947; Ph.D., University of Rochester School 
of Medicine and Dentistry, 1954. 

WILLIAM S. STONE, Dean of the School of Medicine and Director of 
Medical Education and Research 

B.S., University of Idaho, 1924; M.S., 1925; M.D., University of Louisville, 1929; 

Ph.D. (Hon.), University of Louisville, 1946. 

General Administrative Officers 

G. WATSON ALGIRE, Director of Admissions and Registrations 
B.A., University of Maryland, 1930; M.S., 1931. 

B. JAMES BORRESON, Executive Dean for Student Life 
B.A., University of Minnesota, 1944. 

C. WILBUR CISSEL, Director of Finance and Business 

B.A., University of Maryland, 1932; M.A., 1934; C.P.A., 1939. 

ix 



HELEN E. CLARKE, Dean of Women 
B.S., University of Michigan, 1943; M.A., University of Illinois, 1951; Ed.D., 
Teachers College, Columbia University, 1960. 

WILLIAM W. COBEY, Director of Athletics 
A.B., University of Maryland, 1930. 

L. EUGENE CRONIN, Director of Natural Resources Institute 
A.B., Western Maryland College, 1938; M.S., University of Maryland, 1943; 
Ph.D., 1946. 

LESTER M. DYKE, Director of Student Health Service 
B.S., University of Iowa, 1936; M.D., 1926. 

GEARY F. EPPLEY, Dean of Men 

B.S., Maryland State College, 1920; M.S., University of Maryland, 1926. 

HARRY D. FISHER, Comptroller and Budget Officer 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1943; C.P.A., 1948. 

GEORGE W. FOGG, Director of Personnel 
B.A., University of Maryland, 1926; M.A., 1928. 

ROBERT J. McCartney, Director of University Relations 
B.A., University of Massachusetts, 1941. 

GEORGE W. MORRISON, Associate Director and Supervising Engineer, 
Physical Plant {Baltimore) 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1927; E.E., 1931. 

VERNON H. REEVES, Professor of Air Science and Head, Department of Air 
Science 

B.A., Arizona State College, 1936; M.A., Columbia University, 1949. 

WERNER C. RHEINBOLDT, Director, Computer Science Center 

Dipl. Math., University of Heidelberg, 1952; Dr. Rer. Nat., University of Freiburg, 
1955. 

HOWARD ROVELSTAD, Director of Libraries 

B.A., University of Illinois, 1936; M.A., 1937; B.S.L.S., Columbia University, 1940. 

CLODUS R. SMITH, Director of the Summer Session 

B.S., Oklahoma State University, 1950; M.S., 1955; Ed.D., Cornell University, 
1960. 

GEORGE O. WEBER, Director and Supervising Engineer, Department of Physical 
Plant. 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1933. 



Division Chairmen 

JOHN E. FABER, JR., Chairman of the Division of Biological Sciences 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1926; M.S., 1927; Ph.D., 1937. 

HAROLD C. HOFFSOMMER, Chairman of the Division of Social Sciences 

B.S., Northwestern University, 1921; M.A., 1923; Ph.D., Cornell University, 1929. 

CHARLES E. WHITE, Chairman of the Lower Division 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1923; M.S., 1924; Ph.D., 1926. 



CHAIRMEN, STANDING COMMITTEES, FACULTY SENATE 

GENERAL COMMITTEE ON EDUCATIONAL POLICY 
Monroe H. Martin (Arts and Sciences), Chairman 

GENERAL COMMITTEE ON STUDENT LIFE AND WELFARE 

Joseph F. Mattick (Agriculture), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON ADMISSIONS AND SCHOLASTIC STANDING 
Russell B. Allen (Engineering), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON INSTRUCTIONAL PROCEDURES 

Thomas G. Andrews (Arts and Sciences), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON SCHEDULING AND REGISTRATION 
Richard H. Byrne (Education), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON PROGRAMS, CURRICULA, AND COURSES 
V. R. Cardozier (Agriculture), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON FACULTY RESEARCH 

James A. Hummel (Arts and Sciences), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON PUBLIC FUNCTIONS AND COMMENCEMENTS 
Donald W. O'Connell (Business and Public Administration), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON LIBRARIES 

Walter E. Schlaretzki (Arts and Sciences), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON UNIVERSITY PUBLICATIONS 
Mark Keeny (Agriculture), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON INTERCOLLEGIATE COMPETITION 
Robert B. Beckmann (Engineering), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON PROFESSIONAL ETHICS, ACADEMIC FREEDOM 
AND TENURE 

George Anastos (Arts and Sciences), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON APPOINTMENTS, PROMOTIONS, AND SALARIES 
Stanley B. Jackson (Arts and Sciences), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON FACULTY LIFE AND WELFARE 
John M. Brumbaugh (Law), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON MEMBERSHIP AND REPRESENTATION 
Noel E. Foss (Pharmacy), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON COUNSELING OF STUDENTS 
Mary K. Carl (Nursing), Chairman 

COMMITTEE ON THE FUTURE OF THE UNIVERSITY 
Homer Ulrich (Arts and Sciences), Chairman 



XI 



Adjunct Committees of the General Committee of Student 
Life and Welfare 

STUDENT ACTIVITIES 

Gayle S. Smith (Arts and Sciences), Chairman 

FINANCIAL AIDS AND SELF-HELP 
A. B. Hamilton (Agriculture), Chairman 

STUDENT PUBLICATIONS AND COMMUNICATIONS 
George F. Batka (Arts and Sciences), Chairman 

RELIGIOUS LIFE 

Bryce Jordan (Arts and Sciences), Chairman 

STUDENT HEALTH AND SAFETY 

Ellen Harvey (Physical Education), Chairman 

STUDENT DISCIPLINE 

J. Allan Cook (Business and Public Administration), Chairman 

BALTIMORE CAMPUS, STUDENT AFFAIRS 

Calvin Gaver (Dentistry), Chairman 



Xll 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



The Graduate School was established in its present form in 1918 under the 
jurisdiction of the Graduate Council with the Dean of the Graduate School 
serving as Chairman. It was created for the purpose of administering and 
developing programs of advanced study and research for graduate students 
in all branches of the University. Prior to the present organization some 
advanced degrees were awarded but they were under the jurisdiction of the 
individual departments subject to the supervision of the general faculty. 
Despite the large expansion of graduate programs into new areas as the 
University has grown, the spirit of each program is essentially that of indi- 
vidual study under competent supervision. The Graduate School is not an 
extension of the undergraduate program but was created rather for the pre- 
paration of those who in the future will carry on the spirit of individual 
inquiry. Thus it promotes and provides an atmosphere of research and 
scholarship for both the students and the faculty; in particular, it stimulates 
that harmonious relationship between the two which results in advancement 
of learning. At the present time over fifty departments are authorized to 
offer graduate programs to one or more of the advanced degrees awarded 
by the University, 

The Graduate Council consists of ex-officio, elected and appointed mem- 
bers of the Graduate Faculty and is charged with the formulation of the 
overall policies of the Graduate School. It meets regularly in March, June 
and November to consider all matters relating to graduate work brought to 
its attention by the University Administration, the Graduate Faculty and the 
Dean of the Graduate School. It may also be called for special meetings 
throughout the year if urgent business must be transacted. 

The Graduate Faculty consists of regular and associate members chosen 
in accordance with the Plan of Organization of the Graduate Faculty and is 
listed in the back of this catalog. The direction of individual programs and 
theses is primarily assigned to the regular members of the Graduate Faculty. 

The Graduate Faculty Assembly consists of the regular members of the 
Graduate Faculty and meets once each year. Special meetings may be called 
by the Dean of the Graduate School if necessary. In accordance with the 
University Faculty Organization Plan, it has authority over the educational 
policy of the Graduate School, may review actions taken by the Graduate 
Council and serves as a referendum body on questions referred to it by the 
Graduate Council. 

The Dean of the Graduate School serves as chairman and executive offi- 
cer of both the Graduate Council and the Graduate Faculty Assembly. 

The following standing committees are appointed by the Dean of the 
Graduate School: The Committee on Publications, Committee on Language 
Requirements, Committee on Graduate Programs and Standards for Grad- 
uate Work, Committee on Fellowships and Student Welfare, Committee on 
Research, Committee on Procedures, Committee on the Graduate Faculty, 



General Information 

and the Committee on Elections. They report annually to the Graduate 
Council and reports may be requested by the Dean of the Graduate School 
or by the Graduate Faculty Assembly. 

LOCATION 

The office of the Graduate School is located in the Business and Public 
Administration Building, Rooms 112-115, on the College Park campus. 
This campus is located in Prince Georges County on a large tract of rolling 
wooded land less than eight miles from Washington, D. C. and approxi- 
mately thirty-two miles from Baltimore and is served by excellent trans- 
portation. 

The Baltimore campus of the University is located at the corner of Lombard 
and Greene Streets, and on this campus the various departments in the 
Schools of Medicine, Dentistry, Pharmacy and Nursing offer their graduate 
programs. 

LIBRARIES 

Libraries of the University are located on the College Park and Baltimore 
campuses. They consist of the general University Library (the McKeldin 
Library), the Engineering and Physical Sciences Library, and the Chemistry 
Library in College Park; and the Health Sciences Library and the Law 
Library in Baltimore. The libraries have a total book collection of almost 
500,000 cataloged volumes, and more than 5,000 periodicals and news- 
papers are received currently. 

In addition to the total of cataloged volumes cited above, the College Park 
libraries contain over 100,000 U. S. government and United Nations docu- 
ments, and thousands of phonorecords, maps, negatives, prints, and techni- 
cal reports. 

Bibliographical facilities of these libraries include, in addition to the card 
catalogs, printed catalogs of other libraries, e.g., British Museum, Biblio- 
theque Nationale, and Library of Congress, as well as trade bibliographies 
of foreign countries, special bibliographies of subject fields and similar 
research aids. 

In the McKeldin Library are many study carrels available to graduate stu- 
dents whose study and research require extensive use of library materials. 
Lockers are likewise available for assignment to graduate students. Facili- 
ties for reading microtext materials and for use of typewriters are also pro- 
vided. Interlibrary loan service from other institutions is provided for those 
engaged in research. 

Within a thirty mile radius of College Park are located the Enoch Pratt Free 
Library of Baltimore and the unexcelled libraries of the U. S. Government, 
including the Library of Congress and the National Library of Medicine, 
and the libraries of Department of Agriculture, Department of Interior, and 
National Institutes of Health. 



General Information 



GENERAL INFORMATION 



Detailed information concerning the American Civilization Program, fees 
and expenses, scholarships and awards, student life, and other material 
of a general nature, may be found in the University publication titled An 
Adventure in Learning. This publication may be obtained on request from 
the Catalog Mailing Office, North Administration Building, Univer- 
sity of Maryland at College Park. A detailed explanation of the regulations 
of student and academic life may be found in the University publication 
titled. University General and Academic Regulations. This is mailed in 
September and February of each year to all new undergraduate students. 
Requests for course catalogs for the individual schools and colleges should 
be directed to the deans of these respective units addressed to: 

COLLEGES LOCATED AT COLLEGE PARK: 

Dean 

(College in which you are interested) 
The University of Maryland 
College Park, Maryland 

PROFESSIONAL SCHOOLS LOCATED AT BALTIMORE: 

Dean 

(School in which you are interested) 
The University of Maryland 
Lombard and Greene Streets 
Baltimore 1, Maryland 



ACADEMIC INFORMATION 

ADMISSION 

An applicant for admission to the Graduate School must hold a bachelor's 
or a master's degree from a college or university of recognized standing. 
The applicant shall furnish an official transcript of his collegiate record 
which for unconditional admission must show creditable completion of an 
adequate amount of undergraduate preparation of high quality for graduate 
work in his chosen field. Application for admission to the Graduate School 
must be made by September 1 for the fall term and by January 1 for the 
spring term on blanks obtained from the Office of the Graduate School. 
Admission to the summer session is governed by the date listed in the 
Summer School Catalog, which is generally June 1 . 

If favorable action on admission is taken before the applicant has com- 
pleted his undergraduate program, it is understood that the action is 
conditional and contingent on the receiving of the bachelor's degree 
named in the application. 



Academic Information 

Applications for the Graduate School received after June 30, 1964 must 
be accompanied by a $10.00 non-refundable application fee. If the student 
is accepted for graduate study and enrolls as a graduate student, he will 
not be assessed the $10.00 matriculation fee. 

After approval of the application a matriculation card, signed by the Dean, 
is issued to the student. This card permits him to register in the Graduate 
School. It is his certificate of membership in the Graduate School and 
should be retained by the student to present at each succeeding registration. 
If the student admitted is not enrolled upon the passing of the third regis- 
tration, the matriculation card becomes invalid and a new application will 
have to be filed if the student wishes to pursue a graduate program. 

At the time of the first registration, an Identification Card will be issued 
to all full-time graduate students. 

Admission to the Graduate School does not necessarily imply admission 
to candidacy for an advanced degree. 

REGISTRATION 

All students pursuing graduate work in the University, even though they 
are not candidates for higher degrees, are required to register in the Gradu- 
ate School at the beginning of each session. Graduate credit will not be 
given unless the student matriculates and registers in the Graduate School. 
This appUes likewise to students who register through University College 
at locations away from the campus. 

The program of work for each session is arranged by the student with the 
major department and entered upon two course cards which are signed 
first by the professor in charge of the student's major subject and then by 
the Dean of the Graduate School. One card is retained by the Dean. The 
student takes the other card to the Registrar's Office, where the registration 
is completed. Students will not be admitted to graduate courses until the 
Registrar has certified to the instructor that registration has been com- 
pleted. Registration forms are obtained at the Registrar's Office. 

A Schedule of Classes, supplementing this catalog, is issued shortly before 
the beginning of each semester, showing the hours and location of class 
meetings. This Schedule of Classes is available at the Office of the Registrar. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

Graduate students must elect for credit in partial fulfillment of the require- 
ments for higher degrees only courses designated For Graduates or For 
Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates. Students who are inadequately 
prepared for graduate work in their chosen fields or who lack prerequisites 
for minor courses may elect a limited number of courses numbered from 1 
to 99 in the general catalog, but graduate credit will not be allowed for 
these courses. Courses that are audited are registered for in the same way as 
other courses, and the fees are the same. 

4 



Academic Information 

PROGRAM OF WORK 

The professor who is selected to direct a student's thesis work is the stu- 
dent's adviser in the formulation of a graduate program, including suitable 
minor work, which is arranged in cooperation with the instructors. To 
encourage thoroughness in scholarship through intensive application, gradu- 
ate students in the regular sessions are limited to a program of fifteen credit 
hours per semester. If a student is preparing a thesis during the minimum 
residence for the master's degree, the registration in graduate courses should 
not exceed twelve hours for the semester since the registration in research is 
required. 

SUMMER SESSION 

The University conducts a summer session at College Park, with a compre- 
hensive undergraduate and graduate program. The University publishes a 
separate bulletin giving full information on this summer session. This 
bulletin is available upon application to the Director of the Summer School. 
University of Maryland, College Park. 

GRADUATE WORK IN PROFESSIONAL SCHOOLS AT 
BALTIMORE 

Graduate courses and opportunities for research are offered in the profes- 
sional schools at Baltimore. Students pursuing graduate work in the pro- 
fessional schools must register in the Graduate School and meet the same 
requirements and proceed in the same way as do other graduate students in 
the other departments of the University. 

OAK RIDGE INSTITUTE 

The University is one of the sponsoring institutions of the Oak Ridge 
Institute of Nuclear Studies located at Oak Ridge, Tennessee. One of the 
features of this affiliation is the opportunity, in the appropriate fields, for 
graduate students to do their research problems and prepare their theses 
under a cooperative arrangement. Such opportunity is limited to those who 
have completed their course work on the campus, are working in a field 
where facilities are available, and generally are candidates for the doctoral 
degree. Successful applicants will receive Oak Ridge Graduate Fellowships 
with varying stipends depending upon their marital status and dependents. 
Detailed information can be obtained from the Graduate School office or 
from Dr. Ronald Bamford, Dean of the Graduate School, Councilor for the 
University. 

FOREIGN STUDENTS 

Graduate students from foreign countries where English is not the native 
tongue should be adequately prepared to read and write in this language. 
Admission to graduate study implies that the student is aware of this re- 
quirement and is prepared to fully participate in the course of study and 



Academic Information 

research work that is assigned. A foreign student adviser is available to 
all graduate students from other countries to discuss matters of immigration. 

Since the admission and stay of foreign students are in part dependent 
on regulations issued by the United States Immigration and Naturalization 
Service, it is advisable for all graduate students who have been admitted to 
the Graduate School to consult the foreign student adviser in regard to their 
immigration status. Students wishing to come to the United States with a 
student visa must secure an Immigration 1-20 Form from the Foreign Stu- 
dent Adviser in order to secure the proper visa from the American consul. 
Students with student visas already studying in the United States who wish 
to transfer to the University of Maryland must also secure an 1-20 Form 
from the Foreign Student Adviser in order to request the Immigration and 
Naturalization Service to grant permission for the transfer. 

Every foreign student is expected to see the foreign student adviser as 
soon as possible after arriving at the University. The adviser will be able 
to assist not only with various problems regarding immigration, housing, 
fees, etc., but also with more general problems of orientation to life in the 
University and the community. 

GRADUATE WORK BY SENIORS IN THIS UNIVERSITY 

A senior of this University who has nearly completed the requirements for 
the undergraduate degree may, with the approval of his undergraduate 
dean, the head of the department concerned, and the Dean of the Graduate 
School, register in the undergraduate college for graduate courses, which 
may later be transferred for graduate credit toward an advanced degree at 
this University, but the student must be within seven credit hours of com- 
pleting his undergraduate work and the total of undergraduate and graduate 
courses must not exceed fifteen credits for the semester. Excess credits in 
the senior year cannot later be used for graduate credit unless such pre- 
arrangement is made. Seniors who wish to register for graduate credit 
should apply to the Dean of the Graduate School for information about 
procedure. 

ADMISSION TO CANDIDACY FOR ADVANCED DEGREES 

Application for admission to candidacy for the master's and for the doctor's 
degree is made on application blanks which are obtained at the office of the 
Dean of the Graduate School. These are filled out in duplicate by the stu- 
dent and submitted to his major department for further action and transmis- 
sion to the Dean of the Graduate School. All applications for admission to 
candidacy must be approved by the Graduate Council. 

Admission to candidacy in no case assures the student of a degree, but 
merely signifies he has met all the formal requirements and is considered by 
his instructors sufficiently prepared and able to pursue such graduate study 
and research as are demanded by the requirements of the degree sought. 
The candidate must show superior scholarship in graduate work already 
completed. 



Academic Information 

Application for admission to candidacy is made at the time stated in the 
sections deaUng with the requirements for the degree sought. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREES OF MASTER OF ARTS 
AND MASTER OF SCIENCE 

ADVANCEMENT TO CANDIDACY. Each prospective candidate for the master's 
degree is required to make application for admission to candidacy not later 
than the date listed in Important Dates for the semester in which degree 
is sought. (Copies of Important Dates can be obtained in the Office 
of the Graduate School). He must have completed at least twelve semester 
hours in graduate work at the University of Maryland. An average grade of 
"B" in all major and minor subjects is the minimum requirement. Courses 
completed with a "D" or "F" in the major and minor must be repeated. 

MINIMUM RESIDENCE. A residence of at least two semesters, or equivalent, 
at this institution, is required. 

COURSE REQUIREMENTS. A minimum of twenty-four semester hours, ex- 
clusive of thesis and registration for research, with a minimum average 
grade of "B" in courses approved for graduate credit, is required for the 
degrees of Master of Arts and Master of Science. The student is also re- 
quired to register for six semester hours for research and thesis work. The 
total number of credit hours required for the degree is thirty. If the student 
is inadequately prepared for the required graduate courses either in the 
major or minor subjects, additional courses may be required to supplement 
the undergraduate work. Of the twenty-four hours required in graduate 
courses, not less than twelve and not more than sixteen semester hours must 
be earned in the major subject. The remaining credits must be outside the 
major subject and must comprise a group of coherent courses intended to 
supplement and support the major work. Not less than one-half of the total 
required course credits for the degree, or a minimum of twelve, must be 
selected from courses numbered 200 or above. No credit for the degree of 
Master of Arts or Master of Science may be obtained for correspondence 
courses or those taken by examination. The entire course of study must 
constitute a unified program approved by the student's major adviser and by 
the Dean of the Graduate School. All requirements for the degree must be 
completed within an eight-year period. 

TRANSFER OF CREDIT. Credit not to exceed six semester hours for course 
work at other recognized institutions may be applied towards the master's 
degree only when such course work has been taken after the student has 
been admitted to the University of Maryland Graduate School. Before 
taking course work for transfer, the student must have the approval of 
his adviser and the head of the department in his major field. Normally, 
approval may be given only for courses which are not offered by the Uni- 
versity of Maryland during the period of the student's attendance. The 
request for transfer of credit shall be submitted to the Graduate Council 
for approval when the student applies for admission to candidacy. The 
candidate is subject to final examination by this institution in all work 
offered for the degree. 



Academic Information 

Graduate work in the Overseas Programs of the University of Maryland 
is limited to six hours provided that the student is admitted to graduate 
studies, that prior approval is obtained from the major professor and the 
head of the department involved and from the Graduate School. Arrange- 
ments for proper registration must be made with the Graduate School. 

If a graduate student working for an advanced degree at another institu- 
tion wishes to take courses at the University of Maryland, his application 
for admission must be accompanied by a letter from the graduate dean of his 
institution stating that credit for such courses is acceptable toward his 
degree. 

THESIS. In addition to the twenty-four semester hours in graduate courses, 
a satisfactory thesis is required of all candidates for the degrees of Master 
of Arts and Master of Science. (Exception may be made in the cases of 
candidates for the degree of Master of Arts in American Studies.) See 
pages 9-10.) The thesis must demonstrate the student's ability to do in- 
dependent work and it must be acceptable in literary style and composition. 
With the approval of the student's major professor and the Dean of the 
Graduate School, the thesis in certain cases may be prepared in absentia 
under the direction and supervision of a member of the faculty of this 
institution. 

The original copy of the thesis must be deposited in the office of the Grad- 
uate School not later than the date listed in Important Dates published 
annually by the Graduate School. The date published is the deadline for 
the acceptance of theses but they may be deposited earlier. The thesis 
should not be bound as the University later binds all theses uniformly. An 
abstract of the contents of the thesis, not to exceed 250 words in length, 
must accompany it. A manual giving full directions for the physical make- 
up of the thesis should be consulted by the student before the typing of 
the manuscript is begun. Students may obtain copies of this manual from 
the Students' Supply Store at nominal cost. 

FINAL EXAMINATION. The final oral examination is conducted by a com- 
mittee appointed by the Dean of the Graduate School. The student's 
adviser acts as the chairman of the committee. The other members of the 
committee are persons under whom the student has taken most of his 
major and minor courses. The chairman and the candidate are notified 
of the members of the examining committee prior to the period set for 
oral examination. The chairman of the committee selects the exact time 
and place for the examination and notifies the other members of the com- 
mittee and the candidate. The examination is normally conducted at the 
end of the semester, but upon recommendation of the student's adviser, 
an examining committee may be appointed by the Dean of the Graduate 
School at any time when all other requirements for the degree have been 
completed. A report of the committee is sent to the Dean as soon as pos- 
sible after the examination. A special form for this purpose is supplied to 
the chairman of the committee and the approval must be unanimous. Such 
report is the basis upon which recommendation is made to the faculty that 

8 



Academic Information 

the candidate be granted the degree sought. The period for the oral exam- 
ination is usually about one hour, but the time should be long enough to 
insure an adequate examination. 

The examining committee also approves the thesis, and it is the candidate's 
obligation to see that each member of the committee has ample oppor- 
tunity to examine a copy of the thesis prior to the date of the examination. 
A student will not be admitted to final examination until all other require- 
ments for the degree have been met. In addition to the oral examination, 
a comprehensive written examination may be required at the option of the 
major department. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREES IN AMERICAN STUDIES 

The American Studies Program is intended to prepare the candidate for 
teaching and research in American culture. The program is particularly 
designed for the teacher or student whose intellectual interest is not Hm- 
ited to a single academic department. For instance, the historian who likes 
literature, the literary critic who wishes to study the social background of 
literature, the political scientist who wishes to study the social background 
of literature, the poUtical scientist who wishes to know more about the 
history of this country, and the sociologist who wants to study the roots 
of sociology in America, all may find the American Studies Program the 
proper one for them. The four cooperating departments of English, His- 
tory, Government and Politics, and Sociology offer the basic work in the 
program, and the student will stress the work of one of those departments 
when he determines his course of graduate studies. All students, however, 
will be expected to understand the development of American institutions 
and to show some proficiency in the literary, social, economic, and political 
history of the United States. 

The study of American civilization brings in many different fields, so a 
student has an unusually wide opportunity to plan a program suited to his 
individual need. To help him do this, a committee representing the depart- 
ments whose American fields he intends to study is set up shortly after he 
registers. The chairman of the committee is from the department of the 
student's greatest interest and acts as his adviser. The committee also pre- 
pares and reads the student's comprehensive examination and reads the 
thesis if one is submitted. 

The candidate for a degree must pass a final written examination testing 
his understanding of American civilization in terms of his individual pro- 
gram of studies. 

MASTER OF ARTS. With the approval of his advisers and committee, a 
candidate for the Master of Arts degree with a major in American Studies 
may elect in lieu of the thesis six additional hours of course work, to 
include at least two substantial seminar papers. The total number of 
credit hours required for the degree would then be thirty semester hours. 



Academic Information 

Each candidate must present credits for at least fifteen semester hours of 
work in two of the four cooperating departments, and credits for at least 
fifteen semester hours in supporting courses (nine hours if a thesis is 
elected). Supporting courses will normally be in such fields as European 
or Latin-American history, English literature, comparative literature, 
philosophy, art, education, sociology, economics, and government and 
politics. 

Each candidate must demonstrate in a written examination that he pos- 
sesses a reading knowledge of one foreign language. 

All other requirements are the same as for the degrees of Master of Arts 
and Master of Science in other fields. 

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY. The American Studies Program cuts across 
several fields; therefore, a faculty committee representing the departments 
in which the student plans to study will be appointed shortly after the 
student registers. The chairman of the committee is from the department 
of the student's major interest and acts as his adviser. The committee is 
responsible for helping the student to integrate his program. Working 
through the student's adviser the committee aids in planning the student's 
over-all program, prepares and grades any comprehensive examinations, 
and reads the dissertation. 

The general requirements for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in Amer- 
ican Studies are the same as those for the doctoral degree in other fields. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF 
EDUCATION 

The Master of Education degree is designed to increase competency in 
applied areas within the general field of education. Thirty semester hours 
of course work are required. Of the thirty hours, one-half must be in 
courses numbered 200 and above, and one-half must be in education. 
Subject to the foregoing limitations, courses in department other than 
education may be selected by the student and his adviser. 

In connection with course work there are required two semester papers, 
the nature and form of which are prescribed in a Statement of Policy 
issued by the Department of Education. 

The procedure for advancement to candidacy and the transfer of credits 
is the same as for the degrees of Master of Arts and Master of Science. 
The nature of the comprehensive examination, and other matters pertain- 
ing to degree requirements, are described elsewhere in these announce- 
ments and in the Statement of Policy referred to above. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF 
MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

The Master of Business Administration program is designed primarily to 
prepare students for positions of responsibility in business and government. 

10 



Academic Information 

Emphasis is placed on the development of analytical ability and reasoned 
judgment in decision making. Instructional methods include case analysis, 
seminar discussion and decision simulation. Computer familiarization is 
provided. 

A core of four courses embraces the areas of business decisions central 
to the firm's operation; relevant analytical methods, especially quantitative 
techniques; behavioral factors affecting the managerial task and the 
environment in which business functions, especially its relationships with 
government. 

Beyond the core, further advanced work may be taken in Management 
and in Statistics, and a concentration may be undertaken in a field of 
special interest: Accounting, Finance, Marketing, Personnel and Indus- 
trial Relations, and Transportation. 

Among the factors which are considered in admission of students for 
graduate work in Business are an undergraduate record evidencing high 
scholastic attainment and performance on the required Admission Test 
for Graduate Study in Business. 

The Admission Test for Graduate Study in Business is offered four times 
a year through the Educational Testing Service, Princeton, New Jersey. 
The test is not designed to test specific knowledge in specialized academic 
subjects and normal undergraduate training provides sufficient general 
knowledge to answer the test questions. A bulletin of information (which 
includes an application for the test) should be obtained six weeks in 
advance of the desired test date, from Admission Test for Graduate Study 
in Business, Educational Testing Service, Princeton, New Jersey. Appli- 
cations and fees must reach ETS at least two weeks before the desired 
test administration date. ETS establishes regular test centers throughout 
the country and abroad and the bulletin contains a list of these centers. 

Individuals who are quahfied are accepted not only from the area of 
undergraduate business administration but from other areas, such as 
engineering, the sciences, the arts, the humanities, and other fields. The 
Graduate program is offered in the day school and is conducted on the 
campus. 

Those students whose major undergraduate work has been in areas other 
than business are required to complete certain basic core requirements 
in business and economics with a 'B" average before being admitted to 
candidacy for the degree of Master of Business Administration. These 
core course requirements are hsted below: 

Principles of Economics 6 hours Marketing 3 hours 

Principles of Accounting 6 hours Management and 

Business Law 3 hours Organization Theory 3 hours 

Statistics 3 hours Business Finance 3 hours 



11 



Academic Information 

COURSE REQUIREMENTS for the degree of Master of Business Administra- 
tion are: 

A minimum of thirty semester hours must be completed in courses num- 
bered 200 or above. A minimum average of "B" must be earned in these 
courses. If the student is inadequately prepared for the required grad- 
uate courses, additional courses may be required to supplement the under- 
graduate work. Of the thirty hours required in graduate courses, not less 
than six and not more than nine must be takin in a major subject. Courses 
covering the remaining credits must be taken outside the major subject 
and must comprise a coherent group, as approved by the student's advisor. 
No credit for the degree of Master of Business Administration may be 
obtained for correspondence courses or those taken by examination. The 
entire course of study must constitute a unified program approved by the 
student's advisor and by the Dean of the Graduate School. All require- 
ments for the degree must be completed within an eight-year period. 

The other requirements for the degree are the same as for the degrees 
of Master of Arts and Master of Science. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF 
MASTER OF MUSIC 

Three areas of specialization are provided in the Master of Music program 
to allow the student to pursue advanced work in the area for which his 
experience and interest have best prepared him. (1) Specialization in 
the history and literature of music leads to a study of musical styles and 
literatures and of the methods and materials of systematic musicology. 
Each candidate must demonstrate that he possesses a reading knowledge 
of one foreign language. A thesis is required in which mastery of musico- 
logical method must be shown. (2) Specialization in theory and compo- 
sition leads to advanced work in analysis and the use of musical materials. 
A thesis of an analytical nature will normally be required. Students with 
the necessary creative ability may be allowed to present a thesis which 
consists of an original composition of major proportions. (3) Specializa- 
tion in performance leads to advanced work in the history, literature, and 
theory of music, and will combine seminars in the literature of a particular 
instrument with advanced instruction in that literature. In this approach 
the final project will consist of a seminar paper of an analytical nature and 
a graduate-level recital containing the works covered in the paper. 

At least nine semester hours of the thirty required for the degree will 
normally be in a field of music outside the area of specialization (music 
theory in the case of the history-literature concentration, for example), 
and will constitute the minor area. In exceptional cases a student may take 
minor courses (no more than nine hours) in a field outside music. His- 
tory, Philosophy, Music Education, American or English Literature, and 
Foreign Languages are among the recommended minor fields. 

All other requirements are the same as for the degree of Master of Arts. 
12 



Academic Information 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF 
MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK 

The School of Social Work offers work leading to the degree of Master of 
Social Work with a concentration in social casework. Concurrent field 
instruction is provided in cooperative arrangement with affiliated social 
agencies throughout Maryland. 

Two academic years of full-time study are required for completion of the 
School's requirements, except that a limited number of part-time students 
are permitted to enroll for designated courses. 

A comprehensive examination is given late in the semester in which the 
student completes requirements for the degree. 

Additional details may be obtained by addressing a request to: The School 
of Social Work, University of Maryland, 721 West Redwood Street, Balti- 
more 1, Maryland. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF 
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY 

ADVANCEMENT TO CANDIDACY. Candidates for the doctor's degree must 
be admitted to candidacy at least one academic year prior to the conferring 
of degrees. Applications for admission to candidacy for the doctor's degree 
are made in duplicate by the student and submitted to his major department 
for further action and transmission to the Dean of the Graduate School. 
Blanks may be obtained at the office of the Graduate School. 

Before admission to candidacy the applicant must have demonstrated 
to the Head of the Foreign Language Department that he posseses a read- 
ing knowledge of at least two foreign languages from the list approved 
by his major department and the Graduate Council, one of which must 
be either French or German. However, the two languages chosen must 
not belong to the same language family. Preliminary examinations or 
such other substantial tests as the departments may elect are also required 
for admission to candidacy. 

The student must complete all of his program for the degree, including 
the thesis and final examination, during a four-year period after admission 
to candidacy. Failure to do so requires another application for admission 
to candidacy with the usual preliminary examination unless the Graduate 
Council rules otherwise. 

RESIDENCE. The equivalent of three years of full-time graduate study and 
research is the minimum required. Of the three years the equivalent of 
at least one year must be spent in residence at the University. On a part- 
time basis the time needed will be correspondingly increased. All work 
at other institutions offered in partial fulfillment of the requirements for 
the Doctor of Philosophy degree is submitted to the Graduate Council 

13 



Academic Information 

for approval, upon recommendation of the department concerned, when 
the student applies for admission to candidacy for the degree. 

The doctor's degree is not given merely as a certificate of residence and 
work, but is granted only upon sufficient evidence of high attainments in 
scholarships, and ability to carry on independent research in the special 
field in which the major work is done. 

MAJOR AND MINOR SUBJECTS. The candidate must select a major and one 
or two closely related minor subjects. At least twenty-four semester hours 
of course work, exculsive of research, are required for the minor. Of the 
twenty-four semester hours at least eight hours must be at the 200-level 
unless special permission is granted beforehand.. If two areas are chosen 
for the minor requirement not less than nine semester hours may be pre- 
sented in either area. The remainder of the required residence is devoted 
to intensive study and research in the major field. The amount of required 
course work in the major subject will vary with the department and the 
mdividual candidate. The candidate must register for a minimum of twelve 
semester hours of research at this institution. 

THESIS. The ability to do independent research must be shown by a dis- 
sertation on some topic connected with the major subject. An original 
typewritten copy and one clear, plain carbon copy of the thesis, together 
with an abstract of the contents, not to exceed 600 words in length, must 
be deposited in the Office of the Graduate School on the scheduled date. 
The date published is the deadline for the acceptance of theses but they 
may be deposited earlier. It is the responsibility of the student also to 
provide copies of the thesis for the use of the members of the examin- 
ing committee prior to the date of the final examination. 

The original copy should not be bound, as the University 
later binds uniformly all theses for the general University Library. The 
carbon copies are bound by the student in cardboard covers which may 
be obtained at the Students' Supply Store. The abstracts are published 
by University Microfilms. 

A manual giving full directions for the physical make-up of the thesis 
should be consulted by the student before typing of the thesis is begun. 
Students may obtain copies of this manual at the Students' Supply Store. 

FINAL EXAMINATION. The final oral examination is held before a commit- 
tee appointed by the Dean. One member of this committee is a repre- 
sentative of the Graduate Faculty who is not directly concerned with the 
student's graduate work. One or more members of the committee may be 
persons from other institutions who are distinguished scholars in the 
student's major field. 

The duration of the examination is approximately three hours, and 
covers the research work of the candidate as embodied in his thesis, 
and his attainments in the fields of his major and minor subjects. The 

14 



Academic Information 

other detailed procedures are the same as those stated for the master's 
examination. 

RULES GOVERNING LANGUAGE EXAMINATIONS FOR 
CANDIDATES FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY 

1. A candidate for the doctor's degree must show in a written examina- 
tion that he possesses a reading knowledge of at least two foreign languages 
from the list approved by his major department and the Graduate Council, 
one of which must be either French or German. However, the two languages 
chosen must not belong to the same language family. The passages to be 
translated will be taken from books and journals approved by the student's 
major department. The Foreign Language Department will select material 
amounting to approximately 500 words from the literature submitted and 
present to the students in each field a common examination in mimeo- 
graphed form. The examination aims to test ability to use the foreign 
language so that the student may be able to read some of the original 
basic literature in the field. It is presumed that the candidate will know 
sufficient grammar to distinguish inflectional forms and that he will be 
able to translate in two hours 500 words with the aid of a dictionary. 

2. Students planning to take the examination must register in 
the office o'' the Department of Foreign Languages at the times stated in 
"Important Dates" published annually and available in the Office of the 
Graduate School. 

3. Examinations are held in the Office of the Department of Foreign 
Languages in October, February and May. The specific days of these 
examinations are found in "Important Dates." 

4. There is no limitation on the nurriber of times the examination may 
be taken, but a $5.00 fee will be charged for the second and subsequent 
examinations. 



REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF 
DOCTOR OF EDUCATION 

The Doctor of Education degree is offered for students who hold or expect 
to hold teaching or administrative positions in education and who desire 
to develop exceptional competence in special areas. The abifity to explore 
anc solve practical educational problems is emphasized. The require- 
ments are the same as for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy except as 
specified below. 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES. When the program of study and research does not 
involve the use of foreign languages the requirement may be waived by 
the Department of Education. 

MAJOR AND MINOR SUBJECTS. The Candidate must select one major area 
and one minor area in which he expects to develop exceptional compe- 

15 



Academic Information 

tence. The minor may be a single area or may consist of a group of 
related areas selected to broaden the candidate's understanding of educa- 
tion. In addition to the major and minor, other areas if desired may be 
included in the program also. The amount of course work required in 
the major, minor, and related areas will vary according to the needs of 
each individual candidate. 

PROJECT. Instead of completing a thesis as required for a candidate for 
the degree of Doctor of Philosophy, a candidate for this degree must 
demonstrate exceptional competence to work through field problems by 
completing a project in the major area. A Committee on Doctoral Re- 
search is appointed for each candidate. The committee is composed of 
three members at least two of whom are from the faculty of the College 
of Education. The committee passes upon the student's plans for research. 
The specialist in the student's major area serves as sponsor and provides 
detailed guidance for the project. 

The regulations governing submission and form of copies of the project 
are the same as for theses submitted for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy 
in education. 

WRITTEN EXAMINATIONS. Written examinations for the degree of Doctor 
of Education parallel those for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in edu- 
cation. 

FINAL ORAL EXAMINATION. The final examination covers the project and 
its relationship to the general field in which it lies and the candidate's at- 
tainments in related areas. 

GRADUATE FEES 

The fees paid by graduate students are as follows: 

Application fee, $10.00. (See page 4). 

Matriculation fee of $10.00. This is paid only once, upon first registra- 
tion in the Graduate School. 

Graduation fee for master's degree, $10.00. 

Graduation fee for doctor's degree including a hood, microfilming and 
binding of thesis, and publication in Dissertation Abstract, $50.00. 

Tuition fee. A fixed charge of $18.00 per semester credit hour. 
Foreign Language Examination (first examination without charge), $5.00. 

Testing fee for education majors, $5.00. 

Laboratory fees, where charged, range from $1.00 to $20.00 per semester 
course. 

Infirmary fee, $5.00 (College Park only). All full-time students are charged 
the fee of $5.00 for the academic year at the time of registration for the 
fall semester. Heads of departments will designate status of graduate 
students. 

16 



Academic Information 

There is a $3.00 fine for violation of the University parking regulations. 
All graduate students are expected to abide by these regulations, regardless 
of full-time or part-time attendance. The failure to register for a parking 
permit entails a $5.00 fee. 

An Adventure in Learning, the undergraduate catalog of the University, 
contains a detailed statement of l^es and expenses and includes changes 
in fees as they occur. A copy may be requested from the Catalog Mail- 
ing Office, North Administration Building, University of Maryland at 
College Park. 

LIVING EXPENSES AND SELF-HELP. The University in no way assumes re- 
sponsibility for the housing of graduate students. 

Board and lodging are available in many private homes in College Park 
and Baltimore. The cost of board and room varies from about $105.00 to 
$140.00 a month, depending upon the desires of the individual. For Col- 
lege Park only, a list of accommodations is maint.ained by the Housing 
Bureau in the Office of the Dean of Men. 

Application for student employment, aside from fellowships and assistant- 
ships, may be made through the Offices of the Dean of Men and the Dean 
of Women, or to department heads. 

FELLOWSHIPS AND ASSISTANTSHIPS 

FELLOWSHIPS. A number of fellowships have been established by the Uni- 
versity. The stipend for the University fellows is $800.00 for nine months 
and the remission of all graduate fees except the graduation fee. Several 
industrial and special fellowships, with varying stipends, are also available 
in certain departments. 

University Fellows are permitted to carry a full graduate program, and 
they may satisfy the residence requirement for higher degrees in the normal 
time. 

Applications for fellowships are made on blanks which may be obtained 
from the Office of the Graduate School. The application with the necessary 
credentials, is sent by the applicant directly to the Dean of the Graduate 
School. 

Applications are forwarded by the Dean to the departments for their con- 
sideration and recommendation. The awards of University fellowship are 
on a competitive basis. 

GRADUATE ASSISTANTSHIPS. A number of teaching and research assistant- 
ships are available in several departments. The compensation is at a rate 
of $200.00 per month unless otherwise specified and varies with the nature 
and amount of service required and with the terms of appointment. The 
amount of credit allowed toward a degree is normally a maximum of ten 
credit hours in a regular semester. The research assistants usually par- 

17 



Academic Information 

ticipate in research that meets the requirements for a master's or a doctor's 
degree. 

Applications for graduate assistantships are made directly to the depart- 
ments concerned and appointments are made through the regular channels 
for staff appointments. Further information regarding these assistantships 
may be obtained from the departments concerned. 

RESIDENCE COUNSELING GRADUATE ASSISTANTSHIPS. A limited number 
of assistantships are available to graduate men students to act as super- 
visors in undergraduate residence halls. To qualify, persons must receive 
full status in the Graduate School, must have outstanding leadership qual- 
ities and must be single. Remuneration for all residence assistantships is 
$2,000 per academic year, remission of Graduate School fees and room 
charges. Further information about these assistantships may be obtained 
from the Office of the Director of Housing. 

Similar residence assistantships are available for graduate women students 
contingent upon acceptance to the Graduate School. They should offer 
evidence of leadership ability and interest in working with people. Grad- 
uate assistants live in the residence halls with students and serve as coun- 
selors and group advisors under the supervision of the director of resi- 
dence and the student personnel staff. Remuneration for the assistantship 
is $2,000 per academic year, remission of Graduate School fees and room 
charges. Board and room charges must be paid by the student. 

For further information about these assistantships women applicants should 
write to the Office of the Dean of Women. 

GRADUATE PRIZE OF THE COLLEGE PARK BRANCH, AAUW 

A Graduate Prize of $100.00 will be awarded annually by the College Park 
Branch of the American Association of University Women to an outstand- 
ing woman student working for an advanced degree at the University of 
Maryland. The selection will be made by the Scholarship Committee of 
the Branch from candidates recommended by departments and the Grad- 
uate School. 

STUDENT LOAN FUNDS 

National Defense Education Act Loan Funds are available to graduate 
students of the University of Maryland up to $ 1 000 per year. Such appli- 
cations should be directed to Mr. H. Palmer Hopkins, Director, Office of 
Student Aid, North Administration Building, University of Maryland at 
College Park, Maryland. 

A Student Loan Fund is maintained by the College Park Branch of the 
American Association of University Women. It is administered through 
the Office of the Dean of Women, and is available to deserving women 
who are graduate students at the University of Maryland. 

18 



Academic Information 

Likewise the Sigma Chapter of Phi Delta Gamma Fraternity for Grad- 
uate Women provides loans to graduate women of the University of Mary- 
land. 
For further information contact the office of the Graduate School. 

COMMENCEMENT 

Attendance is required at the June commencement if the degree is con- 
ferred at that time. 

Application for diploma must be filed in the Office of the Registrar eight 
weeks before the date at which the candidate expects to obtain a degree 
except during the summer session (see Important Dates). 

Academic costume is required of all candidates at the June commence- 
ment. Those who so desire may purchase or rent caps and gowns at the 
Students' Supply Store. Orders must be filed eight weeks before the date 
of convocation but may be cancelled later if the student finds himself 
unable to complete his work for the degree. 

METHOD OF NUMBERING COURSES AND 
COUNTING CREDIT HOURS 

Courses for Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates are numbered 100 
to 199; courses for Graduates only are numbered 200 and upward. 

A course with a single number extends through one semester. 

A course with a double number extends through two semesters. 

The number of semester hour credits is shown by the arabic numerals in 
parentheses after the title of the course. Examples: 

Course 101. Title (3). 

First semester. 

If a laboratory course: 

Course 101. Title. (3) 

One lecture and two laboratory periods a week, first semester. 
(This is a semester course: offered once a year.) 

Course 101. Title. (3) 

First and second semester. 

(This is a semester course, repeated each semester, and except for research, 

seminar, and certain problem courses, must be taken only one semester.) 

Course 103, 104. Title (3, 3). 

Three hours a week, first and second semesters. 
If a laboratory course: 



19 



Academic Information 
Course 103, 104. Title (3, 3). 

One lecture and two laboratory periods a week, first and second semesters. 
(This is a course extending through two semesters and carrying three semester 
credits each semester.) 

Course 103, 104. Title (3, 3). 

Three hours a week, second and first semesters. 

(This is a course extending through two semesters, but it begins v/ith the second 

semester.) 

Course 105, /, s. Title (3, 3). 

Three hours a week, first and second semesters. 

(This is an alternate way of listing a two-semester course.) 

GRADES 

The following symbols are used for grades: 'A," "B," "C" and "S" — 
Passing; "D" and "F" — Failure; "I" — Incomplete. Since graduate stu- 
dents must maintain an overall "B" average, every credit hour of "C" 
in course work must be balanced by a credit hour of "A." A grade of 
"A" in thesis research will not balance a grade of "C" in a course. AU 
incomplete grades must be removed before the degree is conferred. 



20 



CURRICULA AND COURSES 

AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING 

Professors: Sherwood, Corning, and Weske 
Associate Professor: Rivello. 

Lecturers: Lobb, Nicolaides, Pai, Seigel and Wilson 
Instructor: Reilly. 

The Department of Aeronautical Engineering offers courses and oppor- 
tunities for research leading to the degree of Master of Science and Doctor 
of Philosophy in aeronautical engineering. 

Facilities for graduate research include two subsonic and two supersonic 
wind tunnels, a shock tube, a balUstic range and complete structural load- 
ing and measuring equipment for both static and dynamic conditions. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Aero. E. 101. Aerodynamics I. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 21 and Math. 21. 
Basic fluid mechanics and aerodynamic theory. (Sherwood.) 

Aero. E. 102. Aerodynamics II. (2) 

Second semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Aero. E. 101. Elements 
of hydrodynamics and application to engineering problems. (Sherwood.) 

Aero. E. 107, 108. Aerospace Design. (4, 4) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and two supervised calculation periods 
a week. Prerequisities, E. S. 20, Aero. E. 102 and Aero. E. 113. Theory and 
methods of aerospace vehicle design, stability and control, airloads, and struc- 
tural design. (Coming.) 

Aero. E. 109, 110. Flight Propulsion. (3, 3) 

Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, M. E. 1. Operating 
principles of piston, turbojet, turboprop, ramjet, and rocket engines. Thermo- 
dynamic processes and engine performance, aero-thermochemistry of combustion, 
fuels and propellants, energy for space flight. (Weske.) 

Aero. E. Ill, 112. Elective Research. (2, 2) 

One lecture and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, Aero. E. 102 and 
Aero. E. 113. Wind tunnel tests; structure tests. Written and oral reports on 
original research projects. (Staff.) 

Aero. E. 113, 114. Flight Structures. (4, 3) 

First semester, three lectures and one calculation period a week; second semester, 
three lectures a week. Prerequisites, E. S. 20 and Math. 64. Principles and prob- 
lems of stress analysis and structural design of flight structures. (Rivello.) 

21 



Aeronautical Engineering 

Aero. E. 115. Aerodynamics III. (3) 

Prerequisite, Aero. E. 102. Elementary theory of the flow of a compressible gas 
at subsonic and supersonic speeds. (Sherwood.) 

Aero. E. 117. Aircraft Vibrations. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Math. 64. Vibration and other dynamic 
problems occurring in structures. Specific topics of study include the single de- 
gree of freedom system, damping, forced vibrations, critical frequency multiple 
degrees of freedom, and vibration isolation and absorption. (Corning.) 

Aero. E. 118. Dynamics of Aerospace Vehicles. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Aero. E. 102 and 107. Study of the motions of 
orbital vehicles, and non-orbital glide and ballistic vehicles, through their entire 
trajectory of boost, orbit or glide, and re-entry. 

For Graduates 

A. BASIC AERODYNAMICS 

Aero. E. 220, 221. Aerodynamics of Incompressible Fluids. (3,3) 

Prerequisites, Aero. E. 101, Aero. E. 102, Math. 64. Fundamental equations in 
fluid mechanics. Irrotational motion. Circulation theory of lift. Thin airfoil 
theory. Lifting line theory. Wind tunnel corrections. Propeller theories. Linear- 
ized equations in compressible flow. 

Aero E. 222, 223. Aerodynamics of Viscous Fluids. (3, 3) 

Prerequisites, Aero. E. 101, Aero. E. 102, Math. 64. Fundamental concepts. 
Navier-Stokes' equations. Simple exact solutions. Laminar boundary layer 
theory. Pohlhausen method. Turbulent boundary layer; mixing length and 
similarity theories. Boundary layer in compressible flow. (Weske.) 

Aero. E. 224, 225. Aerodynamics of Compressible Fluids. (3, 3) 

Prerequisites, Aero. E. 115, Math. 64. One dimensional flow of a perfect com- 
pressible fluid. Shock waves. Two-dimensional linearized theory of compressible 
flow. Two-dimensional transonic and hypersonic flows. Exact solutions of two 
dimensional isotropic flow. Linearized theory of three-dimensional potential 
flow. Exact solution of axially symmetrical potential flow. One-dimensional 
viscous compressible flow. Laminar boundary layer of compressible fluids. (Pai.) 

B. APPLIED AERODYNAMICS 

Aero. E. 230, 231. The Aerodynamics of High Altitude 
Vehicles. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, permission of instructor. Aerothermodynamic study of several types 
of high altitude, hypersonic vehicles including ballistic, boost-glide and satellite 
vehicles. Examination of problems in stability, control, boundary-layer growth, 
Shockwave interactions and convective and radiative heating. (Wilson.) 

Aero. E. 232, 233. Wave Propagation in Gases and Solids. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, permission of instructor. Application of method of characteristics 
to unsteady compressible flow. Study of isentropic and non-isentropic flows of 
both ideal and non-ideal gases. The Lagrange ballistic problem, detonation, the 



22 



Aeronautical Engineering 

shock tube and spherical waves. Impact loading on elastic-plastic materials, the 
stopping shock, interactions and reflections in solids. Stress and strain produced 
in solids with varying cross-sectional area. (Seigel.) 

Aero. E. 234, 235. Aerospace Facilities and Techniques. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, permission of instructor. Problems in supersonic and hypersonic 
tunnel development such as the aerodynamic design of nozzles, diffusers, storage 
systems and arc heaters. Shock tubes and shock tube wind tunnels. Development 
of ballistic ranges and basic considerations in the design of high-speed launchers. 
Instrumentation and data reduction. (Lobb.) 

Aero. E. 236, 237. Heat Transfer Problems Associated with 
High Velocity Flight. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, permission of instructor. Heat conduction in solids and thermal 
radiation of solids and gases. Analytic solutions to simple problems and numeri- 
cal methods for solving complicated problems. Convective heating associated 
with laminar and turbulent boundary-layer flow. Heat transfer equations are 
derived for the flat plate case and for selected body shapes such as cones and 
hemispheres. Real gas effects on convective heating are examined. (Wilson.) 

C. STRUCTURES 

Aero. E. 250, 251. Advanced Flight Structures. (3, 3) 

Prerequisites, Math. 64 and Aero. E. 113, 114, or permission of the instructor. 
Introduction to two dimensional theory of elasticity, energy methods, plate 
theory, theory of elastic instability. Aerodynamic heating of structures, thermal 
stresses, creep, creep bending and buckling, visco-elastic theory. (Rivello.) 

D. PROPULSION 

Aero. E. 260, 261. Advanced Propulsion. (3, 3) 

Prerequisites, M. E. 100; Aero. E. 109, 110. Special problems of thermody- 
namics and dynamics of aircraft power plants; jet, rocket and ramjet engines; 
plasma, ion and nuclear propulsion for space vehicles. (Weske.) 

E. DYNAMICS 

Aero. E. 270, 271. Flight Dynamics. (3, 3) 

Prerequisites, Math. 64 and Aero. E. 114. Dynamics of a rigid body and applica- 
tions to airplane dynamics. Generalized coordinates and Lagrange's equations. 
Vibrations of simple systems. Dynamics of elastically connected masses. In- 
fluence, coefficients. Mode shapes and principal oscillations. Transient stresses 
in an elastic structure. Wing divergence and aileron reversal. Theory of two 
dimensional oscillating airfoil. Flutter problems. Corrections for finite span. 
Compressibility eff^ects. (Nicolaides.) 

F. GENERAL 

Aero. E. 290. Seminar. 

(Credit in accordance with work outlined by Aeronautical Engineering staff). 
First and second semesters. 



23 



Agriculture 

Aero. E. 291, 292. Selected Topics in Aerospace 
Engineering. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, permission of instructor. Topics of current interest and recent ad- 
vances in the field of aerodynamics. 

Aero. E. 399. Research. 

(Credit in accordance with woric outlined by Aeronautical Engineering staff). 
First and second semesters. Prerequisite, graduate standing. (Staff.) 



AGRICULTURE 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Agr. 100. Introductory Agricultural Biometrics. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period per week. Introduction 
to fundamental concepts underlying the applications of biometrical methods to 
agricultural problems with emphasis on graphical presentation of data, descrip- 
tive statistics, chi-square and t-tests, and linear regression and correlation. 

For Graduates 
Agr. 200. Agricultural Biometrics. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period per week. Prerequi- 
site, Agr. 100 or equivalent. A continuation of Agr. 100 with emphasis on 
analysis of variance and co-variance, multiple and curvilinear regression, sam- 
pling, experimental design and miscellaneous statistical techniques as applied to 
agricultural problems. 

Agr. 202, 203. Advanced Biological Statistics. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, approval of instructor. An advanced 
course dealing with specialized experimental designs, sampling techniques and 
elaborations of standard statistical procedures as applied to the animal and plant 
sciences. 



AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS 

Professors: Beal, Curtis, Poffenberger, Smith and Walker 

Associate Professors: Foster, Ishee, Mupray, Stevens, Swope 
AND Wysong. 

Assistant Professors: Marshall and Martin 

The Department offers a course study leading to the degree of Master of 
Science and Doctor of Philosophy. Although the major field is agricul- 
tural economics, thesis topics may be selected and courses concentrated 
to provide training in the application of economic principles to the pro- 
duction, processing, distribution, and merchandising of agricultural prod- 

24 



Agricultural Economics 

ucts as well as the inter-relationship of business and industry associated 
with agriculture in a dynamic economy. The curriculum includes courses 
in general agricultural economics, marketing, farm management, finance, 
prices, land economics, agricultural policy, and international agricultural 
development and trade. 

Department requirements, supplementary to the Graduate School, have 
been formulated for the guidance of candidates for graduate degrees. 
Copies of these requirements may be obtained from the Department of 
Agricultural Economics. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
A.E. 103. Economics of Agricultural Cooperation. (3) 

Second semester. A course in the development, expansion and consolidation of 
the cooperative method of business. Modern business organization and operating 
principles and practices related to farmer cooperatives are stressed. (Smith.) 

A.E. 104. Economics of Agricultural Transportation. (3) 

First semester. The course deals with the unique nature of agriculture in broad 
perspective as it relates to economics of transportation of the products involved. 
It includes the development of Agricultural transportation, effect of legislation 
and regulation upon this development, and growth of the intercarrier competi- 
tion. Theories of rate making and classification of carriers are discussed from 
the standpoint of the effect of transportation costs and methods upon plant and 
industry location in agriculture. (Smith.) 

A.E. 106. Prices of Agricultural Products. (3) 

Second semester. An introduction to argricultural price behavior. Emphasis is 
placed on the use of price information in the decision-making process, the rela- 
tion of supply and demand in determining agricultural prices, and the relation 
of prices to grade, time, location, and stages of processing in the marketing 
system. The course includes elementary methods of price analysis, the concept 
of parity, and the role of price support programs in agricultural decisions. 

(Martin.) 

A.E. 107. Financial Analysis of the Farm Business. (3) 

First semester. Application of economic principles to develop criteria for a 
sound farm business, including credit source and use, preparing and filing income 
tax returns, methods of appraising farm properties, the summary and analysis 
of farm records, leading to effective control and profitable operation of the farm 
business. (Wysong.) 

A.E. 108. Farm Management. (3) 

Second semester. The organization and operation of the farm business to obtain 
an income consistent with family resources and objectives. Principles of produc- 
tion economics and other related fields are applied to the individual farm busi- 
ness. Laboratory period will be largely devoted to field trips and other practical 
exercises. (Ishee.) 

A.E. 111. Economics of Resource Development. (3) 

First semester. Economic, political, and institutional factors which influence the 
use of land resources. Application of elementary economic principles in under- 

25 



Agricultural Economics 

standing social conduct concerning the development and use of natural and man- 
made resources. (Ishee.) 

A.E. 112. Agricultural Policy and Programs. (3) 

First semester. A study of public policies and programs related to the problems 
of agriculture. Description, analysis, and appraisal of current policies and pro- 
grams will be emphasized. (Smith.) 

A.E. 114. World Agricultural Production and Trade. (3) 

First semester. World production, consumption, and trade patterns for agricul- 
tural products. International trade theory applied to agricultural products. Na- 
tional influences on international agricultural trade. (Foster.) 

A.E. 115. Marketing Dairy Products. (2) 

First semester. (Offered 1964-65.) A study of principles and practices in the 
marketing of milk and manufactured dairy products including the influence of 
significant geographical and institutional relationships on costs and methods of 
distribution. (Beal.) 

A.E. 116. Marketing Fruits and Vegetables. (2) 

Second semester. (Offered 1964-65.) A study of marketing functions, methods, 
and channels of distribution for fresh and processed vegetables; analyses of sup- 
ply and demand factors, prices, grading, regulatory activities, and government 
programs and services. (Swope.) 

A.E. 117. Marketing Eggs and Poultry. (2) 

Second semester. (Offered 1963-64.) This course embraces the economic phases 
of egg and poultry marketing. Supply and demand factors, including trends, 
will be discussed along with marketing methods, marketing costs and margins, 
market facilities, transportation, government grading, storage and efficiency in 
marketing. Consumer preference, acceptance and purchases will be related to 
consumer income, pricing of competitive products and display methods. (Smith.) 

A.E. 118. Agriculture in World Economic Development. (3) 

First semester. The transition from a primitive agricultural economy to an econ- 
omy of rapidly developing commercial agriculture and industry, and ihe role of 
agriculture in this process. Consideration of the special role American agricul- 
ture may have in world economic development. (Foster.) 

A.E. 119. Foreign Agricultural Economies. (3) 

Second semester. Analysis of the agricultural economy of selected areas of the 
world. The interrelationships among institutions and values, such as govern- 
ment and religion, and the economics of agricultural organization and produc- 
tion. (Foster.) 

A.E. 150. Marketing Livestock and Meat. (2) 

First semester. (Offered 1963-64.) Supply and demand factors, including trends 
in the livestock industry, are discussed along with alternative marketing systems 
and resulting margins and prices. Emphasis is given to the meat packing indus- 
try and problems of grading, transportation, storage, and efficiency in meat dis- 
tribution. Trends in meat merchandising, consumer acceptance, and purchases 
will be discussed. (Smith.) 



26 



Agricultural Economics 

A.E. 198. Special Problems. (1-2) (2 Cr. Max.) (Not for Grad. 
Cr.) 

First and second semesters and summer. Concentrated reading and study in 
some phase or problem in agricultural economics. (Staff.) 

A.E. 199 A-B. Seminar. (1, 1) 

First and second semesters. Students will obtain experience in the selection, 
preparation and presentation of economic topics and problems which will be sub- 
jected to critical analysis. (Wysong.) 

For Graduates 
A.E. 200. Application of Econometrics in Agriculture. (3) 

First semester. Tools for analyzing demand and price behavior of agricultural 
products. Theories of least squares, estimation of structural economic relations 
in simultaneous equation systems, identification problems, and non-linear esti- 
mation techniques. (Martin.) 

A.E. 201. Advanced Theory and Practice of International Agri- 
cultural Trade. (3) 

Second semester. Advanced theory, policies and practice in international trade 
in agricultural products. Includes principal theories of trade and finance, agri- 
cultural trade policies of various countries, and the mechanics of how trade is 
conducted. (Moore.) 

A.E. 202. Market Structure in Agriculture. (3) 

First semester. This course centers on the concept of market structure analysis, 
with application of principles developed to agricultural industries. The dimen- 
sion of market structure is analyzed along with its impact on conduct and per- 
formance. Considerable time is spent on policy issues and the application of the 
antitrust laws to agricultural industries. (Moore.) 

A.E. 208. Agricultural Price and Income Policy. (3) 

Second semester. The evolution of agricultural policy in the United States, em- 
phasizing the origin and development of governmental programs, and their effects 
upon agricultural production, prices and income. (BeaL) 

A.E. 210. Rural Taxation AND Public Functions. (3) 

Second semester. Theory and practical problems in rural taxation. Major types 
of taxes are considered in detail. The tax system as it affects farmers and rural 
areas will be discussed. Major functional responsibilities of the different levels 
of governments are studied, with emphasis upon public services to rural areas 
and equal tax effort for support of equal functional programs. (Walker.) 

A.E. 214. Advanced Agricultural Marketing. (3) 

Second semester. Advanced study of the complex theoretical, institutional and 
legal factors governing both domestic and foreign agricultural trade, with par- 
ticular attention given to policies and practices affecting cost and price. (Beal.) 

A.E. 216. Economics of Agricultural Production. (3) 

First semester. Study of the more complex problems involved in the long-range 
adjustments, organization and operation of farm resources, including the impact 
of new technology and methods. Applications of the theory of the firm, linear 
programming, activity analysis, and input-output analysis. (Ishee.) 

27 



Agricultural Economics 

A.E. 218. Agricultural Economics Research Techniques. (3) 

First semester. Emphasis is given to philosophy and basic objectives of research 
in the field of agricultural economics. The course is designed to help students 
define a research problem and work out logical procedures for executing re- 
search in the social sciences. Attention is given to the techniques and tools 
available to agricultural economists. Research documents in the field will be ap- 
praised from the standpoint of procedures and evaluation of the research. (Beal.) 

A.E. 219. Advanced Land Economics. (3) 

Second semester. Application of micro and macro economic principles to the 
analyses of special problems related to land such as public direction of land 
use, tenure arrangements, conservation, and land reform movements. (Ishee.) 

A.E. 220. International Impacts of Selected Agricultural 
Forces. (3) 

Second semester. Selected agricultural forces (such as pressure of population on 
food supply) and their impact on the political, social, and economic develop- 
ment of the world. (Foster.) 

A.E. 300. Special Topics in Agricultural Economics. (3) 

First and second semesters. This course is designed to offer students special sub- 
ject matter in the field of Agricultural Economics. Subject matter taught in this 
course will be varied and will depend on the persons available for teaching 
unique and specialized phases of Agricultural Economics. The course will be 
taught by the staff or visiting Agricultural Economists who may be secured on 
lectureship or visiting professor basis. (Staff.) 

A.E. 301, Special Problems in Agricultural Economics. (1-2) 
(4 Cr. Max.) 

First and second semesters and summer. Intensive study and analysis of specific 
problems in the field of agricultural ecqnomics, which will provide information 
in depth in areas of special interest to the student. (Staff.) 

A.E. 302. Seminar. (1, 1) 

First and second semesters. Students will participate through study of problems 
in the field, reporting to seminar members and defending positions adopted. 
Outstanding leaders in the field will present ideas for analyses and discussion 
among class members. Students involved in original research will present 
progress reports. Class discussion will provide opportunity for constructive 
criticism and guidance. (Curtis.) 

A.E. 399. Research. 

Advanced research in Agricultural Economics. Credit according to work ac- 
complished. (Staff.) 



28 



Agricultural and Extension Education 



AGRICULTURAL AND EXTENSION EDUCATION 

Professor: Cardozier. 

Associate Professor: Smith. 

Assistant Professors: Jahns and Johnson. 

The Department of Agricultural and Extension Education offers work 
leading to the degree of Master of Science. Students may choose either a 
program on agricultural education or extension education. Either program 
may be pursued on a part-time or full-time basis. 

Students pursuing either curriculum will be expected to have completed 
at least one year of experience in the field in which they are studying. They 
will be expected to have completed at least 1 6 semester hours of education, 
except that one year of professional experience in their field of study may 
be substituted for eight semester hours of the prerequisites. Deficiencies in 
prerequisites may be made up after being admitted to the Graduate School. 
Department requirements, supplemental to the Graduate School, are avail- 
able for the guidance of graduate students. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
R. Ed. 114. Rural Life and Education. (3) 

Second semester. An intensive study of the educational agencies at work in rural 
communities, stressing an analysis of school patronage areas, the possibilities of 
normal life in rural areas, early beginnings in rural education, and the condition- 
ing effects of educational offerings. (Jahns.) 

R. Ed. 150. Extension Education. (2) 

Second semester. The Agricultural Extension Service as an educational agency. 
The history, philosophy, objectives, policy, organization, legislation, and methods 
used in extension work. (Johnson.) 

R. Ed. 160. Extension Communications. (2) 

First semester. An introduction to communications in teaching and within an 
organization; including barriers to communication, the diffusion process, and the 
application of communications principles person to person, with groups, and 
through mass media. (Johnson.) 

R. Ed. 170, 171. Conservation of Natural Resources. (3,3) 

Laboratory fee, $35.00. Designed primarily for teachers. Study of state's natural 
resources — soil, water, fisheries, wildlife, forests, and minerals — natural resource 
problems and practices. Extensive field study. First course concentrates on sub- 
ject matter; second includes methods of teaching conservation. Courses taken 
concurrently in summer session. (Staff.) 

R. Ed. 180, 181. Critique in Rural Education. (1, 1) 

Summer session only. Current problems and trends in rural education. (Staff.) 



29 



Agricultural and Extension Education 

For Graduates 

R. Ed. 200. Research Methods in Rural Education. (2-3) 

First semester. The scientific method, problem identification, survey of research 
literature, preparing research plans, design of studies, experimentation, analysis 
of data and thesis writing. (Cardozier.) 

R. Ed. 201. Rural Life and Education. (3) 

First semester. Analysis of structure and function of rural society and applica- 
tion of social understandings to educational programs. (Smith.) 

R. Ed. 203. Farm Organizations and Rural Education. (3) 

Second semester. (Given in accordance with demand, but not more often than 
alternate years.) Prerequisite, R. Ed. 114 or equivalent. The part played by 
farm organizations in formal and informal education in the rural community. 

R. Ed. 204. Developing Rural Leadership. (2) 

Theories of leadership are emphasized. Techniques of identifying formal and 
informal leaders and the development of rural lay leaders. (Jahns.) 

R. Ed. 207, 208. Problems in Rural Education. (2, 2) 

Second semester. Consideration of current problems and topics in rural educa- 
tion. (Staff.) 

R. Ed. 209. Rural Adult Education. (2) 

Second semester. Principles of adult education applied to rural groups. Under- 
standing adult motivation, ability and behavior. Eff^ective methods of planning, 
organizing and conducting rural adult education programs. (Jahns.) 

R. Ed. 215. Supervision of Student Teaching. (1) 

Summer session. Identification of experiences and activities in an effective stu- 
dent teaching program, responsibilities and duties of supervising teachers, and 
evaluation of student teaching. (Cardozier.) 

R. Ed. 217. Program Planning and Evaluation in Agricultural 
Education. (2-3) 

Second semester. Analysis of community agricultural education needs, selection 
and organization of course content, criteria and procedures for evaluating pro- 
grams. (Smith.) 

R. Ed. 225. Program Development in Extension Education. (2) 

Prerequisite, R. Ed. 150 or equivalent. Principles and procedures of program 
planning and development in extension education. (Johnson.) 

R. Ed. 240. Agricultural College Instruction. (1) 

Second semester. (Given in accordance with demand, but not more often than 
alternate years.) Open to graduate students and members of the faculty in the 
College of Agriculture. A seminar type of course consisting of reports, discus- 
sions, and lectures dealing with the techniques and procedures adapted to teach- 
ing agricultural subjects at the college level. (Cardozier.) 

R. Ed. 301. Field Problems in Rural Education. (1-3) 

First and second semesters and summer session. Prerequisite, six semester hours 



30 



Agricultural Engineering 

of graduate study. Problems accepted depend upon the character of the work of 
the student and the facilities available for study. Periodic conferences required. 
Final report must follow accepted pattern for field investigation. (Staff.) 

R. Ed. 302. Seminar in Rural Education. (1, 1) 

First and second semesters. Problems in the organization, administration, and 
supervision of the several agencies of rural education. Investigations, papers, 
and reports. (Cardozier.) 

R. Ed. 399. Research. 

First and second semesters and summer session. Credit hours according to work 
done. (Staff.) 



AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING 

Professors: Green and Burkhardt. 

Associate Professors: Gienger and Winn. 

Assistant Professors: Harris and Matthews. 

The Department of Agricultural Engineering offers a graduate course of 
study leading to the degree of Master of Science. The student may pursue 
major work in agricultural power and machinery, soil and water conserva- 
tion engineering, agricultural structures or electric power and processing. 
A thesis based upon original research work is required. An employee of 
a nearby institution may submit a thesis based on research work at the 
institution under the direction of and with prior approval by the 
Department. 

Laboratory facilities are available for work in each area of specialization 
and, in cooperation with other departments, ample areas for field tests and 
studies are available. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Agr. Engr. 113. Special Problems in Agricultural Processing. 

(3-4) 

Second semester. Three lectures and one laboratory a week. Laboratory op- 
tional. Prerequisite. Physics 1 or 10. A study of problems in power transmission, 
hydraulics, electricity, thermodynamics, refrigeration, instruments and controls, 
materials handling, and analysis of time and motion as related to the processing 
of agricultural commodities. (Matthews.) 

Agr. Engr. 123. Agricultural Production Equipment. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Prerequisite, Agr. 
Engr. 1. Principles of operation and functions of power and machinery units as 
related to tillage; metering devices; cutting, conveying and separating units; and 
control mechanisms. Principles of internal combustion engines and power unit 
components. (Matthews.) 



31 



Agricultural Engineering 

Agr. Engr. 124. Agricultural Materials Handling and Environ- 
mental Control. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Prerequisite, Agr. 
Engr. 1. Characteristics of construction materials and details of agricultural 
structures. Fundamentals of electricity, electrical circuits, and electrical controls. 
Materials handling and environmental requirements of farm products and ani- 
mals. (Matthews.) 

Agr. Engr. 143. Agricultural Power and Machinery Analysis. (4) 

First semester. Three lectures and one laboratory per week. Prerequisites, Agr. 
Engr. 1, E.S. 21, and M. E. 1. Analysis of power units and equipment used for 
agricultural production with emphasis on functional design requirements. Funda- 
mentals of power transmission, principles of internal combustion engines and 
force analysis. (Harris.) 

Agr. Engr. 144. Design of Operational Systems for Agriculture. 
(3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Prerequisite, Math. 
21 and Phys. 21. Principles and engineering requirements of agricultural en- 
vironmental control. Included are studies of controlling heat and moisture pro- 
duced by animals and crops, static loading of farm structures and electrical com- 
ponents as related to environments and materials handling. (Harris.) 

Agr. Engr. 145. Soil and Water Conservation Engineering. (2) 

Second semester. Two lectures per week. Prerequisites, C. E. 110 and M. E. 102. 
Applications of engineering and soil sciences in erosion control, drainage, irriga- 
tion and watershed management. Principles of agricultural hydrology and design 
of water control and conveyance systems. (Green.) 

Agr. Engr. 198. Special Problems in Farm Mechanics. (1-3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, approval of Department. Problems as- 
signed in proportion to credit. (Gienger.) 

For Graduates 
Agr. Engr. 201. Special Topics in Agricultural Engineering. (3) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and one laboratory period per week. 
Timely topics in specialized areas of agricultural engineering will be selected. 
For example. Instrumentation for Agricultural Engineering Research. (Staff.) 

Agr. Engr. 301. Special Problems in Agricultural 
Engineering. (1-6) 

First and second semester and summer school. Work assigned in proportion 
to amount of credit. (Staff.) 

Agr. Eng. 302. Seminar. (1) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, permission of instructor. (Harris.) 

Agr. Eng. 399. Research. (1-6) 
Credit according to work accomplished. 

(Staff.) 



32 



Agronomy 
AGRONOMY— CROPS AND SOILS 

Professors: Rothgeb and Street. 

Associate Professors: Axley, Decker, Miller and Strickling. 

Assistant Professors: Beyer, Clark and Kresge. 

The Department of Agronomy offers a graduate course of study leading 
to the degree of Master of Science and to the degree of Doctor of Phil- 
osophy. The student may pursue major work in the crops division or in 
the soils division of the Department. A thesis based on original research 
is required for each degree. Ample laboratory and greenhouse facilities 
for graduate work are available on the campus. The Plant Research Farm, 
the Forage Research Farm, and the Tobacco Experiment Farm offer ade- 
quate nearby research facilities. Many projects of the Department are 
conducted in cooperation with the Agricultural Research Service of the 
United States Department of Agriculture with headquarters located three 
miles from the campus. 

Departmental regulations have been assembled for the guidance of candi- 
dates for graduate degrees. Copies of these regulations are available 
from the Department of Agronomy. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
CROPS 
Agron. 103. Crop Breeding. (2) 

Second semester, alternate years. (Offered 1964-65.) Prerequisite, Bot. 117 
or Zool. 104. Principles and methods of breeding annual self and cross- 
pollinated plants and perennial forage species. (Beyer.) 

Agron. 104. Tobacco Production. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Bot. 1. A study of the 
history, adaptation, distribution, culture, and improvement of various types of 
tobacco, with special emphasis on problems in Maryland tobacco production. 
Physical and chemical factors associated with yield and quality of tobacco will 
be stressed. (Street.) 

Agron. 107. Cereal Crop Production. (3) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1964-65.) Two lectures and one labo- 
ratory period a week. Prerequisite, Bot. 1. Study of the principles and practice 
of com, wheat, oats, barley, rye, and soybean production. (Rothgeb.) 

Agron. 108. Forage Crop Production. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, 
Bot. 1. Study of the production and management of grasses and legumes for 
quality hay, silage and pasture. (Decker.) 



33 



Agronomy 

Agron. 109. Turf Management. (2) 

First semester, alternate years. (OflFered 1965-66.) Two lectures a week. Pre- 
requisite, Bot. 1. A study of principles and practices in management of turf 
for lawns, athletic fields, playgrounds, airfields, and highway planting. (Staff.) 

Agron. 151. Cropping Systems. (2) 

Second semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Agron. 1 or equivalent. 
The co-ordination of information for various courses in the development of 
balanced cropping systems, appropriate to different objectives in various areas 
of the state and nation. (Clark.) 

Agron. 152. Seed Production and Distribution. (2) 

First semester, alternate years. One lecture and one labora- 
tory period a week. Prerequisite, Agron. 1 or equivalent. A study of seed 
production, processing, and distribution; federal and state seed control pro- 
grams; seed laboratory analyses; release of new varieties and maintenance of 
foundation seed stocks. (Newcomer.) 

Agron. 154. Weed Control. (3) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1965-66.) Two lectures and one 
laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, Agron. 1 or equivalent. A study 
of the use of cultural practices and chemical herbicides in the control of 
weeds. 

Additional courses under CROPS AND SOILS may be taken. 

For Graduates 
Agron. 201. Advanced Crop Breeding. (2) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1965-66.) Prerequisite, Agron. 103 
or equivalent. Genetic, cytogenetic, and statistical theories underlying methods 
of plant breeding. A study of quantitative inheritance, heterosis, heritability, 
interspecific and intergeneric hybridization, polyploidy, sterility mechanisms, 
inbreeding and outbreeding, and other topics as related to plant breeding. 

(Beyer.) 

Agron. 204. Technic in Field Crop Research. (2) 

Second semester, alternate years. (Offered 1964-65.) Field plot technic, ap- 
plication of statistical analysis to agronomic data, and preparation of the 
research project. (LeClerg.) 

Agron. 205. Advanced Tobacco Production. (2) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1965-66.) Two lectures a week. 
Prerequisite, permission of instructor. A study of the structural adaptation 
and chemical response of tobacco to environmental variations. Emphasis will 
be placed on the alkaloids and other unique components. (Street.) 

Agron. 207, Advanced Forage Crops. (2) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1964-65.) Two lectures a week. Pre- 
requisites, Bot. 101, Chem. 31 and 32, or equivalent, or permission of in- 
structor. A fundamental study of physiological and ecological responses of 
grasses and legumes to environmental factors, including fertilizer elements, 
soil moisture, soil temperature, air temperature, humidity, length of day, 
quality and intensity of light, wind movement, and defoliation practices. 

34 



Agronomy 

Relationship of these factors to life history, production, chemical and botanical 
composition, quality, and persistence of forages will be considered. (Decker.) 

Agron. 208. Research Methods. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, permission of staff. Development of research 
viewpoint by detailed study and report on crop research of the Maryland Ex- 
periment Station or review of literature on specific phases of a problem. (Staff.) 

Agron. S210. Cropping Systems. (1) 

Summer session only. An advanced course primarily designed for teachers of 
vocational agriculture and county agents. It deals with outstanding problems 
and the latest developments in the field. (Staff.) 

Additional courses under CROPS AND SOILS may be taken. 

SOILS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Agron. SI 10. Soil Management. (1) 

Summer session only. An advanced course primarily designed for teachers of 
vocational agriculture and county agents dealing with factors involved in 
management of soils in general and of Maryland soils in particular. Emphasis 
is placed on methods of maintaining and improving chemical, physical, and 
biological characteristics of soils. (Strickling.) 

Agron. IIL Soil Fertility Principles. (3) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1964-65.) Three lectures a week. 
Prerequisite, Agron. 10. A study of the chemical, physical, and biological 
characteristics of soils that are important in growing crops. Soil deficiencies of 
physical, chemical, or biological nature and their correction by the use of 
lime, fertilizers, and rotations are discussed and illustrated. (Strickling.) 

Agron. 112. Commercial Fertilizers. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Agron. 10 or permission 
of instructor. A study of the manufacturing of commercial fertilizers and their 
use in soils for efficient crop production. (Axley.) 

Agron. 113. Soil Conservation. (3) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1964-65.) Two lectures and one labora- 
tory period a week. Prerequisite, Agron. 10 or permission of instructor. A 
study of the importance and causes of soil erosion, and methods of soil erosion 
control. Special emphasis is placed on farm planning for soil conservation. 
The laboratory period will be largely devoted to field trips. 

Agron. 114. Soil Classification and Geography. (4) 

Second semester. Three lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, 
Agron. 10, or permission of instructor. A study of the genesis, morphology, 
classification and geographic distribution of soils. The broad principles govern- 
ing soil formation are explained. Attention is given to the influence of 
geographic factors on the development and use of soils in the United States 
and other parts of the world. The laboratory periods will be largely devoted to 
field trips and to a study of soil maps of various countries. 



35 



Agronomy 

Agron. 116. Soil Chemistry. (3) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1964-65.) One lecture and two 
laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, Agron. 10, or permission of instructor. 
A study of the chemical composition of soils; cation and anion exchange; acid, 
alkaline and saline soil conditions; and soil fixation of plant nutrients. Chemi- 
cal methods of soil analysis will be studied with emphasis on their relation to 
fertilizer requirements. (Axley.) 

Agron. 117. Soil Physics. (3) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1965-66.) Two lectures and one labo- 
ratory period a week. Prerequisites, Agron. 10 and a course in physics, or 
permission of instructor. A study of physical properties of soil with special 
emphasis on relationship to soil productivity. (Strickling.) 

Agron. 119. Soil Mineralogy. (4) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1965-66.) Two lectures and two 
laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, permission of instructor. A study of 
the fundamental laws and forms of crystal symmetry and essentials of crystal 
structure; structure, occurrence, association and uses of minerals, determination 
of minerals by means of their morphological, chemical and physical properties. 
Particular attention is given to soil-forming minerals. Laboratory periods will 
be devoted to a systematic study of about 75 minerals. 

Additional courses under CROPS AND SOILS may be taken. 

For Graduates 
Agron. 250. Advanced Soil Mineralogy. (3) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1964-65.) Three lectures a week. 
Prerequisites, Agron. 10, Agron. 119 and permission of instructor. A study of 
the structure, physical-chemical characteristics and identification methods of soil 
minerals, particularly clay minerals, and their relationship to soil genesis and 
productivity. 

Agron. 251. Advanced Methods of Soil Investigation. (3) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1965-66.) Three lectures a week. 
Prerequisites, Agron. 10 and permission of instructor. An advanced study of 
the theory of the chemical methods of soil investigation with emphasis on 
problems involving application of physical chemistry. (Axley.) 

Agron. 252. Advanced Soil Physics. (3) 

Second semester, alternate years. (Offered 1965-66.) Two lectures and one 
laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, Agron. 10 and permission of instruc- 
tor. An advanced study of physical properties of soils. (Strickling.) 

Agron. 253. Advanced Soil Chemistry, (3) 

First semester, alternate years. (Offered 1964-65.) One lecture and two 
laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, Agron. 10 and permission of instruc- 
tor. A continuation of Agron. 116 with emphasis on soil chemistry of minor 
elements necessary for plant growth. (Axley.) 

Additional courses under CROPS AND SOILS may be taken. 
36 



American Studies 

CROPS AND SOILS 

For Graduates 
Agron. 260. Recent Advances in Agronomy. (2-4) 

First semester. Two hours each year. Total credit four hours. Prerequisite, per- 
mission of instructor. A study of recent advances in agronomy research. (Staff.) 

Agron. 302. Agronomy Seminar. (1, 1) 

First and second semesters. Total credit toward Master of Science degree, 2; 
toward Ph.D. degree, 6. Prerequisite, premission of instructor. (Staff.) 

Agron. 399. Research. 

First and second semesters. Credit according to work done. (Staff.) 



AMERICAN STUDIES 

Committee on American Studies: 

Associate Professor: Beall, Executive Secretary. 

Professors: Hoffsommer, Land, Murphy and Plischke. 

The American Studies Program offers work leading to both the degrees 
of Master of Arts and Doctor of Philosophy. The Department of English, 
History, Government and Politics, and Sociology join to offer integrated 
plans of study. In his class work the student will emphasize the offerings 
of any one of these departments. For lists of courses from which his 
particular program is to be developed, he is to see principally the listings 
of the four departments just mentioned. The Executive Secretary of the 
program will serve as the student's adviser in consultation with the chair- 
man of the department in the field of the student's special interest. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Amer. Stud. 137, 138. Conference Course in American 
Studies (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Four American classics, drawn from the fields of 
the cooperating departments, are studied in detail each semester. Specialists 
from the appropriate departments lecture on these books. The classics for this 
year are Franklin's Autobiography, The Life and Writings of Thomas Jeffer- 
son, De Tocqueviile's Democracy in America, Schlesinger's The Age of Jack- 
son, for the first semester; and for the second semester: llioreau's Walden. 
Howell's A Hazard of New Fortunes, Veblen's The Theory of the Leisure 
Class, and Riesman's The Lonely Crowd. The Conference course, or either 
semester of it, may be chosen by a student outside the program as an elective. 
It also counts as major credit for the four cooperating departments. The course 
meets, like a seminar, once a week. (Beall and cooperating specialists.) 

37 



Animal Science 



For Graduates 



Amer. Stud. 201, 202. Seminar in American Studies. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Bode.) 



ANIMAL SCIENCE 

Professors: Foster and Green. 
Associate Professors: Buric and Leffel. 
Assistant Professor: Young. 

The Department of Animal Science offers work leading to the degree of 
Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. Course work and thesis prob- 
lems are offered in the areas of animal breeding, nutrition, and livestock 
production. 

Departmental requirements have been formulated for the information and 
guidance of graduate students. Copies of these requirements are available 
from the Department of Animal Science. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
An. Sc. 130. Principles of Breeding. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, ZooL 104 or Bot. 117 
and An. Sc. 170 or 171 or An. Sc. 40. Graduate credit (1-3 hours), allowed 
with permission of instructor. The practical aspects of animal breeding, heredity, 
variation, selection, systems of breeding and pedigree study are considered. 

(Green.) 

An. Sc. S131. Special Topics in Animal Science. (1) 

Prerequisite, permission of instructor. Summer session only. This course is 
designed primarily for teachers of vocational agriculture and Extension Serv- 
ice personnel. One primary topic, to be selected mutually by the instructor and 
students, will be presented each session. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
An. Sc. 220. Advanced Breeding. (2) 

Second semester, alternate years. Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, 
An. Sc. 130 or equivalent, and Biological Statistics. This course 
deals with the more technical phases of heredity and variation, selection indices, 
breeding systems, and inheritance in farm animals. (Green.) 

An. Sc. 221. Advanced Livestock Nutrition. (3) 

Second semester, alternate years. (Offered 1964-65.) Three lectures a week. 
Prerequisites, Chem. 31 32, 33, 34 or equivalent, and An. Sc. 110, or permission 
of instructors. Experimental techniques and recent developments in the feeding 
and nutrition of beef cattle, sheep and swine are presented. (Leffel, Young.) 

38 



Art 

An. Sc. 301. Special Problems in Animal Science. (1-2) 

(4 Cr. Max.) 

First and second semesters. Work assigned in proportion to amount of credit. 
Prerequisite, approval of staff. Problems will be assigned which relate specifical- 
ly to the character of work the student is pursuing. (Staff.) 

An. Sc. 302. Seminar. (1) (5 Cr. Max.) 

First and second semesters. Students are required to prepare papers based upon 
current scientific publications relating to Animal Science or upon their research 
work, for presentation before and discussion by the class. (Staff.) 

An. Sc. 399. Research (1-12) 

First and second semesters. Work assigned in proportion to amount of credit. 
Students will be required to pursue original research in some phase of animal 
science, carrying the same to completion, and report the results in the form 
of a thesis. (Staff.) 



ART 

Professor: Lembach. 

Associate Professor: Maril. 

Assistant Professors: Grubar, Jamieson, Stites and O'Connell. 

The Department of Art offers a graduate course of study leading to the 
degree of Master of Arts. Two curricula are offered: (a) Creative Art 
Program, which emphasizes studio work in painting, drawing and sculp- 
ture; (b) History of Art Program, in which the emphasis is placed on 
the history and criticism of art, and art education. 

1. Creative Art Program: An A.B. degree with an art major from 
an accredited university, or its equivalent, is required. In addition, spe- 
cial departmental requirements must be met. Of thirty hours of approved 
graduate work, twelve must be in the creative art program, and six in the 
history of art. All candidates for the Master of Arts degree will be re- 
quired to pass a written comprehensive examination and submit a thesis 
or an original creative project in painting, drawing or sculpture. 

2. History of Art Program: The student enrolling in this program 
will submit evidence of prior study in the general field of art on the under- 
graduate level, or demonstrate familiarity with the subject by requesting 
a special Departmental examination. Based on the recommendations of 
the Staff, additional courses may be required to supplement the student's 
undergraduate work. An adequate reading knowledge of French or German 
will be expected. A written comprehensive examination will be adminis- 
tered to each student before qualifying for the final oral examination. A 
thesis is required. 

39 



Art 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Art 102, 103. Creative Painting. (3, 3) 

Three two-hour laboratory periods per week. Prerequisites, Art 1, 5, 7. 
Assignments of pictorial composition aimed at both mural decoration and easel 
picture problems. The formal values in painting are integrated with the stu- 
dent's own desire for personal expression. (Maril.) 

Art 104, 105. Life Class (Drawing and Painting, 
Intermediate.) (3, 3) 

Three two-hour laboratory periods per week. Prerequisites, Art 1 and 5. 
Careful observation and study of the human figure for construction, action, 
form, and color. (Staff.) 

Art 106, 107. Portrait Class (Drawing and Painting). (3, 3) 

One lecture hour and five laboratory hours per week. Prerequisites, Art 1 and 
5. Thorough draftsmanship and study of characterization and design stressed. 

(Wharton.) 
Art 108, 109. Modern Art. (3, 3) 

A survey of the developments in various schools of modern art. Works of art 
analyzed according to their intrinsic values and in their historical background. 
Collections of Washington and Baltimore are utilized. (Grubar, Stites.) 

Art 110. Print Making. (3) 

Basic experiences in the various print making media: woodcut, etching, and 
lithography. Emphasis on a demonstrated understanding of the means of mak- 
ing five prints. (O'Connell.) 

Art 111. Print Making. (3) 

Development in depth of not more than two print making media leading to 
a demonstrated capability with the techniques as means to artistic ends. 

(O'Connell.) 
Art 113, 114. Illustration. (3, 3) 

Two three-hour laboratory periods per week. Prerequisites, Art 1, 5, and 
104. This course is designed for the purpose of channeling fine art training into 
practical fields, thereby preparing the student to meet the modern commercial 
advertising problems. Special emphasis will be placed upon magazine and book 
illustrating. (Jamieson.) 

Art 115, 116. Still Life Painting (Advanced). (3, 3) 

Two three-hour laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite, Art 6. This course 
is for those who have completed Art 6 and wish to specialize in Still Life 
Painting, and more creative work. (Jamieson.) 

Art 154, 155. Life Drawing and Painting (Advanced). (3, 3) 

Three two-hour laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite, Art 105. This course 
is for those who have completed Art 105 and wish to develop greater proficiency 
in the use of the figure in creative work. (Staff.) 

Art 156, 157. Portrait Painting (Advanced). (3, 3) 

Two three-hour laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite, Art 106, 107. This 
course is for those who have completed Art 106, 107 and wish to specialize in 
portraiture. (Wharton.) 

40 



Art 

Art 158. Mural Painting. (3) 

Prerequisite, Art 104. Primarily for those students who wish to continue ad- 
vanced study from the model with direct application to mural painting. 

(Jamieson.) 

Art 185, 186. Renaissance and Baroque Art in Italy. (2, 2) 

Prerequisite, Art 1 1 . The first term is concerned with the emergence and 
development of Renaissance painting, sculpture and architecture through the 
first quarter of the 16th century. In the second term Mannerism and Baroque 
phases are studied. (Grubar, Stites.) 

Art 188, 189. History of 16th and 17th Century Painting, (2, 2) 

Prerequisite, Art 11. A study of the development of painting and related arts. 
The first semester study will center on Italian painting in the 16th and 17th 
century and the emergence of the Baroque style. During the second semester, 
the paintings of France, Spain, England, and the Low Countries will be con- 
sidered. (Grubar.) 

Art 190, 191. Special Problems in Art. (3, 3) 

Two three-hour laboratory periods per week or its equivalent in art history 
and appreciation. Permission of Department Head. Designed to offer the 
advanced student in art special instruction in areas not offered regularly by the 
Department. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Art 205, 206. Advanced Problems in Drawing. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, at least one year of traditional methods in drawing from life 
models. An investigation of the many media of drawing and the potentials 
existing therein. (Staff.) 

Art 210. Materials and Techniques of Painting. (3) 

A technical investigation of painting methods from the Renaissance to the 
present. Preparation of grounds, media, underpainting, glazes, and emulsions 
for tempera. (Jamieson.) 

Art 215. 216. Advanced Problems in Painting. (3, 3) 

An understanding of the formal structures of traditional pajnting is expected. 
Problems will be developed by the individual students that will express their 
creative potentials. An experimental attitude will be encouraged. Investigation 
will be made of new painting media. (Staff.) 

Art 220. Creative Tests in Plastics Media. (3) 

Technical and creative tests employing the latest plastics media used by con- 
temporary artists. Special emphasis is placed in Polymer Tempera. 

(Jamieson.) 

Art 276, 277. Advanced Problems in Art Education. (3, 3) 

A closely integrated series of definite problems pursued in an exploratory, 
individual manner, determined by the student's professional needs. (Lembach.) 

Art 230, 231. Experimentation in Sculpture. (3, 3) 

Professional aspects of sculpture, independent research and experimentation are 
stressed. (Freeny.) 

41 



Art 

Art 235. Materials and Techniques in Sculpture. (3) 

For the advanced student interested in a better understanding of his materials. 
Methods of armature building, casting, and the varieties of stone, wood, metal 
and plastic materials will be experimented with and discussed. (Freeny.) 

Art 245. Materials, Media and Techniques in Art. (3) 

A laboratory-lecture course required of all majors in the history and criticism 
of art. An intensive study and practical application of materials, media and 
techniques employed during the various historic periods. (Staff.) 

Art 250. American Pre-Colonial and Colonial Art. (3) 

An investigation of the arts of the various Indian cultures, the period of explora- 
tion, and the early and later phases of Colonial development. (Grubar, Stites.) 

Art 255. Seminar in Nineteenth Century American Art. (3) 

A critical examination of painting, sculpture and architecture from the end of 
the Colonial period until 1860. (Grubar.) 

Art 260. Seminar in Contemporary Art. (3) 

Prerequisites, Art 108, 109 and the consent of the instructor. An intensive 
study of the major developments in Western European and American art from 
1900 until the present day. (Grubar.) 

Art 265. Baroque Art. (3) 

Advanced problems in Italian and Northern European art of the Baroque period. 

(Grubar, Stites.) 

Art 270. Romanesque and Gothic Art. (3) 

Architectural, sculptural and painting problems in Western Europe. 

(Grubar, Stites.) 

Art 271. Early Christian and Byzantine Art. (3) 

A study of church architecture, sculpture, painting, mosaic, and the minor arts, 
with particular emphasis on iconography. (Grubar, Stites.) 

Art 275. Classical Art. (3) 

Problems in pre-Greek, Greek, Etruscan and Roman art. (Grubar, Stites.) 

Art 280. F.ar Eastern Art. (3) 

Painting, sculpture, architecture and the minor arts of China, Japan and re- 
lated countries from the earliest times to the end of the nineteenth century. 

(Staff.) 

Art 285. Middle and Near Eastern Art. (3) 

The art and architecture of India, Iran, Mesopotamia and Egypt. (Staff.) 



Art 399. Research-Thesis. (1-6) 



(Staff.) 



42 



Botany 



BOTANY 



Professors: Bamford, Gauch, Appleman (emeritus), Krauss, 
Norton (emeritus), D. T. Morgan, and Weaver. 

Associate Professors: Brown, Rappleye, Paterson, Sisler, 
Kantzes, and O. Morgan. 

Assistant Professors: Bell, Galloway, Klarman, Krusberg, 

LOCKARD AND WiLLIAMS. 



The Department of Botany offers a graduate course of study leading to 
the degree of Master of Science and to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. 
The student may pursue major work in plant physiology, plant pathology, 
plant ecology, plant taxonomy, nematology, cytogenetics, or plant anatomy. 
Inasmuch as a thesis based on original research is required for each degree, 
a qualified student may be allowed to pursue a problem of his own choos- 
ing, or choose some area of research in progress since the Department is 
devoted to a study of basic agricultural problems as well as projects of a 
more fundamental nature. An individual employed at a nearby institu- 
tion may submit a thesis based on his research work at the institution 
under the direction of, and subject to prior approval by, a member of the 
faculty. 

Laboratory facilities are available for research in each division, and there 
are ample greenhouses and plot space available on the campus or adja- 
cent University farm land. 

In addition to the normal requirements of the Graduate School, one must 
possess a reading knowledge of one language, either French, German, 
Latin, or Russian, before the Master of Science degree is granted; two 
foreign languages are required for the Ph.D. degree. 

PLANT PHYSIOLOGY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
BoT. lOL Plant Physiology. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
Bot. 1 and general chemistry. Laboratory fee, $6.00. A survey of the general 
physiological activities of plants. (Krauss, Lockard.) 

BoT. 102. Plant Ecology. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Bot. 1. A study of the different plant successions 
and vegetational climaxes and their correlation with the climatic, soil, and 
biotic factors of the environment. (Brown.) 

43 



Botany 

BoT. 103. Plant Ecology Laboratory. (1) 

Second semester. One three-hour laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, Bot. 
102 or equivalent, or concurrent registration therein. Laboratory fee, $6.00. 
The application of field and other methods to the qualitative and quantitative 
study of vegetation and environmental factors. (Brown.) 

For Graduates 
Bot. 200. Plant Biochemistry. (2) 

First semester. (Not offered 1963-1964.) Prerequisites, Bot. 101 and elementary 
organic chemistry, or equivalent. A study of the important substances in the 
composition of the plant body and the chemical changes occurring therein. 

(Galloway.) 

Bot. 201. Plant Biochemistry Laboratory. (2) 

First semester. (Not offered 1963-64.) Two laboratory periods a week. Pre- 
requisite, Bot. 200 or concurrent registration therein. Laboratory fee, $10.00. 
Application of apparatus and techniques to the study of the chemistry of 
plant materials. (Galloway.) 

Bot. 202. Plant Biophysics. (2) 

Second semester. (Not offered 1964-1965.) Prerequisites, Bot. 1 and introduc- 
tory physics, or equivalent. An advanced course dealing with the operation 
of physical phenomena in plant life processes. (Galloway.) 

Bot. 203. Biophysical Methods. (2) 

Second semester. (Not offered 1964-65.) Two laboratory periods a week. 
Laboratory course to accompany Bot. 202. Laboratory fee, $10.00. (Galloway.) 

Bot. 204. Growth and Development. (2) 

First semester. (Not offered 1964-65.) Prerequisite, 12 semester hours of plant 
science. A study of current developments in the mathematical treatment of 
growth and the effects of radiation, plant hormones, photoperiodism, and 
internal biochemical balance during the development of the plant. (Krauss.) 

Bot. 205. Mineral Nutrition of Plants. (2) 

Second semester. (Not offered 1963-1964.) Reports on current literature are 
presented and discussed in connection with recent advances in the mineral 
nutrition of plants. (Krauss.) 

Bot. 209. Physiology of Algae. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Bot. 201, the equivalent in allied fields or per- 
mission of instructor. Laboratory fee, $10.00. A study of the physiology and 
comparative biochemistry of the algae. Laboratory techniques and recent ad- 
vances in algal nutrition, photosynthesis, and growth will be reviewed. (Krauss.) 

Bot. 210. Physiology of Algae-Laboratory. (1) 

Second semester. One laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, previous or con- 
current enrollment in Bot. 209, and permission of instructor. Laboratory fee, 
$10.00. Special laboratory techniques involved in the study of algal nutrition. 

(Krauss.) 

44 



Botany 
BoT. 219. Advanced Plant Ecology. (2) 

First semester. (Not offered 1963-1964.) Prerequisite, Bot. 102 or equivalent 
and permission of instructor. Laboratory fee, $10.00. Discussion of current 
developments in ecology, with emphasis on quantitative and radioecological 
techniques and the energy exchanges in ecological systems. Field trips and 
problems will be arranged. (Brown.) 

PLANT MORPHOLOGY, CYTOLOGY, AND TAXONOMY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Bot. in. Plant Anatomy. (3) 

First semester. One lecture and two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, 
Bot. 110 or equivalent. Laboratory fee, $5.00. The origin and development of 
the organs and tissue systems in the vascular plants. (Rappleye.) 

Bot. 113. Plant Geography. (2) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Bot 1 or equivalent. A study of plant distribution 
throughout the world and the factors generally associated with such distribution. 

(Brown.) 

Bot. 115. Structure of Economic Plants. (3) 

Second semester. (Not offered 1964-1965.) One lecture and two laboratory 
periods a week. Laboratory fee, $5.00. A detailed microscopic study of the 
anatomy of the chief fruit and vegetable crops. (Rappleye.) 

Bot. 116. History and Philosophy of Botany. (1) 

Second semester. (Not offered 1964-1965.) Prerequisite, 20 semester hours 
credit in Biological Sciences, including Bot. 1 or equivalent. Discussion of the 
development of ideas and knowledge about plants, leading to a survey of 
contemporary work in botanical science. (Bamford.) 

Bot. 117. General Plant Genetics. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Bot. 1 or equivalent. The basic principles of 
plant genetics are presented; the mechanics of transmission of the hereditary 
factors in relation to the life cycle of seed plants, the genetics of specialized 
organs and tissues, spontaneous and induced mutations of basic and economic 
significance, gene action, genetic maps, the fundamentals of polyploidy, and 
genetics in relation to methods of plant breeding are the topics considered. 

(D. T. Morgan.) 

Bot. 136. Plants and Mankind. (2) 

First semester. A survey of the plants which are utilized by man, the diversity 
of such utilization, and their historic and economic significance. (Rappleye.) 

Bot. 15 is. Teaching Methods in Botany. (2) 

Summer session. Four two-hour laboratory and demonstration periods a week 
for eight weeks. Prerequisite, Bot. 1. or equivalent. Laboratory fee, $5.00. A 
study of the biological principles of the common plants, and demonstrations, 
projects, and visual aids suitable for teaching in primary and secondary 
schools. (Paterson.) 



45 



Botany 

BoT. 153. Field Botany and Taxonomy, (2) 

Summer session. Prerequisite, Bot. 1 or general biology. Laboratory fee, $5.00. 
The identification of trees, shrubs, and herbs, emphasizing the native plants of 
Maryland. Manuals, keys, and other techniques will be used. Numerous short 
field trips will be taken. Each student will make an individual collection. 

(Brown.) 

BoT. 161. Systematic Botany. (2) 

First semester. (Not off'ered 1964-1965.) Two two-hour laboratory periods a 
week. Prerequisite, Bot. 1 1 or equivalent. Laboratory fee, $6.00. An advanced 
study of the principles of systematic botany. Laboratory practice with difficult 
plant families including grasses, sedges, legumes, and composites. Field trips 
arranged. (Brown.) 

For Graduates 

Bot, 211. Cytology, (4) 

First semester. (Not offered 1963-1964.) Two lectures and two laboratory 
periods a week. Prerequisite, introductory genetics. Laboratory fee, $10.00. 
A detailed study of the chromosomes in mitosis and meiosis, and the relation 
of these to current theories of heredity and evolution. (D. T. Morgan.) 

Bot. 212. Plant Morphology. (3) 

Second semester. (Not offered, 1963-1964.) One lecture and two laboratory 
periods a week. Prerequisites, Bot. 11, Bot. Ill, or equivalent. Laboratory fee, 
$5.00. A comparative study of the morphology of the flowering plants, with 
special reference to the phylogeny and development of floral organs. 

(Rappleye.) 

Bot. 215. Plant Cytogenetics. (3) 

First semester. (Not offered, 1964-1965.) Two lectures and one laboratory 
period a week. Prerequisites, introductory genetics. Laboratory fee, $10.00. 
An advanced study of the current status of plant genetics, particularly gene 
mutations and their relation to chromosome changes in corn and other favorable 
genetic materials. (D. T. Morgan.) 

PLANT PATHOLOGY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Bot. 122. Research Methods in Plant Pathology. (2) 

First or second semester. Two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, Bot. 20, 
or equivalent. Laboratory fee, $5.00, Advanced training in the basic research 
techniques and methods of plant pathology. (Klarman.) 

Bot. 123. Diseases of Ornamental Plants. (2) 

Second semester. (Not offered 1964-1965.) Prerequisite, Bot. 20, or equivalent. 
Symptoms, control measures, and other pertinent information concerning the 
diseases which affect important ornamental plants grown in the eastern states. 

(Klarman.) 



46 



Botany 

BoT. 124. Diseases of Tobacco and Agronomic Crops. (2) 

First semester. (Not offered 1963-1964.) Prerequisite, Bot. 20, or equivalent. 
The symptoms and control of the diseases of tobacco, forage crops, and 
cereal grains. (O. D. Morgan.) 

BoT. 125. Diseases of Fruit Crops. (2) 

First semester. (Not offered 1964-1965.) Prerequisite, Bot. 20, or equivalent. 
Symptoms and control of the diseases affecting fruit production in the eastern 
United States. (Weaver.) 

BoT. 126. Diseases of Vegetable Crops. (2) 

Second semester. (Not Offered 1963-1964.) Prerequisite, Bot. 20, or equivalent. 
The recognition and control of diseases affecting the production of important 
vegetable crops grown in the eastern United States. (Kantzes.) 

BoT. 128. Mycology. (4) 

Second semester. (Not offered 1963-1964.) Two lectures and two laboratory 
periods a week. Prerequisite, Bot. 2, or equivalent. Laboratory fee, $6.00. An 
introductory study of the morphology, classification, life histories, and economics 
of the fungi. (Paterson.) 

BoT. 152S. Field Plant Pathology. (1) 

Summer session. Daily lecture for three weeks. Prerequisite, Bot. 20 or equiva- 
lent. Laboratory fee, $5.00. A course for county agents and teachers of voca- 
tional agriculture. Discussion and demonstration of the important diseases in 
Maryland crops. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 

Bot. 221. Plant Virology. (3) 

First semester. (Not offered 1963-1964.) Two lectures and one laboratory 
period a week. Prerequisites, Bot. 20 and Bot. 101, or equivalent. Laboratory 
fee, $10.00. Consideration of the biological, biochemical, and biophysical 
aspects of plant viruses and virus diseases. (Sisler.) 

Bot. 223. Physiology of Fungi. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Organic Chemistry and Bot. 101 or the equiva- 
lent in bacterial or animal physiology. A study of various aspects of fungal 
metabolism, nutrition, biochemical transformations, fungal products and mechan- 
ism of fungicidal action. (Sisler.) 

Bot. 224. Physiology of Fungi Laboratory. (1) 

Second semester. One laboratory period a week. Prereqtiisite, Bot. 223 or 
concurrent registration therein. Laboratory fee, $10.00. Application of equip- 
ment and techniques in the study of fungal physiology. (Sisler.) 

Bot. 226. Plant Disease Control. (3) 

First semester. (Not offered 1964-1965.) Prerequisite, Bot 20, or equivalent. 
An advanced course dealing with the theory and practices of plant disease 
control. (Bell.) 



47 



Business Administration 

BoT. 241. Plant Nematology. (4) 

Second semester. (Not offered 1964-1965.) Two lectures and two laboratory 
periods a week. Prerequisite, Bot. 20 or permission of instructor. Laboratory 
fee, $10.00. The study of plant-parasitic nematodes, their morphology, anatomy, 
taxonomy, genetics, physiology, ecology, hostparasite relations and control. 
Recent advances in this field will be emphasized. (Krusberg.) 

BoT. 301. Special Problems in Botany. (2 or 3) 

First or second semester. Credit according to time scheduled and organization 
of course. Maximum credit toward an advanced degree for the individual 
student at the discretion of the Department. This course may be organized 
as a lecture series on a specialized advanced topic, or may consist partly, or 
entirely, of experimental procedures. It may be taught by visiting lectures, or 
by resident staff members. Problems or topics may be in: 1 — Physiology; 
2 — Ecology; 3 — Pathology; 4 — Mycology; 5 — Nematology; 6 — Cytology; 
7 — Cytogenetics; 8 — Morphology; 9 — Anatomy; or 10 — Taxonomy. (Staff.) 

BoT. 302. Seminar in Botany. (1) 

First and second semester. Prerequisite, permission of the instructor. Discussion 
of special topics and current literature in all phases of botany. (Staff.) 

BoT. 399. Research. (Credit according to work done.) 

A minimum of 6 credit hours is required for the M.S. degree, and an additional 
minimum of 12 hours is required for the Ph.D. degree. Students must be 
qualified to pursue with profit the research to be undertaken. (Staff.) 



BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Professors: Taff, Clemens, Cook, Fisher, Gentry, Nelson, 

Sweeney, Sylvester, and Wright. 

Associate Professors: Ashmen, Dawson, and Spivey. 

The degree of Master of Business Administration is conferred on those 
students who satisfactorily complete the requirements which are set forth 
in the section of this catalog entitled, "Requirements for the Degree of 
Master of Business Administration." 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
B. A. 100. Office Operations and Management. (3) 

Prerequisite, junior standing. Deals with the principles of scientific management 
as they apply to the examination, improvement, installation, and operation 
of the most effective paperwork methods and systems that a given organization 
can use to achieve its objectives. Procedure flow analysis and form design 
for control of paperwork; process, work distribution, and layout charts, dis- 
tribution of authority and responsibility for office activities are among the 
areas considered. (StaflF.) 

48 



Business Administration 
B. A. 101. Electronic Data Processing. (3) 

Prerequisite, junior standing, Math. 1 1 or the equivalent. Laboratory fee, 
$10.00. The electronic digital computer and its use as a tool in processing 
data. The course includes the following areas: (1) organization of data pro- 
cessing systems, (2) environmental aspects of computer systems, (3) funda- 
mentals of programming using a common problem-oriented language, and 
(4) management control problems and potentials inherent in mechanized data 
processing systems. (Staff.) 

B. A. 102. Electronic Data Processing Applications. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 101. Laboratory fee, $10.00. Intensive study of computer 
applications using a problem-oriented language. Introduction of computer 
methods for the solution of business problems. Laboratory exercises in pro- 
gramming and development of computer techniques. (Staff.) 

B. A. 103. Introduction to Systems Analysis. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 102. Laboratory fee, $10.00 (effective September, 1964). 
Math. 15 or the equivalent. The use of the computer in manage- 
ment and the operation of business. The course includes the follow- 
ing areas: (1) The principles of system analysis, (2) recent applications and 
innovations of the systems concept, (3) design and implementation of computer 
systems, including such techniques as mathematical programming, simulation, 
business games, and network analysis, (4) laboratory use of a digital computer 
in the application of these techniques. (Staff.) 

B. A. 110, 111. Intermediate Accounting. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, B.A. 21. A comprehensive study of 
the theory and problems of valuation of assets, application of funds, corporation 
accounts and statements, and the interpretation of accounting statements. 

(Staff.) 

B. A. 112. Records Management. (2) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, junior standing. Laboratory fee, 
$7.50. Specific management methods and techniques that have proved valuable 
in the creation, use, maintenance, protection and disposition of records are 
studied. (Staff.) 

B. A. 118. Governmental Accounting. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 21. The content of this course covers the scope and func- 
tions of governmental accounting. It considers the principles generally ap- 
plicable to all forms and types of governmental bodies and a basic procedure 
adaptable to all governments. (Wright.) 

B. A. 119. Budgeting and Control. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 21. The use of financial data in controlling an enterprise. 
Budgetary formulation, execution and appraisal. The use of accounting in 
managerial decision making. (Staff.) 

B. A. 120. Accounting Systems. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 20. A study of the factors involved in the design and installa- 
tion of accounting systems: the organization, volume and types of transactions, 
charts of accounts, accounting manuals, the reporting system. Offered only 
in Summer School. (Staff.) 

49 



Business Administration 

B. A. 121. Cost Accounting. (4) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 21. A study of the fundamental procedures of cost account- 
ing, including those for job orders, process and standard cost accounting 
systems. (Sweeney.) 

B. A. 122. Auditing Theory and Practice. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, B.A. 111. A study of the principles and problems 
of auditing and application of accounting principles to the preparation of 
audit working papers and reports. (Wright.) 

B. A. 123. Income Tax Accounting. (4) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 21. A study of the important provisions of the Federal Tax 
Law, using illustrative examples, selected questions and problems, and the 
preparation of returns. (Staff.) 

B. A. 124. Advanced Accounting. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 111. Advanced Accounting theory applied to specialized 
problems in partnerships, ventures, consignments, installment sales, insurance, 
statement of affairs, receiver's accounts, realization and liquidation reports, and 
application of mathematics to accounting problems. Offered only in Summer 
School. (Staff.) 

B. A. 125. C.P.A. Problems. (4) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, B.A. Ill, or consent of instructor. A study of 
the nature, form and content of C.P.A. examinations by means of the prepara- 
tion of solutions to, and an analysis of, a large sample of C.P.A. problems 
covering the various accounting fields. (Staff.) 

B. A, 126. Advanced Accounting. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. HI. Home office and branch accounting, parent and sub- 
sidiary accounting, and foreign exchange. (Staff.) 

B. A. 127. Advanced Auditing Theory and Practice. . (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 122. Advanced auditing theory and practice and report 
writing. (Staff.) 

B. A. 128. Advanced Cost Accounting. (2) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 121. A continuation of basic cost accounting with special 
emphasis on process costs, standard costs, joint costs and by-product costs. 

(Sweeney.) 

B. A. 130. Business Statistics I. (3) 

Prerequisite, junior standing. Required for graduation. Laboratory fee, $6.00 
(effective September, 1964). An introductory course. Emphasis is placed upon 
statistical inference. Topics covered include statistical observation, frequency 
distributions, averages, measures of variability, elementary probability, sampling 
distributions, problems of estimation, simple tests of hypothesis, index numbers, 
times series, graphical and tabular presentation. Selected applications of the 
techniques are drawn from economics, industrial management, marketing and 
accounting. (Nelson, Anderson.) 

B. A. 131. Business Statistics II. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, B.A. 130. Laboratory fee, $6.00 (effective Sep- 
tember, 1964). Review of elementary probability. Population distributions. 
Sampling distributions; binomial, Poisson, normal, "t", chi-square and F. Esti- 

50 



Business Administration 

mates and tests of hypotheses concerning the mean, variance and other param- 
eters. Introduction to analysis of variance, linear regression, and correlation. 

(Nelson, Anderson.) 

B. A. 132. Sample Surveys in Business and Economics. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 130. Laboratory fee, $6.00. (effective September, 1964). A 
general course in scientific sample survey techniques. Review of elementary 
probability, characteristics of good estimators, errors of observation, simple 
random sampling, stratified random sampling, cluster sampling, comparison of 
various sample designs, cost functions, examples of actual survey practices. 

(Nelson.) 
B. a. 134. Statistical Quality Control. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, B.A. 130. Laboratory fee, $6.00. (effective 
September, 1964). Statistical fundamentals; theory, construction and use of 
control charts; acceptance sampling by attributes and variables; work sampling 
and other industrial applications of statistics. (Staff.) 

B. A. 135. Statistical Analysis and Forecasting. (3) 

Alternates with B.A. 132. Prerequisite, B.A. 133. Laboratory fee, $6.00. 
(effective September, 1964). Classical time series analysis, trend, periodic and 
irregular components, seasonal adjustment, growth curves, recent developments 
in time series analysis, techniques of forecasting and quantities as labor force, 
capital formation, demand and sales. (Anderson.) 

B. A. 140. Business Finance. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 21. This course deals with principles and practices involved 
in the organization, financing, and rehabilitation of business enterprises; the 
various types of securities and their use in raising funds, apportioning income, 
risk, and control; intercorporate relations; and new developments. Emphasis 
on solution of problems of financial policy faced by management. (Fisher.) 

B. A. 141. Security Analysis. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 140. A study of the principles and methods used in the 
analysis, selection, and management of investments; investment programs, 
sources of investment information, security price movements, government, 
real estate, public utility, railroad, and industrial securities. (Calhoun.) 

B. A. 143. Credit Management. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 140. A study of the nature of credit and the principles 
applicable to its extension and redemption for mercantile and consumer pur- 
poses; sources of credit information and analysis of credit reports; the organi- 
zation and management of a credit department for effective control. Recent 
developments and effective legal remedies available. (Calhoun.) 

B. A. 148. Advanced Financial Management. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 140. An advanced course in finance. Emphasis is placed 
upon the techniques employed by executives in their application of financial 
management practice to selected problems and cases. Critical classroom 
analysis is brought to bear upon actual methods and techniques used by 
business enterprises. (Fisher.) 

B. A. 149. Marketing Principles and Organization. (3) 

Prerequisite, Econ. 32 or 37. This is an introductory course in the field of 
marketing. Its purpose is to give a general understanding and appreciation of 

57 



Business Administration 

the forces operating, institutions employed, and methods followed in marketing 
agricultural products, natural products, services, and manufactured goods. 

(Staff.) 

B. A. 150. Marketing Management. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 149. A study of the work of the marketing division in a 
going organization. The work of developing organizations and procedures for 
the control of marketing activities are surveyed. The emphasis throughout the 
course is placed on the determination of policies, methods, and practices for 
the effective marketing of various forms of manufactured products. (Staff.) 

B. A. 151. Advertising. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 149. A study of the role of advertising in the American 
economy; the impact of advertising on our economic and social life, the 
methods and techniques currently applied by advertising practitioners, the role 
of the newspaper, magazine, and other media in the development of an adver- 
tising campaign, modern research methods to improve the effectiveness of ad- 
vertising, and the organization of the advertising business. (Ashmen 

B. A. 153. Purchasing Management. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, B.A. 149. Determining the proper sources, 
quality and quantity of supplies, and methods of testing quality; price policies, 
price forcasting, forward buying, bidding and negotiation; budgets and stand- 
ards of achievement. Attention is given to government purchasing and methods 
and procedures used in their procurement. (Staff.) 

B. A. 154. Retail Management. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, B.A. 20 and B.A. 149. Retail store organization, 
location, layout and store policy; pricing policies, price lines, brands, credit 
policies, records as a guide to buying; purchasing methods; supervision of sell- 
ing; training and supervision of retail sales force; and administrative problems. 

(Cook.) 

B. A. 156. Marketing Research Methods. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, B.A. 130 and B.A. 149. This course is intended 
to develop skill in the use of scientific methods in the acquisition, analysis and 
interpretation of marketing data. It covers the specialized fields of marketing 
research, the planning of survey projects, sample design, tabulation procedure 
and report preparation. (Cook.) 

B. A. 157. International Marketing. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 149. Functions of various exporting agencies; documents 
and procedures used in exporting and importing transactions. Methods of pro- 
curing goods in foreign countries; financing of import shipments; clearing 
through the customs districts; and distribution of goods in the United States. 

(Heye.) 

B. A. 158. Advertising Management. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, B.A. 151. This course is concerned with the 
way in which business firms use advertising as a part of their marketing pro- 
gram. The case study methods is used to present advertising problems taken 
from actual business practice. Cases studied illustrate problems in demand 
stimulation, media selection, advertising research, etc. (Staff.) 

52 



Business Administration 
B. A. 160. Personnel Management I. (3) 

This course deals with the problems of directing and supervising employees, 
under modern industrial conditions. Two phases of personnel administration 
are stressed, the application of scientific management and the importance of 
human relations in this field. (Staff.) 

B. A. 161. Personnel Management II. (3) 

Prerequisite or Corequisite. B.A. 160. Job evaluation and merit rating and 
other personnel management techniques generally employed in business. 

(Sylvester.) 

B. A. 163. Industrial Relations. (3) 

A study of the development and methods of organized groups in industry 
with reference to the settlement of labor disputes. An economic and legal 
analysis of labor union and employer association activities, arbitration, media- 
tion, and conciliation; collective bargaining, trade agreements, strikes, boycotts, 
lockouts, company unions, employee representation, and injunctions. 

(Sylvester.) 

B. A. 164. Labor Legislation and Court Decisions. (3) 

Case method analysis of the modern law of industrial relations. Cases include 
the decisions of administrative agencies, courts and arbitration tribunals. 

(Sylvester.) 

B. A. 165. Advanced Production Management. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 169. A study of typical problems encountered by the 
factory manager. The objective is to develop the ability to analyze and solve 
problems in management control of production and in the formulation of 
production policies. Among the topics covered are plant location, production 
planning and control, methods analysis and time study. (StaflF.) 

B. A. 166. Business Communications. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, junior standing. A systematic study 
of the principles of effective written communications in business. The funda- 
mental aim is to develop the ability to write clear, correct, concise, and presua- 
sive business letters and reports. (Patrick.) 

B. A. 167. Operations Research I. (3) 

The philosophy, methods, and objectives of operations research. Basic methods 
are examined and their application to functional areas of business are covered. 

(Staff.) 

B. A. 168. Management and Organization Theory. (3) 

The historical development of management and organization theory, nature of 
the management process and functions and its future development. The role 
of the manager as an organizer and director, the communication process, 
goals and responsibilities. (Spivey.) 

B. A. 169. Production Management. (3) 

Studies the operation of a manufacturing enterprise, concentrating on the 
economies of production. Introduces a grounding in analytical method early 
so that the broad problem areas of system design, operation, and control can 
be based upon the analytical method. (Staff.) 

53 



Business Administration 

B. A. 170. Principles of Transportation. (3) 

Prerequisite, Econ. 32 or 37. A general course covering the five fields of 
transportation, their development, service and regulation. (Staff.) 

B. A. 171. Traffic and Physical Distribution Management. (3) 
Prerequisite, junior standing. Examines the management aspects of the busi- 
ness firm in moving their raw materials and finished goods through traffic, 
warehousing, industrial packaging, material handling, and inventory. A sys- 
tematic examination of the trade-off possibilities and management alternatives 
to minimize cost of product flow and maximizing customer service is covered. 

(Staff.) 

B. A. 172. Motor Transportation. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, B.A. 170. The development and scope of the 
motor carrier industry, different types of carriers, economics of motor trans- 
portation, services available, federal regulation, highway users, highway 
barriers. (Taff.) 

B. A. 173. Water Transportation. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 170. Water carriers of all types, development and types of 
services, trade routes, inland waterways, company organization, the American 
Merchant Marine as a factor in national activity. (Heye.) 

B. A. 174. Commercial Air Transportation. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 170. The air transportation system of the United States; 
airways, airports, airlines. Federal regulation of air transportation. Problems 
and services of commercial air transportation; economics, equipment, operations, 
financing, selling of passenger and cargo services. Air mail development and 
services. (Staff.) 

B. A. 175. Advanced Transportation Problems. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 170. A critical examination of current government trans- 
portation policy and proposed solutions. Urban and intercity managerial trans- 
port problems are also considered. (Staff.) 

B. A. 176. Urban Transport and Urban Development. (3) 

An analysis of the role of urban transportation in present 'and future urban 
development. The interaction of transport pricing and service, urban plan- 
ning, institutional restraints, and public land uses, is studied. (Staff.) 

B. A. 180. Business Law. (3) 

First and second semesters. Legal aspects of business relationships, contracts, 
negotiable instruments, agency, partnerships, corporations, real and personal 
property, and sales. (Dawson, Tiemey.) 

B. A. 181. Business Law. (3) 

Second semesters. Legal aspects of business relationships, contracts, negotiable 
instruments, agency partnerships, corporations, real and personal property, and 
sales. (Dawson, Tierney.) 

B. A. 182. Advanced Business Law. (3) 

Designed primarily for C.P.A. candidates. Legal aspects of wills, insurance, 
torts and bankruptcy. Offered only in Summer School. (Dawson.) 

54 



Business Administration 
B. A. 184. Public Utilities. (3) 

Prerequisites, Econ. 32 or 37. Using the regulated industries as specific ex- 
amples attention is focused on broad and general problems in such diverse 
fields as constitutional law, administrative law, public administration, govern- 
ment control of business, advanced economic theory, accounting, valuation and 
depreciation, taxation, finance, engineering and management. (Clemens.) 

B. A. 189. Business and Government. (3) 

Prerequisites, Econ. 32 or 37. \ study of the role of government in modern 
economic life. Social control of business as a remedy for the abuses of business 
enterprise arising from the decline of competition. Criteria of and limitations 
on government regulation of private enterprise. (Clemens.) 

B. A. 190. Life Insuranc; 

First semester. A general survey of life insurance. Its institutional development, 
selection of risks, mathematical calculations, contract provision, kinds of 
policies, their functional uses, industrial and group contracts and government 
supervision. (Clickner.) 

B. A. 191. Property Insurance. (3) 

Second semester. A study of the insurance coverages written to protect in- 
dividuals and business; fire, extended coverage, business interruption, auto- 
mobile, liability, fidelity, surety, inland marine and ocean marine. Hazards, 
rate-making, legal principles, standard forms and business practices are 
discussed. (Clickner.) 

B. A. 195. Real Estate Principles. (3) 

First semester. This course covers the nature and uses of real estate, real 
estate as a business, basic legal principles, construction problems and home 
ownership, city planning, and control ownership of real estate. (Clickner.) 

B. A. 196. Real Estate Finance. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, B.A. 195. This course includes consideration 
of the factors influencing real estate values, methods and techniques in the 
general appraisal of real estate by brokers and professional appraisers, and 
general problems in real estate financing. (Clickner.) 

B. A. 198. Structure and Operations of Industries. (3) 

Prerequisite, senior standing. The impact of technology and production policies 
on the economic, financial, marketing, and locational policies of representative 
industries. A background course for students in industrial and financial manage- 
ment, business economics, general business, and related areas. (Clemens.) 

B. A. 199. Business Policies. (3) 

Prerequisite, senior standing. A case study course in which the aim is to have 
the student apply both what he has learned of general management principles 
and their specialized functional applications to the overall management function 
in the enterprise. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 

B. A. 210. Advanced Accounting Theory. (3) 

(Fisher.) 

55 



Business Administration 

B. A. 220. Managerial Accounting. (3) 

(Wright.) 
B. A. 221, 222. Seminar in Accounting. (1-6) 

(Wright.) 

B. A. 226. Accounting Systems. (3) 

(Sweeney.) 
B. A. 228. Research in Accounting. (1-6) 

B. A. 229. Problems of Control and Organization. (1-6) 

(Staff.) 
B. A. 230. Advanced Business Statistics. (3) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 130 or consent of instructor. Laboratory fee, $6.00 (effec- 
tive September, 1964). Bayesian decision processes and other statistical methods 
applicable to the operations of the business firm and the analysis of the econ- 
omy. Methodological topics include a consideration of utility, expected values, 
estimation of probabilities, opportunity loss and cost of uncertainty, sampling 
sequential decision procedures and selected topics from classical statistics. 
Applications are made to the problems of inventory control, production, invest- 
ment, and other business functions. (Nelson.) 

B. A. 231. Multivariate Analysis. (3) 

Prerequisites, B.A. 131 and Math. 15 or equivalent. Laboratory fee, $6.00 
(effective September, 1964). Basic principles underlying the construction of 
cross-sectional and longitudinal multivariate models appropriate for the solution 
of business and economic problems. 

B. A. 234. Managerial Analysis. I. (3) 

Required of M.B.A. candidates. The utilization of the scientific method in 
decision-making. Various methodologies are utilized in order to evaluate and 
interpret findings for management action. 

B. A. 235. Managerial Analysis. II (3) 

Designed to enable the student to go into greater depth in the use of analytical 
techniques. Where feasible, data processing is applied and simulated experi- 
ences are provided. The aim is to encourage the development of the perceptive 
approach to complex business situations. 

B. A. 237. Management Simulation I. (3) 

Application of management principles to the solution of complex business 
problems. This is accomplished in conjunction with the use of computer 
facilities at the Computer Science Center on the campus. Laboratory fee, $6.00 
(effective September, 1964). 

B. A. 240. Seminar in Financial Management. (1-6) 

Prerequisite, B.A. 140. (Fisher.) 

B. A. 242. Financial Administration. (3) 

Required of M.B.A. candidates. The role of the financial manager in executive 
decision making. Financial planning, analysis, and control in such areas as the 
allocation of financial resources within the firm, forecasting and budgeting, 
cost and profit controls, capital budgeting and the bases for investment de- 
cisions, alternative sources of short-term and long-term financing and financial 
problems of growth. (Fisher, Wright.) 

B. A. 245. Research in Finance. (1-6) 
56 



Business Administration 
B. A. 249. Problems in the Financial Administration. (1-6) 

(Fisher.) 

B. A. 250. Problems in Sales Management. (1-6) 

(Cook.) 
B. A. 251. Problems in Advertising. (1-6) 

(Gentry.) 

B. A. 252. Problems in Retail Management. (1-6) 

(Cook.) 
B. A. 257. Seminar in Marketing Management. (3) 

(Cook, Gentry.) 

B. A. 258. Research Problems in Marketing. (1-6) 

(Cook, Gentry.) 

B. A. 259. Business Logistics. (3) 

Involves the optimization of human and material resources by their proper 
application at the right time and place to support the business enterprise. 
Consideration is given to analysis of material and manpower requirements, 
production planning and scheduling, acquisition, inventory control, and dis- 
tribution. The role of advanced planning and forecasting is considered in 
minimizing costs and securing the best combination of resources. Impact of 
technology upon the utilization of resources is considered. (Staff.) 

B. A. 262. Seminar in Contemporary Trends in 
Labor Relations. (1-6) 

(Sylvester.) 

B. A. 264. Behavioral Factors in Management. (3) 

Required of M.B.A. candidates. A critical analysis of the impact of the be- 
havioral sciences on traditional concepts of management as process and as 
organization. Included within the area of analysis are such subjects as human 
motivation, human relations, morale, status, role, organization, communication, 
bureaucracy, the executive role, leadership, and training. (Staff.) 

B, A. 265. Development and Trends in Production 
Management. (3) 

(Spivey.) 
B. A. 266. Research in Personnel Management (1-6) 

(Sylvester.) 

B. A. 267. Research in Industrial Relations. (1-6) 

(Sylvester.) 

B. A. 269. Problems in Employer-Employee Relationships. (1-6) 

(Sylvester.) 
B. A. 270. Research in Transportation. (1-6) 

(Taff.) 

B. A. 271. Theory of Organization. (3) 

(Spivey.) 

B. A. 272. Seminar in Management of Physical Distribution. (3) 

(TafT.) 

B. A. 275. Special Studies in Transportation. (3) 

(Taff.) 

57 



Chemical Engineering 

B. A. 277. Seminar in Transportation. (3) 

(Taff.) 

B. A. 280. Seminar in Business and Government 
Relationships. (3) 

(Staff.) 

B. A, 281. Private Enterprise and Public Policy. (3) 

Examines the executive's social and ethical responsibilities to his employees, 
customers, and to the general public. Consideration is given to the conflicts 
occasioned by competitive relationships in the private sector of business and 
the effect of institutional restraints. The trends in public policy and their fu- 
ture effect upon management are examined. For comparative purposes, several 
examples of planned societies are considered. (Staff.) 

B. A. 282. Product, Production and Pricing Policy 
Administration. (3) 

Required of M.B.A. candidates. The application of economic theory to the 
business enterprise in respect to the determination of policy and the handling 
of management problems with particular reference to the firm producing a 
complex line of products. Nature of competition. Pricing policy. Interrelation- 
ship of production and marketing problems. Basic types of cost. Control 
systems. Theories of depreciation and investment and the impact of each upon 
costs. (Clemens.) 

B. A. 284. Seminar in Public Utilities. (1-6) 

B. A. 290. Seminar in Insurance. (3) 

B. A. 295. Seminar in Real Estate. (3) 

B. A. 399. Thesis. (1-6) 

CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 



(Clemens.) 

(Clickner.) 

(Clickner.) 

(Staff.) 



Professors: Beckmann, Bonney, Duffey and Schroeder. 
Associate Professors: Gomezplata, Marchello, and Silverman. 
Assistant Professors: Glomb and Smith. 
Visiting Assistant Professor: Sherwood. 

The Department directs the programs of graduate students who plan to 
qualify for the degree of Master of Science or Doctor of Philosophy in 
the Department of Chemical Engineering. Courses in the subject area of 
nuclear engineering are listed with chemical engineering courses below. 

The basic requirements for the degrees of Master of Science and Doctor 
of Philosophy are set forth on pages 7 and 13 of this catalog. Supple- 

58 



Chemical Engineering 

mental regulations for the guidance of candidates for these degrees in the 
Department of Chemical Engineering are available in the department 
office. 

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates 
Ch. E. 109. Chemical Process Thermodynamics. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 50. Estimation of thermodynamic propertie; 
of pure substances and mixtures. Chemical and phase equilibria in ideal anc 
non-ideal systems. Thermodynamic analysis of processes, equilibrium stag< 
operations, thermodynamics of chemically reacting systems. 

(Bonney, Marchello.] 

Ch. E. 116. Applied Mathematics in Chemical Engineering. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Math. 21 and Ch. E. 127. Mathematical tech 
nique applied to the analysis and solution of Chemical Engineering problems 
Use of differentiation, integration, differential equations, partial differentia 
equations and integral transforms. Application of infinite series, numerical anc 
statistical methods. (Gomezplata.] 

Ch. E. 127, 129, 131. Transfer and Transport Processes 

I, II, III. (4, 3, 3) 

First, second, and first semesters, respectively. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 50. A thre( 
semester sequence of courses convering the theory and applications of molecula 
and turbulent transport phenomena. Principles of fluid mechanics, mass transfe 
and heat transfer. Dimensional analysis, analogy between heat, mass am 
momentum transfer, Newtonian and non-Newtonian flow, convective heat anc 
mass transfer. Steady and unsteady state diffusion and conduction, simultaneou: 
heat and mass transfer, interphase transfer, boundary layer theory. Thi 
equilibrium stage concept and its application to absorption, extraction, anc 
distillation. Analysis of multiple stage processes. Principles of radiant hea 
transfer, evaporation, filtration, crystallization, drying, condensation, boiling 
humidification, ion exchange, and phase separations. (Glomb, Smith.] 

Ch. E. 133, 134. Chemical Engineering Seminar. (1, 1) 

Prerequisite, senior standing. Oral and written reports on recent development: 
in Chemical Engineering and the process industries. Fall and Spring Semesters 

(Staff.; 

Ch. E. 137. Chemical Engineering Laboratory. (3) 

First or second semester. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 129. Laboratory fee, $10.00 
Application of Chemical Engineering process and unit operation principles ii 
small scale semi-commercial equipment. Data from experimental observation 
are used to evaluate performance and efficiency of operations. Emphasis i 
placed on correct presentation of results in report form. (Bonney/ 

Ch. E. 140. Introduction to Nuclear Technology. (2) 

First semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Math. 21 and Phys. 21 
Engineering problems of the different parts of the nuclear energy complex 
including basic theory, nuclear reactor design, and isotopic and chemical separa 
tions are discussed. The emphasis is on the nuclear fission reactor. This is ai 
orientation course for those only generally interested in applied atomic energy 

(Duffey. 

5i 



Chemical Engineering 

Ch. E. 142. Environmental Consideration of Nuclear 
Engineering. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, permission of instructor. 
Engineering analysis of protection of the public and the environment from the 
hazards of nuclear energy operations. Emphasis is on the handling and dis- 
posal of gaseous, liquid and solid radioactive wastes. Meteorological, hydro- 
logical and geological phases are included. Typical problems encountered 
from mining of ores through nuclear reactor operations and chemical separa- 
tions are considered. Legislative and economic factors, site selection, plant 
design and operation as related to the environment are discussed. (Silverman.) 

Ch. E. 145. Chemical Engineering Kinetics. (2) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Chem. 187. Fundamentals of chemical reaction 
kinetics and their application to the design and operation of chemical reactors. 
Reaction rate theory, homogeneous reactions in batch and flow systems, adsorp- 
tion, heterogeneous reactions and catalysis, electrochemical reactions. Catalytic 
reactor design. (Beckmann.) 

Ch. E. 147. Process Engineering and Design. (3) 

Second or first semester. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 129. Utilization of Chemical 
Engineering principles for the design of process equipment. The solution of 
typical problems encountered in the design of chemical plants. Comprehensive 
reports are required. (Schroeder.) 

Ch. E. 148. Nuclear Technology Laboratory. (2 to 4) 

One or two lectures, and one or two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
Chem. 3, Phys. 21, Math. 21, Ch. E. 140, or equivalents, and permission of 
instructor. Laboratory fee, $8.00 per semester. Laboratory operations of equip- 
ment demonstrating techniques of detecting and making measurements of nuclear 
or high energy radiation. Radiation safety experiments are included. Both a sub- 
critical reactor and the 10-KW swimming pool critical reactor are used oc- 
casionally as a source of radiation. (Silverman.) 

Ch. E. 149. Chemical Engineering Economics. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 129. Principles of engineering economy 
applied to chemical processes. Optimizing methods in the design and operation 
of industrial processes. Determination of investment and operating costs for 
chemical plants. (Schroeder.) 

Ch. E. 150. Chemical Process Development. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 129. Chemical process industries studied 
from the standpoint of technology, raw materials, products and processing 
equipment. Operations of the major chemical processes and industries combined 
with quantitative analysis of process requirements and yields. (Schroeder.) 

Ch. E. 152. Advanced Chemical Engineering Analysis. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 116. Application of digital and analog 
computers to chemical engineering problems. Numerical methods, program- 
ming, differential equations, curve fitting, amplifiers and analog circuits. 

(Marchello.) 



60 



Chemical Engineering 

Ch. E. 154. Application of Numerical and Statistical 
Analysis. (2) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 116. Use of probability and statistics in 
chemical engineering. Probability, normal distribution and measure of varia- 
bility. The chi square, and the t-test. Correlation and regression analysis. 
Introduction to analysis of variance and sequential analysis. (Gomezplata.) 

Ch. E. 155. Chemical Process Laboratory. (2) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 129, 145. Laboratory fee, $10.00. Experi- 
mental study of the fundamentals of various chemical processes through the 
operation of laboratory and small semi-commercial scale equipment. Reaction 
kinetics, fluid mechanics, heat and mass transfer. (Staff.) 

Ch. E. 157. Chemical Engineering Systems Analysis and 
Dynamics. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 116. Principles of dynamic response 
applied to process systems. Goals and modes of control; LaPlace transforma- 
tions; representation, analysis and synthesis of simple control systems; closed 
loop response; dynamic testing; role of modern computing machinery in process 
control. (Glomb.) 

Ch. E. 159. Dynamics and Control Laboratory. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 116, 157 concurrently. Laboratory fee, 
$10.00. Methods of process control. Dynamics and response of process systems, 
modes of control, synthesis of simple control schemes. Use of experimental 
and mathematical models of control systems. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Ch. E. 201. Graduate Seminar, (/a) 

First and second semesters. Discussion of current advances and research in 
chemical engineering. Presented by graduate students and staff. (Staff.) 

Ch. E. 203. Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics. (3) 

First semester. Advanced application of the general thermodynamic methods 
of chemical engineering problems. First and second law consequences; estima- 
tion and correlation of thermodynamic properties; phase and chemical reaction 
equilibria. (Marchello, Sherwood.) 

Ch. E. 205. Transport Phenomena. (3) 

First semester. Heat, mass and momentum transfer theory from the viewpoint 
of the basic transport equations. Steady and unsteady state; laminar and tur- 
bulent flow; boundary layer theory, mechanics of turbulent transport; with 
specific application to complex chemical engineering situations. (Glomb.) 

Ch. E. 207. Transfer Operations. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 205. Applications of heat, mass and 
momentum transfer theory to chemical engineering problems. Transfer co- 
efficients; heat, mass and momentum analogies; two-phase flow; boiling and 
condensation; radiation heat transfer. (Glomb.) 



67 



Chemical Engineering 

Ch. E. 209. Complex Equilibrium Stage Processes. (3) 

Second semester. The theory and application of complex equilibrium stages. 
Binary and multicomponent distillation; multicomponent absorption; extraction; 
liquefaction. (Marchello.) 

Ch. E. 211. Advanced Chemical Reaction Kinetics. (3) 

Second semester. The theory and application of chemical reaction kinetics to 
reactor design. Reaction rate theory; homogeneous batch and flow reactors; 
fundamentals of catalysis; design of heterogeneous flow reactors. 

(Beckmann, Smith.) 

Ch. E. 223. Process Engineering and Design. (3) 

First and second semesters. Coordination of the fundamental principles of 
chemical engineering and economics to advanced process engineering and de- 
sign. Optimization of investment and operating costs. Solution of typical 
problems encountered in the design of chemical engineering plants. (Staff.) 

Ch. E. 235. Chemical Process Dynamics. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites: Differential equations or consent of instructor. 
Analysis of open and closed control loops and their elements; dynamic re- 
sponse of processes; choice of variables and linkages; dynamic testing and 
synthesis; noise and drift; chemical process systems analysis; strategies for 
optimum operation. (Smith, Marchello.) 

Ch. E. 247. Special Problems in Chemical Engineering. 

First and second semesters. Special study and/or investigation in chemical 
engineering under the direction of an assigned faculty advisor. Since content 
changes, re-registration is permissible. (Staff.) 

Ch. E. 253. Advanced Topics in Thermodynamics. (3) 

Second semester. Offered in alternate years. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 203. 

Ch. E. 255. Advanced Topics in Chemical Reaction Systems. (3) 

First semester. Offered in alternate years. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 211. 

Ch. E. 257. Advanced Topics in Transfer Theory. (3) 

First semester. Offered in alternate years. Prerequisite, Ch. E. 207. Offered 
1963-64. (Gomezplata.) 

Ch. E. 259. Advanced Topics in Separation Processes. (3) 

Second semester. Offered in alternate years. Offered 1963-64. (Sherwood.) 

Ch. E. 301. Seminar in Nuclear Engineering. (1) 

First and second semester, one meeting a week. Survey of nuclear engineering 
literature, and oral presentation of prepared reports. Since the content of this 
course is changing, a student may receive a number of credits by re-registration. 

(Duffey, Silverman.) 

Ch. E. 302, 303. Nuclear Reactor Engineering. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, permission of 
instructor. The engineering problems of the design, construction and operation 
of typical nuclear reactors, including general design, nuclear reactor theory, 
materials of construction, heat transfer, and control, etc. Emphasis is toward 
commercial nuclear reactors. (Duffey.) 

62 



Chemical Engineering 
Ch. E. 305. Sub-Critical Nuclear Reactor Laboratory. (3) 

One lecture, two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, Ch. E. 148, 302, 
303 or equivalents and permission of instructor. Laboratory fee, $8.00 per 
semester. E.xperimental work with the sub-critical nuclear reactor. The ap- 
propriate radiation detection equivalent is used. Experiments, such as multi- 
plication factors, neutron flux distribution and neutron activation are carried 
out. (Duffey.) 

Ch. E. 308, 309. Nuclear Reactor Laboratory. (4, 4) 

Two lectures and two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, permission of 
instructor, Ch. E. 148, 302, 303. 305, or equivalent. Laboratory fee, $10.00 per 
semester. Experiments demonstrating the techniques of using a critical nuclear 
reactor for research and development work as well as for industrial operations 
are performed. The University of Maryland 10-KW swimming pool reactor 
is employed. Experiments on reactor startup and operation, shielding, control, 
neutron flux distributions, neutron and gamma spectrum, cross section measure- 
ments are included. Experiments will include practice with a nuclear reactor 
simulator. (Duffey.) 

Ch. E. 311, 312. Nuclear Separation Engineering. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, permission of 
instructor. Application of chemical engineering to the chemical and isotopic 
separations necessary for nuclear reactor operation. These separations include 
(1) processing of uranium, thorium, and other ores; (2) chemical separation 
of Plutonium, uranium, fission products and other elements from materials 
irradiated in nuclear reactors; (3) treatment of radioactive wastes; (4) isotopic 
separation of U235; and (5) isotopic separation of heavy water and other 
desired materials. Ch. E. 311 concerns primarily chemical separations, while 
Ch. E. 312 concerns mostly isotopic separations of fuel cycles. Ch. E. 311 is 
not necessarily a prerequisite for Ch. E. 312. (Silverman.) 

Ch. E. 313. Selected Topics in Nuclear Engineering. (2) 

Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, permission of instructor. Topics of current 
interest and recent advances in the nuclear engineering field. Because of the 
rapid advances in the field, information on special topics of much practical im- 
portance is continually becoming available. Such information will be presented 
in this course. Since the content changes, re-registration may be permitted. 

(Duffey, Silverman.) 

Ch. E. 314. Special Problems in Nuclear Engineering. 

Criedit hours to be arranged. Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Laboratory 
fee, $10.00 per semester. Research or special study. This is for individual 
projects on a graduate level. (Duffey, Silverman.) 

Ch. E. 315, 316. Non-Power Uses of Nuclear or High Energy 
Radiation. (2, 2) 

Second semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, permission of instructor. 
An engineering survey of the current applications and those under development. 
Included are such uses of radiation as synthesizing chemicals, preserving foods, 
control of industrial processes. Design of irradiation installations, e.g., cobalt 
60 gamma ray sources, electroneuclear machine arrangements, and specially 
built nuclear reactors are considered. (Silverman.) 

63 



Chemical Engineering 

Ch. E. 317. Radiation Effects Laboratory. (2 to 4) 

Prerequisite, permission of department head. Experiments on the effect of 
massive doses of radiation on the properties of matter for purposes other 
than those pointed toward nuclear power. Radiation processsing, radiation- 
induced chemical reactions, and conversion of radiation energy; isotope power 
sources. (Silverman.) 

Ch. |E. 320, 321. Advanced Nuclear Reactor Theory. (2, 2) 

rirst and second semesters. Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Ch. E. 302, 
303, year of advanced calculus, and permission of instructor. The theory of 
the calculation of critical masses, neutron flux distribution, neutron energy 
spectrum, kinetics of reactor behavior and gamma ray attenuation are presented. 
Miltigroup treatment of reflected reactors, solution of the transport equations, 
perturbation theory, and other advanced calculation techniques are included. 

(Duffey.) 

Ch. E. 399. Research in Chemical Engineering. Research in 
Nuclear Engineering. 

Credit hours to be arranged. Laboratory fee, $8.00 per semester (Research in 
Chemical Engineering). Laboratory fee, $10.00 per semester (Research in 
Nuclear Engineering). The investigation of special problems and the prepara- 
tion of a thesis in partial fulfillment of the requirements of an advanced de- 
gree. (Staff.) 



CHEMICAL PHYSICS 

This program is open to graduate students in the Departments of Chemistry 
or Physics and Astronomy and offers a course of study leading to the 
degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. The following 
courses must be included in the major: Phys. 212 (4 credits); Chem. 
323 (3) or Phys. 210 (3); Chem. 307 (3) or Phys. 208 (3); Phys. 213 
(4) or Chem. 321 (3). Major electives may be from the following: 
Chem. 299 (3); Chem. 313 (3); Phys. 126 (3); Phys. 216 (2); Phys. 
217 (2); Math. 110 (4); Math. Ill (4); Math. 114 (3). Courses to 
satisfy the minor may be chosen from Chemistry, Physics or Mathematics. 
Students with a concentration in chemistry must take one physics course 
at the 200 level in addition to Phys. 212 and students with a concentra- 
tion in physics must take a chemistry course at the 200 level in addition 
to Chem. 187, 189. Research problems in Chemical Physics may be super- 
vised by the faculty in the Department of Chemistry, the Department of 
Physics and Astronomy or the Institute for Molecular Physics. The pro- 
gram will be supervised by a committee from the above units. 



64 



Chemistry 



CHEMISTRY 

Professors: White, Lippincott, Mason*, Pratt, Reeve, Rollinson, 

SCHAMP,* SVIRBELY, VaNDERSLICE, VeITCH, AND WoODS. 

Research Professor: Bailey. 

Associate Professors: Jaquith, Pickard, Purdy, and Stuntz. 

Assistant Professors: Atkinson, Benesch,* Boyd, Gordon, Grim. 

Henery-Logan, Kasler, Lakshmanan, Petrakis, Stewart, and 

Weissman*. 

Departmental regulations have been assembled for the guidance of candi- 
dates for graduate degrees. Copies of these regulations are available from 
the Department of Chemistry. 

Laboratory fees in Chemistry are $12.00 per laboratory course per 
semester, except in Chemistry 270, for which the fee is $20.00. 

ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Chem. 123. Advanced Quantitative Analysis. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods per week. 
Prerequisite, Chem. 187. An intensive study of the theory and techniques of 
inorganic quantitative analysis, including volumetric, gravimetric, electronmetric 
and colorimetric methods. Required of all students majoring in chemistry. 

(Purdy.) 

Chem. 125. Instrumental Analysis. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and six hours of laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisite, Chem. 189, 190 or concurrent registration therein. A study of the 
application of physico-chemical methods to analytical chemistry. Techniques 
such as polarography, potentiometry, conductivity and spectrophotometry will 
be included. (Purdy.) 

Chem. 166, 167. Food Analysis. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. One lecture and two three-hour laboratory periods 
per week. Prerequisite, Chem. 33. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Chem. 206, 208. Spectrographic Analysis. (1, 1) 

One three-hour laboratory a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 188, 190, and consent 
of the instructor. Registration limited. (White.) 



* Members of the Institute for Molecular Physics. 

65 



Chemistry 

Chem. 221, 223. Chemical Microscopy. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. One lecture and one three-hour laboratory period 
a week. Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Registration limited. A study of the 
construction and optics of the microscope and its applications in chemistry, with 
particular emphasis on the optical properties of crystals. (Stuntz.) 

Chem. 225. Advanced Instrumental Analysis. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and six hours of laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisites, Chem. 189, 190 or concurrent registration therein. An intensive study 
of physio-chemical methods as applied to analytical chemistry. Laboratory work 
will include experiments in such fields as polarography, coulometry and am- 
perometry, potentiometry and spectrophotometry, nephlometry. (Purdy.) 

Chem. 226. Advanced Quantitative Analysis. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods per week. 
Prerequisites, Chem. 125, 225, or consent of instructor. A study of advanced 
methods with emphasis on the modern techniques of analytical chemistry. 

(Purdy.) 

BIOCHEMISTRY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Chem. 161, 163. Biochemistry. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem 33, or 
Chem. 37. (Henery-Logan.) 

Chem. 162, 164. Biochemistry Laboratory. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two three-hour laboratory periods a week. Pre- 
requisites, Chem. 33, or Chem. 38. (Henery-Logan.) 

For Graduates 
Chem. 261, 263. Advanced Biochemistry. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 143 or 
consent of instructor. (Veitch.) 

Chem. 262, 264. Advanced Biochemistry Laboratory. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two three-hour laboratory periods a week. Pre- 
requisite, consent of the instructor. (Veitch.) 

Chem. 265. Enzymes. (2) 

First semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Chem. 163. (Veitch.) 

Chem. 267. The Chemistry of Natural Products. (2) 

First or second semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Chem. 143. The 
chemistry and physiological action of natural products. Methods of isolation, 
determination of structure, and synthesis. (Henery-Logan.) 

Chem. 268. Special Problems in Biochemistry. (2-4) 

First and second semesters. Two to four three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisites, Chem. 161, 162, 163, 164, and consent of the instructor. 

(Veitch, Henery-Logan.) 

66 



Chemistry 
Chem. 269. Advanced Radiochemistry. (2) 

Second semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Chem. 205 or consent of 
instructor. Utilization of radioisotopes with special emphasis on applications to 
problems in the life sciences. (Lakshmanan.) 

Chem. 270. Advanced Radiochemistry Laboratory. (1 or 2) 

Second semester. One or two four-hour laboratory periods per week. Pre- 
requisites, Chem. 210 and Chem. 269 (or concurrent registration in Chem. 269) 
and consent of instructor. Registration limited. Laboratory training in utiliza- 
tion of radioisotopes with special emphasis on applications to problems in 
life sciences. (Lakshmanan.) 

Chem 271. Special Topics in Biochemistry. Biochemistry of 
Lipids. (2) 

Two lectures a week. Classification and chemistry of lipids; lipogenesis, and 
energy metabolism of lipids; structural lipids and endocrine control of lipid 
metabolism in mammals. (Lakshmanan.) 

Chem. 273. Special Topics in Biochemistry. Comparative 
Biochemistry. (2) 

Two lectures a week. Energy sources and micronutrient requirements; gluconeo- 
genesis; osmoregulation; nitrogen metabolism; detoxication and excretion; and 
comparative endocrinology. Deals with chordates only. (Lakshmanan.) 

INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Chem. 101. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 37, 187. (StafT.) 

Chem. 102. Inorganic Preparations. (2) 

Second semester. Two three-hour laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite, 
Chem. 123. (Boyd.) 

Chem. 111. Chemical Principles. (4) 

Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 
1 and 3, or equivalent. Not open to students seeking a major in the physical 
sciences, since the course content is covered elsewhere in their curricula. A 
course in the principles of chemistry with accompanying laboratory work con- 
sisting of single quantitative experiments. (Credit applicable only toward degree 
in College of Education.) (Jaquith.) 

For Graduates 
Chem. 201, 203. The Chemistry of the Rarer Elements. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures a week. (Gordon, White.) 

Chem. 202, 204. Advanced Inorganic Laboratory. (2) 

First and second semesters. Two thee-hour laboratory periods a week. (Boyd.) 

Chem. 205. Radiochemistry. (2) 

Two lectures a week. (Rollinson.) 

67 



Chemistry 

Chem. 207. Chemistry of Coordination Compounds. (2) 

Two lectures a week. (RoUinson.) 

Chem. 209. Non-Aqueous Inorganic Solvents. (2) 

Two lectures a week. (Jaquith.) 

Chem. 210. Radiochemistry Laboratory. (1 or 2) 

One or two four-hour laboratory periods a week. Registration limited. Pre- 
requisites, Chem. 205 (or concurrent registration therein) and consent of 
instructor. (Lakshmanan.) 

Chem. 211, 213. Selected Topics in Inorganic Chemistry. (2, 2) 

First and second semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 201, or 
equivalent. An examination of some current topics in modern inorganic 
chemistry. (Staff.) 

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Chem. 141, 143. Advanced Organic Chemistry. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 37, 38. 
An advanced study of the compounds of carbon. (Reeve.) 

Chem. 144. Advanced Organic Laboratory. (2-4) 

First and second semesters. Two three-hour laboratory periods a week. Pre- 
requisites, Chem. 37, 38. (Pratt.) 

Chem. 146, 148. The Identification of Organic Compounds. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two three-hour laboratory periods a week. Pre- 
requisites, Chem. 141, 143, or concurrent registration therein. The systematic 
identification of organic compounds. (Pratt.) 

Chem. 150. Organic Quantitative Analysis. (2) 

First and second semesters. Two three-hour laboratory periods per week. Pre- 
requisite, consent of instructor. The semi-micro determination of carbon, 
hydrogen, nitrogen, halogen and certain functional groups. This course may be 
substituted for Chem. 144 in the chemistry major curriculum. (Kasler.) 

For Graduates 

(One or more courses from the following group 240-254 will customarily 
be offered each semester.) 

Chem. 240. Organic Chemistry of High Polymers. (2) 

Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 141, 143. An advanced course cover- 
ing the synthesis of monomers, mechanism of polymerization, and the correla- 
tion between structure and properties in high polymers. (Bailey.) 

Chem. 241. Stereochemistry. (2) 

Two lectures a week. (Woods.) 

68 



Chemistry 

Chem. 245. The Chemistry of the Steroids. (2) 

Two lectures a week. (Pratt.) 

Chem. 249. Physical Aspects of Organic Chemistry. (2) 

Two lectures a week. (Woods.) 

Chem. 251. The Heterocyclics. (2) 

Two lectures a week. (Pratt.) 

Chem. 254. Advanced Organic Preparations. (2-4) 

First and second semesters. Two or four three-hour laboratory periods a week. 

(Pratt.) 

Chem. 258. The Identification of Organic Compounds, 
an Advanced Course. (2-4) 

First and second semesters. Two to four three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisites, Chem. 141, 143, or concurrent registration therein. (Pratt.) 

PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Chem. 187, 189. Physical Chemistry. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 19 or 
21; Phys. 20, 21; Math. 20, 21, or consent of instructor. This course must be 
accompanied by Chem. 188, 190, unless excused by the instructor. (Svirbely.) 

Chem. 188, 190. Physical Chemistry Laboratory. (1 or 2, 1 or 2) 
First and second semesters. Two three-hour laboratory periods a week. A labora- 
tory course for students taking Chem. 187, 189. (Staff.) 

Chem. 192, 194. Glassblowing Laboratory. (1, 1) 

First and second semesters. One three-hour laboratory period a week. Pre- 
requisite, consent of instructor. Credit not allowed towards graduate degrees in 
chemistry. (Carruthers.) 

Chem. 195. Advanced Physical Chemistry. (2) 

Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Chem. 189. Quantum chemistry and other 
selected topics. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 

The common prerequisites for the following courses are Chem. 1 87 
and 189. 

One or more courses of the group, 281-323, will be offered each semester, 
depending on demand. 

Chem. 281. Theory of Solutions. (2) 

Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Chem. 307, or equivalent. (Svirbely.) 

Chem. 285. Colloid Chemistry. (2) 

Two lectures a week. (Pickard.) 

69 



Chemistry 

Chem. 287. Infra-red and Raman Spectroscopy. (2) 

Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 141, 143, 187, 189 and consent of 
instructor. (Lippincott.) 

Chem. 295. Heterogeneous Equilibria. (2) 

Two lectures a week. (Pickard.) 

Chem. 299. Reaction Kinetics. (3) 

Three lectures a week. (Svirbely.) 

Chem. 303. Electrochemistry. (3) 

Three lectures a week. (Atkinson.) 

Chem. 304. Electrochemistry Laboratory. (2) 

Two three-hour laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, consent of instructor. 

(Svirbely.) 
Chem. 307. Chemical Thermodynamics. (3) 

Three lectures a week. (Pickard.) 

Chem. 311. Physiochemical Calculations. (2) 

Two lectures a week. (Stewart.) 

Chem. 313. Molecular Structure. (3) 

Three lectures a week. (Lippincott.) 

Chem. 317. Chemical Crystallography. (3) 

Three lectures per week. Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Stewart.) 

Chem. 319, 321. Quantum Chemistry. (3, 3) 

Three and two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Chem. 307 and 195, or equivalent. 

(Staff.) 

Chem. 323. Statistical Mechanics and Chemistry. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Chem. 307 or equivalent. (Staff.) 

SEMINAR AND RESEARCH 
Chem. 351. Seminar. (1) 

First and second semesters. (Staff.) 

Chem. 399. Thesis Research. 

First and second semesters, summer session. (Staff.) 



CIVIL ENGINEERING 

Professors: Looney, Allen, Lepper, Mavis, and Otts. 

Associate Professors: Barber, Cournyn, Piper and Wedding. 

Lecturers: Bloem, Roberts and Walker. 

The Civil Engineering Department offers graduate work in the following 
fields: engineering materials, highway engineering, hydraulic engineering, 

70 



Civil Engineering 

sanitary engineering, soils and foundations, and structural engineering, 
leading to the degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
C. E. 101. Civil Engineering Planning. (3) 

First and second semesters. One lecture and two laboratories each week. 

(Piper.) 

C. E. 102. Fluid Mechanics (3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures each week. Prerequisites, Math. 21, 
Phys. 21 or concurrent registration. (Cournyn, Reilly) 

C. E. 110. Surveying I. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. (Gohr, Staff.) 

C. E. 111. Surveying II. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 

(Gohr, Staff.) 

C. E. 112. Photogrammetry. (2) 

First or second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 

(Gohr.) 

C. E. 121, 122. Advanced Strength of Materials. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 

(Lepper, Wedding.) 

C. E. 140. Engineering Analysis and Computer Programming. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures each week. Prerequisites, Math. 64 or con- 
current registration. (Looney, Garber) 

C. E. 142. Advanced Fluid Mechanics. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. (Cournyn.) 

C. E. 150. Soil Mechanics. (4) 

First semester. Three lectures and one laboratory period each week. (Barber.) 

C. E. 151. Materials of Engineering. (3) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 
Prerequisites, Math. 21, concurrent registration in E.S. 20 and Phys. 21. 

(Wedding) 

C. E. 152. Advanced Materials of Engineering. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, C.E. 151, Math. 21, 
Phys. 21, E.S. 20. (Wedding.) 

C. E. 160. Structural Design. (4) 

Second semester. Three lectures and one laboratory period each week. 

(Allen, Piper.) 
C. E. 161. Structural Design. (4) 

First semester. Three lectures and one laboratory period each week. 

(Allen, Piper.) 

71 



Civil Engineering 

C. E. 162. Structural Analysis. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures per week. (Garber, Lepper.) 

C. E. 163. Structural Analysis. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures per week. (Garber, Lepper.) 

C. E. 170. Water Supply. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures and required laboratory each week (Otts.) 

C. E. 171. Sewerage. (4) 

Second semester. Three lectures and required laboratory each week. (Otts.) 

C. E. 180. Transportation. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures per week. (Antrim.) 

C. E. 181. Highways. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. (Barber.) 

C. E. 182. Transportation Planning. (3) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 
Prerequisite, C. E. 180. (Antrim.) 

C. E. 199. Research. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, senior standing. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
C. E. 221, 222. Advanced Strength of Materials. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, E. S. 20, 21 and C. E. 30 or 
equivalent. Analyses for stress and deformation in engineering members by the 
methods of mechanics of materials and elementary theories of elasticity and 
plasticity. Problems in flexure, torsion, plates and shells, stress concentrations, 
indeterminate combinations, residual stresses, stability. (Lepper.) 

C. E. 223. Experimental Stress Analysis. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, C.E. 221 or permission of instructor. Experi- 
mental methods of stress and strain analysis for static and impact forces. Use of 
structural models; brittle and plastic material methods; analogies; photoelasticity; 
optical, mechanical and electrical strain gages and instrumentation. (Wedding.) 

C. E. 224. Advanced Engineering Materials Laboratory. (3) 

First or second semester. Prerequisite, E.S. 20, 21 and C.E. 30 or equivalent. 
Critical examination of the methods for testing engineering materials and 
structures under static, repeated, sustained and impact forces. Laboratory ex- 
periments for the determination of strength and stiffness of structural alloys, 
concrete and other construction materials. Critical examination of the effects of 
test factors on the determination of engineering properties. (Lepper, Wedding.) 

C. E. 225, 226. Advanced Properties of Materials. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, C.E. 221 and 222. Modern theories of 
the structure of matter applied to the study of elastic and plastic deformation of 
materials under static, repeated, sustained and impact forces. Elements of solid 

72 



Civil Engineering 

state physics, crystal structure, slip and dislocation theory; polycrystalline solids. 
Effects of low and high temperature, loading rates, and state of stress on 
mechanical properties and fractures. Critical study of tests and their applica- 
tion to strength of members. (Lepper.) 

C. E. 227, 228. Theories of Concrete and Granular 
Materials. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, C.E. 221, 222, and 224. Critical 
reviews of analytical and experimental investigations of the behavior of con- 
cretes under diverse conditions of loading and environment. Mechanics of 
granular aggregates and the chemistry of cements. Theories for the design of 
Portland cement and asphaltic concrete mixtures. Relations between laboratory 
testing and field experience. (Wedding.) 

C. E. 241. Hydraulic Engineering. (3) 

First or second semester. Prerequisite, C.E. 102 or equivalent. Water power and 
flood control. Analysis of the principal features of a water power project with 
special reference to reservoir, waterway, dam, plant accessories, and power house 
equipment. Complete report on a water power project required, including costs 
and power valuation. (Cournyn.) 

C. E. 251. Soil Mechanics. (3) 

First or second semester. Prerequisite, C.E. 150, or equivalent. Identification 
properties tests and classification methods for earth materials. Strength and 
deformation characteristics, hydraulic properties and permeability, shearing re- 
sistance, compressibility and consolidation, with laboratory tests for these 
properties. Study of the basic theories involved and the development of test 
procedures. (Barber.) 

C. E. 252. Advanced Foundations. (3) 

First or second semesters. Prerequisites, C.E. 150, 162 and 163, or equivalent. 
Principles of mechanics applied to engineering problems in foundations. Earth 
pressure theories, seepage and drainage phenomena, stability of footings and 
slopes, stresses and deformation in soils, consolidation theory and application to 
foundation settlements. (Barber.) 

C. E. 261. Civil Engineering Planning. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, C.E. 160, 161, 162 and 163, or equivalent. General 
planning of large engineering projects involving industrial plants, bridges, high- 
ways, railroads, and port developments. Emphasis on general planning followed 
by design construction and cost estimates. (Piper.) 

C. E. 262. Civil Engineering Planning. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, C.E. 261. City and regional planning and 
development. Special problem of municipal development. Emphasis on pre- 
paring engineering reports, financing and cost estimates. Preparation of presenta- 
tion to public bodies. (Piper.) 

C. E. 263. Theory of Structural Design, (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, C.E. 160, 161, 162, and 163, or equivalent. 
Advanced structural theory applied to the design of bridges and buildings. 
Methods of analysis for indeterminate structures, including movement distribu- 
tion. Maxwell's method, virtual work, reciprocal theory, Muller Breslau's 
principle, and classical analytical methods. (Looney.) 

73 



Civil Engineering 

C. E. 264. Theory of Structural Design. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, C.E. 263. Correlation of theory, experience, and 
experiments in study of structural behavior, proportioning, and preliminary 
design. Special design problems of fatigue, buckling, vibrations, and impact. 

(Looney.) 

C. E. 265, 266. Concrete Structures. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, C.E. 263 and 264. Examination of 
the fundamental basis for the design of reinforced concrete structures. Correla- 
tion of laboratory research, advanced structural theory and mechanics, and 
design methods. Application to the design of modern forms of concrete struc- 
tures, such as folded plates, slabs, thin shells, life slabs, prestressing, and 
precasting. (Looney.) 

C. E. 267, 268. Steel Structures. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, C.E. 263 and 264. Design of large 
steel structures, such as cantilever and continuous trusses and girders, steel 
arches, suspension bridges, and tall building frames. Special problems of 
secondary stresses, wind bracing, stability and bracing, and interaction and 
deformation stresses. Study of specifications, factor of safety and ultimate 
strength, and the relation between structural tests and design. (Looney.) 

C. E. 271, 272. Sanitary Engineering Design. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, C.E. 170 and 171, or equivalent. 
Practical problems in the design of sewer systems and appurtenances; sewage 
treatment plants; water collection and distribution systems; water purification 
plants. Selected design of structures related to the operation of water supply and 
sewerage systems and industrial waste treatment plants. (Otts.) 

C. E. 281, 282. Advanced Highway Engineering. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites. C.E. 150, 180, and 181 or equivalent. 
Reconnaissance and location, surveys and plans, drainage, subgrade structure, 
low-cost roads, base courses, flexible and rigid pavement design. Highway 
organization planning economy, and finance. Geometric design and traflSc 
engineering. (Barber.) 

C. E. 296, 297. Engineering Analysis and Computer 
Programming. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures each week. Prerequisites, consent of 
Head of Department. Engineering Analysis and Computer Programming as 
applied to elasticity, stability and buckling, vibrations, thin plates and shells, 
or other problems in the area of mechanics, structures and materials. 

(Roberts.) 

C. E. 298. Seminar. 

First or second semester. Credit in accordance with work outlined by the 
Department. Prerequisite, consent of the Department of Civil Engineering. 

(Staff.) 

C. E. 399. Research. 

First and second semesters. Credit in accordance with work done. (Staff.) 



74 



Classical Languages and Literatures 
CLASSICAL LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES 

Professor: Avery. 

The Department of Classical Languages and Literatures offers no program 
leading to the degrees of Master of Arts or Doctor of Philosophy at the 
present time. The following courses, however, are offered upon sufficient 
demand to supply the needs of graduate students in other fields, such as 
English, history, and modern foreign languages, who may wish to work 
in Latin in connection with their degree programs in such fields. Students 
should consult their major professors with respect to application of credit 
hours in Latin to their graduate programs. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Prerequisite, Latin 61 or equivalent. 
Latin 101. Catullus and the Roman Elegac Poets. (3) 

Lectures and readings on Catullus as a writer of lyric, an imitator of the 
Alexandrians, and as a writer of elegy, and on Tibullus, Propertius, and Ovid as 
elegists. The reading of selected poems of the four authors. Reports. (Avery.) 

Latin 102. Tacitus. (3) 

Lectures and readings on Greek and Roman historiography before Tacitus and 
on the author as a writer of history. The reading of selections from the Annals 
and Histories. Reports. (Avery.) 

Latin 103. Roman Satire. (3) 

Lectures and readings on the origins and development of Roman satire. The 
reading of selections from the satires of Horace, Petronius' Cena Trimalchionis, 
and the satires of Juvenal. Reports. (Avery.) 

Latin 104. Roman Comedy. (3) 

Lectures and readings on the origins and development of Roman comedy. The 
reading of selected plays of Plautus and Terence. Reports. (Avery.) 

Latin 105. Lucretius. (3) 

Lectures and readings on Greek and Roman Epicureanism. The reading of 
selections from the De reriim natitra. Reports. (Avery.) 

Latin 111. Advanced Latin Grammar. (3) 

An intensive study of the morphology and syntax of the Latin language sup- 
plemented by rapid reading. (Avery.) 

For Graduates 
Prerequisite, Latin 61 or equivalent. 
Latin 210. Vulgar Latin Readings. (3) 

An intense study of the phonology, morphology, and syntax of Classical Latin, 
followed by the study of the deviations of Vulgar Latin from the classical 
norms, with the reading of illustrative texts. The reading of selections from the 
Preregrination ad loca sancta and the study of divergences from classical usage 
therein, with special emphasis on those which anticipate subsequent develop- 
ment in the Romance Languages. Reports. (Avery.) 

75 



Comparative Literature 

COMPARATIVE LITERATURE 

Director of the Program: Aldridge. 

Professors: Aldridge, Cooley, Goodwyn, Jones, Prahl. 

Associate Professors: Friedman, Parsons. 

The Department of Comparative Literature offers graduate work leading 
to the degrees of Master of Arts and Doctor of Philosophy. 

MASTER OF ARTS 

Candidates for the degree must have an undergraduate major in one lan- 
guage or literature acceptable for admission to graduate work in that de- 
partment. Those who offer a major in English must have in addition a 
knowledge of at least one foreign language. Requirements for the degree 
include Comparative Literature 201 and nine other hours of courses in 
Comparative Literature as well as 12 hours of courses in English, classical 
or foreign languages. 

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY 

Candidates must have an M.A. degree in comparative literature or any 
language or literature. Departmental requirements for the degree include 
Comparative Literature 301 and 33 additional hours of courses in com- 
parative literature, English, classical or foreign languages. The student 
must designate as a special field a chronological period (such as the 
Renaissance, Enlightenment, or Age of Realism) or a literary type (such 
as epic, drama or novel) or a literary theme (such as patriotism, the 
Faust legend or primitivism). The majority of his courses must relate to 
the special field and be selected from at least three departments so as to 
satisfy the major-minor requirements of the Graduate School. The dis- 
sertation must be related to the major field. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

CoMP. Lit. 101, 102. Introductory Survey of Comparative 
Literature. (3, 3) 

First semester: Survey of the background of European literature through study 
of Greek and Latin literature in English translations, discussing the debt of 
modern literature to the ancients. Second semester: Study of medieval and 
modern Continental literature. (Friedman.) 

CoMP. Lit. 103. The Old Testament as Literature. (3) 

Second semester. A study of the sources, development and literary types. 

(Panichas.) 

76 



Comparative Literature 
CoMP. Lit. 105. Romanticism in France. (3) 

First semester. Lectures and readings in the French romantic writers from 
Rousseau to Baudelaire. Texts are read in English translations. (Parsons.) 

CoMP. Lit. 106. Romanticism in Germany. (3) 

Second semester. Continuation of Comp. Lit. 105. German literature from 
Buerger to Heine in English translations. (Prahl.) 

CoMP. Lit. 107. The Faust Legend in English and German 
Literature. (3) 

First semester. A study of the Faust legend of the Middle Ages and its later 
treatment by Marlowe in Dr. Faust us and by Goethe in Faust. (Prahl.) 

Comp. Lit. 112. Ibsen. (3) 

First semester. A study of the life and chief works of Henrik Ibsen with 
special emphasis on his influence on the modem drama. (Staff.) 

CoMP. Lit. 114. The Greek Drama. (3) 

First semester. The chief works of Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides and 
Aristophanes in English translations. Emphasis on the historic background, on 
dramatic structure, and on the effect of the Attic drama upon the mind of the 
civilized world. (Prahl.) 

CoMP. Lit. 125. Literature of the Middle Ages. (3) 

Narrative, dramatic, and lyric literature of the Middle Ages; studies in trans- 
lations. (Cooley.) 

CoMP. Lit. 130. The Continental Novel. (3) 

First semester. The European novel in translation from Stendhal through the 
Existentialists, selected from literatures of France, Germany, Italy, Russia and 
Spain. (Friedman.) 

In addition, all literature courses numbered 100 or above offered in the 
Classics, English, and Foreign Languages Departments may be accepted for 
Comparative Literature credit. 

For Graduates 
CoMP. Lit. 201. Problems in Comparative Literature. (3) 

For M.A. candidates only. (Aldridge.) 

CoMP. Lit. 225. The Medieval Epic. (3) 

Second semester. A comparative interpretation of Beowulf, the Waltharius, the 
Chanson de Roland, the Nibelungenlied, and the Cid. (Jones.) 

CoMP. Lit. 258. Folklore in Literature. (3) 

A study of folk heroes, motifs, and ideas as they appear in the world's master- 
pieces. (Goodwyn.) 

CoMP. Lit. 301. Seminar in Themes and Types. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, one year's work in literature and the knowledge 
of one language other than English. Intensive study of fundamental motifs and 
trends in western literature. (Aldridge.) 

In addition, all literature courses numbered 100 or above offered in the 
Classics, English, and Foreign Languages Departments may be accepted for 
Comparative Literature credit. 

77 



Dairy Science 
DAIRY SCIENCE 

Professors: Davis, Arbuckle, and Keeney. 

Associate Professors: Hemken, King, Mattick, Stewart, 
and Williams. 

Assistant Professor: Vandersall. 

The Department of Dairy Science offers work leading to the degree of 
Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. Candidates for the Doctor 
of Philosophy degree have the option of studying in one of two major 
fields: dairy production, which is concerned with breeding, nutrition and 
physiology of dairy animals, or dairy technology, which is concerned with 
chemical, bacteriological, and nutritional aspects of dairy products, as 
well as the industrial phases of milk processing. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
An. Sci. 110. Applied Animal Nutrition. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period per week. Prerequisite, 
Math. 10, Animal Science 15 or permission of instructor. A critical study of 
those factors which influence the nutritional requirements of ruminants, swine 
and poultry. Practical feeding methods and procedures used in formulation of 
economically efficient rations will be presented. (Vandersall.) 

An. Sci. 140. Physiology of Reproduction. (1) 

First semester. One three-hour laboratory period per week. Prerequisite, 
Zoology 102. Anatomy and physiology of the reproductive process and artificial 
insemination of cattle. (Williams.) 

An, Sci. 141. Physiology of Milk Secretion. (1) 

Second semester. One three-hour laboratory period per week. Prerequisite, 
Zoology 102. The anatomy and growth of the mammary gland and the metabo- 
lism and physiology of biosynthesis in the ruminant. (Williams.) 

An. Sci. 142. Dairy Cattle Breeding. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period per week. Pre- 
requisites. Animal Science 40, Zoology 104, or Botany 117. A specialized 
course in breeding dairy cattle. Emphasis is placed on methods or evaluation 
and selection, systems of breeding and breeding programs. (Plowman.) 

An. Sci. S143. Advanced Dairy Production. (1) 

Summer session only. An advanced course primarily designed for teachers of 
vocational agriculture and county agents. It includes a study of the newer 
discoveries in dairy cattle nutrition, breeding and management. (Staff.) 

An. Sci. 180. Food Chemistry. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Prerequisites, 
Organic Chemistry and Quantitative Analysis. The application of basic chemi- 
cal and physical concepts to the composition and properties of foods. Emphasis 

78 



Dairy Science 

will be placed on the relationships of processing technology, and chemical 
composition on the color, texture, flavor, keeping quality, nutritional value 
and general acceptability of food. (Mattick.) 

An. Sci. 181. Product Development. (3) 

Second semester. Organization of the research and development function for 
development of new, economically feasible a»d marketable food products. 
Includes consideration of equipment and packaging development. (King.) 

An. Sci. 182. Processing Milk and Milk Products. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period per week. Prerequisite, 
Animal Science 180. Method of production of fluid milk, butter, cheese, con- 
densed and evaporated milk and milk products and ice cream. (Mattick.) 

For Graduates 
An. Sci. 240. Advanced Ruminant Nutrition. (3) 

First semester. Two one-hour lectures and one, two-hour laboratory per week. 
Prerequisite, permission of department. Biochemical, physiological and bacterio- 
logical aspects of the nutrition of ruminants and other animals. (Vandersall.) 

An. Sci. 241. Research Methods. (3) 

First semester. One lecture and two laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite, 
permission of instructor. The application of biochemical, physio-chemical and 
statistical methods to problems in biological research. (Stewart.) 

An. Sci. 301. Special Problems in Animal Science. (1-2) (4 cr. 

max.) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, approval of staff. Work assigned in 
proportion to amount of credit. Problems will be assigned which relate 
specifically to the character of work the student is pursuing. (Staff.) 

An, Sci. 302. Seminar. (1) (5 cr. max.) 

First and second semesters. Students are required to prepare papers based upon 
current scientific publications relating to Animal Science or upon their research 
work, for presentation before and discussion by the class. (Staff.) 

An. Sci. 399. Research. (1-12) 

First and second semesters. Work assigned in proportion to amount of credit. 
Students will be required to pursue original research in some phase of animal 
science, carrying the same to completion, and report the results in the form of 
a thesis. (Staff.) 



79 



Economics 



ECONOMICS 

Professors: Dillard, Cumberland, Gruchy, O'Connell, Schultze 
AND Ulmer. 

Associate Professors; Chase, Gramley, Knight, and Wonnacott. 
Assistant Professors: Bennett, Dodge, Dorsey, Hinrichs, and Kokat. 
Lecturer: Measday. 

MASTER OF ARTS 

Requirements for the master's degree include (1) course work in eco- 
nomics as the Department deems appropriate in view of the candidate's 
previous training, (2) course work in a minor subject, (3) a thesis on a 
topic approved by the Department, and (4) a comprehensive oral exam- 
ination covering the major and the minor subjects and defense of the thesis. 

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY 

The Ph.D. degree in economics is under the joint direction of the faculties 
of the Department of Economics and the Department of Business Organ- 
ization and Administration. Before being advanced to candidacy doctoral 
students must pass comprehensive written and oral examinations in five 
of the following fields: (1) Accounting, (2) Comparative Economic 
Systems and Economic Planning, (3) Economic Development, (4) Eco- 
nomic Theory (required), (5) Financial Administration, (6) History of 
Economic Thought (required), (7) Industrial Administration, (8) Interna- 
tional Economics, (9) Labor and Industrial Relations, (10), Marketing, 
(11) Money and Banking, (12) Public Finance and Fiscal Policy, (13) 
PubUc Utilities and Social Control of Business, (14) Statistics, (15) Trans- 
portation, (16) any other field, including the minor, approved by the fac- 
ulty. Students should consult with members of the faculty concerning the 
choice of fields and the choice of courses within these fields. 

Six semester hours of statistics with grades of "B" or better must be 
presented. Normally the foreign language requirements are taken before 
the comprehensive examinations. 

Further information concerning requirements and procedures may be 
obtained from the departments administering the program. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
EcoN. 102. National Income Analysis. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Econ. 32. An analysis of national 
income accounts and the level of national income and employment. (Schultze.) 

SO 



Economics 

EcoN. 130. Mathematical Economics, (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Econ. 102 and 132 and one year of college 
mathematics. A course designed to enable economics majors to understand the 
simpler aspects of mathematical economics. Those parts of the calculus and 
algebra required for economic analysis will be presented. (Ulmer.) 

Econ. 131. Comparative Economic Systems. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Econ. 32 or 37. An investigation of the 
theory and practice of various types of economic systems. The course begins 
with an examination and evaluation of the capitalistic system and is followed by 
an analysis of alternative types of economic systems such as fascism, socialism, 
and communism. (Gruchy, Dodge). 

Econ. 132. Advanced Economic Principles. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Econ. 32. Required for economics 
majors; an analysis of price and distribution theory with special attention to 
recent developments in the theory of imperfect competition. (Knight, Staff.) 

Econ. 134. Contemporary Economic Thought. (3) 

Prerequisites, Econ. 32 and senior standing. A survey of recent trends in Ameri- 
can, English, and continental economic thought with special attention to the 
work of such economists as W. C. Mitchell, J. R, Commons, T. Veblen, W. 
Sombart, J. A. Hobson and other contributors to the development of economic 
thought since 1900. (Gruchy.) 

Econ. 137. The Economics of National Planning. (3) 

Prerequisite, Econ. 32 or 37. An analysis of the principles and practice of econ- 
omic planning with special reference to the planning problems of western 
European countries and the United States. (Gruchy.) 

Econ. 138. Economics of the Soviet Union. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 32 or 37. An analysis of the organization, 
operating principles and performance of the Soviet economy with attention to 
the historical and ideological background, planning, resources, industry, agri- 
culture, domestic and foreign trade, finance, labor, and the structure and growth 
of national income. (Dodge.) 

Econ. 140. Money and Banking. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Econ. 32 or 37. A study of the rela- 
tion of money and credit to economic activity and prices; the impact of public 
policy in financial markets and in markets for goods and services; policies, 
structure, and functions of the Federal Reserve System; organization, operation, 
and functions of the commercial banking system, as related particularly to 
questions of economic stability and public policy. (Gramley and Staff.) 

Econ. 141. Theory of Money, Prices and Economic Activity. (3) 
Second semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 140. A theoretical treatment of the influence 
of money and financial markets on economic activity and prices, and of the 
effects of monetary policy on the markets for goods and services; the role of 
money in the classical and Keynesian macro-systems topics of theoretical interest 
in monetary policy formation and implementation. (Gramley.) 



81 



Economics 

EcoN. 142. Public Finance and Taxation. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Econ. 32 or 37. A study of govern- 
ment fiscal policy with special emphasis upon sources of public revenue, the tax 
system, government budgets, and the public debt. (Chase, Hinrichs.) 

EcoN. 147. Business Cycles. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 140. A study of the causes of depressions 
and unemployment, cyclical and secular instability, theories of business cycles, 
and the problem of controlling economic instability. (Schultze.) 

EcoN. 148. International Economics. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Econ. 32 or 37. A descriptive and 
theoretical analysis of international trade; balance of payments accounts; the 
mechanism of international economic adjustment; comparative costs; economics 
of customs unions. (Wonnacott.) 

Econ. 149. International Economic Policies. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 148. Contemporary balance of payments 
problems; the international liquidity controversy; investment, trade and economic 
development; evaluation of arguments for protection. (Wonnacott.)" 

Econ. 160. Labor Economics. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Econ. 32 or 37. The historical develop- 
ment and chief characteristics of the American labor movement are first 
surveyed. Present-day problems are then examined in detail; wage theories, 
unemployment, social security, labor organization, and collective bargaining. 

(Dorsey, Knight, Measday.) 

Econ. 170. Industrial Organization. (3) 

Prerequisite, Econ. 32 or 37. Changing structure of the American economy; price 
policies in different industrial classifications of monopoly and competition in 
relation to problems of public policy. 

Econ. 171. Economics of American Industries. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 32 or 37. A study of the technology, 
economics and geography of twenty representative American industries. 

(Clemens.; 

For Graduates 
Econ. 200. Micro-Economic Analysis. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 132. A critical analysis of the theory of 
economic decision-making in the firm, household, and industry in perfect and 
imperfect competition; price, output, distribution and the theory of general 
equilibrium. Review of recent contributions. (Ulmer.) 

Econ. 201. Advanced Micro-Economic Analysis. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 200 or consent of instructor. Continua- 
tion of Econ. 200 with particular attention to recent developments in linear 
programming, game theory, activity analysis, welfare economics, input-output 
analysis, and micro-dynamic models. (Ulmer.) 

S2 



Economics 
EcoN. 202. Macro-Economic Analysis. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 132. National income accounting: deter- 
mination of national income and employment especially as related to the 
modern theory of effective demand; consumption function; multiplier and 
acceleration principles; the role of money as it affects output and employment 
as a whole. (Schultze.) 

Econ. 204. Origins and Development of Capitalism. (3) 

Study of the transition from feudalism to capitalism and the subsequent develop- 
ment of leading capitalist institutions in industry, agriculture, commerce, 
banking, and the social movement. (Dillard.) 

Econ. 205. Economic Development of Underdeveloped Areas. (3) 
First semester. Principles and problems of economic developments in under- 
developed areas: policies and techniques which hasten economic development. 

Econ. 206. Seminar in Economic Development. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 205 or consent of instructor. Problems and 
policies of economic development in specified underdeveloped areas. 

Econ. 210. Advanced Mathematical Economics. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, either one year of calculus or Econ. 130. Model- 
building and mathematical derivation of micro-and macro-economic theories. 
Foundations of econometrics and activity analysis. Topics in differential and 
difference equations and in matrix algebra introduced as required. (Ulmer.) 

Econ. 230. History of Economic Thought. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 132 or consent of instructor. A study of the 
development of economic thought and theories including the Greeks, Romans, 
canonists, mercantilists, physiocrats. Adam Smith, Malthus, Ricardo. Relation of 
ideas to economic policy. (Dillard.) 

Econ. 231. Economic Theory in the Nineteenth Century. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 230 or consent of the instructor. A study 
of various nineteenth and twentieth century schools of economic thought, 
particularly the classicists, neo-classicists, Austrians, German historical school, 
American economic thought and the socialists. (Dillard.) 

Econ. 232, 233. Seminar in Institutional Economic Theory. (3, 3) 

A study of recent developments in the field of institutional economic theory in 
the United States and abroad. (Gruchy.) 

Econ. 234. Economic Growth in Mature Economies. (3) 

Analysis of policies and problems for achieving stable economic growth in 
mature economies such as the United States, the United Kingdom, and the 
Scandinavian countries. (Gruchy.) 

Econ. 235. Advanced International Economics. (3) 

First semester. General equilibrium and disequilibrium in the world economy; 
international mechanism and adjustment; price, exchange rate, and income 
changes. Commercial policy and the theory of customs unions. (Wonnacott.) 

Econ. 236. Seminar in International Economic Relations. (3) 
A study of selected problems in international economic relations. (Wonnacott.) 

83 



Economics 

EcoN. 237. Selected Topics in Economics. (3) 

EcoN. 238. Seminar in Economic Development of the Soviet 
Union. (3) 

Prerequisite, Econ. 138 or consent of instructor. Measurement and evaluation 
of Soviet economic development including interpretation and use of Soviet 
statistics, measurement of national income and rates of growth, fiscal and 
monetary policies, investment and technological change, planning and economic 
administration, manpower and wage policies, foreign trade and aid, and selected 
topics in Bloc development. (Dodge.) 

EcoN. 240. Monetary Theory and Policy. (3) 

First semester. An adequate knowledge of micro- and macro-economics is as- 
sumed. Theory of money, financial assets, and economic activity; review of 
classical, neo-classical and Keynesian contributions; emphasis on post- Keynesian 
contributions, including those of Tobin, Patinkin, Gurley-Shaw, Friedman, and 
others. (Gramley.) 

EcoN. 241. Seminar in Monetary Theory and Policy. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Econ. 240 or consent of instructor. Theory of the 
mechanisms through which central banking affects economic activity and prices; 
formation and implementation of monetary policy; theoretical topics in monetary 
policy. (Gramley.) 

EcoN. 242. Public Finance and Fiscal Policy. (3) 

Prerequisite, Econ. 142 or consent of instructor. Taxation, public expenditures, 
and public debt; the use of fiscal policy as a stabilization device against inflation 
and recession. (Chase.) 

Econ. 243. Money and Finance in Economic Development. (3) 
Econ. 247. Economic Growth and Instability. (3) 

Second semester. An analytical study of long-term economic growth in relation 
to short-term cyclical instability. Attention is concentrated on the connection 
between accumulation of capital and the capital requirements of secular growth 
and business cycles. Earlier writings as well as recent growth models are 
considered. (Schultze.) 

Econ. 248. The Economics of Technical Change. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, consent of instructor. A study of the determi- 
nants and impact of inventions and innovations. Attention is given to the 
qualitative and quantitative aspects of technical change, both at the micro- 
economic and macro-economic levels, and under different conditions of eco- 
nomic development. 

Econ. 260. Seminar in Labor Economics. (3) 

Prerequisite, Econ. 160 or consent of instructor. Theories of wage determina- 
tion, including analysis of wage structures and wage-price spiral; organization 
of labor markets, including factors influencing labor mobility and unemploy- 
ment. (Knight.) 

Econ. 270. Advanced Industrial Organization. (3) 
(Arranged.) 

Econ. 399. Thesis. 

(Arranged.) (Staflf.) 

84 



Education 



EDUCATION 



Professors: V. Anderson, Blough, Byrne, Duffey, Gerberich, 
Grentzer, Harrison, Hovet, Hymes, Kurtz, Maley, Mayor, 
McClure, Mershon, Morgan, Newell, Patrick, Perkins, Prescott, 

RiSINGER, SCHINDLER, THOMPSON, VAN ZWOLL, WaETJEN, AND WlGGIN. 

Associate Professors: Brandt, Bowie, Grambs, Hebeler, Kelsey, 
Marx, Peck, Raths, Spencer, Stunkard, Tierney and Ulry. 

Assistant Professors: P. Anderson, Bott, F. Brown, Giblette, Goer- 
iNG, Greenberg, Klevan, Kyle, Lawson, Lockard, Luetkemeyer, 
W. Massey, Mendeloff, Ray, Renz, Simms, Weaver. 



MASTER OF ARTS AND MASTER OF EDUCATION 

In consultation with an adviser, a student may choose to qualify for the 
degree of Master of Arts or Master of Education. 

In addition to the general requirements for admission to the Graduate 
School, applicants for unconditional admission with a major in education 
must have had sixteen semester hours of acceptable undergraduate work 
in education and must meet other standards set by this department of 
the Graduate School. 

During the first semester of graduate work, the student is required to 
take a test battery, at a fee of $5.00, and to submit professional recom- 
mendations. 

The student is assigned an adviser in terms of the major area of interest 
as indicated on the application blank. 

Following is a list of the major areas approved for Master's degrees in 
education: 



Adult Education 
Business Education 
Counseling 

Education Administration and 
Supervision 
Elementary 
General 
Secondary 
Elementary School Curriculum 
and Instruction 

Corrective and Remedial 
Reading Instruction 
History, Philosophy, and Com- 
parative Education 
Home Economics Education 



Human Growth and Develop- 
ment 
Industrial Arts Education 
Music Education 
Secondary School Curriculum 
and Instruction 
English 

Foreign Languages 
Mathematics 
Science 
Social Studies 
Special Education 
Vocational Industrial Educa- 
tion 



85 



Education 



The time limit for completing either degree is the same as that prescribed 
for the Master of Arts and the Master of Science degrees of the Graduate 
School. 

Students majoring in Educational Administration and Supervision are 
required to complete at least two summer sessions of six weeks each of 
full-time residence study. 

MASTER OF ARTS REQUIREMENTS 

A student is recommended to the Graduate Council for advancement to 
candidacy for the Master of Arts degree after he has successfully passed 
the qualifying examination and has completed at least twelve hours of 
satisfactory graduate work at the University of Maryland. The candidate 
must meet all requirements including thesis and successful passing of the 
oral examination as prescribed by the Graduate School for the Master of 
Arts degree. 

MASTER OF EDUCATION REQUIREMENTS 

A student may be recommended for advancement to candidacy on the 
basis of course work plus recommendations of his major adviser and the 
Education Master's Committee acting for the Department of Education. 
The Master of Education candidate will write one or two seminar papers 
depending on which plan he is pursuing, and will take a final compre- 
hensive examination covering all course work. The final examination 
must be taken by the full-time student in the second semester of course 
work and by the part-time student during the time he is enrolled for the 
last six hours of course work. 

Currently both the qualifying and comprehensive examinations are ad- 
ministered on the second Saturday of January and May and on the 
Saturday of the fourth week of the summer session. 

For further information respecting the master's degrees in education, see 
the statement of policy issued by the Department of Education. 

ADVANCED GRADUATE SPECIALIST IN EDUCATION 
The major areas of the program are as follows : 



Adult Education 

Counseling 

Curriculum and Instruction 

Educational Administration 
and Supervision 

Elementary Education 

Higher Education 

Home Economics Education 

Human Development Educa- 
tion 



Industrial Arts Education 

Music Education 

Physical Education, Recrea- 
tion and Health 

Secondary Education 

Special Education 

Student Personnel Adminis- 
tration 

Vocational-Industrial Educa- 
tion 



86 



Education 

A student in this program is admitted to the Graduate School on a special 
non-degree basis and must have earned at least a master's degree in some 
recognized university or college. The background tests for graduate 
students in Education are required. 

The minimum number of semester credits of graduate work required to 
complete the program is sixty, thirty of which must be taken at the Uni- 
versity of Maryland. At least 12 hours, exclusive of field experience, must 
be taken on the College Park campus. Registration in some kind of field 
study, field experience, apprenticeship, or internship is required. Candi- 
dates may be required to take a substantial portion of work in departments 
other than Education. A faculty adviser must be selected before admission. 

Students in this group majoring in Educational Administration and Super- 
vision are required to complete at least one semester of full-time residence 
study. 

Half of the student graduate work must be in 200's or 300's courses or 
in work elsewhere comparable to these courses at the University of Mary- 
land. Students are required to maintain a "B" average and to demonstrate 
a high degree of professional competence in their selected field. 

A final examination of not less than six hours in length must be passed 
in order to complete the program. A certificate or diploma is awarded 
upon the completion of the program. 

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY AND DOCTOR OF EDUCATION 

Each candidate is required to achieve exceptional ability in at least one 
major area and one minor area of competence. 

The candidate should choose his major from the following list of areas: 



Counseling 

Curriculum and Instruction 

Educational Administration 
and Supervision 

Elementary Education 
*Higher Education 

History, Philosophy, and Com- 
parative Education 

Home Economics Education 

Human Development Educa- 
tion 

Industrial Arts Education 
** Physical Education, Recrea- 
tion, and Health 



Research Design, Measure- 
ment, and Statistical 
Analysis 
Secondary Education 
English 

Foreign Languages 
Mathematics 
Science 
Social Studies 
Student Personnel Adminis- 
tration 
Vocational-Industrial Educa- 
tion 



"In combination with one of the other areas as a teaching major. 

"'"The Ph.D. program in this area is administered under a separate department 

of the Graduate School 



87 



Education 

Minors may be chosen from fields other than education, from the foregoing 
list of major areas, or from the following list: 

Adult Education Higher Education 

** Agricultural Education Music Education 

Business Education 

Fn addition to the general University requirements for a doctor's degree, 
the following requirements must be met: 

1. The preliminary examination for admission to candidacy for the doc- 
tor's degree will cover the student's preparation in major and minor fields, 
and will include such other examinations as may be required by the faculty. 
A student must be admitted to candidacy in order to have the Department's 
official permission to be a candidate for a doctor's degree. 

2. A comprehensive examination covering the general fields of major 
and minor study must be passed by each candidate, after which the final 
examination is administered by a committee appointed by the Dean of the 
Graduate School. 

In general the requirements for the Doctor of Education degree are the 
same as those for the degree Doctor of Philosophy. The most important 
differences between the two degrees are as follows: 

1 . The purpose of the Doctor of Education degree is to prepare persons 
of exceptional competence to work in the field. The emphasis for this 
degree is placed on broad understanding, whereas that for the degree of 
Doctor of Philosophy is placed on specialized research. 

2. A reading knowledge of foreign languages is required for the degree 
of Doctor of Education only when needed for research and study in the 
doctoral program. 

3. In order to meet the residence requirements, a candidate for the Ph.D. 
degree must spend at least two semesters in full-time study on the College 
Park campus. A candidate for the Ed.D. degree may substitute two 
summers of residence for one semester of residence, or four summers 
for two semesters except in selected areas where there are special resi- 
dence requirements. However, a candidate for the degree of Doctor of 
Education in Educational Administration and Supervision must meet the 
same residence requirements as the candidate for the Ph.D. degree. 

4. The doctoral study for the Ed.D. consists of a project rather than a 
dissertation. The project requires research to meet a practical field prob- 
lem. Credit of six to nine hours is allowed for a project as compared 
with twelve to eighteen hours for a Ph.D. dissertation. For further informa- 
tion respecting the doctoral degrees, see the "Statement of Policy, Doc- 
toral Degrees in Education," issued by the Department of Education. 



** Administered under a separate department of the Graduate School. 

88 



EDUCATrON 

GENERAL EDUCATION 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Ed, 100. History of Education in Western Civilization. (3) 

Educational institutions through the ancient, mediaeval, and early modern 
periods in the western civilization, as seen against a background of socio-eco- 
nomic development. (Wiggin.) 

Ed. 102. History of Education in the United States. (3) 

A study of the origin and development of the chief features of the present 
system of education in the United States. (Wiggin.) 

Ed. 107. Philosophy of Education. (2-3) 

A study of the great educational philosophers and systems of thought affect- 
ing the development of modern education. (Wiggin.) 

Ed. 147. Audio- Visual Education. (3) 

First semester and summer session. Laboratory fee, $1.00. Sensory impressions 
in their relation to learning; projection apparatus, its cost and operation; 
slides, film-strips, and films; physical principles underlying projection; auditory 
aids to instruction; field trips; pictures, models, and graphic materials; inte- 
gration of sensory aids with organized instruction. Recommended for all 
education students. (Herrick, Maley, Schramm.) 

Ed. 150. Educational Measurement. (3) 

First and second semesters and summer session. Constructing and interpreting 
measures of achievement. (Giblette, Dayton.) 

Ed, 151. Statistical Methods in Education. (3) 

Designed as a first course in statistics for students in education. Emphasis is 
upon educational applications of descriptive statistics, including measures of 
central tendency, variability, and association. (Stunkard.) 

Ed. 155. Laboratory Practices in Reading. (2-4) 

Prerequisite, Ed. 153 or Ed. 154. A laboratory course in which each student 
has one or more pupils for analysis and instruction. At least one class meeting 
per week to diagnose individual cases and to plan instruction. (Massey.) 

Ed. 157. Corrective-Remedial Reading Instruction. (3) 

Prerequisite, Ed. 153 or equivalent. For teachers, supervisors, and administra- 
tors who wish to identify and assist pupils with reading difficulties. Concerned 
with diagnostic techniques, instructional materials, and teaching procedures use- 
ful in the regular classroom. (Massey.) 

Ed. 160. Educational Sociology. (3) 

Deals with data of the social sciences which are germane to the work of teach- 
ers. Implications of democratic ideology for educational endeavor, educational 
tasks imposed by changes in population and technological trends, the welfare 
status of pupils, the socio-economic attitudes of individuals who control the 
schools, and other elements of community background. (Risinger, Grambs.) 



89 



Education 

Ed. 161. Introduction to Counseling and Pupil Services. (3) 

Presents guidance principles and procedures, and examines the functions of 
counselors, psychologists in schools, school social workers, and other pupil 
service workers. (Byrne, Marx.) 

Ed. 162. Mental Hygiene in the Classroom. (3) 

The practical application of the principles of mental hygiene to classroom 
problems. (Greenberg.) 

Ed. 185. Pupil Transportation. (2) 

Includes consideration of the organization and administration of state, county, 
and district pupil transportation service with emphasis on safety and economy. 
T'- pu :.ing of bus ro.ies; the selection and training of bus drivers, and 
maintenance mechanics; the specification of school buses; and procurement 
procedures are included. (Staff.) 

Ed. 187. Field Experience in Education. (1-4) 

a. Adult Education f. Industrial Arts Education 

b. Counseling g. Student Personnel Administration 

c. Curriculum and Instruction h. Supervision 

d. Educational Administration i. Vocational-Industrial Education 

e. Higher Education 

Planned field experience may be provided for selected graduate students who 
have had teaching experience and whose application for such field experience 
has been approved by the education faculty. Field experience is offered in a 
given area to both major and non-major students. Prerequisites, at least six 
semester hours in education at the University of Maryland plus such other 
prerequisites as may be set by the major area in which the experience is to be 
taken. (Staff.) 

Ed. 188. Special Problems in Education. (1-3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Available only to mature students who have 
definite plans for individual study of approved problems. (Staff.) 

Note: Course cards must have the title of the problem and the name of 
the faculty member who has approved it. 

Ed. 189. Workshops, Clinics, and Institutes. (1-6) 

The following types of educational enterprises may be scheduled under this 
course heading: workshops conducted by the College of Education (or developed 
cooperatively with other colleges and universities) and not otherwise covered in 
the present course listing; clinical experiences in pupil-testing centers, reading 
clinics, speech therapy, laboratories, and special education centers; institutes 
developed around specific topics or problems and intended for designated 
groups such as school superintendents, principals, and supervisors. The maxi- 
mum number of credits that may be earned under this course symbol toward 
any degree is six semester hours; the symbol may be used two or more times 
until six semester hours have been reached. (Staff.) 

Ed. 190. Problems and Trends in Contemporary American 

Education. (2-4) 

Designed to present a broad overview of some key issues and trends that relate 
to the improvement of instruction at elementary, secondary and teacher educa- 

90 



Education 

tion levels. Lectures by visiting educators of national prominence will be re- 
viewed and analyzed in discussion groups led by regular University staff mem- 
bers. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Ed. 202. The Junior College. (2) 

The philosophy and development of the junior college in the United States 
with emphasis on curriculum and administrative controls. Special attention is 
devoted to the importance, need, place and development of technical-terminal 
curricula. (Kelsey.) 

Ed. 203. Problems in Higher Education. (3) 

A study of present problems in higher education. (Kelsey.) 

Ed. 205. Comparative Education. (3) 

A study of historical changes in ways of looking at national school systems, 
and of problems in assessing their effectiveness. (Wiggin.) 

Ed. 206. Seminar in Comparative Education. (2) 

(Wiggin.) 

Ed. 207. Seminar in History and Philosophy of Education. (2) 

(Wiggin.) 

Ed. 209. Adult Education. (3) 

A study of adult education in the United States, with attention to adult abilities 
and intelligence, programs of adult education, and a rationale for adult educa- 
tion. (Wiggin.) 

Ed. 210. The Organization and Administration of Public 
Education. (3) 

First semester. The basic course in school administration. Deals with the or- 
ganization and administration of school systems — at the local, state, and 
federal levels; and with the administrative relationships involved. 

(Newell, van Zwoll.) 

Ed. 211. The Organization and Administration of Secondary 
Schools. (3) 

Second semester. The work of the secondary school principal. Includes topics 
such as personnel problems, school-community relationships, student activities, 
schedule making, and internal financial accounting. (P. Anderson.) 

Ed, 212. School Finance and Business Administration. (3) 

An introduction to principles and practices in the administration of the public 
school finance activity. Sources of tax revenue, the budget, and the function 
of finance in the educational program are considered. (van Zwoll.) 

Ed. 214. School Plant Planning. (2) 

An orientation course in which the planning of school buildings is developed 
as educational designing with reference to problems of site, building facilities, 
and equipment. (van Zwoll.) 

91 



Education 

Ed. 216. Public School Supervision. (3) 

The nature and functions of supervision; various supervisory techniques and 
procedures; human relationship factors; and personal qualities for supervisor. 

(P. Anderson.) 

Ed. 217. Administration and Supervision in Elementary 
Schools. (3) 

Problems in administering elementary schools and improving instruction. 

(Staff.) 
Ed. 218. School Surveys. (2-6) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Includes study of school surveys with 
emphasis on problems of school organization and administration, finance and 
school plant planning. Field work in school surveys is required. (Newell.) 

Ed. 219. Seminar in Educational Administration and 
Supervision. (2-4) 

Prerequisite, at least four hours in educational administration and supervision 
or consent of instructor. A student may register for two hours and may take 
the seminar a second time for an additional two hours. (Staff.) 

Ed. 221. Advanced School Plant Planning. (2) 

Ed. 214 is a prerequisite to this course. However, students with necessary 
background may be admitted without completion of Ed. 214. This is an ad- 
vanced course in school plant planning problems. Emphasis is given to 
analysis of the educational program and planning of physical facilities to 
accommodate that program. (van Zwoll.) 

Ed. 223. Practicum in Personnel Relationships. (2-6) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Enrollment limited. Designed to help 
teachers, school administrators, and other school staff members to learn to 
function more effectively in developing educational policy in group situations. 
Each student in the course is required to be working concurrently in the field 
with a group of school staff members or citizens on actual school problems. 

(Newell.) 

Ed. 224. Apprenticeship in Education. (6-9) 

a. Counseling e. Student Personnel Administration 

b. Curriculum and Instruction f. Supervision 

c. Educational Administration g. Vocational-Industrial Education 

d. Industrial Arts Education 

Apprenticeships in the major area of study are available to selected students 
whose application for an apprenticeship has been approved by the Education 
faculty. Each apprentice is assigned to work for at least a semester full-time or 
the equivalent with an appropriate staff member of a cooperating school, school 
system, or educational institution or agency. The sponsor of the apprentice 
maintains a close working relationship with the apprentice and the other 
persons involved. Prerequisites, teaching experience, a master's degree in 
education, and at least six semester hours in education at the University of 
Maryland. (Staff.) 

Note: The total number of credits which a student may earn in Ed. 187, 
Ed. 224, and Ed. 287 is limited to a maximum of twenty (20) semester hours. 

92 



Education 
Ed. 225. School Public Relations. (3) 

A study of the interrelationships between the community and the school. Public 
opinion, propaganda, and the ways in which various specified agents and 
agencies within the school have a part in the school public relations program 
are explored. (van ZwoU.) 

Ed. 226. Child Accounting. (2) 

An inquiry into the record keeping activities of the school system, including 
an examination of the marking system. (van Zwoll.) 

Ed. 227. Public School Personnel Administration. (3) 

A comparison of practices with principles governing the satisfaction of school 
personnel needs, including a study of tenure, salary schedules, supervision, 
rewards, and other benefits. (van Zwoll.) 

Ed. 228. Introduction to Student Personnel. (2) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Same as Psych. 228.) A systematic analy- 
sis of research and theoretical literature on a variety of major problems in 
the organization and administration of student personnel services in higher 
education. Included will be discussion of such topics as the student personnel 
philosophy in education, counseling services, discipline, housing, student activi- 
ties, financial aid, health, remedial services, etc. (Byrne, Magoon, Marx.) 

Ed. 234. The School Curriculum. (2-3) 

A foundations course embracing the curriculum as a whole from early child- 
hood through adolesence, including a review of historical developments, an 
analysis of conditions affecting curriculum change, an examination of issues 
in curriculum making, and a consideration of current trends in curriculum 
design. (Hovet.) 

Ed. 235. Principles of Curriculum Development. (3) 

Curriculum planning, improvement, and evaluation in the schools; principles 
for the selection and organization of the content and learning experiences; 
ways of working in classroom and school on curriculum improvement. 

(Hovet, V. Anderson.) 

Ed. 237. Curriculum Theory and Research. (2) 

The school curriculum considered within the totality of factors affecting pupil 
behavior patterns, an analysis of research contributing to the development 
of curriculum theory, a study of curriculum theory as basic to improved cur- 
riculum design, the function of theory in guiding research, and the construc- 
tion of theory, through the utilization of concepts from the behavior research 
disciplines. (Hovet.) 

Ed. 241. Problems in the Teaching of Reading. (3) 

A. Elementary Schools 

B. Secondary Schools 

Prerequisite: Ed. 153 or equivalent. Implications of current theory and the 
results of research for the teaching of reading. Attention is given to all areas 
of development reading instruction, with special emphasis on presistent problems. 

(Massey.) 

93 



Education 

Ed. 242. Coordination in Work-Experience Programs. (2) 

Surveys and evaluates the qualifications and duties of a teacher-coordinator 
in a work-experience program. Deals particularly with evolving patterns in 
city and country schools in Maryland, and is designed to help teacher-coordi- 
nators, guidance counselors, and others in the supervisory and administrative 
personnel concerned with functioning relationships of part-time cooperative 
education in a comprehensive educational program. (Merrill.) 

Ed. 245. Introduction to Research. (2) 

Intensive reading, analysis, and interpretation of research; applications to teach- 
ing fields; the writing of abstracts, research reports, and seminar papers. 

(Hovet.) 

Ed. 248. Seminar in Industrial Arts and Vocational 
Education. (2) 

(See Ind. Ed. 248) (Maley.) 

Ed. 249. Personality Theories in Education. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Examination of constructs and research 
relating to major personality theories with emphasis on their significance for 
educators working with the behavior of individuals in school settings. (Staff.) 

Ed. 250. Cases in Pupil Appraisal. (3) 

Prerequisite, Ed. 262. Collecting and interpreting non-standardized pupil ap- 
praisal data; synthesis of all types of data through case study procedures. 

(Marx.) 

Ed. 251. Intermediate Statistics in Education. (3) 

Prerequisite, Ed. 151 or equivalent. A study of the basic statistical techniques 
used for graduate research in education, including tests of significance and sam- 
pling techniques. Necessary arithmetic skills are developed as part of the course. 

(Stunkard.) 

Ed. 253. Occupational Choice: Theory and Information. (3) 

Prerequisite, Ed. 161. Research and theory related to occupational and edu- 
cational decisions; school programs of related information and other activities 
in occupational decisions. (Byrne.) 

Ed. 254. Organization and Administration of Pupil Services. (2) 

Prerequisite, Ed. 261 or permission of instructor. Instilling the guidance point 
of view and implementing guidance practices. (Byrne, Marx.) 

Ed. 255, 256. Advanced Laboratory Experiences in Reading 
Instruction. (3-3) 

Prerequisites, at least 21 credits applicable to the master's program in Cor- 
rective and Remedial Reading. The first semester of the course deals with diag- 
nostic techniques. Each participant will assist in diagnosing reading disabilities 
and in recommending instructional programs for individual pupils. The second 
semester deals with instruction of pupils with reading disabilities. Each par- 
ticipant will plan and execute a program of instruction for an individual or 
a small group, applying findings of the preliminary diagnosis. (Massey.) 



94 



Education 
Ed. 257. Diagnosis and Remediation of Reading Disabilities. (3) 

Prerequisites, Ed. 153 and Ed. 154. For those who wish to become corrective 
and remedial reading specialists. Concerned with clinical techniques, instruc- 
tional materials, and remedial procedures useful to the reading specialist in 
(1) diagnosing serious reading difficulties and (2) planning programs of 
individual and small-group instruction. The work includes the writing of 
diagnostic and progress reports. (Massey.) 

Ed. 259. Counseling in Elementary Schools. (3) 

For elementary school counselors or advanced students preparing for elementary 
school counseling. The functions of a counselor in elementary school covering 
both general guidance and interview functions. (Staff.) 

Ed. 260. School Counseling: Theoretical Foundations and 
Practice. (3) 

Prerequisites, Ed. 161, 250, 253. Exploration of learning theories as applied 
to counseling in schools, and practices which stem from such theories. 

(Byrne.) 

Ed. 261. Practicum in Counseling. (2-6) 

Two hour class plus laboratory. Prerequisites, Ed. 260 and permission of 
instructor. Sequence of supervised counseling experiences of increasing com- 
plexity. Limited to 8 applicants in advance. (Byrne, Marx.) 

Ed. 262. Measurement in Pupil Appraisal. (3) 

Prerequisite, Ed. 150. Study of group tests typically employed in school 
testing programs; discussion of evidence relating to the measurement of 
abilities. (Gerberich.) 

Ed. 265. Theory of Measurement. (2) 

Prerequisites, Ed. 150 and Ed. 151. Treats such topics as theory and techniques 
used in various scaling methods, test analysis, predictive accuracy of scores, and 
equivalence of scores. For students desiring more advanced treatment of 
problems. (Giblette.) 

Ed. 267. Curriculum Construction Through Community 
Analysis. (2) 

Prerequisites, Ed. 163, 164, 165. Selected research problems in the field of 
community study with emphasis on Baltimore area. (Staff.) 

Ed. 269. Counseling and Pupil Services Seminar (2) 

Enrollment by permission of instructor. (Staff.) 

Ed. 271. Advanced Statistics in Education. (3) 

Prerequisite, Ed. 251 or equivalent. Primarily for the education student de- 
siring more advanced work in statistical methodology. Survey of major types 
of statistical design in educational research; application of multivariate statisti- 
cal techniques to educational problems. (Stunkard.) 

Ed. 275, 276. Advanced Problems in Art Education. (3, 3) 

These courses are centered about problems of teaching art in the elementary 
and secondary schools in terms of the philosophy of art education today, tech- 
niques and processes in the visual arts, and creative opportunities in the visual 
arts and in art education. The student also will have the opportunity to do 
special work centered about his problems in art education. (Lembach.) 

95 



Education 

Ed. 279. Seminar in Adult Education. (2) 

(Wiggin.) 

Ed. 280. Research Methods and Materials. (2) 

Research methodology for case studies, surveys, and experiments; measure- 
ments and statistical techniques; design, form and style for theses and re- 
search reports. Primarily for advanced students and doctoral candidates. 

(Stunkard.) 

Ed. 281. Source Materials in Education. (2) 

Bibliography development through a study of source materials in education, 
special fields in education, and for seminar papers and theses. (Wiggin.) 

Ed. 287. Internship in Education. (12-16) 

a. Curriculum and Instruction e. Student Personnel Services 

b. Educational Administration f. Supervision 

c. Industrial Arts Education g. Vocational-Industrial Education 

d. Pupil Personnel Services 

Internships in the major area of study are available to selected students who 
have teaching experience. The following groups of students are eligible: (a) 
any student who has been advanced to candidacy for the doctor's degree; and 
(b) any student who receives special approval by the education faculty for. 
an internship, provided that prior to taking an internship, such student shall 
have completed at least sixty semester hours of graduate work, including at 
least six semester hours in education at the University of Maryland. Each 
intern is assigned to work on a full-time basis for at least a semester with 
an appropriate staff member in a cooperating school, school system, or educa- 
tional institution or agency. The internship must be taken in a school situation 
different from the one where the student is regularly employed. The intern's 
sponsor maintains a close working relationship with the intern and the other 
persons involved. 

Note: The total number of credits which a student may earn in Ed. 187, Ed. 
224, and Ed. 287 is limited to a maximum of twenty (20) semester hours. 

(Staff.) 

Ed. 288. Special Problems in Education. (1-6) 

First and second semesters and summer session. Master's of Education or doc- 
toral candidates who desire to pursue special research problems under the direc- 
tion of their advisers may register for credit under this number. Course card 
must have the title of the problem and the name of the faculty member under 
whom the work will be done. (Staff.) 

Ed. 290. Doctoral Seminar. (1-3) 

Prerequisite, passing the preliminary examinations for a doctor's degree in edu- 
cation, or recommendation of a doctoral adviser. Analysis of doctoral projects 
and theses, and of other on-going research projects. A doctoral candidate may 
participate in the Seminar during as many University sessions as he desires, but 
may earn no more than three semester hours of credit in the Seminar. An Ed.D. 
candidate may earn in total no more than nine semester hours, and a Ph.D. 
candidate, no more than eighteen semester hours, in the Seminar and in 
Ed. 399. (Raths, Stunkard.) 

96 



Education 

Ed. 302. Curriculum in Higher Education. (3) 

An analysis of research in curriculum and of conditions affecting curriculum 
change, with examination of issues in curriculum making based upon the history 
of higher education curriculum development. (Kelsey.) 

Ed. 303. Organization and Administration of Higher 
Education. (2) 

Organization and administration of higher education at the local, state, and fed- 
eral levels; and an analysis of administrative relationships and functions and 
their effects on curriculum and instruction. (Kelsey.) 

Ed, 304. Student Personnel and the College Student. (2) 

A demographic study of the characteristics of college students; as well as a 
study of their aspirations, values, and purposes. (Marx.) 

Ed. 305. College Teaching. (3) 

Various methods of college instruction analyzed in relation to the curriculum 
and psychological basis. These would include the case study method, the dem- 
onstration method, the lecture method, the recitation method, teaching machines, 
teaching by television, and other teaching aids. (Kelsey and Staff.) 

Ed. 309. Seminar in Problems of Higher Education. (2) 

(Kelsey.) 
Ed. 310. Seminar in Student Personnel. (2-6) 

An intensive study of the various student personnel functions. A means to 
integrate the knowledges from various fields as they relate to student personnel 
administration. (Marx.) 

Ed. 399. Research — Thesis. (1-6) 

First and second semesters and summer session. Students who desire credit for 
a master's thesis, a doctoral dissertation, or a doctoral project should use this 
number. (Staff.) 

EARLY CHILDHOOD-ELEMENTARY EDUCATION^ 

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates 
ECEEd. 105. Science in the Elementary School. (2-3) 

A. Early Childhood. B. Elementary. Laboratory fee, $2.00. Designed to help 
teachers acquire general science understandings, and to develop teaching 
materials for practical use in classrooms. Includes experiments, demonstrations, 
constructions, observations, field trips, and use of audio-visual materials. The 
emphasis is on content and method related to science units in common use in 
elementary schools. (Blough.) 

ECEEd. 115. Activities and Materials in Early Childhood 
Education. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, C. Ed. 50, 51, or 110. Laboratory fee, 
$5.00. Storytelling; selection of books; the use, preparation, and presentation 
of such raw materials as clay, paint (easel and finger), blocks, wood, and scrap 
materials. (Stant.) 



^ For additional courses in reading see listings under Education. 

97 



Education 

ECEEd. 116. Music in Early Childhood Education. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Music 16 or equivalent. Creative 
experiences in songs and rhythms; correlation of music and everyday teaching 
with the abilities and developments of each level; study of songs and ma- 
terials; observation and teaching experience with each age level. (L. Brown.) 

ECEEd. 121. Language Arts in the Elementary School. (2-3) 

A. Early Childhood. B. Elementary. Teaching of spelling, handwriting, oral 
and written expression, and creative expression. Special emphasis given to skills 
having real significance to pupils. (Seidman.) 

ECEEd. 122. Social Studies in the Elementary School. (2-3) 

A. Early Childhood. B. Elementary. Consideration given to curriculum, organ- 
ization and methods of teaching, evaluation of newer materials, and utilization of 
environmental resources. (O'Neill, Weaver, Duffey.) 

ECEEd. 123. The Child and the Curriculum. (3) 

A. Early Childhood. B. Elementary. Relationship of the elementary school 
curriculum to child growth and development. Recent trends in curriculum 
organization; the effect of environment on learning; readiness to learn; and 
adapting curriculum content and methods to maturity levels of children. 

(Seidman, Bennett.) 

ECEEd. 124. Mathematics in the Elementary School. (2-3) 

A. Early Childhood. B. Elementary. Emphasis on materials and procedures 
which help pupils sense arithmetical meanings and relationships. Helps teachers 
gain a better understanding of the number system and arithmetical processes. 

(Schindler, F. Brown.) 

ECEEd. 125. Art in Elementary Shcool. (2) 

Concerned with art methods and materials for elementary schools. Includes 
laboratory experiences with materials appropriate for elementary schools. 

(Lembach, Longley.) 

ECEEd. 152. Literature for Children and Young People, 
Advanced. (3) 

Prerequisite, Ed. 52, or approval of instructor. Development of literary ma- 
terials for children and young people. Timeless and ageless books, and out- 
standing examples of contemporary publishing. Evaluation of the contribu- 
tions of individual authors and illustrators and children's book awards. Study 
and practice in story-telling, and reading guidance in the classroom and 
library. (D. Brown.) 

ECEEd. 153. The Teaching of Reading. (2-3) 

A. Early Childhood. B. Elementary. C. Secondary. Concerned with the funda- 
mentals of developmental reading instruction, including reading readiness, use 
of experience records, procedures in using basal readers, the improvement of 
comprehension, teaching reading in all areas of the curriculum, uses of chil- 
dren's literature, the program in word analysis, and procedures for determining 
individual needs. (Schindler, Massey, Fanning.) 



98 



Education 
ECEEd. 160. Teacher-Parent Relationships. (2-3) 

A survey of child development, child guidance, and related fields; a review of 
current materials, books, periodicals, leaflets, films, skits; study of individual 
parent conferences; guided observation; discussion leading, role playing, pre- 
paring materials and programs for parent groups, and television skits with 
laboratory practice through the group itself. (Hymes.) 

For Graduates 
ECEEd. 200. Seminar in Elementary Education. (2) 

Primarily for individuals who wish to write seminar papers. Enrollment should 
be preceded by at least 12 hours of graduate work in education. (Staff.) 

ECEEd. 205. Promlems of Teaching Science in Elementary 
Schools. (2) 

An opportunity to pursue special problems in curriculum making, course of 
study development, or other science teaching problems. Class members may 
work on problems related directly to their own school situations. 

(Blough, F. Brown.) 

ECEEd. 221. Problems of Teaching Language Arts in Elementary 
Schools. (2) 

Implications of current theory and results of research for the language arts in 
the elementary schools. (Seidman, Collins.) 

ECEEd. 222. Problems of Teaching Social Studies in Elementary 
Schools. (2) 

Application to the social studies program of selected theory and research in 
the social sciences, emphasizing patterns of behavior, environmental influences, 
and critical thinking. (O'Neill, Weaver, Duffey.) 

ECEEd. 224. Problems of Teaching Mathematics in Elementary 
Schools. (2) 

Implications of theory and results of research for the teaching of arithmetic 
in the elementary schools. (Schindler, F. Brown.) 

HUMAN DEVELOPMENT EDUCATION 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

H. D. Ed. 102, 103, 104. Child Development Laboratory 
I, II AND in. (2, 2, 2) 

These courses involve the direct study of children throughout the school year. 
Each participant gathers a wide body of information about an individual, 
presents the accumulating data from time to time to the study group for criticism 
and group analysis and writes an interpretation of the dynamics underlying the 
child's learning, behavior and development. Provides opportunity for teachers 
in-service to earn credit for participation in their own local child study group. 

(Staff.) 



99 



Education 

H. D. Ed. 112, 114, 116. Scientific Concepts in Human 
Development I, II and III. (3, 3, 3) 

Summer session. (Staff.) 

H. D. Ed. 113, 115, 117. Laboratory in Behavior Analysis 
I, II AND III. (3, 3, 3) 

Summer session. (Staff.) 

H. D. Ed. 120, 121, 122. Study of Human Development and 
Learning in School Settings I, II, III. (2, 2, 2) 

A sequence of courses which enables in-service teachers and administrators 
to carry on advanced study of human development and learning principles 
in the continuous study and evaluation of several different phases of the school 
program over an extended period of time. (Staff.) 

H. D. Ed. 145. Guidance of Young Children. (3) 

First and second semesters. Development of an appreciation and understand- 
ing of young children from different home and community backgrounds; 
study of individual and group problems. (Hymes.) 

For Graduates 
H.D. Ed. 200. Introduction to Human Development and 
Child Study. (3) 

Offers a general overview of the scientific principles which describe human 
development and behavior and makes use of these principles in the study of 
individual children. Each student will observe and record the behavior of 
an individual child throughout the semester and must have one half-day a 
week for this purpose. It is basic to further work in child study and serves 
as a prerequisite for advanced courses where the student has not had field 
work or at least six weeks of workshop experience in child study. When offered 
during the summer intensive laboratory work with case records may be substi- 
tuted for the study of an individual child. (Thompson, Prescott.) 

H. D. Ed. 201. Biological Bases of Behavior. (3) 

H. D. Ed. 200 or its equivalent must be taken before H. D. 201 or concur- 
rently. Emphasizes that understanding human life, growth and behavior depends 
on understanding the ways in which the body is able to capture, control and 
expend energy. Application throughout is made to human body processes and 
implications for understanding and working with people. (Lawson, Morgan.) 

H. D. Ed. 202. Social Bases of Behavior. (3) 

H. D. Ed. 200 or its equivalent must be taken before H. D. Ed. 202 or con- 
currently. Analyzes the socially inherited and transmitted patterns of pressures, 
expectations and limitations learned by an individual as he grows up. These are 
considered in relation to the patterns of feeling and behaving which emerge 
as the result of growing up in one's social group. (Staff.) 

H. D. Ed. 203. Integrative Bases of Behavior. (3) 

H. D. Ed. 200, or its equivalent, H. D. Ed. 201 and H. D. Ed. 202 are pre- 
requisite. Analyzes the organized and integrated pattern of feeling, thinking 
and behaving which emerge from the interaction of basic biological drives and 
potentials with one's unique experience growing up in a social group. (Peck.) 

100 



Education 

H. D. Ed. 204, 205. Physical Processes in Human Development. 
(3,3) 

Prerequisite, 200 or equivalent. Describes in some detail the major organic 
processes of: conception, biological inheritance; differentiation and growth of the 
body; capture, transportation and use of energy; perception of the environment; 
coordination and integration of function; adaptation to unusual demands and to 
frustration; normal individual variation in each of the above processes. 

(Goering, Bowie.) 

H. D. Ed. 206, 207. Socialization Processes in Human Develop- 
ment I, II. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, 200 or equivalent. Analyzes the processes by which human beings 
internalize the culture of the society in which they live. The major sub-cultures 
in the United States, their training procedures, and their characteristic human 
expresssions in folk-knowledge, habits, attitudes, values, life-goals, and adjust- 
ment patterns are analyzed. Other cultures are examined to highlight the 
American way of life and to reveal its strengths and weaknesses. 

(Kurtz, Matteson, Mershon.) 

H. D. Ed. 208, 209. Self Processes in Human Development I 

AND II. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, 200 or equivalent. Analyzes the effects of the various physical and 
growth processes, affectional relationships, socialization processes, and peer 
group roles and status on the integration, development, adjustment, and realiza- 
tion of the individual self. This analysis includes consideration of the nature of 
intelligence and of the learning process; the development of skills, concepts, 
generalizations, symbolizations, reasoning and imagination, attitudes, values, 
goals and purposes; and the conditions, relationships and exi>eriences that are 
essential to full human development. The more common adjustment problems 
experienced in our society at various maturity levels, and the adjustment 
mechanisms used to meet them are studied. (Mershon, Peck, Perkins.) 

H. D, Ed. 210. Affectional Relationships and Processes in 
Human Development. (3) 

H. D. Ed. 200 or its equivalent must be taken before or concurrently. De- 
scribes the normal development, expression and influence of love in infancy, 
childhood, adolescence and adulthood. It deals with the influence of parent- 
child relationship involving normal acceptance, neglect, rejection, inconsistency, 
and over-protection upon health, learning, emotional behavior and personality 
adjustment and development. (Kyle.) 

H. D. Ed. 211. Peer-culture and Group Processes in Human 

Development. (3) 

H. D. Ed. 200 or its equivalent must be taken before or concurrently. Analyzes 
the process of group formation, role-taking and status-winning. It describes 
the emergence of the "peer-culture" during childhood and the evolution of 
the child society at different maturity levels to adulthood. It analyzes the 
developmental tasks and adjustment problems associated with winning belonging 
and playing roles in the peer group. (Lawson.) 

H. D. Ed. 212, 214, 216. Advanced Scientific Concepts in Human 
Development I, II, III. (3, 3, 3) 

Summer session. (Staff.) 

101 



Education 

H. D. Ed. 213, 215, 217. Advanced Laboratory in Behavior 
Analysis I, II, III. (3, 3, 3) 

Summer session. (Staff.) 

H. D. Ed. 221. Learning Theory and the Educative Process. (3) 

Provides a systematic review of the major theories of learning and their im- 
pact on education. Considers factors that influence learning. (Perkins, Brandt.) 

H. D. Ed. 230, 231. Field Program in Child Study I and II. (2-6) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Offers apprenticeship training preparing 
properly qualified persons to become staff members in human development 
workshops, consultants to child study field programs and coordination of mu- 
nicipal or regional child study programs for teachers or parents. Extensive 
field experience is provided. In general this training is open only to persons 
who have passed their preliminary examinations for the doctorate with a 
major in human development or psychology. (Prescott.) 

H. D. Ed. 250a, 250b, 250c. Direct Study of Children. (1, 1, 1) 

May not be taken concurrently with H. D. Ed. 102, 103, or 104. Provides 
the opportunity to observe and record the behavior of an individual child in a 
nearby school. These records will be used in conjunction with the advanced 
courses in human development and this course will be taken concurrently with 
such courses. Teachers active in their jobs while taking advanced courses in 
human development may use records from their own classrooms for this 
course. A minimum of one year of direct observation of human behavior is 
required of all human development students at the master's level. This require- 
ment may be satisfied by this course. (Staff.) 

H. D. Ed. 260. Synthesis of Human Development Concepts. (3) 

Prerequisites, H. D. Ed. 204, 206 and 208. A seminar wherein advanced 
students work toward a personal synthesis of their own concepts in human 
growth and development. Emphasis is placed on seeing the dynamic interrela- 
tions between all processes in the behavior and development of an individual. 

(Prescott.) 

H. D. Ed. 270. Seminars in Special Topics in Human Develop- 
ment. (2-6) 

Prerequisite, consent of the instructor. An opportunity for advanced students 
to focus in depth on topics of special interest growing out of their basic courses 
in human development. (Staff.) 



INDUSTRIAL EDUCATION 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Ind. Ed. 115. Research and Experimentation in Industrial Arts. 

(3) 

This is a laboratory-seminar course designed to develop persons capable of 
planning, directing, and evaluating effective research and experimentation 
procedures with the materials, products, and processes of industry. (Maley.) 

102 



Education 

Ind, Ed. 121. Industrial Arts in Special Education. (3) 

Four hours laboratory per week, one hour lecture. Prerequisite, Sp. Ed. 170 
and 171 or consent of instructor. Laboratory fee $5.00. This course provides 
experiences of a technical and theoretical nature in industrial processes ap- 
plicable for classroom use. Emphasis is placed on individual research in the 
specific area of one's major interest in special education. (Staff.) 

Ind. Ed. 125, 126. Industrial Training in Industry I, II. (3, 3) 

The first course is designed to provide an overview of the function of indus- 
trial training, type of programs, organization, development and evaluation. 
The second course (prerequisite the first course) is designed to study specific 
training programs in a variety of industries, plan program visitation, training 
program development, and analyses of industrial training research. (Merrill.) 

Ind, Ed. 143. Industrial Safety Education I. (2) 

This course deals briefly with the history and developing of effective safety 
programs in modern industry and treats causes, effects, and values of industrial 
safety education inclusive of fire prevention and hazard controls. (Staff.) 

Ind. Ed. 144. Industrial Safety Education II. (2) 

In this course exemplary safety practices are studied through conference dis- 
cussions, group demonstrations, and organized plant visits to selected industrial 
situations. Methods of fire precautions and safety practices are emphasized. 
Evaluative criteria in safety programs are formulated. (Staflf.) 

Ind, Ed, 150, Training Aids Development, (3) 

Study of the aids in common use as to their source and application. Special 
emphasis is placed on principles to be observed in making aids useful to shop 
teachers. Actual construction and application of such devices will be required. 

(Maley.) 

Ind. Ed. 157. Tests and Measurements. (2) 

Prerequisite, Ed. 150 or consent of instructor. The construction of objective 
tests for occupational and vocational subjects. (Luetkemeyer.) 

Ind. Ed. 161. Principles of Vocational Guidance. (2) 

This course identifies and applies the underlying principles of guidance to the 
problems of educational and vocational adjustment of students. (Staff.) 

Ind. Ed. 164. Shop Organization and Management. (2) 

This course covers the basic elements of organizing and managing an industrial 
education program including the selection of equipment and the arrangement 
of the shop. (Crosby.) 

Ind. Ed. 165. Modern Industry. (3) 

This course provides an overview of manufacturing industry in the American 
social, economic, and culture pattern. Representative basic industries are 
studied from the viewpoints of personnel and management organization, indus- 
trial relations, production procedures, distribution of products, and the like. 

(Harrison.) 

Ind. Ed. 166. Educational Foundations of Industrial Arts. (2) 
A study of the factors which place industrial arts education in any well- 
rounded program of general education. (Luetkemeyer.) 

103 



Education 

Ind. Ed. 167. Problems in Occupational Education. (2) 

The purpose of this course is to secure, assemble, organize, and interpret data 
relative to the scope, character and effectiveness of occupational education. 

(Staff.) 

Ind. Ed. 168. Trade or Occupational Analysis. (2) 

This course should precede Ind. Ed. 169. Provides a working knowledge of oc- 
cupational and job analysis which is basic in organizing vocational-industrial 
courses of study. (Luetkemeyer.) 

Ind. Ed. 169. Course Construction. (2) 

Surveys and applies techniques of building and reorganizing courses of study 
for effective use in vocational and occupational schools. (Crosby.) 

Ind. Ed. 170. Principles of Vocational Education. (2) 

The course develops the vocational education movement as an integral phase 
of the American program of public education. (Maley.) 

Ind. Ed. 171. History of Vocational Education. (2) 

An overview of the development of vocational education from primitive times 
to the present. (Luetkemeyer.) 

Ind. Ed. 175. Recent Technological Developments in Products 

AND Processes. (3) 

This course is designed to give the student an understanding of recent techno- 
logical developments as they pertain to the products and processes of industry. 
The nature of the newer products and processes is studied as well as their effect 
upon modern industry and/or society. (Crosby.) 

For Graduates 
Ind. Ed. 207. Philosophy of Industrial Arts Education. (3) 

This course is intended to assist the student in his development of a point of 
view in regard to industrial arts and its relationship with the total educational 
program. He should, thereby, have a "yardstick" for appraising current proced- 
ures and proposals and an articulateness for his own professional area. 

(Harrison.) 

Ind. Ed. 214. School Shop Planning and Equipment Selection. (3) 

This course deals with principles involved in planning a school shop and pro- 
vides opportunities for applying these principles. Facilities required in the 
operation of a satisfactory shop program are catalogued and appraised. 

(Tierney.) 



Ind. Ed. 216. Supervision of Industrial Arts. (2) 



(Tierney.) 



Ind. Ed. 220. Organization, Administration, and Supervision of 
Vocational Education. (2) 

This course surveys objectively the organization, administration, supervision, 
curricular spread and viewpoint, and the present status of vocational educa- 
tion. (Staff.) 

104 



Education 

Ind. Ed. 240. Research in Industrial Arts and Vocational Edu- 
cation. (2) 

This is a course offered by arrangement for persons who are conducting re- 
search in the areas of industrial arts and vocational education. (Staff.) 

Ind. Ed. 241. Content and Method of Industrial Arts. (3) 

Various methods and procedures used in curriculum development are ex- 
amined and those suited to the field of industrial arts education are applied. 
Methods of and devices for industrial arts instruction are studied and prac- 
ticed. (Maley.) 

Ind. Ed. 248. Seminar in Industrial Arts and Vocational Edu- 
cation. (2) 

(Staff.) 

Ind. Ed. 250. Teacher Education in Industrial Arts. (3) 

This course is intended for the Industrial Arts teacher educator at the college 
level. It deals with the function and historical development of Industrial 
Arts Teacher education. Other areas of content include administration pro- 
gram and program development, physical facilities and requirements, staff 
organization and relationships, college-secondary school relationships, philos- 
ophy and evaluation. (Harrison.) 



LIBRARY SCIENCE EDUCATION 

For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates 
L. S. Ed. 120. Introduction to Librarianship. (3 hours) 

An overview of the library profession. Development of public, academic, 
special and school library services. History of books and libraries. The library 
as a social institution. The impact of communication media on society. Phi- 
losophy of librarianship. Professional standards organizations and publica- 
tions. (D. Brown.) 

L. S. Ed. 122. Basic Reference and Information Sources. (3 hours) 

Evaluation, selection, and utilization of information sources, in subject areas, 
including encyclopedias, dictionaries, periodical indexes, atlases, yearbooks. 
Study of bibliographical methods and form. (D. Brown.) 

L. S. Ed. 124. Book Selection and Evaluation for Children and 
Youth. (3 hours) 

Principles of book selection for school libraries and children's collections. Book 
selection aids and reviewing media. Influence of the community and curriculum 
on selection. Evaluation of publishers editions, translations, series. 

(D. Brown.) 

L. S. Ed. 126. Cataloging and Classification of Library Mate- 
rials. (3 hours) 

Principles and practice in the organization of library materials. Dewey Decimal 
Classification, rules for the dictionary catalog, Sears subject headings. Treat- 
ment of non-book materials. Cataloging aids and tools. (D. Brown.) 

105 



Education 

L. S. Ed. 128, School Library Administration and Service. (3 
hours) 

Acquisition, circulation, utilization and maintenance of library materials. 
Organization of effective school library programs. School library quarters and 
equipment. Publicity and exhibits. Evaluation of library services. (D. Brown.) 

L. S. Ed. 130. Library Materials for Children. (3 hours) 

Reading interests of children. Advanced study of children's literature. Survey 
of informational materials in subject fields including: books, periodicals, films, 
filmstrips, records, pictures, pamphlet materials. (D. Brown.) 

L. S. Ed. 132. Library Materials for Youth. (3) 

Reading interests of young people. Literature for adolescents. Informational 
materials in subject fields including: books, periodicals, films, filmstrips, rec- 
ords, pictures, pamphlet materials. (D. Brown.) 

SECONDARY EDUCATION 

GENERAL AND ACADEMIC 
For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Sec. Ed. 130. The Junior High School. (2-3) 

A general overview of the junior high school. Purposes, functions and charac- 
teristics of this school unit; a study of its population, organization, program 
of studies, methods, staff, and other similar topics, together with their implica- 
tions for prospective teachers. (McClure, Grambs.) 

Sec. Ed. 134. Materials and Procedures for the Secondary 
School Core Curriculum. (3) 

Laboratory fee, $1.00. This course is designed to bring practical suggestions 
to teachers who are in charge of core classes in junior and senior high schools. 
Materials and teaching procedures for specific units of work are stressed. 

(Grambs.) 

For Graduates 
Sec. Ed. 239. Seminar in Secondary Education, (2) 

(McClure, V. Anderson, Risinger.) 

Sec. Ed, 247. Seminar in Science Education. (2) 

An opportunity to pursue special problems in curriculum making, course of 
study development, or other science teaching problems. Class members may 
work on problems related directly to their own school situations. (Lockard.) 

Sec, Ed, 268. Seminar in Educational Sociology. (2) 

(Grambs, Risinger.) 
BUSINESS EDUCATION 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
B, Ed, 101. Problems in Teaching Office Skills. (2) 

Problems in development of occupational competency, achievement tests, stand- 
ards of achievement, instructional materials, transcription, and the integration of 
office skills. For experienced teachers. (Patrick.) 

106 



Education 

B. Ed. 102. Methods and Materials in Teaching Bookkeeping 
AND Related Subjects. (2) 

Important problems and procedures in the mastery of bookkeeping and related 
office knowledges and skills including a consideration of materials and teaching 
procedures. (Patrick.) 

B. Ed. 104. Basic Business Education in the Secondary 
Schools. (2) 

Includes consideration of course objectives; subject matter selection; and 
methods of organizing and presenting business principles, knowledges, and prac- 
tices. (Patrick.) 

For Graduates 

B. Ed. 200. Administration and Supervision of Business 
Education. (3) 

Major emphasis on departmental organization and its role in the school pro- 
gram, curriculum, equipment, budget-making, supervision, guidance, place- 
ment and follow-up, school-community relationships, qualifications and selec- 
tion of teaching staff, visual aids and in-service programs for teacher develop- 
ment. For administrators, supervisors, and teachers. (Patrick.) 

B. Ed. 205. Seminar in Business Education. (2) 

The study and evaluation of the literature and research in Business Education. 

B. Ed. 255. Principles and Problems of Business 
Education. (2-3) 

Principles, objectives, and practices in business education; occupational founda- 
tions; current attitudes of business, labor and school leaders; general business 
education relation to consumer business education and to education in general. 

(Patrick.) 

B. Ed. 256. Curriculum Development in Business 
Education. (2-3) 

This course is especially designed for graduate students interested in devoting 
the summer session to a concentrated study of curriculum planning in business 
education. Emphasis will be placed on the philosophy and objectives of the 
business education program, and on curriculum research and organization of 
appropriate course content. (Staff.) 

HOME ECONOMICS EDUCATION 
For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
H. E. Ed. 102. Problems in Teaching Home Economics. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, H. E. Ed. 140. A study of the man- 
agerial aspects of teaching and administering a homemaking program; the 
physical environment, organization, and sequence of instructional units, re- 
source materials, evaluation, home projects. (Spencer.) 

H. E. Ed. 120. Evaluation of Home Economics. (3) 

The meaning and function of evaluation in education; the development of a plan 
for evaluating a homemaking program with emphasis upon types of evaluation 
devices, their construction, and use. (Spencer.) 

107 



Education 

For Graduates 

H. E. Ed. 200. Seminar in Home Economics Education. (2) 

(Spencer.) 

H. E. Ed. 202. Trends in the Teaching and Supervision of 
Home Economics. (2-4) 

Study of home economics programs and practices in light of current educational 
trends. Interpretation and analysis of democratic teaching procedures, out- 
comes of instruction, and supervisory practices. (Spencer.) 

MUSIC EDUCATION 
For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Mus. Ed. 12S. Music for Elementary Classroom Teacher. (2-3) 

Prerequisite, Music 16 or consent of instructor. A study of the group activities 
and materials through which the child experiences music. The course is de- 
signed to aid both music specialists and classroom teachers. It includes an out- 
line of objectives and a survey of instructional methods. (Eisenstadt.) 

Mus. Ed. 129. Methods of Class Instrumental Instruction. (2) 

Prerequisites, or concurrent registration in Music 80, 81. Organization of and 
techniques for teaching beginning instrumental classes in the public schools. 
Two one-hour laboratories and one lecture per week. (Berman.) 

Mus. Ed. 132. Music in the Secondary School. (2-3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. A study of the vocal and instrumental pro- 
grams in the secondary schools. A survey of the needs in general music and the 
relationship of music to the core curriculum. (Eisenstadt.) 

Mus. Ed. 139. Music for the Elementary School Specialist. (2) 

First semester. Prerequisite, senior standing. A survey of instructional ma- 
terials; objectives; organization of subject matter; lesson planning; methods 
and procedures in singing, listening, rhythms, simple instruments and creative 
activities for the music specialist in the elementary school. Twenty periods of 
observation will be required for three credits. (Eisenstadt.) 

Mus. Ed. 163. Band Techniques and Administration. (2) 

Prerequisites, Music 81 and 161. Two lectures and two laboratory hours per 
week. Intensive study of a secondary wind instrument and of rehearsal tech- 
niques. A survey of instructional materials, administrative procedures, and 
band pageantry will be included. (Henderson.) 

Mus. Ed. 170. Methods and Materials for Class Piano Instruc- 
tion. (2) 

The study of the principles and techniques of teaching class piano. The fol- 
lowing groups, beginning and advanced, will be used for demonstrations: 
elementary school children, junior and senior high school students, adults. 
Special emphasis will be placed on the analysis of materials. (de Vermond.) 

Mus. Ed. 171. String Teaching in the Public Schools. (2) 

A study of the problems of organizing and developing the string program in 
the public schools. Emphasis is placed on exploratory work in string instru- 
ments, on the study of teaching techniques, and on the analysis of music litera- 
ture for solo, small ensembles, and orchestra. (Berman.) 

lOS 



Education 

Mus. Ed. 173. The Vocal Music Teacher and School Organiza- 
tion. (2) 

Prerequisite, practice teaching or teaching experience. Study of the function 
of the vocal music teacher in the elementary and secondary schools. Students 
will serve as resource teachers for those enrolled in Mus. Ed. 139. Open to 
graduate students by permission of instructor. (Grentzer.) 

Mus. Ed. 175. Methods and Materials in Vocal Music for the 
High School. (2-4) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. A survey of suitable vocal and choral 
repertoire for the high school. Problems of diction interpretation, tone pro- 
duction, and phrasing. The course is designed primarily for choral directors and 
teachers of voice classes. The course may be repeated for credit since differ- 
ent repertoires are covered each time the course is offered. 

Mus. Ed. 180. Instrumental Music for the High School. (2) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. A survey of the repertoires for high 
school orchestra, band, and small ensemble. Problems of interpretations, 
intonation, tone quality, and rehearsal techniques. The course may be re- 
peated for credit, since different repertoires are covered each time the course 
is offered. 

For Graduates 

Mus. Ed. 200. Research Methods in Music and Music Education. 
(3) 

The application of methods of research to problems in the fields of music and 
music education. The preparation of bibliographies and the written exposition 
of research projects in the area of the student's major interest. (Grentzer.) 

Mus. Ed. 201. Administration and Supervision of Music in the 
Public Schools. (3) 

The study of basic principles and practices of supervision and administration 
with emphasis on curriculum construction, scheduling, budgets, directing of 
in-service teaching, personnel problems, and school-community relationships. 

(Grentzer.) 

Mus. Ed. 204. Current Trends in Music Education. (Seminar). (3) 

A survey of current philosophies and objectives of music in the schools. The 
scope and sequence of the music curricula, vocal and instrumental, on the ele- 
mentary and secondary levels. (Grentzer.) 

Mus. Ed. 205. Seminar in Vocal Music in the Elementary 
Schools. (2) 

A comparative analysis of current methods and materials used in the ele- 
mentary schools. A study of the music curriculum as a part of the total school 
program, and of the roles of the classroom teacher and the music specialist. 

(Grentzer.) 

Mus. Ed. 206. Choral Conducting and Repertoire. (3) 

The study and reading of choral literature of all periods, including the con- 
temporary, suitable for use in school and community choruses. Style, interpre- 
tation, tone quality, diction, rehearsal and conducting techniques are analyzed. 

(Staff.) 

109 



Education 

Mus. Ed. 207. Seminar in Vocal Music in the Secondary Schools. 
(2) 

A comparative analysis of current methods and materials used in teaching 
junior and senior high-school classes in general music, history and apprecia- 
tion, theory, and voice; and in directing choral groups and community sing- 
ing. (Grentzer.) 

Mus. Ed. 208. The Teaching of Music Appreciation. (3) 

A study of the objectives for the elementary and secondary levels; the tech- 
niques of directed listening, the presentation of theoretical and biographical 
materials, course planning, selection and use of audio-visual aids, and library 
materials, and the correlation between music and other arts. (Ulrich.) 

Mus. Ed. 209. Seminar in Instrumental Music. (2) 

A consideration of acoustical properties and basic techniques of the instru- 
ments. Problems of ensemble and balance, intonation, precision, and interpreta- 
tion are studied. Materials and musical literature for orchestras, bands and 
small ensembles are evaluated. (Staff.) 

Mus. Ed. 210. Advanced Orchestration and Band Arranging. 
(Seminar). (2) 

Prerequisite, Music 147 or the equivalent, or consent of the instructor. A 
study of arranging and transcription procedures in scoring for the orchestra 
and band. Special attention is given to the arranging problems of the in- 
strumental director in the public schools. (Henderson.) 

Mus. Ed. 250. History and Aesthetics of Music Education. (3) 

The study of the development of pedagogical practices in music education, 
their aesthetic implications and educational values. (Grentzer.) 

SPECIAL EDUCATION 

Sp. Ed. 170. Introduction to Special Education. (3) 

Designed to give an understanding of the needs of all types of exceptional chil- 
dren, stressing preventive and remedial measures. (Hebeler.) 

Sp. Ed. 171. Characteristics of Exceptional Children. (3-6) 

A. Mentally Retarded. B. Gifted. C. Perceptually impaired. Prerequisite, 
Sp. Ed. 170. Studies the diagnosis, etiology, physical, social, and emotional 
characteristics of exceptional children. (Renz.) 

Sp. Ed. 172. Education of Exceptional Children. (3-6). 

A. Mentally Retarded. B. Gifted. C. Perceptually impaired. Prerequisite, Sp. 
Ed. 171 or equivalent. Offers practical and specific methods of teaching ex- 
ceptional children. Selected observation of actual teaching may be arranged. 

(Hebeler.) 

Sp. Ed. 173. Curriculum for Exceptional Children. (3-6) 

A. Mentally Retarded. B. Gifted. Prerequisite, Sp. Ed. 171 or equivalent. 
Examines the principles and objectives guiding curriculum for exceptional chil- 
dren; gives experience in developing curriculum for these children; studies 
various curricula currently in use. (Hebeler.) 

no 



Education 

Sp. Ed. 200. Exceptional Children and Youth. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Deals primarily with research relevant to 
the intellectual, psychological, physical, and emotional characteristics of ex- 
ceptional children. (Renz.) 

Sp. Ed. 205. The Exceptional Child and Society. (3) 

Prerequisite, Sp. Ed. 200 or consent of instructor. Relationship of the role 
and adjustment of the child with an exceptionality to societal characteristics. 

(Renz.) 

Sp. Ed. 210. Administration and Supervision of Special Educa- 
tion Programs. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Consideration of the determination, estab- 
lishment and function of educational programs for exceptional children for 
administrative and supervisory personnel. (Hebeler.) 

Sp. Ed. 215. Evaluation and Measurement of Exceptional Chil- 
dren and Youth. (3) 

Prerequisites, Ed. 150, Ed. 151, Sp. Ed. 200. Deals with the understanding 
and interpretation of the results of psychological and educational tests appli- 
cable for use with exceptional children. (Renz.) 

Sp. Ed. 220. Educational Diagnosis and Planning for Exceptional 
Children and Youth. (3) 

Prerequisite, Sp. Ed. 215. Deals with the identification of learning characteris- 
tics of exceptional children and the planning of appropriate programs. 

(Hebeler.) 

Sp. Ed. 225. Problems in the Education of the Mentally Re- 
tarded. (3) 

Prerequisite, 9 hours Sp. Ed. including Sp. Ed. 200, or consent of instructor. 
Consideration of the pertinent psychological, educational, medical, sociological 
and other relevant research and theoretical material relevant to the determina- 
tion of trends, practices, regarding the mentally retarded. (Renz.) 

Sp. Ed. 230. Problems in the Education of the Gifted. (3) 

Prerequisite, 9 hours Sp. Ed. including Sp. Ed. 200, or consent of instructor. 
Consideration of the pertinent psychological, educational, medical, sociological 
and other relevant research and theoretical material relevant to the determina- 
tion of trends, practices, regarding the gifted. (Hebeler.) 

Sp. Ed. 235. Problems in the Education of Children with Emo- 
tional Disturbances. (3) 

Prerequisite, 9 hours Sp. Ed. including Sp. Ed. 200, or consent of instructor. 
Consideration of the pertinent psychological, educational, medical, sociological 
and other relevant research and theoretical material relevant to the determina- 
tion of trends, practices, regarding the emotionally disturbed. (Hebeler.) 

Sp. Ed. 278. Seminar in Special Education. (2) 

Prerequisite, 9 hours in Special Education, or consent of instructor. An over- 
view of education of exceptional children. (Hebeler.) 

Ill 



Electrical Engineering 
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 

Professors: Tompkins, Reed and Wagner. 
Associate Professors: Hochuli, Price, Rutelli and Simons. 
Lecturers: Chu, Hogan, Schuchard, Trent and Vanderslice. 
Assistant Professors: Marcovitz and Pugsley. 

A written qualifying examination is required of all candidates for the 
master's degree in electrical engineering. This examination is held on the 
Saturday immediately prior to the fall registration period. Off-campus and 
part-time students must have satisfactorily completed a minimum of nine 
semester hours of graduate course work before being admitted to the writ- 
ten qualifying examination. Full-time students having less than nine 
semester hours of graduate course work are permitted to take this exami- 
nation by special arrangement. The student must have been admitted to 
the Graduate School (electrical engineering) before taking this examination. 

Students working toward the Master of Science degree in electrical engi- 
neering must take a minimum of six semester hours of course work from 
resident professors of electrical engineering. Students working toward 
the Doctor of Philosophy degree must take a minimum of twenty-four 
semester hours of course work from resident professors of electrical en- 
gineering and satisfactorily pass a written qualifying examination; students 
presenting a minor in electrical engineering must include at least six 
semester hours of electrical engineering from resident professors. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
E. E. 100. Alternating-Current Circuits. (4) 

First semester. Three lectures and one laboratory period a week. Pre- 
requisites, Math. 20, 21, Phys. 20, 21, and E. E. 1. Laboratory fee, $4.00. 
Required of juniors in electrical engineering. Single and polyphase-circuit 
analysis under sinusoidal and non-sinuosidal conditions of operation. Mesh- 
current and nodal methods of analysis. Harmonic analysis by the Fourier 
series method. Theory and design of tuned coupled circuits. (Price, Simons.) 

E. E. 101. Engineering Electronics. (4) 

Second semester. Three lectures and one laboratory period a week. Pre- 
requisite, E. E. 100. Laboratory fee, $4.00. Required of juniors in elec- 
trical engineering. Theory and applications of electron tubes and associated 
circuits with emphasis on equivalent-circuit and graphical analysis of audio 
amplifiers; theory of feedback amplifiers. (Price, Reed, Simons.) 

E. E. 103. Random Variable. (2) 

Second semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. E. 100 and concur- 
rent registration in E. E. 101. Electrical noise involving Gaussian distribu- 
tion; Shot Noise; elements of probability and statistics; noise figure. (Price.) 

112 



Electrical Engineering 
E. E. 104. Long-Line Theory. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. E. 100 and E. E. 
107. Required of juniors in electrical engineering. Long-line theory applied 
to audio-frequency and ultra-high-frequency systems; theory of stubbing; 
elements of filter theory; impedance matching; Maxwell's equations in rect- 
angular and cylindrical coordinates and in scalar notation. (Reed.) 

E. E. 106. Programming Digital Computers. (2) 

First semester. Required of juniors in electrical engineering. Prerequisites, 
Math. 21, Phys. 21, E. E. 1, and concurrent registration in Math. 64. Number 
systems; theory of digital computers; essential steps in programming; numerical 
solutions. (Larson.) 

E. E. 108. Natural Circuit Behavior. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, E. E. 100, Math. 64, 
concurrent registration in E. E. 101. Required of juniors in electrical engineer- 
ing. Current, voltage, and power transients in lumped-parameter networks; 
the pole-zero concept of circuit analysis; introduction and utilization of Laplace 
transforms. (Price, Simons.) 

E. E. 109. Pulse Techniques. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, E. E. 108, Math. 64. 
Required of seniors in electrical engineering. Generation, shaping, amplifica- 
tions and delay of non-sinusoidal wave-forms. Circuit design techniques and 
application to radar, television, and computers. (Simon, Schulman.) 

E. E. 110. Transistor Circuitry. (3) 

First and second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. E. 101. 
P-n junction theory; point-contact and junction type transistors; transistor para- 
meters; equivalent circuits; typical transistor amplifier and oscillator circuits. 

(Simons.) 

E. E. Ill, 112. Radio Engineering. (4, 4) 

First and second semesters. TTiree lectures and one laboratory period a week. 
Prerequisites, E. E. 101, E. E. 108. Laboratory fee, $4.00. Required of seniors 
in electrical engineering. Characteristics of radio-frequency circuits including 
the design of tuned couple circuits and Class C amplifiers. Amplification, oscil- 
lation, modulation, and detection with particular emphasis on radio-frequency 
amplification and broadcast-range reception. (Wagner, Price, Rutelli.) 

E. E. 113. Network Synthesis. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. E. 108. Reactive net- 
works; Two-terminal pair networks; filters; amplifier networks; block dia- 
grams. (Price, Simons.) 

E. E. 114. Applied Electronics. (3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. E. 101. 

Detectors and discriminators; gas tube characteristics and associated circuits; 

photoelectric tubes and associated circuits; rectifiers and regulators; vacuum 

tube instruments. (Staff.) 

E. E. 115. Feedback Control Systems. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, E. E. 101 and E. E. 
108. Servomechanisms and automatic regulators; investigations of electric, 

113 



Electrical Engineering 

hydraulic, pneumatic, and mechanical elements; analysis of system differential 
equations and development of transfer functions; stability criteria. (Price.) 

E. E. 116. Feedback Control Systems Laboratory. (1) 

Second semester. One laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, E. E. 115 or 
concurrent registration in E. E. 115. Laboratory fee, $5.00. Laboratory ex- 
ercises involving some of the basic concepts of feedback control systems. 

(Price.) 

E. E. 118. Electrical Energy Conversion. (4) 

First semester. Three lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, 
E. E. 100. Required of seniors in electrical engineering. Laboratory fee, $5.00. 
The operating principles of alternating-current machinery considered from 
theoretical, design, and laboratory points of view. Synchronous generators and 
motors; single and poly-phase transformers; three-phase induction generators 
and motors; single-phase induction motors; emphasis on energy conversion. 

(Reed.) 

E. E. 120. Electromagnetic Waves. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Math. 64, senior stand- 
ing in electrical engineering or physics. The basic mathematical theory of electro- 
magnetic wave propagation employing Maxwell's equations in scaler and vector 
form and in generalized coordinates; application to wave-guide transmission; 
propagation in space. (Reed.) 

E. E. 130. Electronic Analog Computers. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, E. E. 101. Math. 64. 
Principles of electronic computers of the analog type. Analog computing com- 
ponents, operational amplifiers, d-c amplifiers, instrument servos, multipliers, and 
function generators. (Chu.) 

E. E. 131. Electronic Digital Computors. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, E. E. 101, Math. 64. 
Principles of electronic computers of the digital type. Digital computing opera- 
tions, basic computing and control circuits, logical design, arithmetic unit, mem- 
ory systems, and control units. (Chu.) 

E. E. 160, 161. Vacuum Tubes (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Math. 64, 
senior standing in electrical engineering or physics. Electron emission; laws of 
electron motion; space charge effects; noise in vacuum tubes; magnetic lenses; 
klystrons; magnetrons; photoelectric tubes; other special-purpose tubes. 

(Hochuli.) 

For Graduates 
E. E. 201. Electromagnetic Theory. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. E. 120 or E. E. 215. 
Theoretical analysis and engineering applicants of Laplace's, Poisson's and Max- 
well's equations. (Hochuli.) 

E. E. 202, 203. Transients in Linear Systems. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, undergrad- 
uate major in electrical or mechanical engineering or physics. Operational 

114 



Electrical Engineering 

circuit analysis; the Fourier integral; transient analysis of electrical and me- 
chanical systems and vacuum tube circuits by the Laplace transform method. 

(Wagner.) 

E. E. 206, 207. Microwave Engineering. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week first semester and two lec- 
tures and one laboratory period a week second semester. Prerequisite, E .E. 
201 or E. E. 216. Laboratory fee, E. E. 207, second semester, $5.00. Basic 
consideration in solving field problems by differential equations; circuit concepts 
and their validity at high frequency; propagation and reflection of electro- 
magnetic waves; guided electromagnetic waves; high frequency oscillators and 
tubes; radiation engineering. (Hochuli.) 

E. E. 212, 213. Servomechanisms. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, undergraduate 
major in electrical or mechanical engineering or physics. (It is desirable that 
the student should have had E. E. 202.) The design and analysis of regulatory 
systems, emphasizing servo-mechanisms. Regulatory systems are analyzed by 
means of the governing differential equations to provide background for more 
practical studies of frequency spectrum analysis. Characteristics of actual 
systems. (Price.) 

E. E. 215, 216. Radio Wave Propagation. (3,3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, undergrad- 
uate major in electrical engineering, physics, or mathematics. Maxwell's wave 
equat-'on; concept of retarded magnetic vector potential; propagation over plane 
earth; propagation over spherical earth; refraction; meteorological effects; 
complex antennas; air-to-air propagation; lobe modulation, (Reed.) 

E. E. 218, 219. Signal Analysis and Noise. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, undergraduate 
major in electrical engineering or physics. Fourier series and integrals; phase 
and frequency modulation; noise figures of linear systems; shot effect; power 
spectra; applications of correlation function; properties of noise. (Hogan.) 

E. E. 220, 221. Theory of Communication. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. E. 219. 
Measure of information and channel capacity; methods of describing random 
signals and circuit analysis involving those signals. The statistical theory of 
communication systems. Systems which are statistically optimum. (Hogan.) 

E. E. 222. Graduate Seminar. (1-3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, approved application for candidacy to the de- 
gree of Master of Science or Doctor of Philosophy in electrical engineering. 
Seminars are held on topics such as microwave engineering, radiation engineer- 
ing, non-linear circuit analysis, tensor analysis, and other topics of current 
interest. Since the subject matter is continually changing, a student may receive 
a number of credits by re-registration. (Reed, Rutelli. and Wagner.) 

E. E. 230. Mathematics of Circuit Analysis. 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, undergraduate major in 
electrical engineering or physics. The mathematics of circuit analysis, including 
determinants, matrices, complex variable, and the Fourier integral. 

(Vanderslice.) 

115 



English Language and Literature 

E. E. 23 L Active Network Analysis. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. E. 230. The complex 
frequency plane; conventional feedback amplifier theory; Bode's mathematical 
definitions of feedback and sensitivity; theorems for feedback circuits; stability 
and physical realizability of electrical networks. Nyquist's and Routh's criteria 
for stability. (Vanderslice.) 

E. E. 232, 233. Network Synthesis. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. E. 231 
or equivalent. Design of driving-point and transfer impedance functions with 
emphasis on the transfer loss and phase of minimum-phase networks; flow 
diagrams; physical network characteristics, including relations existing between 
the real and imaginary components of network functions; modern methods of 
network synthesis. (Vanderslice.) 

E. E. 235. Applications of Tensor Analysis. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. E. 202 or E. E. 230. 
The mathematical background of tensor notation which is applicable to electrical 
engineering problems. Applications of tensor analysis to electric circuit theory 
and to field theory. (Wagner.) 

E. E. 399. Electrical Engineering Research. 

Prerequisite, approved application for candidacy to the degree of Master of 
Science or Doctor of Philosophy in electrical engineering. Six semester hours 
of credit in E. E. 399 are required of M. S. degree candidates and a minimum 
of eighteen semester hours are required of Ph.D. candidates. A thesis covering 
an approved research problem and written in conformity with the regulations 
of the Graduate School is a partial requirement for either the degree of Master 
of Science or the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in electrical engineering. 

(Graduate Staff.) 



ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 



Professors: Murphy, Aldridge, Bode, Cooley, Harman (Emeritus), 
McManaway (P.T.) and Zeeveld. 

Associate Professors: Beall, Fleming, Friedman, Hovey, Jerman, 

LUTWACK, MiSH, AND MyERS. 

Assistant Professors: Brown, Portz, and Smith. 

The Department of English offers graduate work leading to the degrees 
of Master of Arts and Doctor of Philosophy. Candidates normally take 
both major and minor work within the Department of English, but with 
permission students may take minor work in other departments. 

Departmental requirements for the degree of Master of Arts include: 
(1) Eng. 210; (2) 3 credits from the following: Eng. 101, 102, 107, 
202; (3) 6 credits in Eng. 230, 231. Candidates must meet a foreign 

116 



English Language and Literature 

language requirement by either ( 1 ) passing the Graduate School reading 
examination in French or German; or (2) submitting a record of 12 un- 
dergraduate credits in one of the following languages: French, German, 
Spanish, Italian, Latin, or Greek. Students who wish to continue their 
work in this department towards the doctorate will be expected to elect 
the first alternative. 

Departmental requirements for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in- 
clude: (1) a reading knowledge of French and German; (2) Eng. 102 
and 202; (3) an oral qualifying examination (normally waived for Uni- 
versity of Maryland Masters of Arts in English), to be taken in the first 
year of residence after the master's degree or its equivalent; (4) a com- 
prehensive written examination on English and American literature. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Eng. lOL History of the English Language. (3) 

Second semester. (Herman.) 

Eng. 102. Old English. (3) 
First semester. 

Eng. 104. Chaucer. (3) 

First semester. (Cooley.) 

Eng. 107. American English. (3) 
Second semester. 

Eng. 110, 111. Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Mish, Zeeveld.) 

Eng. 112, 113. Literature of the Renaissance. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Zeeveld.) 

Eng. 115, 116. Shakespeare. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Zeeveld.) 

Eng. 120. English Drama from 1660 to 1880. (3) 

Second semester. (Ward.) 

Eng. 121. Milton. (3) 

Second semester. (Murphy.) 

Eng. 122. Literature of the Seventeenth Century, 
1600-1660. (3) 

First semester. (Mish, Murphy.) 

Eng. 123. Literature of the Seventeenth Century, 1660-1700. (3) 

Second semester. (Mish.) 

Eng. 125, 126. Literature of the Eighteenth Century. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Myers.) 

Eng. 129, 130. Literature of the Romantic Period. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Smith, Weber ) 

117 



English Language and Literature 

Eng. 134, 135. Literature of the Victorian Period. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Brown, Cooley, Jerman.) 

Eng. 139, 140. The English Novel. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Jerman, Ward.) 

Eng. 141. Major British Writers. (3) 

First and second semesters. Two writers studied intensively each semester. 

(Fleming, Panichas.) 
Eng. 143. Modern Poetry. (3) 

First semester. (Fleming.) 

Eng. 144. Modern Drama. (3) 

First semester. (Weber.) 

Eng. 145. The Modern Novel. (3) 

Second semester. (Andrews, Panichas.) 

Eng. 148. The Literature of American Democracy. (3) 

Second semester. (Barnes.) 

Eng. 150, 151. American Literature. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Gravely, Hovey, Thorberg.) 

Eng. 155, 156. Major American Writers. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Gravely, Lutwack, Portz.) 

Eng. 157. Introduction to Folklore. (3) 

First semester. (Birdsall, Cooley.) 

Eng. 160. Advanced Expository Writing. (3) 

Second semester. (Myers, Staff.) 

Eng. 170. Creative Writing. (3) 

First semester. (Fleming.) 

Eng. 171. Advanced Creative Writing. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, permission of the instructor. (Fleming.) 

Eng. 172. Playwriting. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, permission of the instructor, (Fleming.) 

Eng. 190, 191. Honors Conference and Reading. (1, 1) 

(Staff.) 
Eng. 199. Senior Proseminar in Literature. (3) 

(Staff.) 
Eng. 201. Bibliography and Methods. (3) 

First semester. (Hovey, Mish.) 

Eng. 202. Middle English. (3) 

Second semester. (Cooley.) 

Eng. 204. Seminar in Medieval Literature. (3) 

First semester. (Cooley.) 

118 



Entomology 

Eng. 206, 207. Seminar in Renaissance Literature. (3,3) 

First and second semesters. (McManaway, Zeeveld.) 

Eng. 210. Seminar in Seventeenth Century Literature. (3) 

Second semester. (Mish.) 

Eng. 212, 213. Seminar in Eighteenth Century Literature. (3, 3) 
First and second semesters. (Aldridge.) 

Eng. 214, 215. Seminar Nineteenth Century Literature. (3, 3) 
First and second semesters. (Jerman.) 

Eng. 216, 217. Literary Criticism. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Lutwack.) 

Eng. 218. Seminar in Literature and the Other Arts. (3) 

(Myers.) 

Eng. 225,226. Seminar in American Literature. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. (Bode, Hovey.) 

Eng. 227, 228. Problems in American Literature. (3, 3) 

(Aldridge.) 

Eng. 230. Special Studies in English Literature. (3) 

Individual reading projects in literary works and related scholarship of a limited 
period; conferences; reports. (Cooley, Staff.) 

Eng. 231. Special Studies in American Literature. (3) 

Individual reading projects in literary works and related scholarship of a limited 
period; conferences; reports. (Lutwack.) 

Eng. 241. 242. Studies in Twentieth Century Literature. (3, 3) 

(Bode, Hovey.) 

Eng. 399. Thesis Research. (1-6) 

Arranged. (Staff.) 



ENTOMOLOGY 

Professors: Bickley, Ditman, and Langford. 

Associate Professor: Jones. 

Assistant Professors: Harrison, Haviland, Steinhauer. 

The Department of Entomology offers work toward the degrees of Master 
of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. Candidates for the Ph.D. degree 
who are not employed by the Department are expected to register for a 
minimum of 24 semester hours credit during two semesters at College Park. 

119 



Entomology 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Ent. 100. Advanced Apiculture. (3) 

Second semester. One lecture and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisite, Ent. 4. The theory and practice of apiary management. Designed 
for the student who wishes to keep bees or requires a practical knowledge of 
bee management. $3.00 Lab fee. (Abrams.) 

Ent. 105. Medical Entomology. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one two-hour laboratory period a week. Pre- 
requisite, Ent. 1 or consent of the Department. A study of insects and related 
anthropods that affect the health and comfort of man directly and as vectors 
of disease. In discussions of the control of such pests the emphasis will be 
upon community sanitation. $3.00 Lab fee. (Jones.) 

Ent. 107. Insecticides. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, consent of the Department. The development 
and use of contact and stomach poisons, fumigants and other important chem- 
icals, with reference to their chemistry, toxic action, compatibility, and host 
injury. Recent research emphasized. (Shepard.) 

Ent. 109. Insect Physiology. (2) 

Second semester. Two lectures and occasional demonstrations. Prerequisite^ 
consent of the Department. The functioning of the insect body with particular 
reference to blood, circulation, digestion, absorption, excretion, respiration, 
reflex action and the nervous system, and metabolism. (Jones.) 

Ent. 116. Insect Pests of Ornamentals and Greenhouse 

Plants. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one two-hour laboratory period a week. 
Prerequisite, Bot. 1 and Zool. 1. The recognition, biology, and control of in- 
sects injurious to plants grown in ornamental planting, nurseries, and other 
glass. $3.00 Lab fee. (Haviland.) 

Ent. 119. Insect Pests of Domestic Animals. (2) 

First semester. One lecture and one two-hour laboratory period a week. Pre- 
requisite, Ent. 1 or consent of the Department. The recognition, biology, and 
control of insects and related arthropods injurious to horses, cattle, hogs, sheep, 
goats, and poultry. $3.00 Lab. fee. (Haviland.) 

Ent. 120. Insect Taxonomy and Biology. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisite, Ent. 1. Introduction to the principles of systematic entomology 
and the study of all orders and the important families of insects; immature 
forms considered. $3.00 Lab. fee. (Bickley.) 

Ent. S121. Entology for Science Teachers. (4) 

Summer session. Five lectures and five two-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Laboratory fee, $3.00. This course will include the elements of morphology, 
taxonomy and biology of insects using examples commonly available to high 
school teachers. It will include practice in collecting, preserving, rearing and 
experimenting with insects insofar as time will permit. (Haviland.) 

120 



Entomology 

Ent. 198. Special Problems. (1-3) 

First and second semesters. Credit and prerequisites, to be determined by the 
Department. Investigation of assigned entomological problems. (Staff.) 

Ent. 199. Seminar. (1, 1) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, senior standing. Presentation of 
original work, reviews and abstracts of literature. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 

Ent. 203. Advanced Insect Morphology. (3) 

First semester. One lecture and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Insect structure with special reference to function. Given in preparation for 
advanced work in physiology or research in morphology. $3.00 Lab. fee. 

(Haviland.) 

Ent. 205. Insect Ecology. (2) 

Second semester. One lecture and one two-hour laboratory period a week. 
Prerequisite, consent of the Department. A study of fundamental factors in- 
volved in the relationship of insects to their environment. Emphasis is placed 
on the insect as a dynamic organism adjusted to its surroundings. $3.00 Lab. 
fee. (Harrison.) 

Ent. 206. Culicidology. (2) 

Second semester. One lecture and one three-hour laboratory period a week. 
(Alternate years.) The classification, distribution, ecology, biology, and control 
of mosquitoes. $3.00 Lab. fee. (Bickley.) 

Ent. 207. Advanced Insect Physiology. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
(Alternate years.) Prerequisites, one year of organic chemistry and Ent. 109 
or equivalent. In this course students rear experimental insects, make up rea- 
gents and solutions to be used, set up equipment, calibrate it, and make de- 
tailed measurements and observations on the functions of selected organ systems. 
$3.00 Lab. fee. (Jones.) 

Ent. 208. Toxicology of Insecticides. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. (Alternate years.) A study of the 
physical, chemical and biological properties of insecticides. Emphasis is placed 
on the relationship of chemical structure to insecticidal activity and mode of 
action. Mechanism of resistance are also considered. (Staff.) 

Ent. 301. Advanced Entomology. (1-6) 

Credit and prerequisites to be determined by the Department. First and sec- 
ond semesters. Studies of minor problems in morphology, physiology, taxonomy 
and applied entomology, with particular reference to the preparation of the 
student for individual research. (Staff.) 

Ent. 399. Research. 

First and second semesters. Required of graduate students majoring in ento- 
mology. This course involves research on an approved project. A dissertation 
suitable for publication must be submitted at the conclusion of the studies as a 
part of the requirements for an advanced degree. (Staff.) 

121 



Foreign Languages and Literature 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 



Professors: Alden, Falls, Goodwyn, Jones, Prahl, Quynn, 
Rand, Smith, and Zucker (Emeritus). 

Associate Professors: Alter, Bingham, Dobert, Hering, Nemes, 
Parsons, and Rosenfield. 

Assistant Professors: Mendeloff and Rovner. 



MASTER OF ARTS 

Candidates must pass, in addition to written examinations in the courses 
pursued, a written examination based on the reading lists in their respec- 
tive fields of French, German and Spanish, established by the Department. 
The examination will test the general familiarity of the candidate with 
his respective field and his powers of analysis and criticism. The oral 
examination will deal chiefly with the field of his thesis. 

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY 

Candidates must pass a comprehensive written examination at least three 
months before the degree is awarded. This examination will include 
linguistics and each of the major literary fields. 

Attention is called to the courses in Comparative Literature listed on 
pages 76-77. 



For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 



FRENCH 



French 0. Intensive Elementary French. (0). 

First and second semesters and summer session. Graduate students should 
register as auditors only. Intensive chemistry course in the French language 
designed particularly for graduate students who wish to acquire a reading 
knowledge. (Hall.) 

French 101. Applied Linguistics. (3) 

The nature of Applied Linguistics and its contributions to the effective teaching 
of foreign languages. Comparative study of English and French, with em- 
phasis upon points of divergence. Analysis, evaluation and construction of 
related drills. (Mendeloff.) 

French 103-104. Advanced Composition. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Translation from English into French, free compo- 
sition, practical study of syntactical structure. (Alden.) 

French 107. Introduction to Medieval Literature. (3) 

French literary history from the ninth through the fifteenth century, selected 
readings from representative texts. (Mendeloff.) 

122 



Foreign Languages and Literature 

French IIL French Literature of the Sixteenth Century. (3) 
The Renaissance in France; humanism; Rabelais and Calvin; the Pleiade; 
Montaigne. (Falls.) 

French 115-116, French Literature of the Seventeenth 
Century. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. First semester: Descartes, Pascal, Corneille, Racine. 
Second semester: the remaining great classical writers, with special attention 
to Moliere. (Quynn, Rosenfield.) 

French 125-126. French Literature of the Eighteenth 
Century. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. First semester: development of the philosophical and 
scientific movement; Montesquieu. Second semester: Voltaire, Diderot, Rous- 
seau. (Falls, Bingham.) 

French 131-132. French Literature of the Nineteenth 
Century. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. First semester: drama and poetry from Romanti- 
cism to Symbolism. Second semester: the major prose writers of the same 
period. (Bingham, Quynn.) 

French 141-142. French Literature of the Twentieth 
Century. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. First semester: drama and poetry from Symbolism 
to the present time. Second semester: the contemporary novel. (Alter, Alden.) 

French 171-172. French Civilization. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. French life, customs, culture, traditions. First 
semester: the historical development. Second semester: present-day France. 

(Rosenfield, Bingham.) 

For Graduates 

French 201. The History of the French Language. (3) 

A rapid survey of the major phenomena of French linguistic history, con- 
sidered from the internal and external points of view. Introduction to lin- 
guistic terminology. Prerequisite, some knowledge of Latin desirable. (Smith.) 

French 203. Comparative Romance Linguistics. (3) 

A comparative study of the principal Romance languages: phonology, morphol- 
ogy, syntax, lexicon. (Smith, Mandeloff.) 

French 207. Elementary Old French. (3) 

An introduction to Old French accidence and vocabulary through the reading 
of the Chanson de Roland. Readings in modern French of representative works 
of Old French literature. (Smith.) 

French 208, Old French Phonology and Morphology, (3) 

Phonological changes from Vulgar Latin to Old French; the resultant Old French 
accidence and morphological changes from Vulgar Latin to Old French. 
Prerequisite, some knowledge of Latin desirable. (Smith.) 

123 



Foreign Languages and Literature 

French 209. Medieval French Culture. (3) 

Extensive readings in modern French translations of the masterpieces of Old 
French literature; lectures and readings on the historical and social setting of 
these works in feudalism. (Smith.) 

French 210. Elementary Old Provencal. (3) 

The essentials of Old Provencal phonology and morphology necessary to read- 
ing; readings in Old Provencal lyric poetry and other representative literary 
works. Prerequisite, some knowledge of Latin desirable. (Smith.) 

French 211-212. Seminar in French Classicism. (3, 3) 

Origin and underlying ideas of classicism will be discussed. Main classic writers 
to be studied, with shifting emphasis from year to year. (Quynn.) 

French 220-221. The Age of Enlightenment. (3, 3) 

The literature of ideas from Bayle to Condorcet. (Bingham.) 

French 230. Seminar in Romanticism. (3) 

Sources and theories of French romanticism will be studied, along with works 
of major French romantic writers. Different writers or genres will be stressed 
from year to year. (Quynn.) 

French 235-236. The Realistic Novel in the Nineteenth 

Century, (3, 3) 

The main works of Balzac, Stendhal, Flaubert, the Goncourts, Zola, Maupassant, 
and Daudet. (Alter.) 

French 243-244. The Contemporary French Theater. (3, 3) 

The most important writers and trends in French drama from the end of the 
nineteenth century to the present. (Falls.) 

French 245-246. Seminar in the Contemporary Novel. (3, 3) 

Critical study of the entire work of a major twentieth century novelist, such as 
Proust, Gide, Mauriac, Duhamel. Usually a different novelist will be treated 
in the second semester. (Alden.) 

French 251-252. The History of Ideas in France. (3, 3) 

Analysis of currents of ideas as reflected in French literature. First semester, 
17th and 18th centuries. Second semester, 19th and 20th centuries. Conducted 
in English. (Rosenfield.) 

French 271-272. Advanced Writing and Stylistics. (3, 3) 

Composition, translation, explication de textes of both prose and poetry. Pre- 
requisite, French 121 or 122 or their equivalent. (Alden.) 

French 281-282. Reading Course. (3, 3) 

Designed to give graduate students a background of a survey of French litera- 
ture. Extensive outside readings, with reports and periodic conferences. 

(Staff.) 

French 291-292. Seminar. Topic to be determined. (3, 3) 
124 



Foreign Languages and Literature 
French 399. Research. (1-6) 

Credits determined by work accomplished. Guidance in preparation of master's 
and doctoral theses. Conferences. (Staff.) 

GERMAN 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

German 0. Intensive Elementary German. (0) 

First and second semesters and summer session. Graduate students should 
register as auditors only. Intensive elementary course in the German language 
designed particularly for graduate students who wish to acquire a reading 
knowledge. (Hering.) 

German 103-104. Advanced Composition. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Translation from English into German, free 
composition, letter writing. (Staff.) 

German 125-126. German Literature of the Eighteenth 

Century. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. The main works of Klopstock, Wieland, Lessing, 
Herder, Goethe, Schiller. (Hering, Staff.) 

German 131-132. German Literature of the Nineteenth 

Century. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Study of the literary movements from romanticism 
to naturalism. (Prahl, Staff.) 

German 141-142. German Literature of the Twentieth 

Century. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prose and dramatic writings from Gerhart Haupt- 
mann to the present. Modern literary and philosophical movements will be 
discussed. (Dobert, Staff.) 

German 171-172. German Civilization. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Study of the literary, educational, artistic traditions; 
great men, customs, and general culture. (Dobert, Staff.) 

German 191. Bibliography and Methods. (3) 

Second semester. Especially designed for German majors. (Staff.) 

Attention is called to Comp. Lit. 106, Romanticism in Germany, and 
Comp. Lit. 107, The Faust Legend in English and German Literature. 

For Graduates 
The requirements of students will determine which courses will be offered. 

German 201. History of the German Language. (3) 

Lectures on the evolution of modem German. Reading and analysis of 
selected illustrative texts. (Jones.) 

125 



Foreign Languages and Literature 

German 203. Gothic. (3) 

An introduction to historical Germanic linguistics. A grammatical analysis 
and reading of selections from the Gothic Bible. (Jopes.) 

German 204. Old High German. (3) 

A study of Old High German grammar, and readings from the literature of the 
period. (Jones.) 

German 205. Middle High German. (3) 

Grammar and readings in Middle High German literature. (Jones.) 

German 207. Literature of Old High German and Middle 

High German. (3) 

A study of the literature of the Old High German and Middle High German 
periods. (Jones.) 

German 211-212. Literature of the Sixteenth and 

Seventeenth Centuries. (3, 3) 

Study of the Reformation, Humanism and the Baroque. The main works of 
Luther, Sachs, Wickram, Fischart, Opitz, Gryphius, Grimmelshausen. (Hering.) 

German 224-225. Goethe and his Time. (3, 3) 

The main works of Goethe and his contemporaries as reflecting the literary 
development from Rococo to Biedermeier. (Hering.) 

German 226. Schiller. (3) 

Study of Schiller's works with emphasis on his dramas. (Prahl.) 

German 230. German Romanticism. (3) 

Special consideration given to the ideas and the style of romantic writers. 

(Prahl.) 

German 234. The German Drama of the Nineteenth 
Century. (3) 

Kleist, Grabbe, Biichner, Grillparzer, Hebbel, Hauptmann. (Dobert.) 

German 250. The German Lyric. (3) 

Types of lyrical poetry from "Minnesang" to Symbolism with emphasis on 
post-Goethean lyricists. (Hering.) 

German 281-282. Reading Course. (3, 3) 

Designed to give the graduate student a background of a survey of German 
literature. Extensive outside readings, with reports and periodic conferences. 

(Dobert.) 

German 291-292. Seminar. (3, 3) 

Topic to be determined. (Staff.) 

German 399. Research. (1-6) 

Credits determined by work accomplished. Guidance in preparation of master's 
and doctoral theses. Conferences. (Staff.) 

126 



Foreign Languages and Literature 

SPANISH 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Spanish lOL Applied Linguistics. (3) 

Nature of Applied Linguistics and its contribution to the effective teaching of 
foreign languages. Comparative study of English and Spanish with emphasis 
upon points of divergence. Analysis, evaluation, and construction of related 
drills. (Mendeloff.) 

Spanish 103-104. Advanced Composition. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Training in self-expression in Spanish, free composi- 
tion, writing and speaking. (Goodwyn.) 

Spanish 107. Introduction to Medieval Literature. (3) 

Spanish literary history from the eleventh through the fifteenth century. Selective 
readings from representative texts. (Mendeloff, Parsons.) 

Spanish 111. Poetry of the Sixteenth and Seventeenth 
Centuries. (3) 

Renaissance, mystics, and baroque poetry. (Goodwin, Rand.) 

Spanish 112. Prose of the Sixteenth and Seventeenth 
Centuries. (3) 

Selected readings in the pastoral, sentimental, picturesque novel and in the Ro- 
mances of Chivalry. (Goodwyn.) 

Spanish 113, Drama of the Sixteenth and Seventeenth 
Centuries. (3) 

Selected plays of Lope de Vega, Calderon de la Barca, Tirso de Molina, and 
others. (Parsons, Rovner.) 

Spanish 114. Lope de Vega. (3) 

Selected works of Lope de Vega. (Parsons, Rovner.) 

Spanish 115-116. Cervantes. (3, 3) 

Drama, Exemplary Novels and Don Quixote. (Goodwyn, Rand.) 

Spanish 125. Literature of the Eighteenth Century. (3) 

Reform and neo-classicism: Feijoo and Luzan. (Goodwyn.) 

Spanish 131. Nineteenth Century Fiction. (3) 

Reading of some of the significant novels of the nineteenth century. 

(Parsons, Rand.) 

Spanish 135. Modern Spanish Poetry. (3) 

Significant poets of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. (Nemes, Rand.) 

Spanish 136. Modern Spanish Drama. (3) 

Significant plays of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. (Parsons, Rand.) 

Spanish 141-142. Literature of the Twentieth Century. (3, 3) 

First semester. Modern Spanish thought in the Generation of 1898 and after. 
Second semester; the contemporary Spanish novel. (Rand.) 

127 



Foreign Languages and Literature 

Spanish 161. Spanish-American Fiction. (3) 

The novel and short story from the Wars of Independence to the present 
and their reflection of society in the Hispanic republics of the Western Hemi- 
sphere. (Nemes.) 

Spanish 162. Spanish-American Poetry. (3) 

Representative poetry after 1800 and its relation to European trends and writers. 

(Nemes.) 

Spanish 163. Spanish-American Essay. (3) 

Social and political thought from Bolivar to Vasconcelos and its relationship 
to social and political conditions in Spanish America. (Nemes.) 

Spanish 171-172. Spanish Civilization. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. A survey of two thousand years of Spanish his- 
tory, outlining the cultural heritage of the Spanish people, their great men, 
traditions, customs, art and literature, with special emphasis on the interrela- 
tionship of social and literary history. (Rand.) 

Spanish 173-174. Latin-American Civilization. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Introductory survey of the cultures of Latin Amer- 
ica; the historical-political background and the dominating concepts in the 
lives of the people. (Goodwyn, Nemes.) 

For Graduates 

Spanish 201. The History of the Spanish Language. (3) 

The evolution of Spanish as a Romance language from its Latin origins through 
the fifteenth century. Linguistic analysis of related literary specimens. 

(Mendeloff.) 

Spanish 203. Comparative Romance Linguistics. (3) 

A comparative study of the principal Romance languages: phonology, mor- 
phology, syntax, lexicon. (Mendeloff, Smith.) 

Spanish 207. Medieval Spanish Literature. (3) 

The principal literary genres from the eleventh through the fifteenth century. 

(Mendeloff, Parsons.) 

Spanish 215-216. Seminar.- The Golden Age in Spanish Liter- 
ature. (3, 3) 

Study of a literary genre or author, such as the novel of chivalry, the pas- 
toral novel, the picaresque novel, Cervantes, Lope de Vega, Gongora, Cal- 
deron de la Barca. (Goodwyn, Parsons, Rovner.) 

Spanish 233. The Novel of the Nineteenth Century. (3) 

Study of a major work or works of novelists, such as Fernan, Cabellero, Alar- 
con, Valera, Pereda, Galdos, Pardo Bayan. (Goodwyn, Parsons.) 

Spanish 234. The Drama of the Nineteenth Century. (3) 

Study of a major work or works of dramatists such as Moratin, Duque de 
Rivas, Zorrilla, Tamayo y Baus, Echegaray. (Goodwyn, Parsons.) 

128 



Foreign Languages and Literature 

Spanish 237-238. Seminar in Hispanic Poetry (Nineteenth and 

Twentieth Centuries). (3, 3) 

Study of a specific poetic movement such as Romanticism, Modernism, Post- 
modernism. (Nemes, Rand, Goodwyn.) 

Spanish 241-242. Spanish Prose of the Twentieth Century. (3, 3) 
The thought and aesthetics of the work of major writers of essay and novel, 
such as the Generation of 1898 and the novel after 1940. (Rand.) 

Spanish 245. The Drama of the Twentieth Century. (3) 

Important works of Benavente, Azorin, Garcis, Lorca, Casona, Buero Vallejo 
and others. (Rand.) 

Spanish 263. Colonial Spanish- American Literature. (3) 

Colonial thought and writers and their influence in the national literatures. 

(Nemes.) 

Spanish 264. National Spanish-American Literature, Seminar. (3) 
Study of a significant work, genre, or groups of works in a certain country or 
group of countries of Spanish America in relation to other literatures with 
special emphasis on the interrelationship of social and literary history. 

(Nemes.) 

Spanish 281-282. Reading Course. (3, 3) 

Designed to give the graduate student a background of a survey of Hispanic lit- 
erature. Extensive readings, with reports and periodic conferences. (Staff.) 

Spanish 291-292. Seminar. (3, 3) 

Topic to be chosen. (StaflF.) 

Spanish 399. Research. (1-6) 

Credits to be determined by work accomplished. Guidance in preparation of 
master's and doctoral theses. Conferences. (Staff.) 

RUSSIAN 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Russian 101, 102. Modern Russian Literature. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Works of Maxim Gorky, Alexi Tolstoy, P. Ro- 
manov, M. Zoshchenko, M. Sholokhov. (Hitchcock.) 

Russian 103, 104. Russian Literature of the Nineteenth Century. 

(3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Selected writings of Pushkin, Gogol, Lermantov, 
Turgenev, Dostoevsky, Leo Tolstoy, Chekhov. (Hitchcock.) 

CHINESE 

Chinese 101, 102. Readings from Chinese History. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Based on an anthology of historians from the 
Chou to the Ching dynasties. (Chen.) 

129 



Geography 

Chinese 171, 172. Chinese Civilization, (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. This course supplements Geography 134 and 135, 
Cultural Geography of East Asia. It deals with Chinese literature, art, folklore, 
history, government, and great men. Second semester: developments in China 
since 1911. The course is given in English translation. (Chen.) 

HEBREW 

Hebrew 101. The Hebrew Bible. (3) 

Reading of selected portions of the Pentateuch. (Greenberg.) 

Hebrew 102. The Hebrew Bible. (3) 

Reading of selected portions of the Prophets, (Greenberg.) 

Hebrew 103, Modern Hebrew Literature. (3) 

The period of the Haskalah (Enlightenment). (Greenberg.) 

Hebrew 104. Modern Hebrew Literature. (3) 

The period of the Tehiah (Modern Revival). (Greenberg.) 



GEOGRAPHY 

Professors: Van Royen and Hu, 
Consulting Professor: Roterus. 
Associate Professors: Ahnert, Chaves. 
Lecturers: Van Bergen van der Grijp, Lemons. 

Students seeking graduate degrees in geography are expected to have 
acquired a broad foundation in the subject and in allied fields. This 
foundation must have included a minimum of 24 semester hours in geog- 
raphy, of which 3 semester hours shall have been in morphology, 3 in 
map reading and interpretation, 3 in meteorology, 3 in climatology, 3 in 
pedology and 9 semester hours in general human, economic, or regional 
geography. In addition the student must have taken successfully the 
following courses, or their equivalents, in allied fields: anthropology (3 
semester hours), economics (6 semester hours), history (6 semester 
hours), introductory or general botany (3 or 4 semester hours), foreign 
language (12 semester hours ) . Students coming to Maryland from other 
institutions are required to take an examination in a major foreign language 
in the Department. Students who do not have this background will be 
accepted as graduate students in a provisional status only and will be 
required to make up their deficiencies before being admitted to candidacy 
for an advanced degree. Graduate credit will not be given for courses 
taken to make up for deficiencies in background. 

130 



Geography 

In addition to meeting the general requirements of the Graduate School, 
candidates for the master's degree in geography are required to have taken 
successfully: one field course (Geog. 170 or 200, or equivalent), a 
course in cartography, a course in soils and one seminar. In addition 
to the final oral examination, the candidate for the master's degree in 
geography is required to pass satisfactorily a written examination covering 
the field in which he has worked, his understanding of basic principles, 
and his power of reasoning. 

A graduate student seeking the Doctor of Philosophy degree in geography 
must take a comprehensive written and oral examination to determine 
whether he has sufficiently broad and profound knowledge and understand- 
ing of the entire field of geography to qualify as a candidate for the 
doctor's degree. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Geog. 100. Regional Geography of Eastern Anglo-America. (3) 

Prerequisite, Geog. 10, or Geog. 15, or permission of instructor. A study of the 
cultural and economic geography, and the geographic regions of eastern United 
States and Canada, including an analysis of the significance of the physical 
basis for present-day diversification of development, and the historical geo- 
graphic background. (Mika.) 

Geog. 101. Regional Geography of Western Anglo-America. (3) 

Prerequisite, Geog. 10, or Geog. 15, or permission of instructor. A study of 
western United States, western Canada, and Alaska along the lines mentioned 
under Geog. 100. (Mika.) 

Geog. 103. Geographic Concepts and Source Materials. (3) 

A comprehensive and systematic survey of geographic concepts designed ex- 
clusively for teachers. Stress will be placed upon the philosophy of geography 
in relation to the social and physical sciences, the use of the primary tools 
of geography, source materials, and the problems of presenting geographic 
principles. 

Geog. 104. Geography of Major World Regions. (3) 

A geographic analysis of the patterns, problems, and prospects of the world's 
principal human-geographic regions, including Europe, Anglo-America, the 
Soviet Union, the Far East, and Latin America. Emphasis upon the casual 
factors of differentiation and the role geographic differences play in the inter- 
pretation of the current world scene. This course is designed especially for 
teachers. 

Geog. 105. Geography of Maryland and Adjacent Areas. (3) 

An analysis of the physical environment, natural resources, and population in 
relation to agriculture, industry, transport, and trade in the state of Maryland 
and adjacent areas. 

Geog. 110. Economic and Cultural Geography of Caribbean 
America. (3) 

An analysis of the physical framework, broad economic and historical trends, 
cultural patterns, and regional diversification of Mexico, Central America, 
the West Indies, and parts of Colombia and Venezuela. (Chaves.) 

131 



Geography 

Geog. 111. Economic and Cultural Geography of South America. 
(3) 

A survey of natural environment and resources, economic developments and 
cultural diversity of the South American republics, with emphasis upon prob- 
lems and prospects of the countries. (Chaves.) 

Geog. 120. Geography of Europe. (3) 

First and second semester. Agricultural and industrial development of Europe 
and present-day problems in relation to the physical and cultural setting of the 
continent and its natural resources. (Ahnert.) 

Geog. 122. Economic Reserves and Development of Africa. (3) 

The natural resources of Africa in relation to agricultural and mineral produc- 
tion; the various stages of economic development and the potentialities of the 
future. (Deshler.) 

Geog. 123. Problems of Colonial Geography. (3) 

Problems of development of colonial areas, with special emphasis upon the 
development of tropical regions and the possibilities of white settlement in the 
tropics. 

Geog. 125. Geography of Asia. (3) 

Lands, climates, natural resources and major economic activities in Asia 
(except Soviet Asia). Outstanding differences between major regions. (Hu.) 

Geog. 130. Economic and Political Geography of Eastern Asia. 
(3) 

Study of China, Korea, Japan, the Philippines: physical geographic setting, 
population; economic and political geography. Potentialities of major regions 
and recent developments. (Hu.) 

Geog. 131. Economic and Political Geography of South and 
Southeast Asia. (3) 

Study of the Indian subcontinent. Farther India, Indonesia: physical geographic 
setting; population; economic and political geography. Potentialities of various 
countries and regions and their role in present Asia. (Hu.) 

Geog. 134. Cultural Geography of China and Japan. (3) 

Survey of geographical distribution and interpretation of cultural patterns of 
China and Japan. Emphasis on basic cultural institutions, outlook on life, unique 
characteristics of various groups. Trends of cultural change and contemporary 
problems. (Hu.) 

Geog. 140. Geography of the Soviet Union. (3) 

The natural environment and its regional diversity. Geographic factors in the 
expansion of the Russian state. The geography of agricultural and industrial 
production, in relation to available resources, transportation problems, and 
diversity of population. (Anderson.) 

Geog. 146. Regional Geomorphology. (3) 

Regional and comparative morphology, with special emphasis upon Anglo- 
America. (Ahnert.) 

132 



Geography 

Geog. 150. History and Theory of Cartography. (3) 

The development of maps throughout history, geographical orientation, coordi- 
nates, and map scales. Map projections, their nature, use, and limitations. 
Principles of representation of features on physical and cultural maps. Modern 
uses of maps and relationships between characteristics of maps and use types. 

(van Bergen van der Grijp.) 

Geog. 151, 152. Cartography and Graphics Practicum. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. One hour lecture and two two-hour laboratory 
periods a week. Techniques and problems of compilation, design, and con- 
struction of various types of maps and graphs. Relationships between map 
making and modern methods of production and reproduction. Trips to repre- 
sentative plants. Laboratory work directed toward cartographic problems en- 
countered in the making of non-topographic maps. (Wiedel.) 

Geog. 153. Problems in Cartographic Representation and Pro- 
cedure. (3) 

Two hours lecture and two hours laboratory a week. Study of cartographic 
compilation methods. Principles and problems of symbolization, classification, 
and representation of map data. Problems of representation of features at dif- 
ferent scales and for different purposes. Place-name selection and lettering 
stickup and map composition. (van Bergen van der Grijp.) 

Geog. 154. Problems of Map Evaluation. (3) 

Two hours lecture and two hours laboratory a week. Schools of topographic 
concepts and practices. Theoretical and practical means of determining map 
reliability, map utility, and source materials. Nature, status, and problems of 
topographic mapping in different parts of the world. Non-topographic special 
use maps. Criteria of usefulness for purposes concerned and of reliability. 

(Wiedel.) 

Geog. 155. Problems and Practices of Photo Interpretation. (3) 
Two hours of lecture and two hours of laboratory per week. Interpretation 
of aerial photographs with emphasis on the recognition of landforms of dif- 
ferent types and man-made features. Study of vegetation, soil, and other data 
that may be derived from aerial photographs. Types of aerial photographs and 
limitations of photo interpretation. (Ahnert.) 

Geog. 160. Advanced Economic Geography I. Agricultural Re- 
sources. (3) 

First semester, alternate years. Prerequisite, Geog. 10, or Geog. 15. The 
nature of agricultural resources, the major types of agricultural exploitation in 
the world, and the geographic distribution of certain major crops and animals 
in relation to the physical environment and economic geographic conditions. 
Main problems of conservation. (Van Royen.) 

Geog. 161. Advanced Economic Geography II. Mineral Resources. 

(3) 

First semester, alternate years. Prerequisite, Geog. 10, or Geog. 15. The nature 
and geographic distribution of the principal power, metallic, and other minerals. 
Economic geographic aspects of modes of exploitation. Consequences of geo- 
graphic distribution and problems of conservation. (Van Royen.) 

133 



Geography 

Geog. 170. Local Field Course. (3) 

First semester. Training in geographic field methods and techniques. Field 
observation of land use in selected rural and urban areas to eastern Maryland. 
One lecture per week with Saturday and occasional weekend field trips. Primarily 
for undergraduates. (Ahnert.) 

Geog. 180. Scientific Methodology and History of Geography. 
(3) 

First semester. For undergraduate and graduate majors in Geography. May be 
taken also by students with a minimum of 9 hours in systematic and 6 hours in 
regional geography. A comprehensive and systematic study of the history, 
nature, and basic principles of geography, with special reference to the major 
schools of geographic thought; a critical evaluation of some of the important 
geographical works and methods of geographic research. (Hu.) 

Geog. 190. Political Geography. (3) 

Geographical factors in national power and international relations; an analysis 
of the role of "Geopolitics" and "Geostrategy", with special reference to the 
current world scene. (Chaves.) 

Geog, 195. Geography of Transportation. (3) 

The distribution of transport routes on the earth's surface; patterns of transport 
routes; the adjustment of transport routes and media to conditions of the natural 
environment; transportation centers and their distribution. (Mika.) 

Geog. 197. Urban Geography. (3) 

Origins of cities, followed by a study of the elements of site and location with 
reference to cities. The patterns and functions of some major world cities will 
be analyzed." Theories of land use differentiation within cities will be ap- 
praised. (Mika.) 

Geog. 198. Topical Investigations. (1-3) 

First and second semester. Independent study under individual guidance. 
Restricted to advanced undergraduate students with credit for at least 24 hours 
in geography, and to graduate students. Any exception should have the ap- 
proval of the Head of the Department. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 

Geog. 200. Field Course. (3) 

. Field work in September, conferences and reports during first semester. For 
graduate students in geography. Open to other students by special permission of 
the Head of the Department of Geography. Practical experience in conduct- 
ing geographic field studies. Intensive training in field methods and techniques 
and in the preparation of reports. (Staff.) 

Geog. 210, 211. Seminar in the Geography of Latin America. 
(3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, Geog. 110, 111 or consent of instruc- 
tor. An analysis of recent changes and trends in industrial development, ex- 
ploitation of mineral resources and land utilization. (Chaves.) 

134 



Geography 

Geog. 220, 221. Seminar in the Geography of Europe and Africa. 
(3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, Geog. 120, 122 or consent of 
instructor. Analysis of special problems concerning the resources and develop- 
ment of Europe and Africa. (Van Royen, Deshler.) 

Geog. 230, 231. Seminar in the Geography of East Asia. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Analysis of problems concerning the geography of 
East Asia with emphasis on special research methods and techniques applicable 
to the problems of this area. (Hu.) 

Geog. 240, 241. Seminar in the Geography of the U.S.S.R. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, reading knowledge of Russian and 
Geog. 140 or consent of instructor. Investigation of special aspects of Soviet 
geography. Emphasis on the use of Soviet materials. (Staff.) 

Geog. 246. Seminar in the Geography of the Near East. (3) 

Geog. 250. Seminar in Cartography. (Credit arranged.) 

First or second semester. The historical and mathematical background of 
cartographic concepts, practices and problems, and the various philosophical and 
practical approaches to cartography. Discussions will be supplemented by the 
presentation of specific cartographic problems investigated by the students. 

(van Bergen van der Grijp.) 

Geog. 260. Advanced General Climatology. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Geog. 41, or consent of instructor. Advanced 
study of elements and controls of the earth's climates. Principles of climatic 
classification. Special analysis of certain climatic types. (Lemons.) 

Geog. 261. Applied Climatology. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Geog. 41, or consent of instructor. Study of 
principles, techniques, and data of micro-climatology, physical and regional 
climatology relating to such problems and fields as transportation, agriculture, 
industry, urban planning, human comfort, and regional geographic analysis. 

(Lemons.) 

Geog. 262, 263. Seminar in Meteorology and Climatology. (3, 3) 
First and second semesters. Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Selected topics 
in meteorology and climatology chosen to fit the individual needs of advanced 
students . ( Lemons . ) 

Geog. 280. Geomorphology. (3) 

Second semester. An advanced comparative study of selected geomorphic 
processes and land forms; theories of land forms evolution and geomorpho- 
logical problems. (Van Royen.) 

Geog. 290, 291. Selected Topics in Geography. (1-3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, joint consent of adviser and Head of 
the Department of Geography. Readings and discussion on selected topics in the 
field of geography. (StaflF.) 

Geog. 399. Thesis Research. 

(Credit to be arranged.) First and second semesters; summer session. (Staff.) 

135 



Government and Politics 

GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS 

Professors: Plischke, Burdette, Dillon, Harrison and Steinmeyer. 

Associate Professors: Anderson, Hathorn and McNelly, 

Assistant Professors: Alperin, Byrd, Jacobs and O'Donnell. 

Lecturer: Barber, 

The Department of Government and Politics offers a graduate course of 
study leading to the degree of Master of Arts and the degree of Doctor 
of Philosophy. 

For the master's degree, the student may either pursue a general program 
in government and politics or he may specialize in international affairs 
or in public administration. In addition to the completion of a minimum 
of 24 semester hours credit of formal course work (excluding thesis credit) 
in the major and minor fields combined, the master's candidate is required 
to demonstrate in a written comprehensive examination satisfactory com- 
petence in graduate course work in the major field and to write and defend 
in an oral examination a thesis acceptable to the Department. There is 
no language requirement for the M. A. degree. 

For the doctoral degree, the student must pursue a general program in 
government and politics, though a significant degree of specialization is 
permissible. The doctoral candidate must show in a written compre- 
hensive examination satisfactory competence in five of the following 
fields. (1) comparative government; (2) international affairs; (3) political 
theory; (4) public administration; (5) public law; (6) public poUcy and 
political behavior; (7) and state and local government. No candidate 
may attempt the comprehensive examination prior to the fulfillment of 
the language requirement for the doctorate, and no candidate may attempt 
the comprehensive examination more than twice. The following languages 
are approved for the Ph.D. requirement: French, German, Russian, 
Spanish, Chinese, Japanese, and Arabic. One of the languages must 
be either French or German. No two languages offered may be in the 
same language family, and no student may offer his native language. The 
completion of a dissertation acceptable to the Department, and defended 
in oral examination, is the final Ph.D. requirement. 

Additional information respecting requirements and procedures may be 
obtained from the Department, described in detail in a specially prepared 
Manual of Instructions for Graduate Study in Government and Politics. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

G. & P. 101. International Political Relations. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A study of the major factors underlying international 
relations, the methods of conducting foreign relations, the foreign policies of 
the major powers, and the means of avoiding or alleviating international 
conflicts. (Staflf.) 

136 



Government and Politics 

G. & P. 102. International Law. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A study of the basic character, general principles, and 
specific rules of international law, with emphasis on recent and contemporary 
trends in the field and its relation to other aspects of international affairs. 

(Harrison.) 

G. & P. 103. Contemporary African Politics. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1 . A survey of contemporary developments in the domestic 
and international politics of Africa, with special emphasis on the problems of 
national independence and the role of an emerging Africa in world affairs. 

G. & P. 104. Inter-American Relations. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. An analytical and historical study of the Latin- 
American policies of the United States and of problems in our relations with 
individual countries, with emphasis on recent developments. (Harrison, Barber.) 

G. & P. 105. Recent Far Eastern Politics. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. The background and interpretation of recent political 
events in the Far East and their influence on world politics. 

(Steinmeyer, McNelly.) 

G. & P. 106. American Foreign Relations. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. The principles and machinery of the conduct of 
American foreign relations, with emphasis on the Department of State and the 
Foreign Service, and an analysis of the major foreign policies of the United 
States. (Plischke, Barber.) 

G. & P. 108. International Organization. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. I. A study of the objectives, structure, functions, and 
procedures of international organizations, including the United Nations and 
such functional and regional organizations as the Organization of American 
States. (Plischke, Barber.) 

G. & P. 109. Foreign Policy of the USSR. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A study of the development of the foreign policy of 
the Soviet Union, with attention paid to the forces and conditions that make 
for continuities and changes from Tsarist policies. (Jacobs.) 

G. & P. 110. Principles of Public Administration. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A study of public administration in the United States, 
giving special attention to the principles of organization and management and 
to fiscal, personnel, planning, and public relations practices. 

(Dillon, O'Donnell.) 

G. & P. 111. Public Personnel Administration. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 110 or B. A. 160. A survey of public personnel administra- 
tion, including the development of merit civil service, the personnel agency, 
classification, recruitment, examination techniques, promotion, service ratings, 
training, discipline, employee relations, and retirement. (O'Donnell.) 

G. & P. 112, Public Financial Administration. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 110 or Econ. 142. A survey of governmental financial 
procedures, including processes of current and capital budgeting, the admin- 
istration of public borrowing, the techniques of public purchasing, and the 
machinery of control through pre-audit and post-audit. (O'Donnell.) 

137 



Government and Politics 

G. & P. 113. Governmental Organization and Management. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 110. A study of the theories of organization and manage- 
ment in American government with emphasis on new trends, experiments, and 
reorganizations. (Dillon.) 

G. & P. 120. Problems in Political Behavior. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. The problem approach to political behavior with 
emphasis on theoretical and empirical studies on selected aspects of the political 
process. 

G. & P. 124. Legislatures and Legislation. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A comprehensive study of legislative organization, 
procedure, and problems. The course includes opportunities for student contact 
with Congress and with the Legislature of Maryland. (Hathorn, Alperin.) 

G. & P. 131. Introduction to Constitutional Law. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A systematic inquiry into the general principles of the 
American constitutional system, with special reference to the role of the 
judiciary in the interpretation and enforcement of the federal constitution. 

(Hathorn, Byrd.) 

G. & P. 132. Civil Rights and the Constitution. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 131. A study of civil rights in the American constitutional 
context, emphasizing freedom of religion, freedom of expression, minority 
discrimination, and the rights of defendants. (Hathorn, Byrd.) 

G. &. P. 133. The Judicial Process. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. An examination of judicial organization in the United 
States at all levels of government, with some emphasis on legal reasoning, legal 
research, and court procedures. (Byrd.) 

G. & P. 141. History of Political Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A survey of the principal political theories set forth 
in the works of writers from Plato to Bentham. (Anderson, Byrd.) 

G. & P. 142. Recent Political Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A study of 19th and 20th century political thought, 
with special emphasis on recent theories of socialism, communism, and 
fascism. (Anderson, Byrd.) 

G. & P. 144. American Political Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A study of the development and growth of American 
political concepts from the colonial period to the present. (Anderson.) 

G. & P. 145. Russian Political Thought. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A survey and analysis of political ideas in Russia and 
the Soviet Union from early times to the present. (Anderson.) 

G. & P. 154. Problems of World Politics. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A study of governmental problems of international 
scope, such as causes of war, problems of neutrality, and propaganda. Students 
are required to report on readings from current literature. (Steinmeyer.) 

138 



Government and Politics 

G. & P. 160. State AND Local Administration. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A study of the administrative structure, procedures, and 
policies of state and local governments with special emphasis on the state level 
and on intergovernmental relationships, and with illustrations from Maryland 
governmental arrangements. (Dillon, O'Donnell.) 

G. & P. 161. Metropolitan Administration. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. An examination of administrative problems relating to 
public services, planning, and coordination in a metropolitan environment. 

G. & P. 171. Problems OF American Public Policy. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. The background and interpretation of various factors 
which affect the formation and execution of American public policy. 

(Hathorn.) 

G. & P. 174. Political Parties. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A descriptive and analytical examination of American 
political parties, nominations, elections, and political leadership. 

(Burdette, Hathorn, Alperin.) 

G. & P. 178. Public Opinion. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. An examination of public opinion and its effect on 
political action, with emphasis on opinion formation and measurement, propa- 
ganda, and pressure groups. (O'Donnell, Alperin.) 

G. & P. 181. Administrative Law. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A study of the discretion exercised by administrative 
agencies, including analysis of their functions, their powers over persons and 
property, their procedures, and judicial sanctions and controls. (Dillon.) 

G. & P. 191. Government and Administration of the Soviet 

Union. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A study of the adoption of the communist philosophy by 
the Soviet Union, of its governmental structure, and of the administration of 
government policy in the Soviet Union. (Steinmeyer, Jacobs.) 

G. & P. 192. Governments and Politics of Latin America. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 1. A comparative study of the governmental systems and 
political processes of the Latin American countries, with special emphasis on 
Argentina, Brazil, Chile, and Mexico. (Harrison, Barber.) 

G. & P. 193. Governments and Politics of Asia. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 97, or G. & P. 105, or Hist. 61, or Hist. 62, or Hist. 187, 
or Hist. 188, or Hist. 189. A comparative study of the political systems of 
China, Japan, India, and other selected Asian countries. (McNelly) 

For Graduates 

G. & P. 201. Seminar in International Political Organization.(3) 
A study of the forms and functions of various international organizations. 

(Plischke.) 

139 



Government and Politics 

G. & P. 202. Seminar in International Law. (3) 

Reports on selected topics assigned for individual study and reading in sub- 
stantive and procedural international law. (Harrison.) 

G. & P. 203. Functional Problems in International Relations. 
(3) 

An examination of the major substantive issues in contemporary international 
relations, involving reports on selected topics based on individual research. 

(Staff.) 

G. & P. 204. Area Problems in International Relations. (3) 

An examination of problems in the relations of states within a particular 
geographic area, such as Europe, Asia and the Far East, Africa and the 
Middle East, and the Western Hemisphere. Individual reporting as assigned. 

(Staff.) 

G. & P. 205. Seminar in American Political Institutions. (3) 

Reports on topics assigned for individual study and reading in the background 
and development of American government. (Burdette, Hathorn.; 

G. & P. 206. Seminar in American Foreign Relations. (3) 

Reports on selected topics assigned for individual study and reading in American 
foreign policy and the conduct of American foreign relations. (Plischke.) 

G. & P. 207. Seminar in Comparative Governmental Institutions. 
(3) 

Reports on selected topics assigned for individual study and reading in govern- 
mental and political institutions in governments throughout the world. (Staff.) 

G. & P. 208. Seminar in the Government and Politics of Emerg- 
ing Nations. (3) 

An examination of the programs of political development in the emerging 
nations with special reference to the newly independent nations of Asia and 
Africa and the less developed countries of Latin America. Individual reporting 
as assigned. 

G. & P. 209. Seminar in International Administration. (3) 

An analysis of the administrative aspects of international organizations with 
some attention given to program administration. (Plischke.) 

G. & P. 211. Seminar in Federal-State Relations. (3) 

Reports on topics assigned for individual study and reading in the field of recent 
federal-state relations. (Dillon.) 

G. & P. 213. Problems of Public Administration. (3) 

Reports on topics assigned for individual study and reading in the field of 
public administration. (Dillon.) 

G. & P. 214. Problems of Public Personnel Administration. (3) 

Reports on topics assigned for individual study and reading in the field of 
public personnel administration. (O'Donnell.) 

140 



Government and Politics 
G. & P. 215. Problems of State and Local Government. (3) 

Reports on topics assigned for individual study in the field of state and local 
government throughout the United States. (Dillon, O'Donnell.) 

G. & P. 216. Government Administrative Planning and Manage- 
ment. (3) 

Reports on topics assigned for individual study and reading in administrative 
planning and management in government. (Dillon.) 

G. & P. 218. Seminar in Urban Administration. (3) 

Selected topics are examined by the team research method with students respon- 
sible for planning, field investigation, and report writing. 

G. & P. 221. Seminar in Public Opinion. (3) 

Reports on topics assigned for individual study and reading in the field of public 
opinion. (Burdette, O'Donnell.) 

G. & P. 223. Seminar in Legislatures and Legislation. (3) 

Reports on topics assigned for individual study and reading about the composi- 
tion and organization of legislatures and about the legislative process. 

(Burdette, Hathorn.) 

G. & P. 224. Seminar in Political Parties and Politics. (3) 

Reports on topics assigned for individual study and reading in the fields of 
political organization and action. (Burdette, Hathorn.) 

G. & P. 225. Man and the State. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 142. Individual reading and reports on such recurring 
concepts in political theory as liberty, equality, justice, natural law and 
natural rights, private property, sovereignty, nationalism and the organic state. 

(Anderson, Byrd.) 

G. & P. 226. Scope and Method of Political Science. (3) 

Required of all Ph.D. candidates. A seminar in the methodologies of political 
science, and their respective applications to different research fields. Inter- 
disciplinary approaches and bibliographical techniques are also reviewed. 

G. & P. 227. Analytical Systems and Theory Construction. (3) 

Prerequisite, G. & P. 226. Examination of the general theoretical tools available 
to political scientists and of the problems of theory building. Attention is 
given to communications theory, decision-making, game theory and other 
mathematical concepts, personality theory, role theory, structural -functional 
analysis, and current behavioral approaches. 

G. & P. 231. Seminar in Public Law. (3) 

Reports on topics assigned for individual study and reading in the fields of 
constitutional and administrative law. (Hathorn, Byrd.) 

G. & P. 261. Problems IN American Government AND Politics. (3) 

An examination of contemporary problems in various fields of government and 
politics in the United States, with reports on topics assigned for individual 
study. (Staff.) 

G. & P. 399. Thesis Research. (Arranged). 

(Staff.) 

141 



History 
HISTORY 



Professors: Land, Bauer, Chatelain, Gordon (emeritus), 
Merrill, and France. 

Associate Professors: Conkin, Ferguson, Jashemski, Rivlin, 
Sparks, and Stromberg. 

Assistant Professors: Callcott, Farquhar, Gatell, and Yaney. 

MASTER OF ARTS 

A. Course Requirements 

1. Course requirements are those set forth under Academic Information 
in this catalog with the exception of No. 2 and No, 3 below. 

2. The course, H. 200 — Historiography, is required. 

3. Fifteen hours of the total required for the Master of Arts degree must 
be in history, of which at least 9 hours shall be in the field of 
concentration. 

B. Thesis 

1. A thesis is required of all candidates for the Master of Arts degree 
in history. 

2. The Department of History expects that the thesis, required of all 
candidates for the master's degree, shall display a capacity for directed 
research in a variety of historical sources, the ability to interpret 
factual detail, and shall constitute a properly documented report of 
the completed research. 

C. Examinations 

1. Candidates for the Master of Arts degree must pass a 4 to 6 hour 
written examination. The primary purpose of this examination is 
to determine the student's mastery of his major field. The examina- 
tion will require factual and interpretive material as well as bibli- 
ography and historiography, 

2, The oral examination will be confined to the thesis and the field in 
which it lies, 

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY 

A. Course Requirements 

L Course requirements are those set forth under Academic Information 
in this catalog, with the exception of 2 and 3 below. 

2, The course, H. 200 — Historiography, is required. 
142 



History 

3. In consultation with his adviser, a candidate must select four general 
fields to present for examination. 

4. Fields: 

Greek History Russian History 

Roman History Middle Eastern History 

Medieval History Chinese History 

European History 1500-1789 Latin American History 

European History 1789-Present U.S. History to 1865 

English History U.S. History Since 1865 

British Empire Minor Outside Department 

B. Examinations 

1. The Qualifying Examination is normally taken after the student has 
completed one year's work beyond the M.A. Separate written exam- 
inations of 3 to 4 hours each will be given on two selected fields on 
successive days. One language examination must be passed before 
the qualifying examination can be administered. 

2. The Comprehensive Examination is taken at the completion of the 
student's course work. The comprehensive examination covers the 
two remaining fields and will consist of written examinations of 3 
to 4 hours in each field and an oral examination of approximately 
two hours duration. The second language examination must be 
passed before the comprehensive examination can be administered. 
The satisfactory completion of the comprehensive examination shall 
for departmental purposes constitute admission to candidacy for 
which the student must make formal application within one month. 

3. The Final Examination is conducted by a committee appointed by 
the Dean of the Graduate School. This examination, of approxi- 
mately three hours duration, covers the research of the candidate as 
embodied in his thesis and his attainments in the fields of his major 
and minor subjects. 

C. The following languages are approved for the Ph.D. requirement: 

French, German, Russian, Spanish, Arabic, Turkish, Hebrew, Chinese, 
and Japanese. One of the languages must be either French or German. 
No two languages offered may be in the same language family. 

D. The Ph.D. Dissertation 

The Department of History expects that the dissertation, required of all 
candidates for the doctorate, shall display a capacity for independent 
research in primary and secondary sources. The resulting synthesis must 
constitute a contribution to historical knowledge and ought to reveal the 
qualities of insight and sound judgment in the handling of historical 
materials. 



143 



History 

AMERICAN HISTORY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
H. 5, 6 are prerequisites for courses H. 101 to H. 142, inclusive. 

H.lOl. American Colonial History. (3) 

The settlement and development of colonial America to the middle of the 
eighteenth century. (Ferguson.) 

H. 102. The American Revolution. (3) 

The background and course of the American Revolution through the formation 
of the Constitution. (Ferguson.) 

H. 103. The Formative Period in America, 1789-1824. (3) 

The evolution of the federal government, the origins of political parties, 
problems of foreign relations in an era of international conflict, beginnings of 
the industrial revolution in America, and the birth of sectionalism. (Ferguson.) 

H. 105. Social and Economic History of the 
United States to 1865. (3) 

A synthesis of American life from independence through the Civil War. 

(Chatelain.) 

H. 106. Social and Economic History of the 
United States Since the Civil War. (3) 

The development of American life and institutions, with emphasis upon the 
period since 1876. (Chatelain.) 

H. 114. The Middle Period of American History 1824-1860. (3) 

An examination of the political history of the United States from Jefferson to 
Lincoln with particular emphasis on the factors producing Jacksonian democ- 
racy. Manifest Destiny, the Whig Party, the anti-slavery movement, the Repub- 
lican Party, and secession. (Sparks.) 

H. 115. The Old South. (3) 

A study of the institutional and cultural life of the ante-bellum South with 
particular reference to the background of the Civil War. (Callcott.) 

H. 116. The Civil War. (3) 

Military aspects; problems of the Confederacy; political, social, and economic 
effects of the war upon American society. (Sparks.) 

H. 118, 119. Recent American History. (3, 3) 

Party politics, domestic issues, foreign relations of the United States since 1890. 
First semester, through World War \. Second semester, since World War I. 

(Merrill.) 

H. 121. History of the American Frontier. (3) 

Prerequisites, H. 5, 6, or the equivalent. The Trans-Allegheny West. The 
westward movement into the Mississippi Valley, and the Far West. (Staff.) 

H. 124. Reconstruction and the New Nation 1865-1896. (3) 

Problems of reconstruction in both South and North. Emergence of big business 
and industrial combinations. Problems of the farmer and laborer. (Merrill.) 

144 



History 

H. 127, 128. Diplomatic History of the United States. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. An historical study of the diplomatic negotiations 
and foreign relations of the United States. First semester: from the Revolution 
to the Civil War. Second semester: from the Civil War to the present. 

(Wellborn.) 

H. 129. The United States and World Affairs. (3) 

A consideration of the changed position of the United States with reference to 
the rest of the world since 1917. (Wellborn.) 

H. 133, 134. The History of Ideas in America. (3, 3) 

A history of basic beliefs about religion, man, nature, and society. Consent of 
the instructor is required for H. 134. (Conkin.) 

H. 135, 136. Constitutional History of the United States. (3, 3) 

A study of the historical forces resulting in the formation of the Constitution, 
and the development of American constitutionalism in theory and practice 
thereafter. (Gatell.) 

H. 141, 142. History of Maryland. (3, 3) 

First semester: a survey of the political, social and economic history of colonial 
Maryland. Second semester: Maryland's historical development and role as a 
state in the American Union. (Chatelain.) 

H. 147. History of Mexico. (3) 

The history of Mexico with special emphasis upon the independence period and 
upon relations between ourselves and the nearest of our Latin American 
neighbors. (Crosman.) 

H. 148. History of Canada. (3) 

A history of Canada, with special emphasis on the nineteenth century and upon 
Canadian relations with Great Britain and the United States. (Gordon.) 

EUROPEAN HISTORY 

H. 41, 42, H. 51, 52, or H. 53, 54 are prerequisites for courses H. 151 to H. 
180 inclusive. 

H. 151. History of the Ancient Orient and Greece. (3) 

A survey of the ancient civilizations of Egypt, the Near East, and Greece, with 
particular attention to their institutions, life, and culture. (Jashemski.) 

H. 153. History of Rome. (3) 

A study of Roman civilization from the earliest beginnings through the Republic 
and down to the last centuries of the Empire. (Jashemski.) 

H. 155, 156. History of Medieval Europe. (3, 3) 

A story of medieval government, society, and thought from the collapse of 
classical civilization to the Renaissance. (Robertson.) 

H. 157. The Age of Absolutism, 1648-1748. (3) 

Europe in the age of Louis XIV and the Enlightened Despots. (Staff.) 

145 



History 

H. 158. The Old Regime and the French Revolution. (3) 

Europe in the era of the French Revolution. (Staff.) 

H. 159, 160. History of European Ideas. (3, 3) 

Beginning with a review of the basic Western intellectual traditions as a 
heritage from the Ancient World, the course will present selected important 
currents of thought from the scientific revolution of the 16th and 17th centuries 
down to the 20th century. First semester: through the 18th century. Second 
semester: 19th and 20th centuries. (Stromberg.) 

H. 161. The Renaissance and Reformation. (3) 

The culture of the Renaissance, the Protestant revolt and Catholic reaction 
through the Thirty Years War. (Staff.) 

H. 163, 164. History of the British Empire. (3, 3) 

First semester; the development of England's Mercantilist Empire and its fall in 
the war for American Independence (1783). Second semester: the rise of the 
Second British Empire and the solution of the problem of responsible self- 
government (1783-1867), the evolution of the British Empire into a Common- 
wealth of Nations, and the development and problems of the dependent Empire. 

(Gordon.) 

H. 165. Constitutional History of Great Britain. (3) 

A survey of constitutional development in England with emphasis on the real 
property aspects of feudalism, the growth of the common law, the development 
of Parliament, and the expansion of liberties of the individual. (Gordon.) 

H. 167, 168. History of Russia. (3, 3) 

A history of Russia from earliest times to the present day. (Yaney.) 

H. 169, 170. Europe in the Nineteenth Century, 1815-1919. (3,3) 

A study of the political, economic, social, and cultural developments of Europe 
from the Congress of Vienna to the First World War. (Bauer.) 

H. 171, 172. Europe in the World Setting of the 
Twentieth Century. (3, 3) 

A study of political, economic, and cultural developments in twentieth century 
Europe with special emphasis on the factors involved in the two World Wars 
and their global impacts and significance. (Prange.) 

H. 173. The Soviet Union. (3) 

A history of the Bolshevik Revolution and the founding of the Soviet Union; the 
economic and foreign policy of the USSR to the present. (Yaney.) 

ASIAN HISTORY 

H. 181, 182. The Middle East. (3, 3) 

A survey of the historical and institutional developments of the nations of this 
vital area. The Islamic Empires and their cultures; impact of the west; breakup 
of the Ottoman Empire and rise of nationalism; present day problems. (Rivlin.) 



146 



History 
H. 183. The Contemporary Middle East. (3) 

H. 181 or 182 recommended though not required. The development of middle 
eastern institutions in the 19th and 20th centuries with reference to the emer- 
gence of contemporary states and their place in world affairs. (Rivlin.) 

H. 187, 188. History of China. (3, 3) 

A history of China from earliest times to the present. The emphasis is on the 
development of Chinese institutions that have molded the life of the nation 
and its people. (Farquhar.) 

H. 189. History of Japan. (3) 

A history of Japan from earliest to modern times. Emphasis is placed on the 
evolution of institutions and thought. (Farquhar.) 

H. 199. Proseminar in Historical Writing. (3) 

First and second semesters. (Bauer, Calcott, Gatell, Staff.) 

For Graduates 

H. 200. Historiography: Techniques of Historical Research 
AND Writing. (3) 

An introduction to the professional study of history, including an examination 
of the sources and nature of historical knowledge, historical criticism, and syn- 
thesis. Required of all candidates for advanced degrees in history. 

(Bauer, Sparks, and Staff.) 

H. 201. Seminar in American History. (3) 

(Staff.) 

H. 202. Historical Literature: American. (1-6) 

Readings in the standard works and monographic studies to meet the require- 
ments of qualified graduate students who wish intensive concentration in Amer- 
ican history. (Staff.) 

H. 203. Seminar in the History of Maryland. (3) 

(Land.) 

H. 205. Seminar in American Economic History. (3) 

A seminar in the problems of American economic history of selected periods. 

(Staff.) 

H. 206. Seminar in American Social History. (3) 

A seminar in the problems of American social history of selected periods. 

(Staff.) 

H. 208. Seminar in Recent American History. (3) 

(Merrill.) 

H. 211. Seminar in American Colonial History. (3) 

A seminar on selected problems of early American history. (Land.) 

H. 212. Seminar in the American Revolution. (3) 

A seminar on problems of American history in the revolutionary era. 

(Ferguson.) 

147 



History 

H. 214. Seminar in the Middle Period of American 
History. (3) 

Selected research topics in the period from Jackson to the Civil War. 

(Sparks.) 

H. 215. Seminar in the Old South. (3) 

A seminar on problems in the history of the ante-bellum South. (Staff.) 

H. 216. Seminar in the American Civil War. (3) 

Investigations of the political, military, and economic problems of the North 
and South during the Civil War. (Sparks.) 

H. 217. Seminar in Reconstruction America. (3) 

A seminar on problems resulting from the Civil War: political, social, and 
economic reconstruction. (Merrill.) 

H. 221. Seminar in Western History. (3) 

A seminar on American frontier history in the trans-Appalachian region and 
the Great Plains. (Pitt.) 

H. 233. Seminar in Early American Intellectual History. (3) 

A seminar on selected problems of American intellectual history before 1859. 

(Conkin.) 

H. 234. Seminar in Recent American Intellectual History. (3) 
A seminar on problems of American intellectual history since 1859. 

(Conkin.) 

H. 245. Topics in Latin American History. (3) 

A seminar on selected topics in Latin American history. (Crosman.) 

H. 251. Seminar in Greek History. (3) 

A seminar in the sources and problems of Greek history. (1) "Greek Federal 
Leagues" and "Political Institutions of the Greek City States" are usually offered 
in alternate years. (Jashemski.) 

H. 253. Seminar in Roman History. (3) 

A seminar in the sources and problems of Roman history. (1) "Provinces of 
the Roman Empire"; (2) "Roman Political Institutions," (3) "Roman Religion," 
and (4) "Municipal Life and Institutions" are usually offered in successive 
years. (Jashemski.) 

H. 255. Seminar in Medieval Europe. (3) 

A seminar in the sources and major problems of western medieval history, 
with emphasis upon administrative and constitutional problems. 

(Robertson.) 

H. 260. Historical Literature: European. (1-6) 

Readings in the standard works and monographic studies to meet the require- 
ments of qualified graduate students who wish intensive concentration in Euro- 
pean history. (Staff.) 

H. 265. Seminar in Middle Eastern History. (3) 

A seminar on selected problems of Middle Eastern history. (Rivlin.) 

148 



History 

H. 269. Seminar in Nineteenth Century Europe. (3) 

A seminar on problems in the history of western Europe during the nine- 
teenth century. (Bauer.) 

H. 281. Problems in the History of World War I. (3) 

Investigation of various aspects of the First World War, including military opera- 
tions, diplomatic phases, and political and economic problems of the war and 
its aftermath. (Prange.) 

H. 282. Problems in the History of World War II. (3) 

Investigation of various aspects of the Second World War, including military 
operations, diplomatic phases, and political and economic problems of the 
war and its aftermath. (Prange.) 

H. 285. Seminar in the History of Britain. (3) 

A seminar in selected problems of the history of the United Kingdom. 

(Gordon.) 

H. 286. Seminar in the History of the British Empire. (3) 

A seminar on selected problems in the history of the British Empire. (Gordon.) 

H. 289. Seminar in Chinese History. (3) 

A seminar on selected problems in the history of China. (Farquhar.) 

H. 290. Historical Literature: Asian. (1-6) 

Readings in the standard works and monographic studies to meet the require- 
ments of qualified graduate students who wish intensive concentration in Asian 
history. (Staff.) 

H. 390. The Teaching of History in Institutions of 
Higher Learning. (1) 

Investigation and discussion of professional teaching of history at the college 
level; course construction, presentation of subject matter, testing, instructional 
aids, evaluation of instruction. Required of all graduate assistants. 

H. 399. Research. (1-6) 

Credit apportioned to amount of research. First and second semesters. (Staff.) 



HOME ECONOMICS 

Professors: Lippeatt and Mitchell. 

Associate Professors: Braucher, Brown, Compton, and Wilson. 

Assistant Professors: Eheart and Wilbur. 

Lecturer: Britton. 

The College offers programs of study leading to the degree of Master of 
Science in the fields of food and nutrition, institution administration, gen- 
eral home economics, and textiles and clothing. 

149 



Home Economics 

A candidate for an advanced degree with a major or minor in home eco- 
nomics is expected to have an undergraduate major in home economics 
or in closely allied fields. The graduate study program will supplement 
the student's previous training and experience to achieve a well-rounded 
knowledge of the subject, with due consideration given to the student's 
purpose in undertaking graduate study. Graduate students may prepare 
for some specialized phases of home economics, including food, nutri- 
tion, textiles and clothing, and home economics education. (See Depart- 
ment of Education.) A student whose preparation is deficient in any area 
may meet prerequisites during a period of study as a special student or 
as a provisional candidate. Interdepartmental programs and offerings in 
the several areas of home economics to give breadth of contact with the 
field of home economics are available. 

FOOD AND NUTRITION 

Students with a major or minor in the field of food and nutrition may 
select from a variety of courses, seminars, and experiences in independent 
study. Each student plans his program in consultation with his major 
adviser, after consideration of his background and purpose in graduate 
study. 

A master's degree candidate wishing to major in this field is expected to 
have had training equivalent to that of an undergraduate major in the 
Department of Food Nutrition and Institution Management (basic courses 
in food and nutrition, organic and biochemistry, microbiology, and 
physiology). 

GENERAL HOME ECONOMICS 

This program is oriented toward home economists whose work is centered 
in home, school and community services, and to home economists re- 
turning to employment after a period of absence. It is primarily designed 
to increase competence in more than one area within the field of home 
economics. The program utilizes many courses in the University as well 
as the College to permit a well-integrated study. 

TEXTILES AND CLOTHING 

For students who wish to major or minor in textiles and clothing a 
variety of offerings is available as to course work and opportunities for 
independent study. Candidates for a Master of Science degree in the 
field of textiles and clothing are expected to acquire a general knowl- 
edge of all phases of the field and an understanding of research methods 
in it, and to concentrate in one of the various areas of textiles and 
clothing. 



150 



Home Economics 

FOOD, NUTRITION AND INSTITUTION ADMINISTRATION 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
FOOD 

F. & N. 130. Special Problems in Food and/or Nutrition. (1-3) 
First and second semesters. Prerequisites, F. & N. 5, Food 10, or consent of 
instructor. Problem may be in any one of several areas of food and nutrition 
and will carry the name of the basic area; e. g., child nutrition, adolescent 
nutrition. (Brown.) 

Food 150. Food Economics and Meal Management. (3) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and one two-hour laboratory period 
a week. Consent of department. Laboratory fee, $10.00. Distribution and 
marketing of the food supply; food costs; legal measures for consumer protec- 
tion; retail selection of food commodities in relation to levels of spending; 
management of family meals through organization of equipment and appoint- 
ments; time, energy, and money management for effective family living. 

(Staff.) 

Food 152, 153. Advanced and Experimental Foods. (3) (3) 

First and second semesters. One lecture and two two-hour laboratory periods 
a week. Prerequisites, F. & N. 5; Chem. 31, 32, 33, 34, or equivalent. Physical 
and chemical properties of food as related to modern theories of food process- 
ing; study of recent advances in the field; recipe development and group and 
laboratory experimentation as an introduction to methods of research. 

(Eheart.) 

For Graduates 
FOOD 
Food 200. Advanced Experimental Food. (3-5) 

Second semester. Two lectures and three laboratory periods a week. Labora- 
tory fee, $10.00. Selected readings of literature in experimental foods. De- 
velopment of individual problem. (Eheart.) 

Food 204. Recent Trends in Food. (2-3) 

First semester. Recent trends in the preparation, processing, and marketing 
of foods. (Brown.) 

Food 210. Readings in Food. (3) 

First or second semester. Prerequisites, Food 152, 153. A critical survey of the 
literature of recent developments in food research. (Seidel, Eheart.) 

Food 220. Seminar. (1-2) 

First and second semesters. Reports and discussions of current research in 
foods. (Eheart.) 

Food 399. Research. (1-6) 

First and second semesters. Credit in proportion to work done and results 
accomplished. Investigation in some phases of food which may form the 
basis for a thesis. (Eheart.) 

151 



Home Economics 

INSTITUTION ADMINISTRATION 

I. M. 150. Institution Organization and Management. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, F. & N. 5. Planning of functional kitchens for 
institutions and commercial food services. Equipment selection and mainte- 
nance, layout, field trips and observations in a variety of situations. (Brown.) 

I. M. 151. Institution Food Purchasing and Cost Control. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Food 10; Nutr. 20 or equivalent. 
Selection ot food, methods and units of purchase in large quantities. Budgets, 
food cost accounting and control. Field trips. (Brewer.) 

I. M. 152. Institution Foods. (3) 

Second semester. One lecture and two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
Food 10; Nutr. 20 or 121; or consent of instructor. Laboratory fee, $10.00. 
Application of basic principles and procedures of food preparation to quantity 
food preparation. Standardizing recipes; menu planning for various types of 
food services; determination of food costs. (Brown.) 

I. M. 153. Food Service Organization and Management. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Application of principles 
of scientific management to the organization of food services. Efficient per- 
sonnel management with emphasis on training and supervision of employees. 

(Brown.) 

I. M. 154. School Food Service. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one morning a week for field experience in 
a school food service. Prerequisites, Food 10 and Nutr. 20 or 121, or consent 
of instructor. Not open to Institution Administration majors. Study of organi- 
zation, management, menu planning, food purchasing and preparation and cost 
control for serving the noon meal in schools and child care centers. (Brown.) 

I. M. SI 66. Nutrition and Meal Planning. (2) 

Summer only. Special application to group food services: school lunches, 
restaurants, and hospitals. (StaflF.) 

I. M. SI 68. Cost Accounting for School Food Service. (2) 

Summer Session. Food cost accounting systems for school lunch programs; 
programs and procedures of accumulating, recording, and interpreting data for 
cost control. (Staflf.) 

I. M. SI 69. Food Purchasing for School Food Service. (3) 

Summer session. Purchasing procedures; grading, processing and packing of 
food: selection of food, specifications, and marketing regulations. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 

I. M. 200. Food Service Administration and Supervision. (3) 

First semester. One lecture and two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, 
I.M. 152 and 154 or equivalent. Supervision and administrative policies; per- 
sonnel management with emphasis on human relations, and philosophy under- 
lying management practices. 

152 



Home Economics 



NUTRITION 



NuTR. 121, Science of Nutrition. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, Chem. II, 13 or 1, 3, or consent of department. 
Two lectures and one two-hour laboratory period a week. An understanding of 
the chemical and physiological utilization of nutrients present in the various 
foods as related to individual human nutritional status, with studies applied 
nutrition. Laboratory fee, $3.00. (Hoyt.) 

Nutr. 123. Nutrition for Health Services. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Nutr. 20, Chem. II, 13 or 1, 3 or 
equivalent. Laboratory fee, $3.00. A study of nutritional status and the effect 
of food habits and food consumption on family health. Nutritional require- 
ments for individuals in different stages of development. Techniques and pro- 
cedures for the application of nutrition knowledge with consideration of various 
economic levels and social backgrounds. For graduate nurses, dietitians, health 
teachers, and social workers. (Braucher.) 

Nutr. 124. Advanced Nutrition. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, Consent of department; Zool. 1; Biochem. 81, 
82 or concurrent. Laboratory fee, $10.00. Two lectures and one two-hour 
laboratory. The progress of nutrition as found in the results of current re- 
search, with emphasis on interpretation and application. (Hoyt.) 

Nutr. 125. Therapeutic Nutrition. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequi- 
sites, Nutr. 121, 124. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Modifications of the normal 
adequate diet to meet human nutritional needs in pathological conditions. 

(McKinley.) 

For Graduates 

Nutr. 204. Recent Advances in Nutrition. (2-3) 

First and second semester. Factors that affect the nutritive value of food 
during production, cookery processes, holding practices, processing, packaging, 
and storage. (Braucher.) 

Nutr. 208. Recent Progress in Human Nutrition. (3) 

Second semester. Recent developments in the science of nutrition with em- 
phasis on the interpretation of these findings for application in health and 
disease. Aids for the dietitian in creating a better understanding of nutrition 
among patients, students of graduate status and personnel, such as those in the 
dental and medical professions. (Staff.) 

Nutr. 210. Readings in Nutrition. (3). 

First and second semesters. Reports and discussions of significant nutritional 
research and investigation. (Braucher.) 

Nutr. 211. Problems in Nutrition. (3-5) 

Second semester. Experience in a phase of nutrition research which is of in- 
terest to the student. Use of experimental animals, human studies or a com- 
pilation and extensive and critical study of research methods, techniques or 
data of specific projects. 

153 



Home Economics 

NuTR. 212. Nutrition for Community Services. (3) 

First semester. Application of the principles of nutrition to various community 
problems of specific groups of the public. Students may select specific problems 
for independent study. (Braucher.) 

NuTR. 220. Seminar. (1) 

First and second semesters. Reports and discussion of current research in 
nutrition. (Staflf.) 

Nutr. 399. Research. (6) 

First and second semesters. Credit in proportion to work done and results 
accomplished. Investigation in some phase of nutrition which may form the 
basis of a thesis. 



GENERAL HOME ECONOMICS 



For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

H. E. 170. Communication Skills and Techniques in 
Home Economics. (3) 

First and second semesters. Laboratory fee, $10.00. Principles and techniques 
for professional demonstration and presentation of home economics and its 
related areas with selected experiences in television, radio, creative writing, and 
photography. (Staff.) 

H. E. 180. Professional Seminar. (2) 

First and second semester. Clarification of perceptions of one's job and the 
situation in which one operates; attainment of professional breadth and depth; 
establishment of reasonable levels of aspiration — recognized to be requisites 
for a successful career in home economics and related areas. (For seniors in 
College of Home Economics.) (Lippeatt.) 

H. E. 190. Special Problems in Home Economics. (1-3) 

First and second semesters. Consent of instructor. Laboratory fee, $3.00 a 
semester hour. Problem may be in any area of home economics and will carry 
the name of the subject matter of the problem, a. Applied (Art) Design; b. 
Clothing; c. General Home Economics; d. Family Life; e. Food and Institu- 
tional Food; f. Management; g. Nutrition; h. Textiles. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
H. E. 201. Methods of Research in Home Economics. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Statistics or Tests and Measurements. 
Application of scientific methods to problems in the field of home economics 
with emphasis on needed research of an inter-disciplinary nature. (Wilson.) 

H. E. 202. Integrative Aspects of Home Economics. (2) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Scope and focus 
of total professional field with emphasis on purposes and functions as related 

154 



Home Economics 

to family and other group living. Impact of the changing social, economic, 
technological and educational situations upon home economics. (Wilson.) 

H. E. 290. Special Topics. (1-6) 

First and second semesters. Summer session. Concentrated study in areas of 
home economics, such as: consumer problems; housing, interior design and 
home furnishings; institution administration and food service; a. Applied (Art) 
Design; b. Clothing; c. General Home Economics; d. Family Life; e. Food and 
Institutional Food; f. Management; g. Nutrition; h. Textiles. (Staff.) 

H. E. 399. Thesis Research. (1-6) 

First and second semesters. Summer session. Credit according to work ac- 
complished. 



FAMILY LIFE AND MANAGEMENT 



For Advanced Undergraduates and Graduates 
F. L. 130. Home Management and Family Life. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, Psych. 1; H. M. 50; H. E. 5. Study of factors 
influencing establishment and maintenance of satisfying interpersonal relations 
throughout the family life cycle as afi"ected by management in the home. 

(Staff.) 

F, L. 132. The Child in the Family. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures. Prerequisites, Psych. 1; H. E. 5 or equiva- 
lent. Study of the child from prenatal stage through adolescence, with em- 
phasis on responsibility for guidance in the home. Biological and psychological 
needs as they affect the child's relationship with his family and peers. 

(Kincaid.) 

F. L. 135. Directed Experiences with Children and Families. (3) 

First and second semesters. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Prerequisites, Psych. 1 and 
consent of department. Observation and study of selected home situations plac- 
ing emphasis on contemporary family living. This course is designed especially 
for students who wish an understanding of children of various ages in relation 
to the family and the quality of living achieved in a variety of life situations. 
(Limited to majors in the College of Home Economics.) (Kincaid.) 

H. M. 140. Fundamentals of Housing. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one two-hour laboratory a week. Pre- 
requisite, H. M. 50. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Sociological, psychological and 
economic aspects of housing. Relationship of the house and the family living 
within. (Staff.) 

H. M. 160. Scientific Management in the Home. (3) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and one two-hour laboratory period 
a week. Prerequisite, H. M. 50 or equivalent. Laboratory fee, $3.00. The 

755 



Home Economics 

Philosophy and application of principles of scientific management in the home 
through the use of resources; management of time, energy, and money; work 
simplification. (Staff.) 

H. M. 161. Resident Experience in Home Management. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, H. M. 50, 160; Food 150; or equiva- 
lent. Residence from five to nine weeks in the home management center. Expe- 
rience in planning, coordinating, and participating in the activities of a house- 
hold, composed of a faculty member, a group of students, and possibly an infant 
on a part-time basis. Laboratory fee, $10.00. (Sutton.) 

H. M. 162. Personal and Family Finance. (2) 

First semester. Prerequisite, H. M. 50. Study of factors influencing use of 
money; how families attempt to achieve financial security; interrelationship of 
money and other resources; types of credit. Emphasis on management of the 
family's money. (Britton.) 

H. M. 165. Home Management Practicum. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, H. M. 50, 160; Food 150; or equiva- 
lent; consent of department. Laboratory fee $3.00. Home management experi- 
ence under supervision in a variety of situations. Designed especially for stu- 
dents who are managing their own homes. (Orvedal.) 



HOUSING AND APPLIED (ART) DESIGN 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

A. D. 100, 101. Mural Design. (2, 2) 

First semester, alternate years. Three laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
A. D. 1, 21. Fee, $3.00. Group and individual expression serving two types of 
objectives: temporary murals for the public schools developed from classroom 
study and rendered in colored chalk on wrapping paper; murals for permanent 
architectural decoration considering propriety to setting and rendered in oil 
paint, gouache, fresco, or mosaic. Brief study of civilization's use of murals. 
Trips to nearby murals having social significance. (Curtiss.) 

H.A.D. 110. Exterior-Interior Housing Design. (3) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and one two-hour laboratory period 
a week. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Prerequisite, H. A. D. 41. An analysis of the 
works of contemporary architects and an overview of the field of architecture, 
relating the elements and principles to interiors. (Staff.) 

A. D. 120, 121. Costume Illustration. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, A. D. 
1, 2, 20, 21. Fee, $3.00. Fashion rendering emphasizing clothing structure, rep- 
resentation of materials and development of individual rendering technique. De- 
velopment of techniques employing transparent water color, India ink, Craftint, 
Zipatone and Burgess process. Study of styles of contemporary fashion illus- 
trators. (Beckwith.) 



156 



Home Economics 
A. D. 124, 125. Individual Problems in Costume. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, A. D. 
1, 2, 20, 21, 120, 121. Fee, $3.00. Advanced problems in fashion illustration or 
costume design for students who are capable of independent work. Program de- 
veloped in consultation with the instructor. (Beckwith.) 

A. D. 132. Advertising Layout. (2) 

First and second semesters. Two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, A. D. 
1, 20, 30, 40. Fee, $3.00. Designing of rough to finished layouts for advertise- 
ments for newspapers, magazines, packaging, brochures and other forms of direct 
advertising. Included is the study of typography and illustration and their re- 
lationship to reproduction. Experience in use of the airbrush. Field trip. (Cuneo.) 

A. D. 134, 135. Individual Problems in Advertising. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, A. D. 
1, 20, 30, 40, 132. Fee, $3.00. Advanced problems in advertising layout. Op- 
portunity to build skills in one area or more of advertising design. Readings. 
Field trip. (Cuneo.) 

A. D. 136. Display. (2) 

First and second semesters. Three laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, A.D. 
1, 4, 30. Fee, $3.00. Practice in effective merchandise display in cooperation 
with retail establishments. Study of other aspects of display through field trips, 
discussion and research. (Nisonger.) 

A. D. 138. Advanced Photography. (2) 

First and second semesters. Three laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, A. D. 
1, 38, 39. Fee, $3.00. Advanced experimental effects emphasizing design in 
photography. Each student must have his own camera. (Davis.) 

H.A.D. 142, 143. Advanced Interior Design. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, A. D. 
1, 2, 40, 41. Fee, $3.00. Designs of rooms drawn in perspective and isometrics 
and rendered in water color. Coordination with fabrics, floor and wall finishes. 
Study of budgets, costs, and manufacturing techniques. Field trips. (Woodlock.) 

H.A.D. 144, 145. Individual Problems in Interior Design. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, A. D. 
1, 2, 40, 41, 142, 143. Fee, $3.00. Advanced problems in interior design for 
students who are capable of independent work. Students assume the role of 
interior decorator serving the needs of theoretical clients. Field trips. 

(Woodlock.) 

CRAFTS 

Cr. 102. Creative Crafts. (2-4) 

Summer session. Daily laboratory periods. Prerequisites, A. D. 1 and permissioD 
of the instructor. Fee, $3.00. Interests of the persons enrolled will determine 
the crafts pursued. Suggested: block printing, wood burning, crayon decoration, 
paper sculpture, clay modeling, metalry, weaving. Excellent for teachers, di- 
rectors of recreation centers, and persons who desire an introduction to recrea- 
tional crafts. (Staff.) 

157 



Home Economics 

Cr. 120, 121. Advanced Ceramics. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Three laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
A. D. 1, Cr. 20, 21. Fee, $3.00. Advanced techniques in clay sculpture and 
in building pottery on the potter's wheel. Study of glaze composition and cal- 
culation. Experimentation with several clay bodies. (Cox.) 

Cr. 124, 125. Individual Problems in Ceramics. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Three laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
A. D. 1, Cr. 20, 21, 120, 121. Fee, $3.00. Individual problems in clay sculp- 
ture and pottery making. Use of gas kiln fired in the medium cone range and 
experimental research in glazes and original textural effects. (Cox.) 

Cr. 130, 131. Advanced Metalry. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Three laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
A. D. 1, Cr. 30, 31. Fee, $3.00. Advanced applications of basic techniques 
in metal working and jewelry making. Introduction of ring making, stone 
setting, and metal casting. (Cox.) 

Cr. 134, 135. Individual Problems in Metalry. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Three laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
A. D. 1, Cr. 30, 31, 130, 131. Fee, $3.00. Advanced problems in metalry and 
jewelry making. Supervised laboratory for students capable of independent 
work and research. (Cox.) 

Cr. 140, 141. Advanced Weaving. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Three laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
A. D. 1, Cr. 40, 41. Fee, $3.00. Advanced weaving on four and eight harness 
looms stressing creative weaves in relation to functional use. (Cox.) 

Cr. 144, 145. Individual Problems in Weaving. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Three laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
A. D. 1, Cr. 40, 41, 141. Fee, $3.00. Advanced problems in creative weaving. 
Supervised laboratory for students capable of independent work and research. 

(Cox.) 



TEXTILES AND CLOTHING 



For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
& C. 101. Fashion Promotion and Coordination. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, 
T. & C. 126; Speech 115 or 117. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Analysis of fashion 
media; industry publications, magazines, newspapers, radio, TV; merchandise 
displays and fashion shows. Role of the stylist. (Staff.) 

& C. 110. Field Experience in Textiles and Clothing. (3) 

First semester or summer school. Prerequisite, senior standing in department. 
Supervised and coordinated training-work program in cooperation with agencies 
and organizations. (Staff.) 



158 



Home Economics 
T. & C. 126. Fundamentals of Fashion. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Clo. 120. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Fashion his- 
tory; current fashions, how to interpret and evaluate them; fashion show tech- 
niques; fashion promotion. The course includes oral and written reports, group 
projects, panel discussions and field trips. (Wilbur.) 

T, & C. 128. Fundamentals of Home Furnishings. (3) 

First and second semesters. Three laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
T. & C. 5, Clo. 10, or consent of instructor. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Selection 
of fabrics for home and institutional furnishings; care and repair of such fur- 
nishings; custom construction of slip covers, draperies, bedspreads; refinishing 
and upholstering furniture. (Wilbur.) 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Tex. 102. Textile Testing. (3) 

Second semester. Three laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, Tex. 150. 
Laboratory fee, $3.00. The theory of textile methods, the repeated use of phys- 
ical and chemical testing, the interpretation of the data, and the presentation of 
the findings. (Young.) 

Tex. 150. Advanced Textiles. (3) 

First semester. One lecture and two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, 
Tex. 55. Laboratory fee, $3.00. An intensive study of textiles from the fiber 
to the finished fabric, from the producer to the consumer. Analysis of fabric 
construction and serviceability features. (Staff.) 

Tex. 153. International Textiles. (2) 

First semester. Two lectures a week. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Prerequisite, 
T. & C. 5 or consent of instructor. Study of historic and contemporary fibers 
and laces with analysis of designs and techniques of decorating fabrics; rela- 
tionship of textiles to the esthetic and developmental cultures of society. 

(Wilbur.) 

CLOTHING 

Clo. 100. Family Clothing. (3) 

First semester in alternate years. One lecture and two laboratory periods a 
week. Prerequisites, T. & C. 5; Clo. 10, 11; or equivalent. Laboratory fee, $3.00. 
Clothing the family; analysis of needs of family members in various stages of 
life cycle; individual and family budgets; problems in selection and/or con- 
struction of wardrobe items. (Staff.) 

Clo. 120. Draping. (3) 

First semester. Two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, Clo. 10. Labora- 
tory fee, $3.00. Demonstrations and practice in creating costumes in fabrics 
and on individual dress forms; modeling of garments for class criticism. 

(Staff.) 

Clo. 122. Tailoring. (2) 

First and second semesters. Two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, 
Clo. 21. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Construction of tailored garments requiring 
professional skiU. (Mitchell.) 

159 



Home Economics 

Clo. 127. Apparel Design. (3) 

Second semester. One lecture and two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, 
Clo. 120. Laboratory fee, $3.00. The art of costuming; trade and custom 
methods of clothing design and construction; advanced work in draping, pat- 
tern design and /or tailoring, with study of the interrelationship of these tech- 
niques. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Tex. 200. Special Studies in Textiles. (2-4) 

First or second semester. Summer session. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Advanced 
inquiry into uses, care, types and/or performance of textile materials, either 
contemporary or historic depending on interest of students; compilation of 
data through testing, surveys, museum visits and/or field trips; writing of tech- 
nical reports. (Staff.) 

Clo. 220. Special Studies in Clothing. (2-4) 

First or second semester. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Special areas of clothing are 
selected according to interest of student; consumer, design, functional aspects, 
and/or evaluation and analysis studies are made of those areas. Reports may 
be written, oral, or by group presentation. (Mitchell.) 

T. & C. 230. Seminar. (1) 

First and second semesters. Laboratory fee, $3.00. The breadth and limit of 

the field of textiles and clothing are investigated; annotated bibliography is 

developed; one oral report is presented. (Mitchell.) 

T. & C. 232. Economics of Textiles and Clothing. (3) 

Second semester. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Study of interrelationship of develop- 
ments in production, distribution and consumption of textiles and clothing af- 
fecting consumers and the market. Analysis of consumption trends as related 
to patterns of family living and population changes. (Mitchell.) 

T. & C. 233. Syntheses of Behavioral Science Concepts in 
Textiles and Clothing. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, Psych. 21 and/or consent of depart- 
ment. Analysis and interpretation of interdisciplinary research methods and 
findings with reference to behavioral aspects of textiles and clothing. Considera- 
tion given to measurement and relation of clothing interest and behavior to atti- 
tudes, values, roles, and social status groupings. (Compton.) 

T. & C. 399. Research. (1-6) 

First and second semesters. Laboratory fee, $3.00. A research problem is 
selected by the student; thesis for partial fulfillment of the Master of Science 
degree is written. 



160 



Horticulture 

HORTICULTURE 

Professors: Haut, Kramer, Link, Scott, Shanks, Stark and 
Thompson. 

Associate Professors: Reynolds, Snyder and Wiley, 

This Department offers graduate work in the fields of floriculture and 
ornamental horticulture, processing, olericulture, and pomology leading 
to the Master of Science or Doctor of Philosophy degrees. 

Departmental requirements, supplementary to the material in the Grad- 
uate School Announcements have been formulated for the administra- 
tion and guidance of graduate students. Copies of these requirements 
may be obtained from the Department. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Hort. 101. Technology of Fruits. (3) 

First semester. (Offered 1964-65.) Prerequisites, Hort. 6, Bot. 101. A critical 
analysis of research work and application of the principles of plant physiology, 
chemistry, and botany to practical problems in commercial production. 

(Thompson.) 

Hort. 103. Technology of Vegetables. (3) 

Second semester. (Offered 1965-66.) Prerequisites, Hort. 58, Bot. 101. For a 
description of these courses see the general statement under Hort. 101. 

(Stark.) 

Hort. 105. Technology of Ornamentals. (2) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Bot. 101. A study of the physiological plant proc- 
esses as related to the growth, flowering, and storage of floricultural and orna- 
mental plants. (Link.) 

HoRT. 107, 108. Woody Plant Materials. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, Bot. 11. A field and laboratory study 
of trees, shrubs, and vines used in ornamental plantings. (Staff.) 

Hort. 114. Systematic Horticulture. (3) 

First semester, alternate years. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 
A study of the origin, taxonomic relationship and horticultural classification of 
fruits and vegetables. (Staff.) 

Hort. 123. Quality Control. (3) 

First seminar, alternate years. (Offered 1965-66.) Two lectures and one 
laboratory period a week. Principles involved in the evaluation of factors of 
quality in horticultural products, including appearance, kinesthetic flavor and 
sanitation factors and statistical presentation of results. (Kramer.) 

Hort. 124. Quality Control Systems. (3) 

Second semester, alternate years. (Offered 1965-66.) Two lectures and one 
laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, Hort. 123. Development of quality con- 
trol systems designed to maintain specific levels of quality for selected food 
products. (Kramer.) 

161 



Horticulture 

HoRT. 150, 151. Commercial Floriculture. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 
Prerequisite, Hort. 11. Growing and handling bench crops and potted plants, 
and the marketing of cut flowers. (Link.) 

Hort. 155, 156. Fundamentals of Fruit and Vegetable 
Processing. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters, alternate years. (Off'ered 1964-65.) Two lectures 
and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 32, 34, Hort. 61. 
Laboratory fee, $5.00 per semester. The fundamentals of canning, freezing 
and preserving of horticultural crops with emphasis on the chemical, biochemi- 
cal and microbiological aspects of processing. (Wiley.) 

Hort. 159. Nursery Management, (3) 

Second semester, alternate years. Two lectures and one laboratory period a 
week. Prerequisites or concurrently, Hort. 62, 107, 108. A study of all phases 
of commercial nursery management and operations. (Staff.) 

Hort. 160. Aboriculture. (3) 

Second semester, alternate years. Two lectures and one laboratory period a 
week. Prerequisites or concurrently, Hort. 107 and 108. A study of the 
planting and maintenance of ornamental shrubs and trees, including basic 
principles of park, institution and estate maintenance. (Staff.) 

Hort. 161 Physiology of Maturation and Storage of 
Horticultural Crops. (2) 

Second semester, alternate years. (Offered 1964-65.) Two lectures a week. 
Prerequisite, Bot. 101. Factors related to maturation and application of sci- 
entific principles to handling and storage of horticultural crops. (Scott.) 

Hort. 198. Special Problems. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Credit arranged according to work done. For 
major students in horticulture or botany. Four credits maximum per student. 

(Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Hort. 200. Experimental Procedures in Plant Sciences. (3) 

First seniester. Prerequisite, permission of instructor. Organization of research 
projects and presentation of experimental results in the field of biological 
science. Topics included will be: Sources of research financing, project out- 
line preparation, formal progress reports, public and industrial supported re- 
search pr(%rams, and technical and popular presentation of research data. 

(Haut.) 
Hort. 201, 202. Experimental Pomology. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Bot. 101. A systematic review of 
scientific knowledge and practical observations as applied to commercial prac- 
tices in pomology. (Thompson.) 

Hort. 203, 204, 205. Experimental Olericulture. (2, 2, 2) 

First semester and in sequence. Prerequisite, Bot. 101. A systematic review of 
scientific knowledge and practical observations as applied to commercial prac- 
tices in olericulture. (Stark.) 

162 



Horticulture 
HoRT. 206. Experimental Floriculture. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Bot. 101. A systematic review of scientific knowl- 
edge and practical observations as applied to commercial practices in floricul- 
ture. (Link.) 

Hort. 207. Methods of Horticultural Research. (3) 

Second semester. One lecture and one four-hour laboratory period a week. 
A critical study of research methods which are or may be used in horticul- 
ture. (Scott.) 

HoRT. 210. Experimental Processing. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, permission of instructor. A systematic review 
of scientific knowledge and practical observations as applied to commercial 
practices in processing. (Kramer.) 

HoRT. 302. Advanced Seminar. (1) 

First and second semesters. Oral reports with illustrative material are required 
on special topics or recent research publications in horticulture. Three credit 
hours maximum allowed toward the M. S. degree or six credits maximum 
toward the Ph.D. degree. (Haut, Staff.) 

HoRT. 399. Advanced Horticultural Research. (2-12) 

First and second semesters. Credit granted according to work done. (Staff.) 

MATHEMATICS 

Professors: Brace, Cohen, Douglis, Goldhaber, Good, Horvath, 
Hummel, Jackson, Kuroda, J. Lehner, Martin,* Mayor, and 
Stellmacher. 

Visiting Professor: Koethe. 

Research Professors: Diaz,* Payne,* Weinstein.* 

Director of Computer Science Center: Rheinboldt.** 

Associate Professors: Auslander, Correl, Ehrlich, Goldberg, 
Karp, G. Lehner, Pearl, Reinhart, Syski, Zedek. 

Visiting Associate Professor: Kovari. 

Research Associate Professor: Bramble.* 

Assistant Professors: Freeman, Kleppner, Maltese, Mikulski, 
Nieto, Sedgewick, Srinivasacharyulu, Tulley, and Willke. 

Research Assistant Professors: Bragg,* Gilbert,* Hubbard,* 
Metcalf,* and Trytten.* 

Lecturers: Ness,** Schweppe. 

For admission to graduate study in mathematics the Department requires, 
in addition to the Graduate School requirements, an official transcript 



* Member of the Institute for Fluid Dynamics and Applied Mathematics under the 

College of Engineering. 

**Member of the Computer Science Center 

163 



Mathematics 

of the student's previous work for its j&les and evidence that the candi- 
date for admission has received sufficient prior training in mathematics 
to indicate that he will be able successfully to undertake graduate 
training. 

Before being recommended for admission to candidacy for the Master's 
degree in mathematics, in addition to the Graduate School requirements, 
the student must demonstrate a reading knowledge of one foreign lan- 
guage of scientific importance and must have completed the major part 
of the course work required for the degree and must have received an 
average grade of "B" or better in all graduate courses taken. 

A student preparing for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy with a major 
in mathematics will be offered a choice of two curricula, one with an 
emphasis on pure mathematics, the other with an emphasis on applied 
mathematics. 

The Department requires successful completion of a preliminary written 
and oral examination before giving its recommendation for admission 
to candidacy for the doctorate. Before presenting himself for this exam- 
ination the student is expected to have acquired a background of mathe- 
matical knowledge equivalent to the following group of graduate studies. 
In the pure mathematics curriculum: algebra, six hours; analysis, six 
hours; geometry and topology, six hours; mathematical methods or mathe- 
matcial physics or physics or (further) analysis, six hours. In the applied 
mathematics curriculum: analysis, fifteen hours (including Math. 286, 
287, 212); mathematical methods, six hours; mathematical physics, six 
hours (including Math. 260); algebra or geometry or topology as related 
to the student's individual work. 

A student who intends to present a minor in mathematics should consult 
with a member of the Graduate Committee in the Department of Mathe- 
matics to secure approval, in advance, for his proposed minor program. 
The Mathematics Department Colloquium meets frequently throughout 
the academic year for reports on current research by the resident staff, 
visiting lecturers, and graduate students. In addition the Institute for 
Fluid Dynamics and Applied Mathematics Colloquium meets at frequent 
intervals for reports on research in those fields. All colloquium meet- 
ings are open to the public. 

Several seminars meet regularly for the discussion of current developments 
in special fields. Graduate students are invited to participate. 

ALGEBRA AND NUMBER THEORY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Math. 100. Vectors and Matrices. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 21 or Math. 15. Algebra of vector spaces and matrices. 
Recommended for students interested in the applications of mathematics. 

(Hummel.) 

164 



Mathematics 

Math. 103. Introduction to Abstract Algebra I (3) 

Prerequisite, Math 22 or equivalent. Integers; groups, rings, integral domains, 
fields. (Ehrlich.) 

Math. 104. Introduction to Abstract Algebra II. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 103 or consent of instructor. An abstract treatment of 
finite dimensional vector spaces. Linear transformations and their invariants. 

(Freeman.) 

Math. 106. Introduction to Number Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 22. Integers, divisibility, Euclid's algorithm, diophantine 
equations, prime numbers, congruences, reciprocity law of quadratic residues, 
quadratic fields, binary quadratic forms. (Kuroda.) 

For Graduates 
Math. 200. Abstract Algebra I. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 104 or equivalent. Elementary properties and examples 
of groups and rings, homomorphism theorems; integral domains, elementary 
factorization theory. Groups with operators; isomorphism theorems, normal 
series, Jordan-Holder Theorem, direct products, Krull-Schmidt Theorem. 

(Goldhaber.) 

Math. 201. Abstract Algebra II. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 200 or consent of instructor. Field theory, Galois theory. 
Commutative ideal theory. Multilinear algebra. (Goldhaber.) 

Math. 202. Linear Algebra. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 201 or consent of instructor. Linear manifolds, the lattice 
sub-spaces, projectives, dualities, the ring of endomorphisms, the full linear 
group and its subgroups. (Pearl.) 

Math. 203. Galois Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 201 or consent of instructor. Field extensions, automor- 
phisms of a field, the Galois group of a polynominal equation, solvability by 
radicals, recent developments in Galois theory. (Kuroda.) 

Math. 204, 205. Topological Groups. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. An introductory course in abstract groups, 
topological spaces, and the study of collections of elements enjoying both 
these properties. The concept of a uniform space will be introduced and studied. 
The representation problem will be considered together with the subject of Lie 
groups. (Kleppner.) 

Math. 206. Number Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Foundations, linear and higher congru- 
ences, law of reciprocity, quadratic forms, sieve methods, elements of additive 
number theory and density, distribution of prime numbers and L-functions, dis- 
cussion of unsolved problems. (Kuroda.) 

Math. 208. Ring Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 201 or consent of instructor. According to the needs of 
the class, emphasis will be placed on one or more of the following: ideal 

165 



Mathematics 

theory, structure theory of rings with or without minimum condition, division 
rings, algebras, non-associative rings. (Goldhaber.) 

Math. 209. Group Theory (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 201 or consent of instructor. According to the needs of 
the class, emphasis will be placed on one or more of the following aspects of 
discrete group theory: finite groups, abelian groups, free groups, solvable or 
nilpotent groups, groups with operators, groups with local properties, groups 
with clan conditions, extensions. (Pearl.) 

Math. 271. Selected Topics in Algebra. (3) 

(Arranged) Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

ANALYSIS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Math. 110. Advanced Calculus. (4) 

Prerequisite, Math 22. A rigorous development of many topics from classical 
analysis such as the Stieltjes integral, surface integrals, sequences and series of 
functions, introduction to the Dirichlet integral (A special section of Math. 110 
for honors students will be provided.) (Tulley) 

Math. 111. Advanced Calculus. (4) 

Prerequisite, Math. 110 or equivalent. Calculus of functions of several variables. 

(Goldhaber.) 

Math. 112. Infinite Processes. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 21 or equivalent. Construction of the real numbers from 
the rational numbers, sequences of numbers, series of positive and arbitrary 
numbers, infinite products, conditional and absolute convergence, sequences 
and series of functions, uniform convergence, integration and diflterentiation of 
series, power series, and analytic functions, Fourier series, elements of the 
theory of divergent series, extension of the theory of complex numbers and 
functions. (Tulley.) 

Math. 113. Introduction to Complex Variables. (4) 

Prerequisite, Math. 110. The algebra of complex numbers, analytic functions, 
mapping properties of the elementary functions. Cauchy's theorem and the 
Cauchy integral formula. Taylor and Laurent series. Residues. (Hummel.) 

Math. 114. Differential Equations. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 110. A general introduction to the theory of differential 
equations. Constructive methods of solution leading to existence theorems and 
uniqueness theorems. Other topics such as: systems of linear equations, the 
behavior of solutions in the large, the behavior of solutions near singularities, 
periodic solutions, stability, and Sturm-Liouville Problems. (Nieto.) 

Math. 117. Introduction to Fourier Analysis. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 113. Fourier series. Fourier and Laplace transforms. 

(Nieto.) 

166 



Mathematics 
Math. 118. Introduction to Real Variables. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 110. The Lebesgue integral. Fubini's theorem. Convergence 
theorems. The Lp spaces. (Kleppner.) 

Math. 162. Analysis for Scientists and Engineers I. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 21 or consent of instructor. Not open to students with 
credit for Math. 22. Calculus of functions of several real variables; limits, 
continuity, partial differentiation, multiple integrals, line and surface integrals, 
vector-valued functions, theorems of Green, Gauss and Stokes. Physical appli- 
cations. (This course cannot be counted toward a major in mathematics.) 

(Sedgewick.) 

Math. 163. Analysis for Scientists and Engineers II. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 162 or 22 or consent of instructor. Not open to students 
with credit for Math. 116 or Math. 113. The complex field. Infinite processes 
for real and complex numbers. Calculus of complex functions. Analytic func- 
tions and analytic continuation. Theory of residues and application to evalua- 
tion of integrals. Conformal mapping. (This course cannot be counted toward 
a major in mathematics.) (Stellmacher.) 

Math. 164. Analysis for Scientists and Engineers III. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 64 and Math. 163, or consent of instructor. Fourier and 
Laplace transforms. Evaluation of the complex inversion integral by the theory 
of residues. Applications to systems of ordinary and partial differential equa- 
tions. (This course cannot be counted toward a major in mathematics.) 

(Sedgewick.) 

For Graduates 
Math. 215, 216. Advanced Differential Equations. (3, 3) 

Prerequisites, Math. 100, 111 and 114, or consent of instructor. Existence and 
uniqueness theorems for systems of ordinary differential equations and for partial 
differential equations, characteristic theory, reduction to normal forms, the 
method of finite differences. (Auslander.) 

Math. 218. Integral Equations. (3) 

Prerequisites, Math. 100 and 287, or consent of instructor. Integral equations 
of the first and second kind, Volterra's equation, Abel's equation and fractional 
differentiation; the Fredholm theory, the Hilbert-Schmidt theory, Mercer's 
theorem, expansion in orthonormal series; existence theorems of potential 
theory and other applications. (Brace.) 

Math. 253, 254. Spectral Theory in Hilbert Space. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 257 and Math. 287 or consent of instructor. An introduction 
to the theory of Hilbert Space and a detailed treatment of the spectral theory 
of self-adjoint operators in Hilbert Space, a presentation of the extension theory 
for symmetric operators, and applications to ordinary and partial differential 
operators. (Freeman.) 

Math. 272. Selected Topics in Analysis. (3) 

(Arranged) Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

167 



Mathematics 

Math. 278. Advanced Topics in Complex Analysis. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 288 or consent of instructor. Material selected to suit in- 
terests and background of the students. Typical topics: Conformal mapping, 
algebraic functions, Riemann surfaces, entire functions, Dirichlet series, Tay- 
lor's series, geometric function theory. (Hummel.) 

Math. 280, 281. Linear Spaces. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 287 or equivalent. Linear vector spaces and their topolo- 
gies, linear operations and transformations and their inverses, Banach and 
Hilbert spaces. (Koethe.) 

Math. 286, 287. Theory of Functions. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, Math. Ill or equivalent. Basic topics in real and complex varia- 
ble theory, real and complex number systems, point sets on the line and in space, 
continuity, Riemann and Stieltjes integrals, Cauchy integral theorem, residues, 
power series, analytic functions, introduction to Lebesgue measures and inte- 
gration. (Douglis.) 

Math. 288. Theory of Analytic Functions. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 287 or a course in complex variables. Advanced topics in 
complex function theory, properties of power series, entire functions, con- 
formal mapping, classification of singularities, harmonic functions. (Zedek.) 

Math. 289. Measure and Integration. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 286 or a course in real variables. Set functions, abstract 
theory of measure, differentiability properties and absolute continuity of set 
functions, measurable functions, abstract integration theory, introduction to 
linear spaces. (Syski.) 

GEOMETRY AND TOPOLOGY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Math. 120. Introduction to Geometry I. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 22 or equivalent. Axiomatic development of plane geom- 
etries, Euclidean and non-Euclidean. Groups of isometries and similarities. 

(Reinhart.) 

Math. 121. Introduction to Geometry II. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 120. Non-Euclidean transformation groups, the Erlangen 
program, projective planes, cubics and quartics. (Reinhart.) 

Math. 122. Introduction to Point Set Topology. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 110 or 146, or equivalent. Connectedness, compactness, 
transformations, homeomorphisms; application of these concepts to various 
spaces, with particular attention to the Euclidean plane. (Kleppner.) 

Math. 123. Introduction to Algebraic Topology. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 122 and 103, or equivalent. Chains, cycles, homology groups 
for surfaces, the fundamental group. (Lehner.) 

Math. 124. Introduction to Projective Geometry. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 22 or equivalent. Recommended for students in the College 
of Education. Elementary projective geometry, combining synthetic and alge- 

168 



Mathematics 

braic approaches, projective transformations, harmonic division, cross ratio, pro- 
jective coordinates, properties of conies. (Reinhart.) 

Math. 126. Introduction to Differential Geometry. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 22 or equivalent. The differential geometry of curves and 
surfaces, curvature and torsion, moving frames, the fundamental differential 
forms, intrinsic geometry of a surface. (Jackson.) 

Math. 128. Euclidean Geometry. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 22 or equivalent. Recommended for students in the College 
of Education. Axiomatic method, models, properties of axioms; proofs of some 
basic theorems from the axioms; modern geometry of the triangle, circle, and 
sphere. (Mayor.) 

For Graduates 
Math. 220. Differential Geometry of Curves and Surfaces. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 110 or equivalent. Classical theory of curves and surfaces, 
geometry in the large, the Gauss-Bonnet Theorem, surfaces of constant curva- 
ture. (Reinhart.) 

Math. 221. Differentiable Manifolds. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Differentiable manifolds, embeddings in 
Euclidean space, vector and tensor bundles, vector fields, differentiable fields, 
Riemann metrics. (Reinhart.) 

Math. 222. Differential Geometry. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 220 or 221. Connections, curvature, torsion; svmplectic, 
contact, and complex structures. (Reinhart.) 

Math. 223, 224. Algebraic Topology. (3, 3) 

Prerequisites, Math. 103 and 123, or consent of instructor. Homology, coho- 
mology, and homotopy theory of complexes and spaces. (G. Lehner.) 

Math. 225, 226. Set Theoretic Topology. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, concurrent enrollment in Math. 286, or equivalent. Foundations 
of mathematics based on a set of axioms, metric spaces, convergence and con- 
nectivity properties of point sets, continua, and continuous curves; the topology 
of the plane. (Correl.) 

Math. 227, 228. Algebraic Geometry. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor, prime and primary ideals in Noetherian 
rings, Hilbert Nullstellensatz, places and valuations, fields of definition. Chow 
points, bi-rational correspondences, Abelian varieties, Picard varieties, alge- 
braic groups. (Pearl.) 

Math. 229. Differential Topology. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 221. Characteristic classes, cobordism, differential struc- 
tures on cells and spheres. (Srinivasacharyulu.) 

Math. 273. Selected Topics in Geometry and Topology. (3) 

(Arranged) Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

169 



Mathematics 

PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Math. 130. Introduction to Probability Theory I. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 22, or equivalent. Sample space, events, probability and its 
basic properties. Independence and conditioning, random variables, distribution 
functions (continuous and discrete); typical distributions, expectations, mo- 
ments, generating functions; transformations of random variables, limit theo- 
rems. (Auslander.) 

Math. 131, Introduction to Probability Theory II, (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 130. Elementary stochastic processes. Renewal process, 
random walk, discrete Markov chains, birth processes, birth and death processes, 
stationary processes. (Auslander.) 

Math, 132. Introduction to Statistics, (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 130. (Three lectures and 1 hour of laboratory a week.) 
Sampling distributions, elements of point and set estimation, maximum likelihood 
principle, testing statistical hypotheses, standard tests, Neyman-Pearson lemma 
and problems of optimality of tests, linear hypotheses, sequential methods. 

(Mikulski.) 

Math. 133. Applied Probability and Statistics I, (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 15 or 21. Intended for students with major other than 
mathematics. Probability concepts in finite sample spaces, generalizations to 
continuous case (intuitive approach), random variables and distribution func- 
tions, standard distributions, expectations, moments and generating functions, 
limit theorems. (Mikulski.) 

Math. 134, Applied Probability and Statistics II. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 133. Sampling distributions, estimation methods, standard 
procedures in testing statistical hypotheses, testing location and scale parame- 
ters, tests of independence and goodness of fit, elements of variance and 
regression analysis. (Mikulski.) 

For Graduates 
Math. 230, 231, Probability Theory, (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, Math. Ill and 130 or consent of instructor. Foundations of proba- 
bility theory. Fields of events, probability space and probability measure. Ran- 
dom variables and convergence of random variables. Induced probability 
spaces. Expectations and moments. Distribution functions and their transforms. 
Consistency theorem. Laws of large numbers and central limit problem. Con- 
ditioning. Measurability and separability of stochastic processes. Stationary 
processes, harmonic analysis, Markov process, Kolmogorov equations, dif- 
fusion theory. Martingales. (Syski.) 

Math, 232, Applied Stochastic Processes, (3) 

Prerequisites, Math. Ill and 130 or consent of instructor. Basic concepts of 
stochastic processes, stationary processes. Markov chains and processes (discrete 
and continuous parameter). Birth and death processes. Applications from the- 
ories of: queueing, storage, inventory, noise, epidemics and others. This course 

170 



Mathematics 

is recommended for graduates from Physics, Engineering, Biology and Social 
Sciences. (Syski.) 

Math. 235, 236. Testing Statistical Hypotheses. (4, 4) 

Prerequisites, Math. 130 and 132. (Recommended to be concurrent with Math. 
230, 231). 3 hours lecture, 2 hours laboratory per week. Statistical decision 
problems. Uniformly most powerful tests. Exponential families of distributions, 
concepts of similarity and tests with Neyman-structure. Unbiased tests. In- 
variance and almost invariance. Elements of non-parametric inference. Linear 
hypotheses. Large sample methods. (Mikulski.) 

Math. 275. Selected Topics in Probability. (3) 

(Arranged) Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

Math. 276. Selected Topics in Statistics. (3) 

(Arranged) Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Math. 146. Fundamental Concepts of Mathematics. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 22 or consent of instructor. Sets, relations, mappings. Con- 
struction of the real number system starting with Peano postulates; algebraic 
structures associated with the construction; Archimedean order, sequential com- 
pleteness and equivalent properties of ordered fields. Finite and infinite sets, 
denumerable and non-denumerable sets. (Maltese.) 

Math. 147. Set Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 22 or consent of instructor. Set Algebra, cardinal arith- 
metic, axiom of choice, Zorn's lemma, well-ordering principle, transfinite in- 
duction, ordinal arithmetic, continuum hypothesis. (Karp.) 

Math. 148. Introduction to Mathematical Logic. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 146 or 147 or 103. Propositional calculus, predicate logic, 
axiomatic set theory, paradoxes. (Not open to students with credit for Math. 
144). (Karp.) 

For Graduates 
Math. 244. Mathematical Logic. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 148. Completeness of first-order predicate logic and appli- 
cations, recursive functions, Godel's incompleteness theorem. (Kuroda.) 

Math. 277. Selected Topics in Mathematical Logic. (3) 

(Arranged) Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

MATHEMATICAL METHODS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Math. 158. Games and Linear Relations. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 22; Math. 100 recommended. Theory of games, minimax 
theorem, theory of linear programming, simplex method, systems of linear in- 
equalities and the nature of their solutions, geometrical interpretations. (Pearl.) 

171 



Mathematics 



For Graduates 



Math. 212. Special Functions. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 287 or consent of instructor. Gamma-function, Riemann 
zeta-function, hypergeometric functions, confluent hypergeometric functions and 
Bessel functions. (Stellmacher.) 

Math. 252. Variational Methods. (3) 

Prerequisites, Math. 257 and Math. 258. The Euler-Lagrange equation, minimal 
principles in mathematical physics, estimation of capacity, torsional rigidity and 
other physical quantities; symmetrization, isoperimetric inequalities, estimation 
of eigenvalues, the minimax principle. (Payne.) 

Math. 257. Operators on Normed Spaces. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 111. An introduction to linear analysis, in particular to 
those concepts and methods important in modern applied mathematics. Among 
the topics to be covered are linear spaces, norms and inner products, linear 
operators, eigenvalues, basic inequalities. (Freeman.) 

Math. 258. Introduction to Partial Differential Equations. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 111. General introduction to the field of partial differential 
equations. Among the topics to be discussed are typical boundary and initial 
value problems of mathematical physics and an indication of the main methods 
of solution, relations to difference equations and integral equations. 

(Stellmacher.) 

Math. 259. Introduction to Continuum Mechanics. (3) 

Prerequisites, Math. 100 and Math. 258 or consent of instructor. Solid and 
fluid continua, general analysis of stress and strain, equilibrium of elastic bodies, 
equation of motion for fluid bodies, stress-strain relations, equations of perfect 
fluids and formulation of viscous flow problems. (Bragg.) 

Math. 260. Foundations of Mathematical Physics. (3) 

Prerequisites, Math. 110 and Math. Ill or consent of instructor. Introduction 
to the theory of distributions and Fourier analysis. Application to partial dif- 
ferential equations. (Stellmacher.) 

Math. 261, 262. Fluid Dynamics. (3, 3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 259 or consent of instructor. A mathematical formulation 
and treatment of problems, arising in the theory of incompressible, compressible 
and viscous fluids. (Payne.) 

Math. 263. Linear Elasticity. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 259. Linear elastic behavior of solid continuous media. 
Topics covered include: torsion and flexure of beams, plane strain and plane 
stress, vibration and buckling problems, variational principles. Emphasis is 
placed on formulation and techniques rather than on specific examples. 

(Payne.) 

Math. 264. Non-Linear Elasticity. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math 259. Fundamentals of non-linear elasticity, finite deforma- 
tions, rubber elasticity, small deformations superimposed on finite deformations. 

(Payne.) 

172 



Mathematics 
Math. 265. Hyperbolic Differential Equations. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 258. Two variables, Cauchy's problems, characteristics. 
Riemann's method, properties of the Riemann function, quasi-linear equations 
and canonical hyperbolic systems, wave equation in n-dimensions, method of 
Hadamard and Riesz, Euler-Poisson equation and the singular problems, 
Huyghen's principle. (Nieto.) 

Math. 266. Elliptic Differential Equations. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 258. The equations of Laplace and Poisson, flux, the 
theorems of Gauss and Green, potential of volume and surface distributions, 
harmonic functions, Green's function and the problems of Dirichlet and Neu- 
mann; linear elliptic equations with variable coefficients, in particular the 
equations of Stokes and Beltrami; fundamental solutions, the principle of the 
maximum, and boundary value problems; introduction to the theory of non- 
linear equations. (Nieto.) 

Math. 274. Selected Topics in Applied Mathematics. (3) 

(Arranged) Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

NUMERICAL MATHEMATICS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Math. 156. Programming for High Speed Computers. (3) 

Prerequisite, Math. 22 or equivalent. General characteristics of high-speed 
automatic computers; logic of programming, preparation of flow charts, pre- 
liminary and final coding; scaling, use of flow point routines; construction and 
use of subroutines; use of machine for mathematical operations and for auto- 
matic coding. (Each student will prepare and, if possible, run a problem on 
a high-speed computer.) (Rheinboldt.) 

Math. 170. Introduction to Numerical Analysis. (4) 

Prerequisite, Math. 21 or Math. 15. (3 lectures and 2 laboratory periods per 
week.) Introduction to numerical methods, errors, interpolation, differences, 
numerical differentiation and integration, interative solution of equations, least 
squares, elements of numerical approximation. (Rheinboldt.) 

Math. 171. Numerical Methods in Linear Algebra. (4) 

Prerequisite, Math. 100 or 104, Math. 110, Math. 170. (3 lectures and 2 
laboratory periods per week.) Numerical solution of linear equations, direction 
methods, iterative methods, eigenvalue problems and their numerical solution, 
errors connected with numerical work in linear algebra. (Rheinboldt.) 

Math. 172. Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential 

Equations. (4) 

Prerequisite, Math. 114 and Math. 171. (3 lectures and 2 laboratory periods 
per week.) The methods of Euler, Runge, Kutta, and other single step-methods, 
multistep methods, discretization errors, stability problems. (Rheinboldt.) 

Math, 173. Numerical Methods for Scientists and 

Engineers. (4) 

Prerequisites, Math. 22 or 162 and Math. 64. (3 lectures and 2 laboratory 
periods per week.) Interpolation, numerical differentiation and integration, 

173 



Mathematics 

numerical solution of polynomial and transcendental equations, least squares, 
systems of linear equations, numerical solution of ordinary differential equa- 
tions, errors in numerical calculations. (Rheinboldt.) 

For Graduates 

Math. 255, 256. Advanced Numerical Methods in 
Differential Equations. (3, 3) 

Prerequisites, Math. 257 and Math. 258. Approximation methods for boundary 
value, initial value and eigenvalue problems in both ordinary and partial dif- 
ferential equations, including finite differences and methods involving approxi- 
mating functions. (Rheinboldt.) 

Math. 267, 268. Modern Numerical Mathematics. (3, 3) 

Prerequisites, Math. 170 and Math. 257. Review of classical numerical analysis, 
matrix computations in particular numerical evaluation of eigenvalues, intera- 
tive techniques from a viewpoint of linear analysis; introduction to numerical 
approximations; error analysis in numerical computation. The course will in- 
volve laboratory work in the Computer Science Center. (Rheinboldt.) 

Math. 269. Advanced Mathematical Programming. (3) 

Prerequisites, Math. 158 and Math. 257. Linear inequalities and related systems 
and their applications to linear programming, convex functions and generalized 
programming problems, topic in non-linear and dynamic programming. 

(Rheinboldt.) 

COURSES FOR TEACHERS OF MATHEMATICS AND SCIENCE 

Math. 181. Introduction to Number Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, one year of college mathematics or consent of instructor. De- 
signed primarily for those enrolled in programs with emphasis in the teaching 
of mathematics and science. Not open to students seeking a major directly in 
the physical sciences, since the course content is usually covered elsewhere in 
their curriculum. Axiomatic developments of the real number. Elementary 
number theory. 

Math. 182. Introduction to Algebra. (3) 

Prerequisite, one year of college mathematics or consent of instructor. De- 
signed primarily for those enrolled in programs with emphasis in the teaching 
of mathematics and science. Not open to students seeking a major directly in 
the physical sciences, since the course content is usually covered elsewhere in 
their curriculum. Modern ideas in algebra and topics in the theory of equations. 

Math. 183. Introduction to Geometry. (3) 

Prerequisite, one year of college mathematics or consent of instructor. De- 
signed primarily for those enrolled in programs with emphasis in the teaching 
of mathematics and science. Not open to students seeking a major directly in 
the physical sciences, since the course content is usually covered elsewhere in 
their curriculum. A study of the axioms for Euclidean and non-Euclidean 
geometry. 

Math. 184. Introduction to Analysis. (3) 

Prerequisite, one year of college mathematics or consent of instructor. De- 
signed primarily for those enrolled in programs with emphasis in the teaching 

174 



Mechanical Engineering 

of mathematics and science. Not open to students seeking a major directly in 
the physical sciences, since the course content is usually covered elsewhere in 
their curriculum. A study of the limit concept and the calculus. (Previous 
knowledge of calculus is not required.) 

Math. 185. Selected Topics for Teachers of Mathematics. (1-3) 

Prerequisite, one year of college mathematics or consent of instructor. 

Math. 189. National Science Foundation Summer Institute 
FOR Teachers of Science and Mathematics. Seminar. (1-3) 

Lectures and discussions to deepen the student's appreciation of mathematics as 
a logical discipline and as a medium of expression. Special emphasis on topics 
relevant to current mathematics curriculum studies and revisions. 

SEMINARS, SELECTED TOPICS, RESEARCH 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Math. 190. Honors Seminar. (2) 

Prerequisite, permission of the departmental Honors Committee. Reports by 
students on mathematical literature; solution of various problems. (Ehrlich.) 

Math. 191. Selected Topics in Mathematics. (Credit according to 
work done.) 

Prerequisite, permission of the instructor. Topics of special interest to advanced 
undergraduate students will be offered occasionally under the general guidance 
of the departmental Committee on Undergraduate Studies. Honors students 
register for reading courses under this number. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Math. 298. Proseminar in Research. (1) 

Prerequisite, one semester of graduate work in mathematics. A seminar devoted 
to the foundations of mathematics, including mathematical logic, axiom sys- 
tems, and set theory. (Auslander.) 

Math. 399. Research. 

(Arranged) (StaflF.) 



MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 

Professors: Shreeve, Jackson and R, W. Allen. 

Associate Professors: Hayleck, Eyler, Wockenfuss and Sayre. 

Assistant Professor: Elkins. 

Instructors: Buchanan, Glass, John, Lloyd, Marks, Mcauliffe, 
Getting, Ward, Wise and Yang. 

Lecturer: Seigel. 

Instruction and research facilities are available for the degrees of Master 
of Science and Doctor of Philosophy in mechanical engineering. 

775 



Mechanical Engineering 

For the Master of Science degree in mechanical engineering a minimum 
of six semester hours of course work in mechanical engineering must be 
taken in classes conducted by members of the resident graduate faculty. 
For the Doctor of Philosophy degree, the minimum is eighteen semester 
hours. 

Registration for six credits of research (M.E. 399, Research) for the 
M.S. degree and twelve credits for the Ph.D. degree are required. It is 
the policy of the Department to require that this research be conducted 
in the Department laboratories. Arrangements for the research, and for 
faculty supervision, must be made, and approved by the Department 
Chairman, well in advance of the registration for the research in order 
that the funds and equipment may be made available. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
M.E. 100. Thermodynamics. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, 
Phys. 20, Math. 21, concurrently. The properties, characteristics, and funda- 
mental equations of gases, and vapors. Application of the first and second 
laws of thermodynamics in the analysis of basic heat engines, air compres- 
sion, and vapor cycles. Flow and non-flow processes for gases and vapors. 

(Eyler, Sayre.) 

M.E. 101. Dynamics of Machinery. (2) 

First semester. One lecture and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, 
E. S. 21; Math 64 concurrently. Kinematics of mechanisms, and dynamic 
characteristics of machinery with emphasis on systems with single degree of 
freedom. (Hayleck, Getting.) 

M.E. 102. Fluid Mechanics I. (3) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 
Prerequisites, M. E. 1. Laboratory fee, $3.00. A rational study of fluids at 
rest and in motion. Principles of viscous and turbulent flow in pipes, nozzles, 
etc. Impulse and momentum concepts. Pumps, turbines, and meters. Dimen- 
sional analysis and laws of similarity. (Sayre, John.) 

M.E. 103. Materials Engineering. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, 
E. S. 30. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Processes and methods to manufacture and 
usefully apply engineering materials; alloys and heat treatment of steel; 
strengthening processes for ferrous and non-ferrous alloys. Fabrication tech- 
niques for metals, polymers, and refractories. Specification, inspection, control 
and automation. (Jackson, Wockenfuss.) 

M.E. 104. Gas Dynamics. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, 
M. E. 102. Compressible flow in ducts and nozzles; effect of area change, heat 
addition, friction, and normal shocks. Themodynamics of chemically reacting 
flows, combustion and equilibrium. (Sayre.) 



176 



Mechanical Engineering 
M.E. 105. Principles of Mechanical Engineering. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Phys. 21, Math 21. 
Required of seniors in civil engineering. Elementary thermodynamics and the 
study of heat, fuel and combustion in the production and use of steam for 
generation of power. Supplemented by laboratory tests and trips to industrial 
plants. (Gather, Sayre.) 

M.E. 106. Transfer Processes. (3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, M. E. 102. 
Conduction by steady state and variable heat flow; laminar and turbulent flow; 
free and forced convection; radiation, evaporation and condensation of vapors. 
Analogy between the transfer of mass, heat, and momentum. (Allen, Eyler.) 

M.E. 107. Energy Conversion. (4) 

Second semester. Three lectures and one laboratory a week. Prerequisite, M. E. 
100. Laboratory fee, $3.00 per semester. Required of seniors in electrical 
engineering. Chemical, heat, mechanical, nuclear and electrical energy con- 
version processes, cycles and systems. Direct conversion processes of fuel cells, 
thermionics, and magnetohydromechanics. (Cather.) 

M.E. 120. Measurements Laboratory. (2) 

Second semester. One lecture and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, 
E. S. 30, M. E. 101, and E. E. 51; M. E. 106 concurrently. Lab Fee $3.00. 
Required of juniors in Mechanical Engineering. Measurements and measurement 
systems; applications of selected instruments with emphasis on interpretation of 
results. (Allen, Cather, Sayre.) 

M.E. 140. Engineering Analysis and Computer Programming. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Math. 64. Elements of 
operational calculus, vector analysis; numerical methods and programming for 
computers. Errors, interpolation, series, integration, interation and solution of 
equations. (Shreeve.) 

M.E. 150, 151. Energy Conversion. (4, 3) 

First semester. Three lectures, one laboratory a week. Second semester. Two 
lectures, one laboratory a week. Prerequisites, M. E. 103, M. E. 104, M. E. 
106. Chemical, heat, mechanical, nuclear and electrical energy conversion 
processes, cycles and systems. Reciprocating, turbo- and jet-propulsion power 
plants and components using all types of heat and reaction sources. Direct 
conversion processes of fuel cells, thermionics and magnetohydromechanics. 

(Shreeve, Cather.) 

M.E. 152. Machine Design. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, 
M. E. 101, 103. Working stresses, stress concentration, stress analysis and 
repeated loadings. Design of machine elements. Multidegree vibration sys- 
tems. (Hayleck, Jackson.) 

M.E. 153. Elasticity and Plasticity I. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, M. E. 152. Analysis 
of plates and shells, thick walled cylinders, columns, torsion of non-circular 
sections, and rotating disks. (Hayleck, Jackson, Wise.) 

777 



Mechanical Engineering 

M.E. 154, 155. Engineering Experimentation. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. One lecture and one laboratory period a week. 
Prerequisite, senior standing in Mechanical Engineering. Laboratory fee, $3.00 
per semester. Theory of experimentation. Selected experiments emphasize 
planned procedure, analysis and communications of results, analogous systems 
and leadership. (Allen, Gather, Sayre.) 

M.E. 156, 157. Mechanical Engineering Analysis and 
Design. (3, 4) 

First semester, two lectures, one laboratory period per week; second semester, 
two lectures and tw( laboratory periods per week. Prerequisite, senior standing 
in Mechanical Engi leering. Creative engineering and problem analysis. Sys- 
tems design including control, reliability and manufacturing requirements. Use 
of computers in design. Design of multi-variable systems. 

(Carter, Hayleck, Jackson.) 

M.E. 161. Environmental Engineering. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, M. E. 101, 106, senior 
standing in Mechanical Engineering. Heating and cooling load computations. 
Thermodynamics of refrigeration systems. Low temperature refrigeration. 
Problems involving extremes of temperature, pressure, acceleration and ra- 
diation. (Marks.) 

M.E. 162. Dynamics II. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, M. E. 101, Math. 64, senior standing 
in Mechanical Engineering. Linear and non-linear plane and three-dimensional 
motion, moving axes. Lagrange's equation, Hamilton's principle, non-linear 
vibration, gyroscope, celestial mechanics. (Hayleck, Wise.) 

M.E. 163. Fluid Mechanics II. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, M. E. 104, M. E. 106, senior standing. 
Hydrodynamics with engineering applications. Stream function and velocity 
potential; conformal transformations; pressure distributions; circulation; nu- 
merical methods and analogies. (Sayre, John.) 

M.E. 164. Thermodynamics II. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, M. E. 104, M. E. 106, senior standing. 
Applications to special systems, change of phase, low temperature. Statistical 
concepts, equilibrium, heterogenous systems. (Eyler, Allen.) 

M.E. 165. Automatic Controls. (3) 

Three lectures per week. Prerequisites, E. E. 52, senior standing. Hydraulic, 
electrical, mechanical and pneumatic automatic control systems. Open and 
closed loops. Steady state and transient operation, stability criteria, linear and 
non-linear systems. Laplace transforms. 

M.E. 166. Special Problems. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, senior standing in Mechanical Engineering. 
Advanced problems in Mechanical Engineering with special emphasis on mathe- 
matical and experimental methods. (Staff.) 

M.E. 167. Introduction to Operations Research I. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, senior standing in Mechanical Engineering. 
Applications of linear programming, queuing model, theory of games and com- 
petitive models to engineering problems. 

178 



Mechanical Engineering 
M.E. 168, 169. Solid State for Engineers. (3, 3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. S. 30. Advanced study of the behavior 
of solid materials. Structure of matter; equilibrium and rate processes; metallic 
and molecular solids; theory of dislocation; mechanical, thermal, electrical, 
optical, and other properties. (Jackson.) 

For Graduates 
M.E. 200, 201. Advanced Dynamics. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, E. S. 21, Math. 64, M. E. 153, 
M. E. 157. Mechanics of machinery. Dynamic force. Balancing of rotating 
parts. Vibrations and vibration damping. Critical speeds. (Wise.) 

M.E. 202, 203. Applied Elasticity. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites. E. S. 20, Math. 64, M. E. 153. 
Advanced methods in structural and experimental stress analysis. Advanced 
strength of materials involving beam problems, curved bars, thin plates and 
shells, buckling of bars, plates and shells, etc. Advanced work in stress con- 
centrations, plastic deformations, etc., and problems involving instability of 
structures. (Wise) 

M.E. 204, 205. Advanced Thermodynamics. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites. M. E. 104, 
M. E. 106, M. E. 151, Math. 64. Advanced problems in thermodynamics on 
compression of gases and liquids, combustion and equilibrium, humidification 
and refrigeration and availability. Problems in advanced heat transfer covering 
the effect of radiation, conduction, and convection, steady and unsteady flow, 
evaporation and condensation. (Shreeve, Allen.) 

M.E. 206, 207. Advanced Machine Design. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Math. 64, 
M. E. 153, M. E. 157. Application of advanced methods of stress analysis 
to design of special stationary and moving machine parts, including rotating 
disk, bearings, thick wall cylinders, screw fastenings, crankshafts, etc. Applica- 
tion of linear and torsional vibration and balancing in the design of machine 
members. Complete design of a machine. Study of current design litera- 
ture. (Jackson.) 

M.E. 208, 209. Design of Turbomachinery. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, M. E. 151. Characteristics and design 
of turbines, pumps, compressors and torque converters; cavitation, stall, and 
surge. (Shreeve.) 

M.E. 210, 211. Advanced Fluid Mechanics. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, M. E. 102, Math. 64 or equivalent. 
Potential flow theory; three dimensional flow examples; application of complex 
variables to two-dimensional flow problems; Blasius theorem, circulation and 
Joukowski hypothesis, engineering applications to cavitation prediction and 
calculation of pressure distribution; introduction to viscous flow and theory of 
the boundary layer. (Sayre.) 

M.E. 212, 213. Advanced Vibrations. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, M. E. 157. Review of single and 
multi-degrees of freedom. Laplace methods. Effects of pulse shape on re- 

179 



Mechanical Engineering 

sponse of linear and non-linear systems; friction, hysterisis and variable damp- 
ing. (Seigel.) 

M.E. 214, 215. Stress Waves in Continuous Media. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, M. E. 153 and M. E. 157. Method 
of characteristics applied to transient phenomena in solids and fluids. Elastic 
and plastic waves under impact. Shock formation and strain rate effects. 

(Seigel.) 

M.E. 216, 217. Energy Conversion Theory. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, M. E. 151. Combustion, thermo- 
electric, thermionic, fuel cells, reactors, magnetohydrodynamics. Special empha- 
sis on kinetics of reactions, fission and fusion. (Shreeve, Gather.) 

M.E. 218, 219. Energy Conversion Systems. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, M. E. 217. Design parameters in 
chemical, nuclear and direct conversion systems for the production of power; 
weight, efficiency and radiation. (Shreeve, Gather.) 

M.E. 220. Seminar. 

Gredit in accordance with work outlined by mechanical engineering staff. 
Prerequisite, graduate standing in mechanical engineering. (Staff.) 

M.E. 222. Advanced Metallography. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, 
M. E. 103, E. S. 20. Advanced study of the structure and properties of metals 
and alloys. Study of the latest developments in ferrous and non-ferrous alloys 
including stainless steels, high temperature steels, tool steels, aluminum, mag- 
nesium and copper alloys. Study of inspection of metals by the use of x-rays, 
spectrograph, metallograph and magniflux. Review of current literature. 

(Jackson.) 

M.E. 223, 224. Theory of Plasticity. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, M. E. 153. Goncepts of yield criteria 
and associated flow rules in the theory of elastic-plastic solids, including per- 
fectly plastic, elastic-plastic and strain-hardening materials. Torsion and plane 
problems of plasticity. (Hayleck, Wise, Jackson.) 

M.E. 225, 226. Advanced Properties of Metals and 

Alloys. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, E. S. 20, 
M. E. 103, M. E. 152, M. E. 153. Properties of metals including tensile, im- 
pact, fatigue, damping, capacity, hardenability, wear, etc. Fabrication problems 
and selection of metals and alloys. Service failures. Properties required for 
nuclear engineering applications. Properties of metals at elevated and extremely 
low temperatures. (Jackson.) 

M.E. 227, 228. Theory of Elasticity. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, M. E. 202, 
203. Stress and strain at a point. Relation between stresses and strains, general 
equations of elasticity, plane strain and plane stress, torsion, bending, axially 
symmetric distribution of stress, plates, thermal stresses, strain energy and ap- 
proximate methods. 

180 



Microbiology 
M.E. 229, 230. Jet Propulsion. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, M. E. 150, 
M. E. 151. Types of thermal jet units. Fluid reaction and propulsive efficiency. 
Performance of rockets, aerothermodynamics, combustion chemical kinetics, 
aerodynamics of high speed air flow. Principles and design of solid and liquid 
propellant rockets. Design of turbojets and aerojets, ramjets and hydroduct 
units, including combustion chambers, turbines and compressor. (Shreeve.) 

M.E. 231, 232. Advanced Heat Transfer. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, M. E. 150, 
M. E. 151. Advanced problems covering effects of radiation, conduction, con- 
vection, evaporation and condensation. Study of research literature on heat 
transfer. (Shreeve, Allen.) 

M.E. 233, 234. Compressible Flow. (3, 3) 

First and second semester. Prerequisites, M. E. 104, Math. 64 or equivalent. 
One dimensional subsonic and supersonic flow; compressible flow in ducts and 
nozzles; two and three dimensional subsonic and supersonic flow; similarity 
rules, normal and oblique shock waves. (Sayre.) 

M.E. 235, 236. Materials and Their Environment. (3, 3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, M. E. 225, 226. Problems involving 
materials subjected to extreme temperatures, nuclear bombardment and radiation 
damage, corrosion and oxidation, impact and flutter, thermal shock, high pres- 
sure and high vacuum. 

M.E. 237. X-Ray and Diffraction Techniques. (3) 

Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisite, M. E. 222. Ad- 
vanced work in X-Ray and diffraction techniques, electron microscopes, and 
optical microscopes, in the study of the structure of materials. 

M.E. 399. Research. 

Credit in accordance with work outlined by the staff of the Department of 
Mechanical Engineering. Prerequisite, graduate standing in mechanical engineer- 
ing. Research in any field of mechanical engineering as applied mechanics, heat 
transfer, thermodynamics, heat, power, etc. (Staff.) 



MICROBIOLOGY 

Professors: Faber, Doetsch, Hansen, and Pelczar. 

Associate Professor: Laffer. 

Assistant Professor: Hetrick. 

Lecturer: Stadtman. 

The Department of Microbiology offers the degrees of Master of Science 
and Doctor of Philosophy. 

The Department of Microbiology offers a program of advanced courses 
emphasizing the biological aspects of microorganisms. All candidates for 

181 



Microbiology 

advanced degrees are required to pursue a rigorous program of funda- 
mental and original research in an area approved by the department 
chairman and the staff. 

Further information concerning graduate work in microbiology may be 
obtained from the Department. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
MiCROB. 101. Pathogenic Microbiology. (4) 

First semester. Two lecture and two two-hour laboratory periods a week. Pre- 
requisite, Microb. 1. Laboratory fee, $15.00. The role of microorganisms in 
the diseases of man and animals with emphasis upon the differentiation and 
culture of microorganisms, type of disease, modes of disease transmission; 
prophylactic, therapeutic and epidemiological aspects. (Faber.) 

Microb. 103. Serology. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two two-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisite, Microb. 101. Laboratory fee, $15.00. Infection and resistance; 
principles and types of immunity; hypersensitiveness. Fundamental techniques 
of major diagnostic immunilogical reactions and their application. (Faber.) 

Microb. 104. History of Microbiology. (1) 

First semester. One lecture period a week. Prerequisite, a major or minor in 
microbiology. History and integration of the fundamental discoveries of the 
science. The modern aspects of cytology, taxonomy, fermentation, and immunity 
in relation to early theories. (Doetsch.) 

Microb. 108. Epidemiology and Public Health. (2) 

Second semester. Two lecture periods a week. Prerequisite, Microb. 1. History, 
characteristic features, and epidemiology of the important communicable dis- 
eases; public health administration and responsibilities; vital statistics. 

(Faber.) 

Microb. 111. General Virology. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period a week. 
Prerequisite, Microb. 101 or equivalent. Basic concepts regarding the nature 
of viruses and their properties, together with techniques for their characteriza- 
tion and identification. (Hetrick.) 

Microb. 121. Advanced Methods. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two two-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisite, consent of instructor: Laboratory fee, $15.00. The application of 
quantitative techniques for the measurement of enzyme reactions, mutations, 
fermentation analysis and other physiological processes of microorganisms. 

(Hansen, Pelczar.) 

Microb. 131, 133. Applied Microbiology. (4, 4) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and two two-hour laboratory periods 
a week. Prerequisite, Microb. 1. Laboratory fee, $15.00. The application of 
microorganisms and microbiological principles to milk, dairy products, and 
foods; industrial processes; soil; water and sanitation operations. 

(Doetsch, Hansen, LaflFer, Pelczar) 

182 



Microbiology 
MiCROB. 150. Microbial Physiology. (2) 

First semester. Two lecture periods a week. Prerequisite, 8 credits in micro- 
biology. Aspects of the growth, death, and energy transactions of microor- 
ganisms are considered, as well as the effects of the physical and chemical 
environment on them. (Doetsch.) 

Micros. 161. Systematic Bacteriology. (2) 

First semester. Two lecture periods a week. Prerequisite, 8 credits in micro- 
biology. History of bacterial classification; international codes of nomenclature; 
bacterial variation as it affects classification . (Hansen.) 

MiCROB. 181. Microbiological Problems. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. Prerequisite, 16 credits in micro- 
biology. Laboratory fee, $15.00. Registration only upon the consent of the 
instructor. TTiis course is arranged to provide qualified majors in microbiology 
and majors in allied fields an opportunity to pursue specific microbiological 
programs under the supervision of a member of the Department. (Faber.) 

For Graduates 
MiCROB. 201. Medical Mycology. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two two-hour laboratory periods a week. Pre- 
requisite, 30 credits in microbiology and allied fields. Laboratory fee, $15.00. 
Primarily a study of the fungi associated with disease and practice in the 
methods of isolation and identification. (Laffer.) 

MiCROB. 202. Genetics of Microorganisms. (2) 

Second semester. Two lecture periods a week. Prerequisite, consent of in- 
structor. An introduction to genetic principles and methodology applicable to 
microorganisms. Spontaneous and induced mutations, interaction between clones. 

(Hansen.) 

MiCROB. 204. Bacterial Metabolism. (2) 

First semester. Two lecture periods a week. Prerequisites, 30 credits in micro- 
biology and allied fields, including Chem. 161 and 162. Bacterial nutrition, 
enzyme formation, metabolic pathways and the dissimilation of carbon and 
nitrogen substrates. (Pelczar.) 

MiCROB. 206, 208. Special Topics. (1-4, 1-4) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, 20 credits in microbiology. Presenta- 
tion and discussion of fundamental problems and special subjects in the field 
of microbiology. (Staff.) 

MiCROB. 210. Virology and Tissue Culture. (2) 

Second semester. Two lecture periods a week. Prerequisite, Microb. 101 or 
equivalent. Characteristics and general properties of viruses and rickettsiae. 
Principles of tissue culture. (Hetrick.) 

MiCROB. 211. Virology and Tissue Culture Laboratory. (2) 

Second semester. Two three-hour laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite. 
Microb. 101 or equivalent. Laboratory fee, $20.00. Registration only upon con- 
sent of instructor. Laboratory methods in virology and tissue culture. 

(Hetrick.) 

183 



Music 

MiCROB. 214. Advanced Bacterial Metabolism. (1) 

Second semester. One lecture period a week. Prerequisite, Microb. 204 and 
consent of instructor. A discussion of recent advances in the field of bacterial 
metabolism with emphasis on metabolic pathways of microorganisms. 

(Pelczar.) 

Microb. 280. Seminar — Research Methods. (1) 

First semester. Discussions and reports by majors in microbiology engaged in 
current research; presentation of selected subjects dealing with recent advances 
in microbiology. (Staff.) 

Microb. 282. Seminar — Microbiological Literature. (1) 

Second semester. Presentation and discussion of current literature in micro- 
biology. (Staff.) 

Microb. 399. Research. 

First and second semesters; summer session. Credits according to work done. 
Laboratory fee, $15.00. The investigation is outlined in consultation with, and 
pursued under, the supervision of a senior staff member of the Department. 

(Staff.) 



MUSIC 

Professors: Ulrich, Grentzer, Jordan, Randall, and Trimble. 
Associate Professor: Henderson. 

Assistant Professors: Berman, Bernstein, Gordon, Heim, Meyer, and 

Pennington. 

The Department of Music offers the degree of Master of Music in three 
areas of specialization: music history and literature, theory and compo- 
sition, and performance. Departmental requirements, supplementary to 
those of the Graduate School, have been formulated in each of the three 
areas of specialization. Copies may be obtained by applying to the 
Department. 

For information on work leading to the degrees of Master of Arts or 
Master of Education in Music Education, and on a music-education minor 
in the degrees of Doctor of Philosophy or Doctor of Education, the 
student is referred to the section devoted to the Department of Education 
in this catalogue. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Music 120, 121. History of Music. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, Music 1 or 20 and junior standing. 
A study of musical styles from their origins in western Europe to their present- 
day manifestations. The interaction of music and other cultural activities. 
Music 120, the Greek period to Bach; Music 121, Bach to the present. 

(Jordan.) 

184 



Music 

Music 141, 142. Musical Form. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, Music 70, 71. A study of the or- 
ganizing principles of musical composition, their interaction in musical forms, 
and their functions in different styles. Music 141, the phrase to the rondo; 
Music 142, the larger forms. (Jordan.) 

Music 143, 144. Composition. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, Music 70, 71. The principles of 
musical composition, and their application to the smaller forms. Original writing 
in nineteenth- and twentieth-century musical idioms for various media. 

(Trimble.) 
Music 145, 146. Counterpoint. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, Music 70, 71. A course in eighteenth- 
century contrapuntal techniques. Study of devices of imitation in the inven- 
tion and the choral prelude. Original writing in the smaller contrapuntal forms. 

(Bernstein.) 

Music 147, 148. Orchestration. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, Music 70, 71. A study of the ranges. 
musical functions and technical characteristics of the instruments, and their 
color possibilities in various combinations. Practical experience in orchestrating 
for small and large ensembles. (Trimble.) 

Music 150. Keyboard Harmony. (2) 

First semester. Prerequisites. Music 70, 71. One lecture and two laboratory 
hours per week. The application to the piano keyboard of the harmonic prin- 
ciples acquired in Music 70 and 71. Harmonization of melodies, improvisions 
and accompanying playing from dictation, and transposition. (Meyer.) 

Music 160, 161. Conducting. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Music 160 or the equivalent is prerequisite to Music 
161. A laboratory course in conducting vocal and instrumental groups. Baton 
technique, score reading, rehearsal techniques, tone production, style, and in- 
terpretation. Music of all periods will be introduced. (Traver.) 

Music 164. Solo Vocal Literature. (3) 

Prerequisite, Music 120, 121 or the equivalent. The study of solo vocal litera- 
ture from the Baroque cantata to the art song of the present. The Lied, melodic, 
vocal chamber music, and the orchestral song are examined. (Pennington.) 

Music 165. Keyboard Music. (3) 

Prerequisite, Music 120, 121 or the equivalent. The history and literature of 
harpsichord, organ, and piano music from the Baroque period to the present. 
Suites, sonatas, and smaller forms are studied with emphasis on the changes 
of style and idiom. (Bernstein.) 

Music 166. Survey of the Opera. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Music 120, 121 or the equivalent. A study of the 
music, librettos, and composers of the standard operas. (Jordan.) 

Music 167. Symphonic Music. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Music 120, 121 or the equivalent. The study of 
orchestral music from the Baroque period to the present. The concerto, sym- 
phony, overture, and other forms are examined. (Henderson.) 

185 



Music 

Music 168. Chamber Music. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Music 120, 121 or the equivalent. The history 
and literature of chamber music from the early Baroque period to the present. 
Music for trio sonata, string quartet and quintet, and combinations of piano and 
string instruments is studied. (Uirich.) 

Music 169. Choral Music. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, Music 120, 121 or the equivalent. The history 
and literature of choral music from the Renaissance to the present, with dis- 
cussion of related topics such as Gregorian chant, vocal chamber music, etc. 

(Jordan.) 

Music 175. Canon and Fugue. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Music 146 or the equivalent. Composition and 
analysis of the canon and fugue in the styles of the eighteenth, nineteenth, and 
twentieth centuries. (Trimble.) 

For Graduates 
Music 200. Advanced Studies in the History of Music. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, Music 120, 121, and consent of instructor. A criti- 
cal study of one style period (Renaissance, Baroque, etc.) will be undertaken. 
The course may be repeated for credit, since a different period will be chosen 
each time it is offered. (Jordan.) 

Music 201. Seminar in Music. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Music 120, 121, and consent of instructor. The 
work of one major composer (Bach, Beethoven, etc.) will be studied. The 
course may be repeated for credit, since a different composer will be chosen 
each time it is offered. (Jordan.) 

Music 202. Pro-Seminar in the History and Literature of 

Music. (3) 

Prerequisites, Music 121 and graduate standing. An introduction to graduate 
study in the history and literature of music. Bibliography and methodology of 
systematic and historical musicology. (Jordan.) 

Music 203. Seminar in Musicology. (3) 

Prerequisites, Music 121 and graduate standing. An intensive course in one of 
the areas of musicology such as performance practices, history of music theory, 
history of notation, or ethnomusicology. Since a cycle of subjects will be studied, 
the course may be repeated for credit. (Bernstein.) 

Music 204. American Music. (3) 

Prerequisites, Music 121 and graduate standing. A lecture course in the history 
of American art music from Colonial times to the present. (Trimble.) 

Music 206. Advanced Modal Counterpoint. (3) 

Prerequisites, Music 146 or the equivalent, and graduate standing. An intensive 
course in the composition of music in the style of the late Renaissance. Analy- 
tical studies of the music of Palestrina, Lasso, Byrd, and others. (Bernstein.) 

186 



Philosophy 
Music 207. The Contemporary Idiom. (3) 

Prerequisites, Music 146 or the equivalent, and graduate standing. Composition 
and analysis in the twentieth century styles, with emphasis on techniques of 
melody, harmony, and counterpoint. (Trimble.) 

Music 208. Advanced Orchestration. (3) 

Prerequisites. Music 148 or the equivalent, and graduate standing. Orchestration 
projects in the styles of Debussy. Ravel, Stravinsky. Schoenberg, Bartok. and 
others. (Trimble.) 

Music 209. Seminar in Musical Composition. (3) 

Prerequisites, Music 144 or the equivalent, and graduate standing. An advanced 
course in musical composition. (Trimble.) 

\ 

Music 212, 213. Interpretation, Performance, and Analysis 

OF THE Standard Repertoire. (2-4 each course.) 

Prerequisite, consent of the graduate faculty in the Department. A seminar in 
analysis and interpretation for the graduate performer, with advanced instruction 
at the instrument of the works studied. In Music 213 a seminar paper and a 
full-length recital are required. (Heim and Staff.) 

Music 218. Teaching the Theory, History, and Literature of 
Music. (3) 

Prerequisite, graduate standing and consent of instructor. A course in teaching 
methodology, with emphasis on instruction at the college level. (Ulrich.) 

Music 399. Thesis Research. (3-6) 

Research in theory or history and literature of music, and musical composition. 
May be repeated for credit. (Staff.) 



PHILOSOPHY 

Professor: Lavine. 

Associate Professors: Pasch and Schlaretzki. 

Assistant Professor: Celarier. 

Instructor: Messenger. 

The Department of Philosophy offers the degrees of Master of Arts and 
Doctor of Philosophy. 

A statement of departmental requirements for these degrees, supple- 
mentary to the requirements of the Graduate School, may be obtained 
on request from the Department. 

Courses numbered below 150 will not be accepted for graduate credit 
in a philosophy major. 



187 



Philosophy 



For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 



Phil. 101. Ancient Philosophy. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, Philosophy 1 and either one additional course 
in philosophy or senior standing. A history of Greek thought from its begin- 
nings to the time of Justinian. The chief figures discussed: the Presocratic 
philosophers, Socrates, Plato, Aristotle, Epicurus, the Stoic philosophers, and 
Plotinus. (Celarier, Messenger.) 

Phil. 102. Modern Philosophy. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Philosophy 1 and either one additional course 
in philosophy or senior standing. A history of philosophical thought in the 
West during the 16th, 17th, and 18th centuries. The chief figures discussed: 
Bacon, Galileo, Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz, Locke, Berkeley, Hume, and Kant. 

(Staff.) 

Phil. 103. Nineteenth Century Philosophy. (3) 

Prerequisites, Phil. 1 and either one additional course in philosophy or senior 
standing. A survey of philosophy in the nineteenth century through a con- 
sideration of such writers as Hegel, Schopenhauer, Nietzsche, Spencer, Marx, 
Comte, Mill, Mach, and Bradley. (Lavine.) 

Phil. 104. Twentieth Century Philosophy. (3) 

Prerequisites, Phil. 1 and either one additional course in philosophy or senior 
standing. A survey of philosophy in the 20th century through a consideration 
of representative figures in England, Europe, and America. Among the theories 
to be studied are logical atomism (Russell, Wittgenstein), positivism (Carnap, 
Ayer), existentialism and phenomenology (Sartre, Husserl), naturalism and 
realism. (Dewey, Santayana). (Staff.) 

Phil. 105. Philosophy in America. (3) 

Prerequisite, Phil. 1. A survey of philosophical thought in America from the 
eighteenth century to the present. Special attention is given to Edwards, Jeffer- 
son, Emerson, Royce, Peirce, James, and Dewey. (Schlaretzki, Messenger.) 

Phil. 123, 124. Philosophies Men Live By. (3, 3) 

Not offered on College Park campus. An exploration of the fundamental beliefs 
which determine what men make of their lives and of the world they live in. 
Classic statements of these beliefs by great philosophers will be chosen for class 
discussion on the basis of their significance for the problems confronting modern 
man. (Staff.) 

Phil. 130. The Conflict of Ideals in Western Civilization. (3) 

First semester. A critical and constructive philosophical examination of the 
assumptions, goals, and methods of contemporary democracy, fascism, socialism, 
and communism, with special attention to the ideological conflict between the 
United States and Russia. (Staff.) 

Phil. 141. Philosophy of Language. (3) 

Prerequisite, Phil. 41. An inquiry into the nature and function of language and 
other forms of symbolism. (Schlaretzki.) 



188 



Philosophy 
Phil. 145. Ethical Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, Phil. 1 or 45. Contemporary problems having to do with the 
meanings of the principal concepts of ethics and with the nature of moral 
reasoning. (Schlaretzki.) 

Phil. 147. Philosophy of Art. (3) 

An inquiry into the nature and functions of art. The course will begin with 
an examination of the relations between art and imitation, art and craft, art 
and beauty, art and pleasure, art and form, art and expression, art and not-art, and 
good, bad, and great art, and conclude with a consideration of the uses of art, 
propagandistic, religious, escapist, and therapeutic. (Staff.) 

Phil. 152. Philosophy of Social and Historical Change. (3) 

First semester. A survey and an assessment of the religious, the philosophic, 
and the scientific approaches to socio-historic change, including the theories of 
linear progress, evolutionary progress, cyclical repetition, Hegelian-Marxian 
dialectic, Weberian secularization and bureaucratization. (Lavine.) 

Phil. 154. Political and Social Philosophy. (3) 

Second semester. A systematic treatment of the main philosophical issues en- 
countered in the analysis and evaluation of social (especially political) institu- 
tions. (Schlaretzki.) 

Phil. 155. Symbolic Logic. (3) 

Phil. 41 or Math. 3 recommended but not required. An introduction to the 
concepts and techniques of modern formal logic by means of matrix and 
axiomatic developments of the sentential calculus and an examination of the 
first-order predicate calculus in a system of natural deduction. (Pasch.) 

Phil. 156. Philosophy of Science. (3) 

Prerequisites, Phil. 41 and either 101 or 102; or consent of instructor. An 
inquiry into the relations of the sciences, the nature of observation, hypotheses, 
verification, experiment, measurement, scientific laws and theories, the basic 
concepts and presuppositions of science, and the relations of science to 
society. (Staff.) 

Phil. 157. Theory of Meaning. (3) 

Prerequisites, Phil. 41 and 102. A study of theories about the meaning of lin- 
guistic expressions, including the verification theory and the theory of meaning 
as use. Among topics to be considered are naming, referring, synonymy, inten- 
sion and extension, and ontological commitment. Such writers as Mill, Frege, 
Russell, Lewis, Carnap, Wittgenstein, Austin, and Quine will be discussed. 

(Staff.) 

Phil. 169. Topics in Contemporary Philosophy. (3) 

Prerequisite, Phil. 102. An intensive examination of contemporary problems 
and issues. Source material will be selected from recent books and articles. 

(Staff.) 

Phil. 170. Metaphysics. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, Phil. 101 and 102. Phil. 41 recommended. A 
study of some central metaphysical concepts (such as substance, relation, caus- 
ality, and time) and of the nature of metaphysical thinking. (Pasch.) 

189 



Philosophy 

Phil. 171. Theory of Knowledge. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Phil. 101 and 102. Phil. 41 recommended. 
The origin, nature, and validity of knowledge will be considered in terms of 
some philosophic problems about perceiving and thinking, knowledge and be- 
lief, thought and language, truth and confirmation. (Pasch.) 

Phil. 175. Topics in Symbolic Logic. (3) 

Prerequisite, Phil. 155. (Staff.) 

Phil. 176. Induction and Probability. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. A study of inferential forms, with emphasis 
on the logical structure underlying such inductive procedures as estimating and 
hypothesis-testing. Decision-theoretic rules relating to induction will be con- 
sidered, as well as classic theories of probability and induction. (Staff.) 

Phil. 180. The Philsophy of Plato. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, Phil. 101 and 102. A critical study of selected 
dialogues. (Celarier.) 

Phil. 181. The Philosophy of Aristotle. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Phil. 101 and 102. A critical study of selected 
portions of Aristotle's writings. (Celarier.) 

Phil. 182. Medieval Philosophy. (3) 

Prerequisite, Phil. 101 or 102. A history of philosophic thought in the West 
from the close of the classical period to the Renaissance. Based upon readings 
in the Stoics, early Christian writers, Neoplatonists, later Christian writers, and 
Schoolmen. (Celarier.) 

Phil. 184. The Continental Rationalists. (3) 

Prerequisites, Phil. 101 and 102. A critical study of the systems of some of 
the major 17th and 18th century rationalists, with special reference to Des- 
cartes, Spinoza, and Leibnitz. (Staff.) 

Phil. 185. The British Empiricists. (3) 

Prerequisites, Phil. 101 and 102. A critical study of selected writings of Locke, 
Berkeley, and Hume. (Staff.) 

Phil. 186. The Philosophy of Kant. (3) 

Prerequisites, Phil. 101 and 102. A critical study of selected portions of Kant's 
writings. (Lavine.) 

Phil. 190. Honors Seminar. (3) 

Open to philosophy honors students and, by permission, to other honors 
students. (Staff.) 

Phil. 191, 192, 193, 194. Topical Investigations. (1-3) 

Each semester. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 

Phil. 255. Seminar in the History of Philosophy. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

190 



Physical Education, Recreation and Health 
Phil. 256. Seminar in the Problems of Philosophy. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

Phil. 260. Seminar in Ethics. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Schlaretzki.) 

Phil. 261. Seminar in Esthetics. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

Phil. 270. Seminar in Metaphysics. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

Phil. 271. Seminar in the Theory of Knowledge. (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Pasch.) 

Phil. 292. Selected Problems in Philosophy. (1-3) 

Each semester. Prerequisite, consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

Phil. 399. Research in Philosophy. (1-12) 

Each semester. (Staff.) 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION, RECREATION AND HEALTH 

Professors: Fraley, Harvey, Humphrey, Johnson, and Massey. 

Associate Professors: Eyler and Husman. 

Assistant Professor: Nelson. 

The graduate student majoring in physical education, recreation, or 
health education may pursue the degrees of Master of Arts, Doctor of 
Education, and Doctor of Philosophy. The following undergraduate re- 
quirements or their equivalents must be met by every candidate before 
admission to candidacy for a graduate degree in physical education: 
basic sciences (human anatomy and physiology, physiology of exercise), 
kinesiology, therapeutics, sport skills, methods, human development, 
measurement, administration, and student teaching. In the event a stu- 
dent has had successful experience in teaching physical education, the 
prerequisites of sport skills, methods, and student teaching may be waived. 
Undergraduate prerequisites in recreation are as follows: psychology, 
sociology, principles, administration, basic sciences, recreational activities, 
and practical experience. Undergraduate prerequisites in health educa- 
tion: biological sciences, bacteriology, human anatomy and physiology, 
nutrition, chemistry, psychology, measurement, administration, principles, 
and field work. 

Every student majoring in physical education, health education or recrea- 
tion is required to take P.E., Hea., Rec. 210 — Methods and Techniques 
of Research, and P.E. 200 — Seminar in Physical Education, Recreation, 
and Health. 

191 



Physical Education, Recreation and Health 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates * 
P.E. 100. Kinesiology. (4) 

First and second semesters; summer session. Three lectures and two laboratory 
hours a week. Prerequisites, Zool. 1, 14, and 15, or the equivalent. 

(Campbell, Nelson.) 

P. E. 120. Physical Education for the Elementary School. (3) 
First and second semesters; summer session, (Humphrey.) 

P. E. 155. Physical Fitness of the Individual. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Massey.) 

P.E. 160. Theory of Exercise. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. Prerequisite, P. E. 100. (Massey.) 

P. E. 170. Supervision in Elementary School Physical 
Education. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. Prerequisite, P. E. 120. 

(Humphrey.) 

P. E. 180. Measurement in Physical Education and Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. Two lectures and two laboratory 
periods a week. (Hanson, Nessler.) 

P. E. 182. History of Dance. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, P. E. 52, 54, 56, 58, or permission of instructor. 

(Madden.) 

P. E. 184. Theory and Philosophy of Dance. (3) 

First and second semesters. (Madden.) 

P. E. 189. Field Laboratory Projects and Workshop. (1-6) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Staff.) 

P. E. 190. Administration and Supervision of Physical 
Education, Recreation and Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Eyler.) 

P. E. 191. The Curriculum in Elementary School Physical 
Education. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. Prerequisite, P. E. 120. 

(Humphrey.) 

P. E. 195. Organization and Administration of Elementary 
School Physical Education. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. Prerequisite, P. E. 120. 

(Humphrey.) 



*A research project must be conducted in each 100 level course taken for graduate 
credit. 

192 



Physical Education, Recreation and Health 
P. E. 196. Quantitative Methods. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Nelson, Massey.) 

For Graduates 

P. E. 200. Seminar in Physical Education, Recreation and 
Health. (1) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Massey, Nelson.) 

P. E. 201. Foundations IN Physical Education, Recreation 
and Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Eyler.) 

P. E. 202. Status and Trends in Elementary School 
Physical Education. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Humphrey.) 

P. E. 203. Supervisory Techniques in Physical Education, 

Recreation and Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Humphrey.) 

P. E. 204. Physical Education and the Development of 
the Child. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. Three lectures a week. 

(Humphrey.) 

P. E. 205. Analysis of Contemporary Athletics. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Husman.) 

P. E. 210. Methods and Techniques of Research. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Massey.) 

P. E. 215. Principles and Techniques of Evaluation. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Hanson.) 

P. E. 230. Source Material Survey. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Eyler.) 

P. E. 250. Mental and Emotional Aspects of Sports and 
Recreation. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Johnson.) 

P. E. 275. Advanced Analysis of Human Motion. (3) 

Prerequisite, P. E. 100; first, second and summer sessions. (Nelson.) 

P. E. 280. Scientific Bases of Exercise. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Massey.) 

P. E. 287. Advanced Seminar. (1-2) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Eyler.) 

193 



Physical Education, Recreation and Health 

P. E. 288. Special Problems in Physical Education, 
Recreation and Health. (1-6) 

First and second semester; summer session. (Staff.) 

P. E. 290. Administrative Direction of Physical Education, 
Recreation and Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Humphrey.) 

P. E. 291. Curriculum Construction in Physical Education 
AND Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Hanson.) 

P. E. 399. Research. (1-5) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Staff.) 

HEALTH EDUCATION 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Hea. 150. Health Problems of Children and Youth. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Johnson.) 

Hea. 155. Physical Fitness of the Individual. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Massey.) 

Hea. 160. Problems in School Health Education in 
Elementary and Secondary Schools. (2-6) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Johnson, Staff.) 

Hea. 170. The Health Program in the Elementary School. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. Prerequisites, Hea. 2 and 4, or 
Hea. 40. (Humphrey.) 

Hea. 178. Fundamentals of Sex Education. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Johnson.) 

Hea. 180. Measurement in Physical Education and Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Hanson, Nessler.) 

Hea. 188. Children's Remedial Fitness Clinic. (1-4) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Johnson.) 

Hea. 189. Field Laboratory Projects and Workshop. (1-6) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Staff.) 

Hea. 190. Administration and Supervision of School Health 
Education. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Johnson.) 

For Graduates 

Hea. 200. Seminar in Physical Education, Recreation and 
Health. (1) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Massey, Nelson.) 

194 



Physical Education, Recreation and Health 



Hea. 203. Supervisory Techniques in Physical Education, 
Recreation and Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Humphrey.) 

Hea. 210. Methods and Techniques of Research. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Massey.) 

Hea. 220. Scientific Foundations of Health Education. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session (Johnson, Slusher.) 

Hea. 230. Source Material Survey. (3) 
First and second semesters; summer session. 



Hea. 240. Modern Theories of Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. 

Hea. 250. Health Problems in Guidance. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. 

Hea. 260. Public Health Education. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. 

Hea. 280. Scientific Bases of Exercise. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. 

Hea. 287. Advanced Seminar. (1-2) 

First and second semesters; summer session. 

Hea. 288. Special Problems in Physical Education, 
Recreation and Health. (1-6) 

First and second semesters; summer session. 



(Eyler.) 
(Johnson.) 
(Johnson.) 
(Johnson.) 

(Massey.) 
(Eyler) 

(Staff.) 



Hea. 290. Administrative Direction of Physical Education, Rec- 
reation AND Health (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Humphrey.) 



Hea. 291. Curriculum Construction in Physical Education 
AND Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. 



Hea. 399. Research. (1-5) 

First and second semesters; summer session. 

RECREATION 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Rec. 120. Program Planning. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Rec. 30. 

Rec. 150. Camp Management. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. 



(Hanson.) 
(Staff.) 



(Harvey.) 
(Harvey.) 



795 



Physical Education, Recreation and Health 

Rec. 180. Leadership Techniques and Practices. (3) 

First and second semesters. (Harvey.) 

Rec. si 84. Outdoor Education. (6) 

Summer only. (Staff.) 

Rec. 189. Field Laboratory Projects and Workshops. (1-6) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Staff.) 

Rec. 190. Organization and Administration of Recreation. (3) 

First and second semesters. (Harvey.) 

For Graduates 

Rec. 200. Seminar in Physical Education, Recreation and 
Health. (1) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Massey, Nelson.) 

Rec. 201. Foundations in Physical Education, Recreation and 
Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Eyler.) 

Rec. 202. Philosophy of Recreation. (2) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Harvey.) 

Rec. 203. Supervisory Techniques an Physical Education, Recrea- 
tion AND Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Humphrey.) 

Rec. 204. Modern Trends in Recreation. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Harvey.) 

Rec. 210. Methods and Techniques of Research. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Massey.) 

Rec. 215. Principles and Techniques of Evaluation. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Hanson.) 

Rec. 230. Source Material Survey. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Eyler.) 

Rec. 240. Industrial Recreation. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Harvey.) 

Rec. 260. Hospital Recreation. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Harvey.) 

Rec. 287. Advanced Seminar. (1-2) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Eyler.) 

Rec. 288. Special Problems in Physical Education, Recreation 
AND Health. (1-6) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Staff.) 

196 



Physics 

Rec. 290. Administrative Direction of Physical Education, 
Recreation and Health. (3) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Humphrey.) 

Rec. 399. Research. (1-5) 

First and second semesters; summer session. (Staff.) 



PHYSICS AND ASTRONOMY 

Professors: Toll. Burgers,* Estabrook, Ferrell, Griem, 
Hornyak. Marion, MacDonald. Myers, Opik, Pal* Singer, 
Snow, Weber, Weske,* and Westerhout. 

Part-Time Professors: Friedman, Hayward, Rado, and Slawsky. 

Visiting Professors: Shakeshaft, and Woltjer. 

Visiting Part-time Professors: DoNN. Glasser. McDonald, and 
Musen. 

Associate Professors: Alley. Day, Erickson, Glover, Greenberg, 
Holmgren, Laster. Misner. Steinberg, Stern, Sucher. Tidman,* 
Wall, Yodh, Zipoy, and G. Zorn. 

Visiting Part-time Associate Professor: Bennett. 

Visiting Associate Professors: Jaffe, and Waggoner. 

Assistant Professors: Armstrong, Beall, Bell, Bhagat. Condon, 
DeBoer,* DeSilva, Detenbeck, Falk, Fivel. Fowler. Click, 
Guernsey,* Hintz, Kehoe, Kim, Koch, Montgomery,* Oneda, 
Pati, PR.ANGE, Rodberg, Van Wijk, Weiss, Whatley, 
Wilkerson,* and B. S. Zorn. 

Visiting Assistant Professors: Burnstein, Greiner, Korff, and 

SCHLITT. 

Part-time Assistant Professor: Dixon. 

Research Associates: Bettinger, Ezawa, Ghosh, Green, Islam, 
Lam, Meshkov, Prasad, Saiedy, Simkin, Singh, Tsuya, Woods, 
and Yabushita. 

Part-time Lecturers: Aitken, Donnert, Fichtel, Fried, Grabner, 
GuTSCHE, Howard, Ivory, Karle, Kostkowski. Lide. Meckler. 

WiNELAND, AND WOLCOTT. 

PHYSICS 

It is expected that the following areas should have been studied preliminary 
to graduate work. Any deficiencies should be made up at once. A limited 
amount of graduate credit will be allowed for courses so taken. 



* Institute for Fluid Dynamics and Applied Mathematics. 

197 



Physics 

General Physics Electricity and Magnetism 

Thermodynamics Modern Physics 

Intermediate Mechanics Advanced Calculus 

Physical Optics Vector Analysis 

Candidates for both the master's and doctor's degrees are required to 
take Theoretical Dynamics (Physics 200, 201) and Electrodynamics 
(Physics 204, 205). These courses each run for a full year and carry a 
total of 12 semester hours credit. 

Candidates for the doctor's degree should take Theoretical Dynamics, 
Electrodynamics, and Quantum Mechanics as well. No other courses are 
specifically required for students doing experimental thesis research, but 
Relativistic Quantum Mechanics is required for students doing disserta- 
tions in theoretical physics. It is recommended in the selection of further 
courses that the student avoid overspecia'' ation in any field. In par- 
ticular, he should take a wide variety oi classical courses as well as 
courses in selected fields of modern physics. Some of the advanced 
courses are given only every second or third year; the student should 
check with the Department to confirm when a given course is available. 

Candidates for advanced degrees in physics may have a minor in either 
astronomy, chemistry, mathematics, engineering, and/or in those fields , 
of physics other than general physics and their field of major specialization. 

Thesis (Ph.D.) 

The student must submit an outline of his topic to the graduate faculty 
for approval. This outline must clearly set forth the nature of the prob- 
lem, proposed method of procedure and the possible results that may be 
obtained. The completed thesis will also be presented to the graduate 
faculty for approval. 

Time Limits 

There will be a departmental limit on the time taken to get a graduate 
degree in physics. For the M.S., this will be five calendar years from 
the date of first enrolling in the Graduate School for full-time students and 
six years for part-time students. For the Ph.D., the time Hmits will be 
7 years from the date of first enrolling in the Graduate School for full- 
time students and 8 years for part-time students. 

Graduate Assistants and other students whose employment is part-time 
and secondary to their studies are to be considered full-time students. 
Timing begins on September 12, 1960 for those students who were en- 
rolled in the Graduate School before that date. 

Off-Campus Courses 

The Department of Physics and Astronomy offers courses at convenient 
times and places so as to accommodate the greatest number of students. 

198 



Physics 

In order to facilitate graduate study in the Washington area, the Depart- 
ment has part-time professors in certain government laboratories where 
a large number of students are interested in graduate study. All M.S. 
candidates beginning graduate studies after August, 1960. must take at 
least 3 credits of their graduate work on the College Park campus. All 
students who began graduate work in the University of Maryland courses 
after August. 1960. will be required to complete on the College Park 
campus at least 18 credits of their graduate work for the Ph.D. degree 
in physics: these credits must include at least 2 credits of Phys. 230 — 
Seminar, and the remainder can be divided among major and minor 
physics courses and thesis research. Normally, students will complete 
a much greater proportion of their graduate study on the College Park 
campus. At government agencies where there is no part-time professor, 
employees desiring to do graduate work in physics should contact a 
member of the graduate staff in the Department. 

Because of the large number of qualified applicants, the Department of 
Physics and Astronomy has had to restrict formal admission to the Grad- 
uate School to those who have shown particularly outstanding work in 
their undergraduate records or who have already done satisfactory work 
in key 100-Ievel courses at Maryland. Those students who are initially 
refused formal admission to the Graduate School may apply for admis- 
sion to University College (oflF-campus program), or to the College of 
Arts and Sciences as special students Each such student should then 
take at least 12 credits of 100-level courses in physics and astronomy 
including, if possible. Physics 120 and Physics 122 or other comparable 
courses suggested by his advisor. At the completion of all of these 
courses with grades of "B" or better, the student should then reapply 
for admission to the Graduate School. While the credits earned in Uni- 
versity College are not directly applicable toward a graduate degree, the 
student will find that the credit requirements are normally not the prin- 
cipal obstacle anyway in earning an advanced degree and the courses 
taken by registration in University College will form a good basis for 
later graduate study. The University of Maryland hopes in this way to 
offer an opportunity for advanced study in physics and astronomy to all 
qualified students. 

Further Information 

For more information, students should write the Department of Physics 
and Astronomy for the departmental publication entitled "Graduate Study 
in Physics." 

GENERAL PHYSICS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Phys. 100. Advanced Experiments. (2 credits per semester) 

Four hours of laboratory work per week. Prerequisite, four credits of Ph>s. 60 
or consent of instructor. Laboratory fee. $10.00 per semester. Selected funda- 

199 



Physics 

mental experiments in electricity and magnetism, elementary electronics, and 
optics. (Marion, E. Stem.) 

PHYSICS 

Phys. 102. Optics. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Phys. 11 or 21; Math. 
21. It is suggested, but not required, that Phys. 60 or Phys. 100 be taken con- 
currently with this course. Geometrical optics, optical instruments, wave motion, 
interference and diffraction, and other phenomena in physical optics. (Zipoy.) 

Phys. 103. Applied Optics. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 102. A detailed 
study of physical optics and its applications. (Alley.) 

Phys. 104, 105. Electricity and Magnetism. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Phys. 11 or 
21; Math. 21; Electrostatics, direct current and alternating current circuitry, 
electromagnetic effects of steady currents, electromagnetic induction, radiation, 
development of Maxwell's equations, Poynting vector, wave equations, and 
electronics. (Steinberg.) 

Phys. 106, 107. Theoretical Mechanics. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 51 or 
consent of instructor. A detailed study of Newtonian mechanics. Dynamics, 
the motion of rigid bodies, oscillation problems, etc., are studied. Lagrange's 
equation of the first kind and the Hamilton-Jacobi equation are introduced. 

(Marion.) 

Phys. 109. Electronic Circuits. (4) 

Second semester. Three hours of lecture and two of laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisite, Phys. 100 and 105 or concurrent enrollment in or Phys. 128. Theory 
of semi-conductor and vacuum tube circuits. Application in experimental physics. 
Laboratory fee, $10.00. (Condon.) 

Phys. 110. Special Laboratory Projects in Physics. (1, 2, or 3) 

Two hours laboratory work a week for each credit hour. One to three credits 
may be taken concurrently, each semester. Prerequisite, Phys. 100 and consent 
of adviser. Laboratory fee, $10.00 per credit hour. Selected advanced experi- 
ments. (Staff.) 

Phys. 111. Physics Shop Techniques. (1) 

First semester. One three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequisite, Phys. 100 
or consent of instructor. Laboratory fee, $10.00. Machine tools, design and con- 
struction of laboratory equipment. (Horn.) 

Phys. 114, 115. Introduction to Biophysics. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, intermediate 
physics and Math. 21. A study of the physical principles involved in biological 
processes, with particular emphasis on current research in biophysics. 

(Mull ins.) 



200 



Physics 
Phys. 118. Introduction to Modern Physics. (3) 

Each semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, general physics and in- 
tegral calculus, with some knowledge of differential equations and a degree of 
maturity as evidenced by having taken one or more of the courses Phys. 50 
through Phys. 110. Introductory discussion of special relativity, origin of quan- 
tum theory, Bohr atom, wave mechanics, atomic structure, and optical spectra. 

(Zom.) 
Phys. 119. Modern Physics. (3) 

Each semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys, 118. A survey of 
nuclear physics, x-rays, radioactivity, wave mechanics, and cosmic radiation. 

(Zorn.) 

Phys. 127, 128. Elements of Mathematical Physics. (4, 4) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Physics 18 and Mathematics 21, or 
consent of the mstructor. Classical dynamics and electrodynamic waves. A 
careful study of mathematical approaches used in mechanics, electricity and 
magnetism, and physical optics. (Marion.) 

Phys. 130, 131. Basic Concepts of Physics. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, junior standing. 
Lecture demonstration fee, $2.00 per semester. A primarily descriptive course 
intended mainly for those students in the liberal arts who have not had any 
other course in physics. This course does not satisfy the requirements of pro- 
fessional schools nor serve as a prerequisite or substitute for other physics 
courses. The main emphasis in the course will be on the concepts of physics, 
their evolution and their relation to other branches of human endeavor. 

(Armstrong.) 

Phys. 140, 141. Atomic and Nuclear Physics Laboratory. (3, 3) 
First and second semesters. One lecture and four hours of laboratory a week. 
Laboratory fee, $10.00 per semester. Prerequisites, two credits of Phys. 100 
and consent of instructor. Classical experiments in atomic physics and more 
sophisticated experiments in current techniques in nuclear physics. Enrollment 
is limited to ten students. (Condon, Detenbeck, Holmgren.) 

Phys. 144, 145. Methods of Theoretical Physics. (4, 4) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Physics 128. A survey of basic ideas 
in thermodynamics and statistical mechanics. An introduction to electrody- 
namics, quantum mechanics, and relativity. Primary emphasis will be placed 
upon the mathematical methods involved in our understanding of these topics. 

(Ferrell.) 

Phys. 152. Introduction to Thermodynamics and Statistical 

Mechanics. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Mathematics 21, Physics 
18 or 51, or consent of the instructor. Introduction to basic concepts in ther- 
modynamics and statistical mechanics. (Bhagat) 

A. GENERAL 

For Graduates 

Phys. 200, 201. Theoretical Dynamics. (3, 3) 

Each semester. Three lecture hours per week. Prerequisite, Physics 127 or 

201 



Physics 

equivalent. This basic course for graduate study in physics covers advanced 
classical mechanics, hydrodynamics, elasticity, thermodynamics, and statistical 
mechanics. It is normally taken concurrently with Physics 204, 205. 

(Myers, Glick, Misner.) 

Phys. 202, 203. Advanced Dynamics. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 201. A 
detailed study of advanced classical mechanics. (Myers.) 

Phys. 204, 205. Electrodynamics. (3, 3) 

Each semester. Three lecture hours per week. Prerequisite, Physics 128 or 
equivalent. This basic course for graduate study in physics covers electrodynam- 
ics and relativity. It is normally taken concurrently with Phys. 200, 201. 

(Sucher, Zipoy.) 

Phys. 208. Thermodynamics. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures per week. Prerequisite, Phys. 201. The first and 
second laws of thermodynamics are examined and applied to homogeneous and 
non-homogeneous systems, calculations of properties of matter, the derivation 
of equilibrium conditions and phase transitions, the theory of irreversible 
processes. (Schamp.) 

Phys. 212, 213. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics. (4, 4) 

Each semester. Four lectures per week. Prerequisite, Phys. 201 or an outstand- 
ing undergraduate background in physics. A study of the Schroedinger equa- 
tion, matrix formulations of quantum mechanics, approximation methods, scat- 
tering theory, etc., and applications to solid state, atomic, and nuclear physics. 

(Day.) 

Phys. 222, 223. Boundary- Value Problems of Theoretical 
Physics. (2, 2) 

Prerequisite, Phys. 205. (Folk, Weiss.) 

Phys. 228. Symmetry Problems in Physics. (3) 

Three lectures per week. Prerequisite, Physics 213. A study of general methods 
of classification of physical systems by their symmetries and invariance prop- 
erties, especially in quantum field theory applications. (Misner, Toll.) 

Phys. 236. Theory of Relativity. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 201. A study of Einstein's special 
theory of relativity and some consequences, and a brief survey of the foundations 
of general relativity. (Weber, Misner.) 

Phys. 240, 241. Theory of Sound and Vibrations. (3, 3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 201. A detailed study of acoustics 
and the theory of vibrations. (Hama.) 

B. ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR PHYSICS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Phys. 126. Kinetic Theory of Gases. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Phys. 107 and Math. 21. Dynamics of 
gas particles, Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution, diffusion, Brownian motion, etc. 

(Mason.) 

202 



Physics 

For Graduates 
Phys. 210. Statistical Mechanics. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Phys. 119, and Phys. 201. 
A study of the determination of microscopic behavior of matter from micro- 
scopic models. Microcanonical, canonical, and grand canonical models. Appli- 
cations of solid state physics and the study of gases. (Weiss.) 

Phys. 214. Theory of Atomic Spectra. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 213. A study of 
atomic spectra and structure — one and two electron spectra, fine and hyper-fine 
structure, line strengths, line widths, etc. (Wilkerson.) 

Phys. 215. Theory of Molecular Spectra. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 214. The structure 
and properties of molecules as revealed by rotational, vibrational, and electronic 
spectra. (Vanderslice.) 

Phys. 216, 217. Molecular Physics. (2, 2) 

Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Phys. 213. Molecular theory of gases and 
liquids, ensemble theory, analysis of empirical models for molecular interactions, 
theory of Coulomb interactions between charge distributions. (Mason.) 

C. SOLID STATE PHYSICS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Phys. 122. Properties of Matter. (4) 

Each semester. Four lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 119 or equivalent. 
Introduction to solid state physics. Electromagnetic, thermal, and elastic prop- 
erties of metals, semiconductors and insulators. (Glover, Stern.) 

For Graduates 
Phys. 218, 219. X-Rays and Crystal Structure. (3, 3) 

Three lectures per week. Prerequisite, Phys. 205. A detailed study of crystal 
structure of solids and of x-rays. (Stern.) 

Phys. 220. Application of X-Ray and Electron Diffraction 
Methods. (2) 

Two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, concurrent enrollment in Phys. 218. 
The investigation of crystal structure, using x-rays and electron diffraction. 

(Stem.) 

Phys. 242, 243. Theory of Solids. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 213. 
Properties of metals, lattice vibrations and specific heats; Boltzmann, Fermi- 
Dirac, and Bose-Einstein statistics, free electron gas theories, band theory of 
metals. (Prange.) 



203 



Physics 

D. NUCLEAR PHYSICS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Phys. 120. Nuclear Physics. (4) 

Each semester. Four lecture hours a week. Prerequisite, Physics 119. An intro- 
duction to nuclear physics at the pre-quantum mechanics level. Properties of 
nuclei; radioactivity; nuclear systematics; nuclear moments; the shell model; 
interaction of charged particles and gamma-rays with matter; nuclear detectors; 
accelerators; nuclear reactions; beta decay; high energy phenomena. 

(Armstrong, Holmgren.) 

Phys. 121. Neutron Physics and Fission Reactors. (4) 

Second semester. Four lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 120. Neutron dif- 
fusion and reactor physics. (Marion.) 

For Graduates 
Phys. 234, 235. Theoretical Nuclear Physics. (3, 3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Phys. 120 and Phys. 213. Nuclear prop- 
erties and reactions, nuclear forces, two, three, and four body problems, nuclear 
spectroscopy, beta decay, and related topics. (MacDonald, Rodberg.) 

Phys. 252, 253. Nuclear Structure Physics. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lecture hours per week. Prerequisite, Phys. 
120 or equivalent; co-requisite, Phys. 212-213 or consent of instructor. Nuclear 
structure and nuclear reactions. Two-body scatterings; nucleon-nucleon forces 
and the deuteron. Neutron scattering: the optical model. Resonance reactions, 
phase-shift analysis, positions and properties of energy levels; the shell model. 
Direct reactions. Electromagnetic transitions. Photoreactions. The design of 
experiments; the extraction of parameters from experimental data and the com- 
parison with nuclear models. (Marion, Holmgren.) 

E. ELEMENTARY PARTICLE PHYSICS 

Phys. 237. Relativistic Quantum Mechanics. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 213. Classical field 
theory, Klein-Gordon and Dirac equations, invariance properties, second quanti- 
zation, renormalization, and related topics. (Greenberg.) 

Phys. 239. Elementary Particles. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 237. Survey of elementary particles 
and their properties, quantum field theory, meson theory, weak interactions, 
possible extensions of elementary particle theory. (Day, Snow.) 

Phys. 258. Quantum Field Theory. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 237. S-matrix, 
Feynman diagrams, scattering theory, renormalization, conservation laws, dis- 
persion relations, and recent non-perturbation approaches to field theory. (Toll.) 

Phys. 260. High Energy Physics. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 237. Nuclear forces are studied by 
examining interactions at high energies. Meson physics, scattering processes, 
and detailed analysis of high energy experiments. (Snow.) 

204 



Physics 

F. ASTROPHYSICS AND GEOPHYSICS 

For additional courses, see the section on Astronomy, below. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Phys. 123. Introduction to Atmospheric and Space Physics. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Physics 127 and Physics 
118 or consent of instructor. Motions of charged particles in magnetic fields, 
aspects of plasma physics related to cosmic rays and radiation belts, atomic 
phenomena in the atmosphere, thermodynamics and dynamics of the atmosphere. 

(Singer.) 

For Graduates 
Phys. 221. Upper Atmosphere and Cosmic Ray Physics. (2) 

Second semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 201 or consent of in- 
structor. Structure of the atmosphere, rocket and satellite experiments, primary 
and secondary cosmic rays, origins of cosmic rays, geomagnetic theory. 

(Singer, Laster.) 

G. FLUID DYNAMICS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Phys. 116, 117. Introduction to Fluid Dynamics. (3, 3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Phys. 106 and Math. 21. Kinematics of 
fluid flow, properties of incompressible fluids, complex variable methods of 
analysis, wave motions. (DeBoer.) 

For Graduates 
Phys. 206. Plasma Physics. (3) 

Three hours of lecture per week. Prerequisite, Physics 204, 205. Knowledge 
of complex variable theory is also desirable. A detailed study of plasma physics. 

(Tidman.) 

Phys. 224, 225. Supersonic Aerodynamics and Compressible 
Flow. (2, 2) 

Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 201. (Pai.) 

Phys. 226, 227. Theoretical Hydrodynamics. (3, 3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 201. A detailed study of advanced 
fluid dynamics. (Burgers.) 

Phys. 232, 233. Hydromechanics Seminar. (1, 1) 

First and second semesters. One meeting a week. (Staff.) 

Phys. 246, 247. Special Topics in Fluid Dynamics. (2, 2) 

Prerequisites, advanced graduate standing and consent of the instructor. 

(Burgers.) 

Phys. 262, 263. Aerophysics. (3, 3) 

Three lectures. Prerequisite, consent of the instructor. (Pai.) 

205 



Physics 

H. RESEARCH, SEMINARS AND SPECIAL TOPICS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Phys. 150. Special Problems in Physics. 

Research or special study. Credit according to work done. Laboratory fee, 
$10.00 per credit hour when appropriate. Given each semester. Prerequisite, 
major in physics and consent of adviser. (Staff.) 

Phys. 190. Independent Studies Seminar. (Credit according 

to work done.) 

First and second semesters. Enrollment is limited to students admited 
to the Undergraduate Honors Program in physics. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Phys. 230. Seminar. 

Seminars on various topics in advanced physics are held each semester, with 
the contents varied each year. One credit for each seminar each semester. 

(Staff.) 

Phys. 231. Applied Physics Seminar. 

One credit for each semester. (Staff.). 

Phys. 238. Quantum Theory — Selected Topics. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Phys. 237. (Staff.) 

Phys. 245. Special Topics in Applied Physics. 

Two credits each semester. Two lectures a week. (Staff.) 

Phys. 248, 249. Special Topics in Modern Physics. (2, 2) 

Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, calculus and consent of instructor. (Staff.) 

Phys. 399. Research. 

Credit according to work done, each semester. Laboratory fee, $10.00 per credit 
hour. Prerequisite: an approved application for admission to candidacy 
or special permission of the Department. (Staff.) 

I. SPECIAL PHYSICS COURSES FOR HIGH SCHOOL 
SCIENCE TEACHERS 

The courses in this section were especially designed for high school teachers 
and are not applicable to B.S., M.S., or Ph.D. degrees in physics without special 
permission of the Department. However, these courses can be included as part 
of a physics minor or as electives. No prerequisites are required. 

Phys. 118A. Atoms, Nuclei, and Stars. (3) 

Three lectures per week. An introduction to basic ideas of the constitution and 
properties of atomic and subatomic systems and of the overall structure of 
the universe. (Hornyak.) 

Phys. 112A. Properties of Materials. (3) 

Three lectures per week. An introduction to the study of solid state physics and 
the properties of fluids. (E. Stern.) 

206 



Astronomy 
Phys. 160A. Physics Problems. (1, 2, 3) 

Lectures and discussion sessions arranged. (Laster.) 

Phys. 170A. Applied Physics. (3) 

Three lectures per week. (Homyak.) 

Phys. 199. National Science Foundation Summer Institute 
FOR Teachers of Science and Mathematics Seminar. (1) 

Arranged during summer school. Enrollment limited to participants in the 
N.S.F. Summer Institute. Laboratory fee, $5.00. (Detenbeck, Staff.) 



ASTRONOMY 

Professors: Westerhout and Opik. 

Visiting Professors: Shakeshaft and Woltjer. 

Part-time Professor: Musen. 

Associate Professor: Erickson. 

Assistant Professors: Bell and Van Wijk. 

Visiting Part-time Lecturer: Donn. 

All candidates must obtain three credits of Astr. 100 or Astr. 102, 
preferably both. This requirement may be waived if the student has 
previous experience. All students should take at least two credits of 
Astr. 230, Astronomy Seminar. All full-time graduate students are ex- 
pected to take Astr. 230 each term. No other Astronomy courses are 
specifically required, but candidates for the doctor's degree should expect 
to take at least 12 credits of Astronomy courses at the 200-level, exclu- 
sive of Astr. 230, in order to pass the qualifying examination. The 
qualifying examination will be offered each year in September. Astronomy 
students will take the same preliminary examination taken by physics 
students to attest the adequacy of their undergraduate training in Physics. 

Many of the advanced Astronomy courses will be offered once every 
other year. Students are also urged to acquire a broad background in 
all fields of Astronomy in addition to their field of specialization. 

Candidates for advanced degrees in Astronomy should have covered in 
their undergraduate preparation all or nearly all the subjects required for 
an adequate preparation for graduate students in Physics. Their 
preparation should also include an introductory Astronomy course or an 
equivalent amount of independent reading in elementary Astronomy. No 
special undergraduate training in astronomy is required, however, although 
it will relieve the student's load in the first year of graduate study if he 
has taken a number of undergraduate astronomy courses. 

Astronomy majors will ordinarily take a minor in Physics, where general 
Physics courses are counted towards fulfillment of the minor require- 

207 



Astronomy 

ments, and Mathematics. Courses in Engineering or Chemistry may also 
be taken as part of the minor, if appropriate for the particular program 
of study. A typical list of minor courses for a Ph.D. candidate might 
consist of Phys.120, Nuclear Physics (4), Phys. 200, 201, Theoretical 
Dynamics (3, 3), Phys. 212, 213, Introduction to Quantum Mechanics 
(4, 4), Math. 114, Differential Equations (3) and Math. 130, Prob- 
ability (3). A candidate for the M.S. degree might omit Phys. 120 and 
212 and 213 from the above list. These lists of minor courses can be 
greatly varied depending on the student's preparation and interests, but 
Phys. 200 and 201 should always be included unless the student has a 
particularly strong undergraduate background in theoretical dynamics. 

The Department also offers M.S. and Ph.D. degrees in Astrophysics. 
The study program for these degrees can be carefully adjusted to give 
the optimum proportion of Physics and Astronomy courses suitable for 
some particular border-line field of study. Students majoring in Astro- 
physics will have the option of taking the qualifying examination in 
either Physics or Astronomy. Special departmental approval of the study 
program must be obtained unless the program meets all requirements of 
either the Physics or Astronomy degree. 

ASTRONOMY 

AsTR. 1, 2. Astronomy. (3, 3) 

Three lectures per week. An elementary course in descriptive astronomy, also 
appropriate for non-science students. Lecture demonstration fee, $3.00 per 
semester. (Donn) 

AsTR. 10. Descriptive and Analytical Astronomy. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. A general survey course intended for 
science majors. Prerequisite concurrent or previous enrollment in Math 20. Lec- 
ture demonstration fee, $3.00. (Van Wijk.) 

Astr. 100. Observational Astronomy, (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two hours of laboratory work per week. Pre- 
requisite, Math 21 and at least 12 credits of introductory physics and astronomy 
courses. Laboratory fee $10. Introduction to the methods of astronomical photo- 
metry and spectroscopy. (Van Wijk.) 

AsTR. 101. Introduction to Galactic Research. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures per week. Prerequisite, Math 21 and at least 12 
credits of introductory physics and astronomy courses. Stellar motions, methods 
of galactic research, study of our own and nearby galaxies, clusters of stars. 

(Van Wijk.) 

Astr. 102. Introduction to Astrophysics. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures per week. Prerequisite, previous or concur- 
rent enrollment in Physics 1 19 or consent of the instructor. Spectroscopy, struc- 
ture of the atmospheres of the sun and other stars. Observational data and 
curves of growth. Chemical composition. (Bell.) 

208 



Astronomy 
AsTR. 110. Introduction to Radio Astronomy. (3) 

Three lectures per week. Prerequisite, Math 21 and at least 12 credits of 
introductory physics and astronomy courses. Characteristics of extraterrestrial 
radio noise, sources of radio emmission, our own and external galaxies, the 
sun, radio telescopes, and basic observational techniques. (Westerhout.) 

AsTR. 124. Celestial Mechanics. (3) 

Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, Physics 127 or consent of instructor. 
Celestial mechanics, orbit theory, equations of motion. (Musen.) 

AsTR. 150. Special Problems in Astronomy. 

Given each semester. Prerequisite, major in physics or astronomy and/or 
consent of advisor. Research or special study. Credit according to work 
done. Lab fee $10.00. (Staff.) 

AsTR. 190. Honors Seminar. 

Credit according to work done, each semester. Enrollment is limited to students 
admitted to the Honors Program in Astronomy. (Staff.) 

AsTR. 200. Dynamics of Stellar Systems. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures per week. Prerequisite, Physics 200 or Astr. 101. 
Theory of stellar encounters. Study of the structure and evolution of dynamical 
systems encountered in astronomy. (Van Wijk.) 

AsTR. 202. Stellar Interiors. (3) 

Three lectures per week. Prerequisites, Math 114 and Physics 119 or consent 
of instructor. A study of stellar structure and evolution. (Bell.) 

AsTR. 203. Stellar Atmospheres. (3) 

Three lectures per week. Prerequisite, Physics 212 or consent of the instructor. 
Observational methods, line formation, curve of growth, equation of transfer, 
stars with large envelopes, variable stars, novae, magnetic fields in stars. 

(Erickson.) 

AsTR. 204. Physics of the Solar System. (3) 

Three lectures per week. Prerequisite, Physics 119. A survey of the problems of 
interplanetary space, planetary structure and atmospheres, physics of the earth's 
upper atmosphere, motions of particles in the earth's magnetic field. (Opik.) 

Astr. 210. Galactic Radio Astronomy. (3) 

Three lectures per week. Prerequisites, Physics 119, Astr. 101 and 110 or con- 
sent of the instructor. Theory and observations of the continuum and 21 -cm line 
emission from the Galaxy; galactic structure and the sources of radio emission. 

(Westerhout.) 
Astr. 212. The Solar Corona. (3) 

Three lectures per week. Prerequisites, Physics 119, Astr. 102 and 110 or con- 
sent of the instructor. A detailed study of the radio emission from the sun. 
Physics of solar phenomena, such as solar flares, structure of the Corona, etc. 

(Erickson.) 
Astr. 214. Instellar Matter. (3) 

Three lectures per week. Prerequisites, previous or concurrent enrollment in 
Physics 213, Astr. 101 or Astr. 102 or consent of instructor. A study of the 
physical properties of interstellar gas and dust. 

209 



Poultry Science 

AsTR. 230. Seminar. (1) 

Seminars on various topics in advanced astronomy are held each semester, with 
the contents varied each year. One credit for each seminar each semester. (Staff.) 

AsTR. 248, 249. Special Topics in Modern Astronomy. 

Credit according to work done each semester. Prerequisite, consent of instructor. 

(Staff.) 

AsTR. 399. Research. 

Credit according to work done, each semester. Laboratory fee, $10 per credit 
hour. Prerequisite, an approved application for admission to candidacy or 
special permission of the Department of Physics and Astronomy. (Staff.) 

CHEMICAL PHYSICS 

(For an outline of this new interdepartmental program leading to the M.S. and 
Ph.D. degrees, see the separate section under this title or write to the Institute 
of Molecular Physics, University of Maryland, College Park, for further details.) 



POULTRY SCIENCE 

Professors: Shaffner and Combs. 

Research Professor: Shore. 

Associate Professors: Creek, Helbacka and Wilcox. 

Course work and research leading to the Master of Science and the Doctor 
of Philosophy degrees are offered. The student may pursue work with the 
major emphasis either in nutrition, physiology, physiological genetics, or 
the technology of eggs and poultry. 

Department requirements, supplementary to the Graduate School, have 
been formulated for the guidance of candidates for graduate degrees. 
Copies of these requirements may be obtained from the Department of 
Poultry Husbandry. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
An. Sci. 160. Technology of Market Eggs and Poultry. (3) 

First semester, alternate years. (Not offered 1963-64.) Two lectures and one 
laboratory per week. A study of the technological factors concerned with the 
processing, storage, and marketing of eggs and poultry, also factors affecting 
their quality and grading. (Helbacka.) 

A. E. 117. Economics of Marketing Eggs and Poultry. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures per week. (See Agricultural Economics A. E. 
117.) (Staff.) 

Poultry Hygiene, see Veterinary Science, V. S. 107. 
Avian Anatomy, see Veterinary Science, V. S. 108. 

210 



Poultry Science 
An. Sci. 161. Poultry Genetics. (3) 

Second semester, alternate years. (Not offered 1963-64.) Two lectures and one 
laboratory period per week. Prerequisites, An. Sc. and Zool. 104. Inheritance of 
factors related to egg and meat production and quality are stressed. An experi- 
ment utilizing procedures of pedigreed matings will be performed in the 
laboratory. (Wilcox.) 

An. Sci. 162. Avian Physiology. (1) 

First semester. One three hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites, Zool. I and 
Zool. 102 or equivalent. The basic physiology of the bird is discussed, ex- 
cluding the rep. jductive system. Special emphasis is given to physiological 
differences between birds and other vertebrates. (Wilcox.) 

An. Sci. SI 63. Poultry Breeding and Feeding. (1) 

Summer session only. This course is designed primarily for teachers of voca- 
tional agriculture and extension service workers. The first half will be devoted to 
problems concerning breeding and the development of breeding stock. The 
second half will be devoted to nutrition. (Combs, Wilcox.) 

An. Sci. SI 64. Poultry Products and Marketing. (1) 

Summer session only. This course is designed primarily for teachers of voca- 
tional agriculture and county agents. It deals with the factors affecting the 
quality of poultry products and with hatchery management problems, egg and 
poultry grading, preservation problems and market outlets for Maryland poultry. 

(Helbacka.) 

For Graduates 
An. Sci. 260. Advanced Poultry Nutrition. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, 
An. Sc. 110, Chem. 31, 32, 33 and 34 or permission of instructor. A funda- 
mental study of the dietary role of proteins, minerals, vitamins, antibiotics, and 
carbohydrates is given as well as a study of the digestion and metabolism of 
these substances. Deficiency diseases as produced by the use of synthetic diets 
are considered. (Combs.) 

An, Sci. 261. Physiology of Reproduction. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, 
Zool. 102 or its equivalent. The role of the endocrines in reproduction is con- 
sidered. Fertility, sexual maturity, egg formation, ovulation, and the physiology 
of oviposition are studied. Comparative processes in birds and mammals are 
discussed. (Shaffner.) 

An. Sci. 262. Poultry Literature. (1-4) 

First and second semesters. Readings on individual topics are assigned. Written 
reports required. Methods of analysis and presentation of scientific material are 
discussed. (Staff.) 

An, Sci, 263S. Poultry Nutrition Laboratory. (2) 

One lecture and one laboratory period a week. To acquaint graduate students 
with common basic nutrition research techniques useful in conducting experi- 
ments with poultry. Actual feeding trials with chicks as well as bacteriological 
and chemical assays will be performed. (Creek.) 

211 



Psychology 

An. Sci. 301. Special Problems in Animal Science. 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, approval of staff. Work assigned in 
proportion to amount of credit. Problems will be assigned which relate 
specifically to the character of work the student is pursuing. 

An. Sci. 302. Seminar. (1) 

First and second semesters. Students are required to prepare papers based upon 
current scientific publications, relating to animal science or upon their research 
work for presentation before and discussed by the class. (Staff.) 

An. Scl 399. Research. (1-12) 

First and second semester. Work assigned in proportion to amount of credit. 
Students will be required to pursue original research in some phase of animal 
science, carrying some to completion and report the results in the form of a 
thesis. (Staff.) 



PSYCHOLOGY 

Professors: Andrews, McGinnies, Magoon, and Waldrop. 

Part-time Professors: Brady and Edgerton. 

Associate Professors: Anderson, Bartlett, Cline, Daston, 
Ferster, Gollub, Heermann, Leventhal, Maxwell, Pliskoff, 
Pumroy, Walder, and Yarczower. 

Assistant Professors: Bienen, Findley, McIntire, McKenzie, 
Pavey, Turnage, and Ward. 

For the master's degree a minimum of 30 hours are required. The major, 
composed of 21 hours, will be identified as General Psychology and will 
consist of Psych. 211-212 (6), Psych. 252-253 (6), the master's thesis 
research (6), and one elective course (3). The minor, composed of a 
minimum of 9 hours, will ordinarily be taken in a field of specialization 
which the student proposes for the major in his doctoral program. 

For the doctoral degree a minimum of 72 hours is required. The majors, 
composed of 48 hours, will consist of at least 30 hours in courses chosen 
from two specialized fields, and 18 hours of research for thesis, the last 
including 6 hours for the master's thesis. The minor will be in General 
Psychology and will consist of a total of 24 hours including Psych. 205- 
206 (6), Psych. 211-212 (6), Psych. 252-253 (6), and two elective 
courses (6). 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Graduate credit will be assigned only for students certified by the Department 
of Psychology as qualified for graduate standing. 

212 



Psychology 
Psych. 110. Educational Psychology. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Psych. 1. Researches on fundamental psychological 
problems encountered in education. Measurement and significance of individual 
differences; learning, motivation, transfer of training, and the educational 
implications of theories of intelligence. (Maxwell.) 

Psych. 122. Advanced Social Psychology. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Psych. 21, and Psych. 90 or consent of instructor. 
A systematic review of researches and points of view in regard to major problems 
in the field of social psychology. (McGinnies, Cline.) 

Psych. 123. Language and Social Communication. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Psych. 21, senior standing and consent of in- 
structor. The nature and significance of verbal and non-verbal communication in 
social psychological processes, including examination of relevant theoretical 
approaches to symbolic behavior. (McGinnies, Cline.) 

Psych. 131. Abnormal Psychology. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, 3 courses in psychology including 
Psych. 5. The nature, diagnosis, etiology, and treatment of mental disorders. 

(Staff.) 

Psych. 136. Applied Experimental Psychology. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Psych. 1 . A study of basic human factors involved 
in the design and operation of machinery and equipment. Organized for stu- 
dents in engineering, industrial psychology, and the biological sciences. 

(Anderson.) 

Psych. 145. Experimental Psychology: Sensory Processes. (4) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and two two-hour laboratory periods 
per week. Prerequisite, Psych. 90. Laboratory fee per semester. $4.00. Primarily 
for students who major or minor in psychology. A systematic survey of the 
laboratory methods and techniques applied to sensory and perceptual processes. 

(Mclntire, Turnage.) 

Psych. 146. Experimental Psychology: Learning, Motivation, 
and Problem Solving. (4) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and two two-hour laboratory periods 
per week. Prerequisite, Psych. 90. Laboratory fee per semester, $4.00. Primarily 
for students who major or minor in psychology. The experimental analysis of 
learning and motivational processes. (Yarczower, Gollub.) 

Psych. 147. Experimental Psychology: Social Behavior. (4) 

First and second semesters. Two lectures and one two-hour laboratory period 
per week. Laboratory fee, $4.00. Prerequisites, Psych. 21 and Psych. 90 or 
equivalent. A laboratory course dealing with methods of studying behavior in 
the social context. Topics will include social perception and motivation, small 
groups, communication and persuasion. Consideration will be given to the 
techniques involved in laboratory experimentation, field studies, attitude scale 
construction, and opinion surveys. (McGinnies, Cline.) 

Psych. 148. Psychology of Learning. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, Psych. 146, or Psych. 145 and permission. Review 
and analysis of the major phenomena and theories of human and animal learning, 

213 



Psychology 

including an introduction to the fields of problem solving, thinking and reasoning 
behavior. (Yarczower, GoUub, Turnage.) 

Psych. 150. Tests and Measurements. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Psych. 90. Laboratory fee, $4.00. Criti- 
cal survey of measuring devices used in counseling, educational and industrial 
practice with an emphasis on the theory, development and standardization. 
Laboratory work will incorporate training in methodology of test development 
together with appropriate practice in the use of selected tests. 

(Waldrop, Bartlett.) 

Psych. 151. Psychology of Individual Differences. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, Psych. 5 and 90. Problems, theories, 
and researches related to psychological differences among individuals and 
groups. (Heermann, Waldrop.) 

Psych. 161. Industrial Psychology. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, 6 hours in psychology. A course designed to aid 
in the understanding of the problems of people in a variety of work situations; 
serving as an introduction to such technical problems as personnel selection, 
interviewing, morale, supervision and management, and human relations in 
industry. Lecture, discussion and laboratory. (Heermann, Bartlett.) 

Psych. 180. Physiological Psychology. (3) 

Prerequisite, Psych. 145 or 146. An introduction to research on the physiological 
basis of human behavior, including considerations of sensory phenomena, motor 
coordination, emotion, drives, and the neurological basis of learning. 

(Brady, Mclntire.) 
Psych. 181. Animal Behavior. (3) 

(Same as Zool. 181.) Second semester. Prerequisite, consent of instructor. A 
study of animal behavior, including considerations of social interactions, learning 
sensory processes, motivations, and experimental methods, with a major 
emphasis on mammals. (Mclntire.) 

Psych. 191. Senior Seminar. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, senior standing and consent of the instructor. The 
historical and theoretical roots of the science of psychology. Analysis of cur- 
rent psychological theories and their related research. (Staff.) 

Psych. 194. Independent Study in Psychology. (1-6) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, written consent of individual faculty 
supervisor. Integrated reading under direction, leading to the preparation of an 
adequately documented report on a special topic. (Staff.) 

Psych. 195. Minor Problems in Psychology. (1-6) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, written consent of individual faculty 
supervisor. An individualized course designed to allow the student to pursue a 
specialized topic or research project under supervision. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 

(All the following courses require consent of the instructor. Not all of the 
graduate courses are offered every year. The times specified for each course 
are given as estimates.) 

214 



Psychology 

Psych. 200. Proseminar: Professional Aspects of 
Psychological Science. (1) 

Prerequisite, consent of faculty advisor. Survey of professional problems in 
phychology, including considerations of contemporary developments, profes- 
sional ethics, literature resources, formulation of critical research problems, and 
discussion of the major institutions requiring psychological services. (Staff.) 

Psych. 201. Sensory and Perceptual Processes. (3) 

Alternate years. Prerequisites. Psych. 180 and 211. The contemporary experi- 
mental and theoretical literature on selected problems in sensation and percep- 
tion. (Andrews, Anderson, Mclntire.) 

Psych. 203, 204. Graduate Seminar. (3, 3) 

Surveys of contemporary American and foreign research literature in specialized 
fields of psychology. (Staff.) 

Psych. 205, 206. Historical Viewpoints and Current Theories 
IN Psychology. (3, 3) 

Alternate years. Prerequisite, Psych. 212. A study of the philosophical and 
scientific background of modern psychology, together with a review of its 
major systematic viewpoints and issues. (Staff.) 

Psych. 207. Conditioning and Learning. (3) 

Alternate years. Prerequisite, Psych. 212. The literature on the experimental 
analysis of behavior, with examination of basic experiments and contemporary 
theories related to them. (Gollub, Yarczower, Turnage.) 

Psych. 208. Verbal Behavior. (3) 

Alternate years. Prerequisite, Psych. 123 and 212. Analysis of such topics as 
verbal learning, psycholinguistics, concept formation, and thinking. (Turnage.) 

Psych. 211, 212. Advanced General Psychology. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Psych. 145 or 146. A systematic review 
of the more fundamental investigations upon which modern psychology is 
based. (Staff.) 

Psych. 213. Advanced Laboratory Techniques. (1-3) 

Methodology of the automatization of research techniques and apparatus; 
apparatus design and construction; telemetric and digital techniques; logical block 
circuitry. Laboratory fee. $5.00 per credit hour. (Staff.) 

Psych. 214. Comparative Psychology. (3) 

Prerequisite, Psych. 181 and 212. The experimental literature on the behavior of 
infra-human organisms. Special topics. (Yarczower, Mclntire.) 

Psych. 215. Advanced Psychophysiology. (3) 

Alternate years. An advanced seminar dealing with special selected topics in 
the area of psychophysiology. (Brady, Mclntire.) 

Psych. 216. Seminar in Psychopharmacology. (3) 

Prerequisite, one year of graduate study in psychology and consent of the 
instructor. A critical review and detailed analysis of the literature and problems 

215 



Psychology 

related to the effects of drugs on animal and human behavior. Designed for 
advanced graduate students in experimental psychology and clinical psychology. 

(Brady, Gollub.) 

Psych. 220. Psychological Concepts in Mental Health. (3) 

Each year. Prerequisite, advanced standing. Concepts in mental health, their 
theoretical status, experimental evidence, and current use. (Waldrop, Walder.) 

Psych. 221. Seminar in Counseling Psychology. (3) 

Selected problems in counseling psychology. (Waldrop, Magoon.) 

Psych. 222. Seminar in Clinical Psychology. (3) 

Selected problems in clinical psychology. (Pumroy, Daston, Walder.) 

Psych. 223. Seminar in Community Mental Health. (3) 

Selected problems in mental health psychology. (Staff.) 

Psych. 224. Seminar in Student Personnel. (2) 

Prerequisite, permission of instructor. The seminar is designed to acquaint the 
student with student personnel functions at the collegiate level. Attention is de- 
voted to the historical antecedents of student personnel activities, the range of 
services, their functions, responsibilities, interrelationships and projected future 
status. Resource personnel presently engaged in student personnel services will 
participate as needed. (Byrne, Magoon.) 

Psych. 225, 226. Measurement and Evaluation. (4, 4) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Psych. 150. Theory and logic of the 
methodology of evaluation. Laboratory practice in methods of appraisal. Survey 
of available testing instruments and techniques. Laboratory fee of $6 each 
semester. (Daston, Pumroy, Walder.) 

Psych. 229. Seminar in Industrial Psychology. (3) 

An advanced seminar covering specialized topics such as: morale and motivation, 
labor relations, consumer motivations, man-machine systems, quantitative and 
qualitative personnel requirements inventory, job evaluation, environmental 
conditions and safety, occupational choice and classification, and the interview. 

(Edgerton, Bartlett, Heermann.) 

Psych. 230. Seminar in Engineering Psychology. (3) 

Alternate years. An advanced seminar covering the analysis of factors, variables, 
and characteristics of systems which affect human performance and efficiency. 

(Anderson.) 

Psych. 231. Training Procedures in Industry. (3) 

Prerequisite, Psych. 148 or equivalent. A consideration of psychological prin- 
ciples and methods for improving job performance; skill development laboratory 
in application of methods and techniques is provided. 

(Edgerton, Bartlett, Heermann.) 

Psych. 232. Personnel Selection and Job Analysis. (3) 

Prerequisite, Psych. 161 or equivalent. Psychological measurement as applied 
to the analysis of job requirements and the development and use of performance 
criteria and predictors. (Edgerton, Bartlett, Heermann.) 

216 



Psychology 
Psych. 233. Social Organization in Industry. (3) 

Prerequisite, permission of instructor. Analysis of management organizations as 
social structures, and the application of concepts and methods of social psychol- 
ogy to problems of conflict, cooperation, and leader-group relations. (Staff.) 

Psych. 240. Interview and Questionnaire Techniques. (3) 

Psychological concepts and methods in the use of interview, questionnaire, and 
inventory procedures for the measurement, prediction and alteration of behavior. 

(Staff.) 

Psych. 241. Persuasion and Attitude Change. (3) 

Each year. Consideration of the communication process and the various media 
of mass communication. Factors related to the effectiveness of communication 
and persuasion are analyzed in the light of experimental evidence, and various 
strategies and techniques of persuasion are reviewed. (McGinnies, Cline.) 

Psych. 242. Seminar in Social Psychology. (3) 

Each year. Analysis and discussion of contemporary systematic positions in 
social psychology. Review of research methods in the area as well as theories 
and problems of current importance. (McGillies, Cline.) 

Psych. 252, 253. Advanced Statistics. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Psych. 90. Detailed study of the funda- 
mentals of statistical inference, experimental design, and the analysis of regres- 
sion and correlation concepts and techniques; a basic course for research students 
in the behavioral sciences. (Andrews, Anderson, Bartlett, Heermann.) 

Psych. 254. Factor Analysis. (3) 

Prerequisite, Psych. 253. Analysis of major developments in factor theory as 
applicable to the behavioral sciences, including computational methods and re- 
search implications. (Andrews.) 

Psych. 255. Seminar in Psychometric Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, Psych. 253. Study of psychophysical methods, scaling technique, 
and the statistical methods of pattern analysis. (Staff.) 

Psych. 256. Mental Test Theory. (3) 

Prerequisite, Psych. 253. Development of test theory from psychophysics and 
measurement theory. Consideration of formal and applied problems involved 
in developing and utilizing phychological tests and measurements. Special atten- 
tion is given to problems of reliability, validity, and prediction. 

(Bartlett, Heermann.) 

Psych. 257. Seminar in Quantitative Psychology. (3) 

Prerequisite, Psych. 253. An advanced seminar covering special topics in statis- 
tical and mathematical methods and models in psychology. (Staflf.) 

Psych. 258. Development of Predictors. (3) 

Prerequisite, Psych. 153. Review of statistical theory and practices in the design, 
development and analysis of techniques of prediction in the behavioral sciences, 
with special attention to the formal and practical problem of criteria for 
prediction. (Andrews, Bartlett, Heermann.) 

217 



Psychology 

Psych. 260. Occupational Development and Choice. (3) 

Prerequisite, Psych. 220. Theoretical and research literature on occupational 
behavior. (Waldrop, Magoon.) 

Psych. 261, 262. Modification of Human Behavior: Research 
Methods and Practice. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. The experimental and applied methods available 
for the induction of behavior change, with emphasis on their relationship to 
community mental health (first semester); process, outcome, and theory in their 
application to counseling and psychotherapy (second semester). 

(Daston, Walder.) 

Psych. 263, 264. Modification of Human Behavior: Laboratory 

AND Practicum. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Application of methods relevant to behavior change 
in counseling and psychotherapy. Individual supervision and group consultation. 
Laboratory fee $6 per semester. (Staff.) 

Psych. 265. Advanced Developmental Psychology. (3) 

Empirical, experimental and theoretical literature related to developmental 
processes. (Waldrop, Pumroy.) 

Psych. 266. Theories of Motivation. (3) 

Alternate years. Current treatments of motivational concepts, and analysis of 
the causal antecedents to behavior. (Staff.) 

Psych. 267. Theories of Personality. (3) 

Scientific requirements for a personality theory. Postulates and relevant research 
literature for several current personality theories. (Daston, Walder.) 

Psych. 269. Practicum in Community Mental Health 
Consultation. (3) 

Each year. Prerequisite, advanced standing. Directly supervised fieldwork in 
mental health consultation. (Staff.) 

Psych. 270. Advanced Abnormal Psychology. (3) 

Alternate years. Deviant behaviors and their etiology and taxonomy. 

(Daston, Walder.) 

Psych. 271. Appraisal of Disabilities. (3) 

Human disabilities and their psychological appraisal. (Daston, Waldrop.) 

Psych. 272. Individual Clinical Diagnosis. (3) 

Alternate years. Prerequisite, Psych. 226. Case study of emotionally disturbed 
individuals with a variety of psychological techniques. (Staff.) 

Psych. 274. Evaluation and Change in Educational Skills. (3) 

Methods for the enhancement of reading and other educational skills. (Staff.) 

Psych. 285, 286. Research Methods in Psychology. (1-3, 1-3) 

Each year. Research is conducted on several problems each semester, in a 
variety of fields of psychology, and under the supervision of various members 
of the faculty. (Staff.) 

218 



Sociology 
Psych. 288, 289. Special Research Problems. (1-4, 1-4) 

First and second semesters. Supervised research on problems selected from 
the area of experimental, industrial, social, quantitative, or mental health 
psychology. (Staff.) 

Psych. 399. Research, (credit arranged.) 

First and second semesters. (Staff.) 



SOCIOLOGY 

Professors: Hoffsommer, Janes, and Lejins. 

Associate Professors: Anderson, Cussler, Hirzel, and Shankweiler. 

Assistant Professors: Coaxes, Franz, and Motz. 

The Department of Sociology grants the degrees of Master of Arts and 
Doctor of Philosophy. Fields of specialization include anthropology, 
criminology, rural and urban sociology, mental health, the family, indus- 
trial and occupational sociology, social theory, social psychology, inter- 
cultural sociology and research methods. 

Prerequisites for graduate study leading to an advanced degree with a 
major in sociology consist of either (1) an undergraduate major (total- 
ling at least 24 semester hours) in sociology or (2) 12 semester hours 
of sociology (including 6 semester hours of advanced courses) and 12 
additional hours of comparable work in economics, political science, or 
psychology. Reasonable substitutes for these prerequisites may be ac- 
cepted in the case of students majoring in other departments who desire 
a graduate minor or several courses in sociology. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Soc. 102. Intercultural Sociology. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 2. On the basis of a comparative study of 
customs, individual and group behavior patterns and institutions, this course 
studies the ideologies of America and other modern societies. (Staff.) 

Soc. 105. Cultural Anthropology. (3) 

Second semester. A survey of the simpler cultures of the world, with attention 
to historical processes and the application of anthropological theory to the 
modem situation. (Anderson, Williams.) 

Soc. 106. Archeology. (3) 

Second semester. A survey of human cultural developments as revealed by 
archeological methods, with materials to be drawn from selected areas of both 
Old and New Worlds. (Anderson.) 



219 



Sociology 

Soc. 111. Sociology of Occupations and Careers. (3) 

First semester. The sociology of work and occupational life in modern society. 
Changing occupational ideologies, values and choices. Occupational status 
systems and occupational mobility. The social psychology of career success. 

(Coates.) 

Soc. 112. Rural-Urban Relations. (3) 

First semester. The ecology of population and the forces making for change in 
rural and urban life; migration, decentralization and regionalism as methods of 
studying individual and national issues. Applied filed problems. (Cussler.) 

Soc. 113. The Rural Community. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. A detailed study of 
rural life with emphasis on levels of living, the family, school, and church and 
organizational activities in the fields of health, recreation, welfare, and planning. 

(Hoffsommer, Hirzel.) 

Soc. 114. The City. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. The rise of urban civiliza- 
tion and metropolitan regions; ecological process and structure; the city as a 
center of dominance; social problems, control and planning. (Staff.) 

Soc. 115. Industrial Sociology. (3) 

First and second semesters. The sociology of human relations in American 
industry and business. Complex industrial and business organizations as social 
systems. Social relationship within and between industry, business, community 
and society. (Coates.) 

Soc. 116. Military Sociology. (3) 

First and second semesters. The sociology of military life. Social change and 
the growth of military institutions. Complex formal military organizations. Mili- 
tary organizations as social systems. Military service as an occupation or pro- 
fession. Career patterns, problems and satisfactions. Relations between military 
institutions, civilian communities and society. (Coates.) 

Soc. 118. Community Organization. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Community organization 
and its relation to social welfare; analysis of community needs and resources; 
health, housing, recreation; community centers; neighborhood projects. 

(DiBella.) 

Soc. 121. Population. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Population distribution and 
growth in the United States and the world; population characteristics of the 
U. S.; resulting population problems and policies. (Hirzel.) 

Soc. 122. Population. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Trends in fertility and 

mortality, migrations, population estimates and the resulting problems and 

policies. (Hirzel.) 

Soc. 123. Ethnic Minorities. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Basic social processes in 
the relations of ethnic groups within the State; immigration groups and the 
Negro in the United States; ethnic minorities in Europe. (Lejins.) 

220 



Sociology 
Sec. 124. The Culture of the American Indian. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. A study of type cultures; 
cultural processes; and the effects of acculturation on selected tribes of Indians 
in the Americas. (Anderson.) 

Soc. 125. Cultural History of the Negro. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. The cultures of Africa 
south of the Sahara and the cultural adjustments of the Negro in North and 
South America. (Anderson.) 

Soc. 131. Introduction to Social Service. (3) 

First and second semesters. General survey of the field of social-welfare activ- 
ities; historical development; growth, functions, and specialization of agencies 
and services, private and public. (DiBella.) 

Soc. 136. Sociology of Religion. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Varieties and sources of 
religious experience. Religious institutions and the role of religion in social 
life. (Anderson.) 

Soc 141. Sociology of Personality. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Development of human 
nature and personality in contemporary social life; processes of socialization; 
attitudes, individual differences, and social behavior. (Motz, Cussler.) 

Soc. 144. Collective Behavior. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Social interaction in 
mass behavior; communication processes; structure and functioning of crowds, 
strikes, audiences, mass movements, and the public. (Cussler.) 

Soc. 145. Social Control. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Forms, mechanisms, and 
techniques of group influence on human behavior; problems of social control 
in contemporary society. (Motz.) 

Soc. 147. Sociology of Law. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Law as a form of social 
control; interrelation between legal and other conduct norms as to their content, 
sanctions, and methods of securing conformity; law as an integral part of the 
culture of the group; factors and processes operative in the formation of legal 
norms as determinants of human behavior. (Lejins.) 

Soc. 153. Juvenile Delinquency. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Juvenile delinquency in 
relation to the general problem of crime; analysis of factors underlying juvenile 
delinquency; treatment and prevention. (Lejins.) 

Soc. 154. Crime and Delinquency Prevention. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Soc. 1 or its equivalent; Soc. 52, Soc. 153, or 
consent of instructor. Methods and programs in prevention of crime and delin- 
quency. (Lejins.) 

221 



Sociology 

Soc. 156. Institutional Treatment of Criminals and 
Delinquents. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites, Soc. 1, or its equivalent; Soc. 52, Soc. 153, or 
consent of instructor. History, organization and functions of penal and correc- 
tional institutions for adults and juveniles. (Lejins.) 

Soc. 161. The Sociology of War. (3) 

Second semester. The origin and development of armed forces as institutions; 
the social causes, operations and results of war as social conflict; the relations 
of peace and war and revolution in contemporary civilization. (Coates.) 

Soc. 162. Basic Principles and Current Practice in 
Public Welfare. (3) 

Summer session only. (DiBella.) 

Soc. 164. The Family and Society. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Soc. 1 and Soc. 64 or its equivalent. Study of 
the family as a social institution; its biological and cultural foundations, historic 
development, changing structure and function; the interaction of marriage and 
parenthood, disorganizing and reorganizing factors in present day trends. 

(Shankweiler, Motz.) 

Soc. 166. Interviewing and Problem Solving in Social Work. (3) 

Prerequisite, Soc. 131, or concurrent registration. The principles of interviewing 
and other diagnostic techniques as applied to social problems with particular 
reference to family and child behavior. (Staff.) 

Soc 171. Family and Child Welfare. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Programs of family and 
child welfare agencies; social services to families and children; child placement; 
foster families. (DiBella.) 

Soc. 173. Social Security. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. The social security pro- 
gram in the United States; public assistance; social insurance. (DiBella.) 

Soc. 174. Public Welfare. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Development and organ- 
ization of the public welfare movement in the United States, social legislation 
interrelations of federal, state, and local agencies and institutions. (DiBella.) 

Soc. 180. Small Group Analysis. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Analysis of small group 
structure and dynamics. Review of research on small groups in factories, military 
service, schools and communities. Presentation of techniques used in the study 
of small groups. (Franz.) 

Soc. 183. Social Statistics. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Measures of 
central tendency and dispersion, use of statistical inference in simple testing of 
null hypotheses, chi square, and labor saving computational devices for 
correlation. (Coates, Knetz.) 

222 



Sociology 
Soc. 185. Advanced Social Statistics. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Soc. 183, or its equivalent. Provides refined sta- 
tistical research methods for advanced students in the social sciences. Sampling 
theory, specialized correlation technique, advanced tests of significance, and 
other procedures. (Coates, Knetz.) 

Soc. 186. Sociological Theory. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, Soc. 1, or its equivalent. Development 
of the science of sociology; historical backgrounds; recent theories of society. 

(Janes, Motz.) 

Soc. 191. Social Field Training. (1-3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites: For social work field training, Soc. 
131; for crime control field training, Soc. 52 and 153. Enrollment restricted to 
available placements. Supervised field training in public and private social agen- 
cies. The student will select his particular area of interest and be responsible to 
an agency for a definite program of in-service training. Group meetings, indi- 
vidual conferences and written program reports will be a required part of the 
course. (Staff.) 

Soc. 196. Senior Seminar. (3) 

Second semester. Required of and open only to senior majors in sociology. 
Scope, fields, and research methods of sociology; practical applications of socio- 
logical knowledge. Individual study and reports. (Cussler, Hoffsommer.) 

For Graduates 
Soc. 201. Methods of Social Research. (3) 

First semester. Selection and formulation of research projects; methods and 
techniques of sociological investigation and analysis. Required of graduate 
majors in sociology. (Hoffsommer.) 

Soc 215. Community Studies. (3) 

First semester. Intensive study of the factors affecting community development 
and growth, social structure, social stratification, social mobility and social insti- 
tutions; analysis of particular communities. (Staff.) 

Soc. 216. Sociology of Occupations and Professions. (3) 

Second semester. An analysis of the occupational and professional structure of 
American society, with special emphasis on changing roles, functions, ideologies, 
and community relationships. (Coates.) 

Soc. 221. Population and Society. (3) 

Second semester. Selected problems in the field of population; quantitative and 
qualitative aspects; American and world problems. (Hirzel.) 

Soc. 224. Race and Culture. (3) 

Second semester. Race and culture in contemporary society; mobility and the 
social effects of race and culture contacts and intermixture. (Anderson.) 

Soc. 230. Comparative Sociology. (3) 

Second semester. Comparison of the social institutions, organizations, patterns 
of college behavior, and art manifestations of societal values of various 
countries. (Staff.) 

223 



Sociology 

Soc. 241. Personality and Social Structure. (3) 

First semester. Comparative analysis of the development of human nature, per- 
sonality, and social traits in select social structures. (Cussler.) 

Soc. 246. Public Opinion and Propaganda. (3) 

Second semester. Process involved in the formation of mass attitudes; agencies 
and techniques of communication; quantitative measurement of public opinion. 

(Motz.) 

Soc. 253. Advanced Criminology. (3) 

First semester. Survey of the principal issues in contemporary criminological 
theory and research. (Lejins.) 

Soc. 254. Seminar: Criminology. (3) 

Second semester. Selected problems in criminology. (Lejins.) 

Soc. 255. Seminar: Juvenile Delinquency. (3) 

First semester. Selected problems in the field of juvenile delinquency. (Lejins.) 

Soc. 256. Crime and Delinquency as a Community Problem. (3) 
Second semester. An intensive study of selected problems in adult crime and 
juvenile delinquency in Maryland. (Lejins.) 

Soc. 257. Social Change and Social Policy. (3) 

First semester. Emergence and development of social policy as related to social 
change; policy-making factors in social welfare and social legislation. (Staff.) 

Soc. 262. Family Studies. (3) 

Second semester. Case studies of family situations; statistical studies of family 
trends, methods of investigation and analysis. (Shankweiler.) 

Soc. 263. Marriage and Family Counseling. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Soc. 64 or Soc. 164 or consent of instructor. A 
sociological analysis of an emerging, family-centered profession. (Shankweiler.) 

Soc. 264. The Sociology of Mental Health, (3) 

First semester. A study of the sociological factors that condition mental health 
together with an appraisal of the group dynamics of its preservation. (Staff.) 

Soc. 271. Theory of Social Interaction. (3) 

Positions of major sociologists and social psychologists as to how the individual 
interacts with various groups and the issues involved. Trends in recent inter- 
action theory. 

Soc. 282. Sociological Methodology. (3) 

Second semester. Logic and method of sociology in relation to the general theory 
of scientific method; principal issues and points of view. (Staff.) 

Soc. 285. Seminar: Sociological Theory. (3) 

First semester. Critical and comparative study of contemporary European and 
American theories of society. Required of graduate majors in sociology. 

(Janes, Motz.) 

224 



Speech and Dramatic Art 
Soc. 291. Special Social Problems. (Credit to be determined) 

First and second semesters. Individual research on selected problems. (Staff.) 

Soc. 399. Thesis Research. (Credit to be determined) 

First and second semesters. (Staff.) 



SPEECH AND DRAMATIC ART 

Professors: Strausbaugh, and Hendricks. 

Associate Professors: Aylward, Batka, Kavanagh, Linkow, 

NiEMEYER, PUGLIESE, AND WEAVER. 

Assistant Professors: Baker, Craven, Frank, Provensen, and 

SCHMITT. 

Associate Research Professor: Causey. 

Lecturers: Carter, Doudna, Resnick, Shutts, Williams, and 
Zerlin. 

Instructors: Brenholtz, and Carpenter. 

The Department offers a graduate course of study leading to the degree 
of Master of Arts. The student may take work with the major emphasis 
either in dramatics, general speech, radio-television, or in speech and 
hearing. 

Department requirements, supplementary to the Graduate School re- 
quirements, have been formulated in each of the fields for the guidance 
of students. Copies may be obtained from the Department. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Speech 102. Radio Production. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 22. Laboratory fee, $2.00. A study of the 
multiple problems facing the producer. Special emphasis is given to acoustic 
setup, casting, "miking," timing, cutting, and the coordination of personnel 
factors involved in the production of radio programs. (Brenholtz.) 

Speech 105. Speech — Handicapped School Children. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 3 for undergraduates. The occurrence, 
identification and treatment of speech handicaps in the classroom. An introduc- 
tion to speech pathology. (Craven, Staff.) 

Speech 106. Clinical Practice. (1 to 5 credits, up to 9) 

Each semester; summer session. Prerequisite, Speech 105. Laboratory fee, $1.00 
per hour. Clinical practice in various methods of corrective procedures with 
various types of speech cases in the University Clinic, veterans hospitals, and the 
public schools. May be taken for 1-5 credit hours per semester. May be repeated 
for a total of 9 semester hours credit. (Craven, Staff.) 

225 



Speech and Dramatic Art 

Speech 107. Advanced Oral Interpretation. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 13. Emphasis upon the longer reading. 
Program planning. (Provensen.) 

Speech 109. Speech and Language Development of Children. (3) 
Second semester. Admission by consent of instructor. An analysis of normal and 
abnormal processes of speech and language development in children. 

(Hendricks.) 

Speech 110. Advanced Group Discussion. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Speech 10. Required in speech cur- 
riculum and elective in other curricula. An examination of current research 
and techniques in the discussion and conference including extensive practice in 
this area. (Linkow.) 

Speech 111, Seminar. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisites, senior standing and consent of instruc- 
tor. Required of speech majors. Present-day speech research. (Strausbaugh.) 

Speech 112. Phonetics. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Speech 3 or consent of instructor. Laboratory fee, 
$3.00. Training in the recognition and production of the sounds of spoken 
English, with an analysis of their formation. Practice in transcription. Mastery 
of the international Phonetic Alphabet. (Kavanagh.) 

Speech 113. Play Production. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 16 or consent of instructor. Development 
of procedure followed by the director in preparing plays for public performance. 

(Pugliese.) 

Speech 114. The Film as an Art Form. (3) 

First and second semester. Laboratory fee, $10.00 (effective September, 1964). 
A study of the motion picture as a developing form of entertainment, com- 
munication, and artistic expression. A series of significant American and foreign 
films are viewed to illustrate the artistic, historical and sociological trends of 
the twentieth century. (Niemeyer.) 

Speech 115. Radio and Television in Retailing. (3) 

First semester. Limited to students in the College of Home Economics. Pre- 
requisite, Speech 1 or 7. Laboratory fee, $2.00. Writing and production of pro- 
motional programs for the merchandising of wearing apparel and house furnish- 
ings. Collaboration with Washington and Baltimore radio stations and retail 
stores. (Brenholtz.) 

Speech 116. Radio and Television Announcing. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Speech 4 and 22 or consent of instructor. Labor- 
atory fee, $2.00. The theory and application of all types of announcing. (Batka.) 

Speech 117. Radio and Television Continuity Writing. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Speech 22 or consent of instructor. A study of 
the principles, methods and limitations of writing for radio and television. 
Application will be made in the writing of general types of continuities and 
commercials. (Brenholtz.) 

226 



Speech and Dramatic Art 
Speech 120. Speech Pathology. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Speech 105. Laboratory fee, $3.00. A continuation 
of Speech 105, with emphasis on the causes and treatment of organic speech 
disorders. (Craven.) 

Speech 124, 125. American Public Address. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Speech 1 or 7. The first semester covers 
the period from colonial times to the Civil War period. The second semester 
covers from the Civil War period through the contemporary period. (Carpenter.) 

Speech 126. Semantic Aspects of Speech in Human Relations. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, one course in public speaking. An analysis of 
speech and language habits from the standpoint of general semantics. 

(Hendricks.) 

Speech 127. Children's Dramatics. (3) 

Principles and methods necessary for staging children's productions on the ele- 
mentary school level. Major emphasis on creative dramatics; the application of 
creative dramatics in the school room, and the values gained by the child in 
this activity. Students will conduct classes in formal and creative dramatics which 
will culminate in children's programs. (Pugliese.) 

Speech 129, 130. Play Directing. (3, 3) 

Admission by consent of instructor. A lecture-laboratory course dealing with the 
fundamentals of script cutting, pacing, movement, blocking, and rehearsal routine 
as applied to the directing of plays. (Pugliese, Niemeyer.) 

Speech 131. History of the Theatre. (3) 

First semester. A survey of dramatic production from early origins to 1800. 

(Niemeyer.) 

Speech 132. History of the Theatre. (3) 

Second semester. A survey of drmatic production from 1800 to present. 

(Niemeyer.) 

Speech 133. Communication Processes in Conferences. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 103 and 104 or the equivalent. Limited 
to students in the military studies curriculum. Group participation in confer- 
ences, methods of problem solving, semantic aspects of language and the func- 
tion of conferences in industry and government. (Linkow.) 

Speech 135. Instrumentation in Speech and Hearing Science. (2) 

First semester. Prerequibite, Speech 3. Laboratory fee, $2.00. The use of elec- 
tronic equipment in the measurement of speech and hearing. (Linkow.) 

Speech 136. Principles of Speech Therapy. (3) 

Prerequisite, Speech 120. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Differential diagnosis of speech 
and language handicaps and the application of psychological principles of learn- 
ing, motivation and adjustment in the treatment of speech disorders. (Hendricks.) 

Speech 138. Methods and Materials in Speech Correction. (3) 

Prerequisite, Speech 120 or the equivalent. Laboratory fee, $3.00. The design 
and use of methods and materials for diagnosis, measurement, and retaining of 
the speech-handicapped. (Craven.) 

221 



Speech and Dramatic Art 

Speech 139. Theatre Workshop. (3) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, Speech 8 or Speech 14. A laboratory 
course designed to provide the student with practical experience in all phases of 
theatre production. (Strausbaugh.) 

Speech 140. Principles of Television Production. (3) 

First semester. Laboratory fee, $5.00 (effective September, 1964). Three hour 
lecture, two hour laboratory. Prerequisite, Speech 22. A study of the theory, 
methods, techniques and problems of television production and direction. Units 
of study covering television cameras and lenses, lighting theory and practices, 
scenery and properties, costumes and makeup, graphic arts and special effects, 
are included. Observation of production procedures at nearby television stations. 
Application will be made through crew assignments for University-produced 
television programs. (Aylward.) 

Speech 141. Introduction to Audiometry. (2) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Speech 3. Required for students whose concentra- 
tion is in speech and hearing therapy. Laboratory fee, $2.00. Analysis of various 
methods and procedures in evaluating hearing losses. (Causey.) 

Speech 142. Speech Reading and Auditory Training. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 3. Required for students whose concentra- 
tion is in speech and hearing therapy. Laboratory fee, $2.00. Methods of train- 
ing individuals with hearing loss to recognize, interpret, and understand spoken 
language. (Causey.) 

Speech 146. Television News and Public Affairs. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 117 or Journ. 101. Training in presenta- 
tion of television news, interviews, discussions and forums. (Batka.) 

Speech 147. Analysis of Broadcasting Processes and Effects, (2) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Speech 22 or consent of instructor. Survey of the 
more common analytic approaches, methods, and results in the field of radio and 
television. (Aylward.) 

Speech 148. Television Direction. (3) 

First semester. Two hour lecture, three hour laboratory. Prerequisite, Speech 
22 or Speech 140. Laboratory fee, $10.00. Principles of television direction 
including analysis of script, casting, rehearsing, production, and video control. 

(Aylward.) 

Speech 149. Television Workshop. (3) 

Second semester. Two hour lecture, four hour laboratory. Prerequisites, Speech 
22, 140 or 148, or consent of instructor. Laboratory fee, $10.00. Advanced 
laboratory course dealing with all phases of producing a complete television 
program. (Batka.) 

Speech 150. Radio and Television Station Management. (2) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 22 or consent of instructor. Broadcasting 
regulations, licenses, personnel functions, sales, advertising, and program and 
station promotion. (Batka.) 

Speech 161. Ancient Rhetoric. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 5 or 11. The theories of speechmak- 
ing and speech composition as propounded by the classical rhetoricians. 

228 



Speech and Dramatic Art 

Special attention is given to Plato, Aristotle, Isocrates, Cicero, Quintillian and 
St. Augustine. (Carpenter.) 

Speech 164. Persuasion in Speech. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 5 or 11. A study of the bases of per- 
suasion with emphasis on recent experimental developments in persuasion. 

(Weaver.) 

Speech 171. Styles and Theories of Acting. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 8 or consent of instructor. The study and 
application of historical styles and theories of acting. (Niemeyer.) 

Speech 175. Stage Design and Lighting. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 14 or consent of instructor. The theory 
of stage design and lighting. Making of plans and lighting plots as coordinate 
elements of scenic art. (Schmitt.) 

Speech 180. Honors Seminar. (3 Hrs.) 

For honors students only. Readings, symposiums, visiting lecturers, discussions. 

(Staff.) 

For Graduates 

(All the following courses require consent of instructor.) 

The Department maintains a reciprocal agreement with Walter Reed 
General Hospital whereby clinical practice may be obtained at the Army 
Audiology and Speech Correction Center, Forest Glen, Maryland, under 
the direction of James P. Albrite, M.D., Director. 

Speech 201. Special Problems Seminar. (A through K) (1-3) 

(6 hours applicable toward M.A. degree.) Prerequisites, 6 hours of speech path- 
ology and consent of instructor. A. stuttering; B. cleft palate; C. delayed speech; 
D. articulation; E. cerebral palsy; F. voice; G. special problems of the deaf; H. 
foreign dialect; I. speech intelligibility; J. neurophysiology of hearing; K. minor 
research problems. (Hendricks, Staff.) 

Speech 202. Techniques of Research in Speech and Hearing. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, 12 hours of speech pathology and audiology. Re- 
quired of candidates for master's degree in speech and hearing therapy. Analysis 
of research methodology including experimental techniques, statistical analysis 
and preparation of reports for scientific investigations in speech and hearing 
science. (Williams.) 

Speech 203. Experimental Phonetics. (3) 

Prerequisite, Speech 112. Laboratory fee, $3.00. The application of experimental 
methods in the quantitative analysis of the phonetic elements of speech. (Baker.) 

Speech 204. Applied Phonetics. (3) 

Prerequisite, Speech 112 or equivalent. Application of phonetic analysis to 
communication systems and clinical analysis in speech and hearing. 

(Kavanagh.) 

229 



Speech and Dramatic Art 

Speech 205. Descriptive Phonetics. (3) 

Prerequisite, Speech 112 or equivalent. Application of phonetic analysis in the 
transcription of dialects. (Baker.) 

Speech 206. Diagnostic Procedures in Speech Pathology. (3) 

Prerequisite, 6 hours of speech pathology. A study of diagnostic tools and 
methods in the analysis of various types of speech disorders. (Hendricks, Staff.) 

Speech 207. Advanced Principles of Speech and He.aring 
Therapy. (3) 

Prerequisite, Speech 136 or equivalent, and 6 hours of speech and hearing 
pathology. A review of learning principles as applied to the training of the 
speech and hearing handicapped. (Hendricks.) 

Speech 210. Anatomy and Physiology of Speech and Hearing. (3) 

Prerequisites, 6 hours of speech pathology and audiology and consent of instruc- 
tor. Laboratory fee, $3.00. A study of the anatomy and physiology of the 
auditory and speech mechanisms. (Carter.) 

Speech 211. A, B, C, D. Advanced Clinical Practice. (1-3 up to 12) 

(6 hours applicable toward M.A. degree.) Prerequisite, 12 hours of speech 
pathology and audiology. Laboratory fee, $1.00 per hour. Supervised training 
in the application of clinical methods in the diagnosis and treatment of speech 
and hearing disorders. (Craven.) 

Speech 212. Advanced Speech Pathology. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, 6 hours in speech pathology and consent of 
instructor. Laboratory fee, $3.00. Etiology and therapy for organic and func- 
tional speech disorders. (Kavanagh.) 

Speech 214. Clinical Audiometry. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisites. 3 hours in audiology and consent of instructor. 
Laboratory fee. $3.00. Testing of auditory acuity with pure tones and speech. 

(Shutts.) 

Speech 216. Communications Skills for the Hard-of-Hearing. (3) 

Pirst semester. Prerequisites, 3 hours in audiology and consent of instructor, 
opeech reading, auditory training, and speech conservation problems in the 
rehabilitation of the hard-of-hearing. (Causey.) 

Speech 217. Selection of Prosthetic Appliances for the 

Acoustically Handicapped. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, Speech 214. Laboratory fee, $3.00. A laboratory 
course in modern methods of utilizing electronic hearing aids. (Shutts.) 

Speech 218. Speech and Hearing in Medical Rehabilitation 

and Special Education Programs. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, 6 hours in speech pathology and audiology and 
consent of instructor. Administrative problems involved in the organization and 
operation of speech and hearing therapy under different types of programs. 

(Hendricks.) 



230 



Speech and Dramatic Art 
Speech 219. Speech Disorders of the Brain-Injured. (3) 

Prerequisites, 6 hours in pathology and audiology and consent of instructor. 
Laboratory fee, $3.00. Methods of evaluation and treatment of children and 
adults who have suffered injury to brain tissue, with subsequent damage to 
speech and language processes. (Hendricks.) 

Speech 220. Experimental Audiology. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisite, 6 hours in audiology. Laboratory fee, $3.00. A 
study of experimental techniques in the investigation of problems in audiology 
and psycho-acoustics. (Causey, Staff.) 

Speech 221. Communication Theory and Speech and 
Hearing Problems. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, 6 hours in speech pathology and audiology and 
consent of instructor. Analysis of current theories of communication as they 
apply to research and therapy in speech and hearing. (Hendricks.) 

Speech 222. Advanced Bio-Acoustics. (3) 

Prerequisite. 6 hours of audiology. Laboratory research methods in the study 
of hearing mechanisms in animals. (Resnick.) 

Speech 223. Advanced Psycho-Acoustics. (3) 

Prerequisite, 6 hours of audiology. Research methodology in the study of 
human hearing. (Doudna.) 

Speech 224. The Preparation of Speech and Hearing 
Scientists in Institutions of Higher Learning. (3) 

Prerequisite, 6 hours of audiology and 6 hours of speech pathology. A review 
of problems involved in the training of personnel who expect to take teaching 
and research positions at university and college level. (Hendricks.) 

Speech 225'. Advanced Semantics. (3) 

Prerequisite, 3 hours of semantics. Advanced study of the effects of language 
in human perception. (Hendricks.) 

Speech 226. Language Problems of the Exceptional Child. (3) 

Prerequisite, 6 hours of speech pathology. A survey of special language prob- 
lems of the mentally retarded, brain-injured, hard-of-hearing and deaf children. 

(Carter.) 

Speech 240. Seminar in Broadcasting. (3) 

First semester. Studies of various aspects of broadcasting. (Aylward.) 

Speech 241. Special Problems in Broadcasting. (3) 

Second semester. An experimental laboratory course for the development of 
new ideas in broadcasting. (Batka.) 

Speech 248. Advanced Television Direction. (3) 

Prerequisite, Speech 148 or consent of instructor. Principles of television direc- 
tion as applied to dramatic programs, together with a consideration of the 
specific aesthetic values of the television medium. (Aylward.) 

231 



Speech and Dramatic Art 

Speech 260. Speech and Drama Programs in Higher Education. (3) 

First semester. A study of current theories and practices in speech and drama. 

(Weaver, Staff.) 

Speech 261. Introduction to Graduate Study in Speech. (3) 

First semester. (Weaver.) 

Speech 262. Special Problems in General Speech. (3) 

First semester. (Weaver.) 

Speech 263. Rhetorical Theories of Style. (3) 

Prerequisites, Speech 124, 125, or 161, or consent of instructor. Examination 
of selected theories of style drawn from the fields of rhetoric and literature, and 
analysis of model speeches. (Carpenter.) 

Speech 264. Interpersonal Communication. (3) 

Problems and processes involved in the use of language in interpersonal 
communication. (Weaver.) 

Speech 270. Seminar: Studies in Theatre. (3) 

First semester. Research projects adapted to individual backgrounds and special 
work. (Niemeyer.) 

Speech 271. The Theory of Pre-Modern Dramatic 
Production. (3) 

Second semester. An historical survey of production styles. (Pugliese.) 

Speech 272. Special Problems in Drama. (3) 

Second semester. The preparation of adaptations and other projects in 
dramaturgy. (Niemeyer.) 

Speech 273. Theories of the Drama. (3) 

Advanced study of the identification and development of dramatic form from the 
early Greek drama to contemporary forms; the esthetics of theatre arts; and 
dramatic criticism. (Pugliese.) 

Speech 290. Independent Study. (1-3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. An individual course designed for intensive 
study or research of problems in any one of the three areas of: drama, general 
speech, or radio/TV. (Staff.) 

Speech 399. Research. (1-6) 

Credit in proportion to work done and results accomplished. (Staff.) 



232 



Veterinary Science 

VETERINARY SCIENCE 

Professors: DeVolt and Ladson. 

Associate Professors: Hatziolos, Johnson and Plumer. 

Assistant Professors: Brown, Kornder and Wiersig. 

No advanced degrees are given in the Department of Veterinary Science. 
Graduate students in other departments are accepted for problems in the 
Department of Veterinary Science upon approval of the Department in 
which the graduate degree may be given. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

An. Sc. 116. Anatomy of Domestic Animals. (3) 

First semester. One lecture and two laboratory periods per week. A systematic, 
comparative study of the pig, ruminants and fowl, with special emphasis of 
those systems important in animal production. Prerequisite, Zool. 1. (Brown.) 

An. Sc. 117. Introduction to Dt«;eases of Animals. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period per week. This course 
gives basic instruction in the nature of disease: including causation, immunity, 
methods of diagnosis, economic importance, public health aspects and prevention 
and control of the common diseases of sheep, cattle, swine, horses, and poultry. 
Prerequisites, Micro. 1, and Zool. 1. (Brown.) 

An. Sc. 170. Poultry Hygiene. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one laboratory period per week. Virus, 
bacterial, and protozoan diseases; parasitic diseases, prevention, control and 
eradication. Prerequisites, Micro. 1, and An. Sc. 1. (DeVolt.) 

An. Sc. 171. Avian Anatomy. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Gross and micro- 
scopic structure, dissection and demonstration. Prerequisite, Zool. 1. (DeVolt.) 

For Graduates 
An. Sc. 200. Electron Microscopy. (2) 

First and second semesters. One lecture and one laboratory period per week. 
Theory of the electron microscope, preparation of specimens, manipulations 
and photography. (Staff.) 

An. Sc. 399. Research. (1-12) 

First and second semesters. Work assigned in proportion to amount of credit. 
Students will be required to pursue original research in some phase of animal 
science, carrying the same to completion, and reporting the results in the 
form of a thesis. (Staff.) 



233 



Zoology 
ZOOLOGY 

Professors: Anastos and Schoenborn. 

Associate Professors: Brown, Crenshaw, Grollman, Haley, 

HiGHTON, LINDER, RaMM, AND WiNN. 

Assistant Professors: Brinkley, Ficken, Gainer, Rothman and Stross. 

The Department of Zoology offers work leading to the Master of Science 
and the Doctor of Philosophy degrees. The general academic re- 
quirements which must be fulfilled for these degrees are described earlier 
in the catalog. -^ 

The special fields which graduate students may emphasize in working 
toward these degrees are behavior, biophysics, cytology, ecology, em- 
bryology, endocrinology, fisheries, genetics, parasitology, physiology, and 
systematics. Information concerning the specific requirements in each of 
these fields may be obtained from the Department. 

Alternate year courses will be offered according to the following sched- 
ule: (a) courses not offered in 1963-64; (b) courses offered in 1963-64. 
All zoology courses with laboratory have a laboratory fee of $8.00 per 
course per semester. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Zool. 102. General Animal Physiology. (4) 

First semester. Occasional summer session. Two lectures and two three-hour 
laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, one year of zoology and chemistry 
31 or 35. The general principles of physiological function as shown in mammals 
and lower animals. (Gainer.) 

ZooL. 108. Animal Histology. (4) 

Second semester. Occasional summer session. Two lectures and two three-hour 
laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, one year of zoology. A microscopic 
study of tissues and organs of vertebrates with special emphasis on the mammal. 
Practice in elementary histo-technique will be included. (Brown.) 

ZooL. 109. Animal Cytology. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. Pre- 
requisites, two years of zoology and organic chemistry, or permission of instruc- 
tor. A study of cellular structure with particular reference to the morphology 
and physiology of cell organoids and inclusions. (Brown.) 

ZooL. 110. General Parasitology. (4) 

First semester. Occasional summer session. Two lectures and two three-hour 
laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, Zool. 1 and 2 or permission of the 
instructor. A consideration of the phenomenon of parasitism through a study 
of the structure, function and host relationships of parasitic organisms. (Haley.) 

234 



Zoology 
ZooL. 118. Invertebrate Zoology. (4) 

Second semester. Occasional summer session. Two lectures and two three-hour 
laboratory periods a week. Prerequisite, one year of zoology. An advanced 
course dealing with the taxonomy, morphology and embryology of the inverte- 
brates, exclusive of insects. Alternate years (b). (Linder.) 

ZooL. 120. Vertebrate Embryology. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisite, one year of zoology. Principles of developmental dynamics includ- 
ing organization, differentiation, morphogenesis, and developmental physiology. 

(Ramm.) 

ZooL. 121. Animal Ecology. (3) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period a week. 
Prerequisite, one year of zoology. The environment and its control of animal 
abundance, organization of populations, and the biology of communities will 
be studied. (Stross.) 

ZooL. 127. Ichthyology. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and one two-hour and one three-hour laboratory 
periods a week. Prerequisites, Zool. 1, 2, and 5. A course in anatomy, embry- 
ology, distribution, habits and taxonomy of marine and fresh water fish. Alter- 
nate years (b). (Winn.) 

ZooL. 128. Zoogeography. (3) 

First semester. Three lecture periods a week. Pn-icquisites, Zool. 1, 2, and 5. 
Principles governing the geographical distribution of animals, with particular 
emphasis on vertebrates. (Highton.) 

ZooL. 129. Vertebrate Zoology. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two two-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisites, Zool. 1, 2, 5, and 6 or permission of instructor. The identification, 
classification, habits and behavior of vertebrates. (Winn.) 

ZooL. 130. Hydrobiology. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisite, one year of biology or permission of instructor. Study of aquatic 
animals and conditions of existence in water. Selected examples are used to 
illustrate the influence of environment on productivity of aquatic communities. 
Alternate years (b). (Stross.) 

ZooL. 150. Special Problems in Zoology. (1 or 2) 

First and second semesters. Summer session. Prerequisites, major in zoology or 
biological sciences, a minimum of 3.0 cumulative average in the biological 
sciences, and consent of instructor. Research or integrated reading in zoology. 
A student may register several times and receive up to 8 semester hours of 
credit. (Staff.) 

ZooL. 151H. Honors Seminar. (1) 

First and second semesters. One discussion period a week. Prerequisite, partici- 
pation in honors program. Guided discussion of topics of current interest. Re- 
peatable to total of 4 hours credit. (StaflF.) 

235 



Zoology 

ZooL. 152H. Honors Independent Study. (1-4) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, participation in honors program. Study 
of classical material by way of guided independent study and laboratory experi- 
ments. Repeatable to a total of 12 hours credit. (Staff.) 

ZooL. 153H. Honors Research. (1-2) 

First and second semesters. Prerequisite, participation in honors program. A 
laboratory research problem; required each semester during honors participation 
and culminating in an honors thesis. Repeatable to a total of 8 hours credit. 

(Staff.) 

ZooL. 182. Ethology. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two two-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisites, two years of zoology including Zool. 5, or permission of instruc- 
tor. The function, causation, and evolution of behavior. Laboratory analysis of 
the behavior of several species. Alternate years (a). (Fricken.) 

ZooL. 190. Evolution. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisite, a course in genetics or per- 
mission of instructor. A consideration of current thought in regard to the 
origin and evolution of living organisms. (Crenshaw.) 

For Graduates 
Zool. 203. Advanced Embryology. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and four hours of laboratory a week. Prerequisites, 
a course in embryology and one in physiology. The biochemical basis of devel- 
opment. Alternate years (b). (Ramm.) 

ZooL. 204. Cellular Physiology. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisites, Zool. 102, and one year of organic chemistry. The principles of 
general and cellular physiology as found in animal life. (Schoenborn.) 

ZooL. 205. Comparative Endocrinology. (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, one year of organic 
chemistry and a course in physiology, or permission of the instructor. A 
systematic approach to the structure and physiology of neuro-endocrine systems 
of invertebrates and vertebrates. Alternate years (a). (Linder.) 

ZooL. 207. Zoology Seminar. (Credit to be arranged) 

First and second semesters. Summer session. One lecture a week for each 
credit hour. 1. cytology; 2. embryology (general embryology, experimental em- 
bryolopy, invertebrate embryology, transplantation and regeneration, endocrines 
and development); 3. fisheries; 4. genetics (population genetics); 5. parasitology 
(general parasitology, helminthology, fish diseases); 6. physiology (physiology 
of protozoa, invertebrate physiology, physiology of fishes, physiology of devel- 
opment); 7. systematics (evolution, herpetology, ichthyology, zoogeography); 
8. ecology (experimental ecology, marine ecology, radioisotopes in ecology, 
population dynamics, limnology); 9. behavior (comparative behavior, fish be- 
havior, electronic instrumentation); 10, recent advances (microtechnique and 
histochemistry, Russian biology). (Staff.) 

236 



Zoology 

ZooL. 208. Special Problems in Zoology. (Credit to be arranged) 
First and second semesters. Summer session. 1. cytology; 2. embryology; 3. 
fisheries; 4. genetics; 5. parasitology; 6. physiology; 7. systematics; 8. ecology; 
9. behavior and 10. general. (Staflf.) 

ZooL. 210. Systematic Zoology. (4) 

Second semester. Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory period a week. 
The principles and methods involved in the classification of animals, with 
emphasis on poulation dynamics and speciation. Methods of evaluating tax- 
onomic data, principles of zoological nomenclature, field and museum tech- 
niques, and the factors influencing the distribution of animals are also stressed. 

(Highton.) 

ZooL. 211, 212. Lectures in Zoology. (3, 3) 

First and second semesters. Three lectures a week. Advanced lectures by out- 
standing authorities in their particular field of zoology. As the subject matter 
is continually changing, a student may register several times, receiving credit 
for several semesters. (Visiting Lecturers.) 

ZooL. 216. Physiological Cytology. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisites, Chem. 161, 162, Phys. 11, Zool. 102, or permission of the instruc- 
tor. A study of the structure and function of cells by chemical, physical and 
miscroscopic methods. Alternate years (b). (Brown.) 

ZooL. 220. Population Genetics. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisite, Zool. 6. The role of mutation, selection, migration, inbreeding 
and stochastic process in evolution. (Highton.) 

ZooL. 223. Analysis of Animal Structure. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and four hours of laboratory a week. Prerequisite, 
a course in embryology. The experimental basis of developmental mechanics. 
Alternate years (a). 

ZooL. 234. Experimental Mammalian Physiology. (4) 

First semester. Two four-hour laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, Zool. 
102 and one year of chemistry above general chemistry. The theory, use and 
application to research of instrumentation normally found in the physiology 
laboratory with an introduction to surgical techniques on both large and small 
animals. (Grollman.) 

ZooL. 235. Comparative Behavior. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisites, usually a course in behavior and one in physiology, and permis- 
sion of instructor. Orientation and migrations, communication, coding, brain 
and behavior, biological rhythms, and hormones and behavior are the main 
subjects that will be considered. Alternate years (a). (Winn.) 

ZooL. 240. Analysis of Animal Populations. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisite, Zool. 121 or permission of instructor. An advanced course in 
animal ecology with a focus on population. Studies of growth and regulation 
of animal populations are emphasized. Alternate years (a). (Stress.) 

231 



Zoology 

ZooL. 245. Biology of Birds. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisite, Zool. 129 or permission of instructor. Emphasis will be on ecology, 
behavior, anatomy, systematics, and reproductive physiology, plus field studies 
of local birds. Alternate years (b). (Ficken.) 

ZooL. 250. Advanced Parasitology. (4) 

Second semester. One three-hour discussion period and one three-hour laboratory 
period a week. Prerequisite, a course in parasitology and permission of the 
instructor. A study of the interactions of hosts and parasites at the organismal 
and population levels, with emphasis on concepts of specificity, immunity, 
pathogenesis and epidemiology. Alternate years (a). (Haley.) 

Zool. 251. Helminthology. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisites, Zool. 110 or equivalent and permission of instructor. A study of 
the biology and morphology of the helminths. Alternate years (b). (Haley.) 

Zool. 252. Protozoology, (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisite, one year of zoology or permission of the instructor. A study of 
the classification, structure and biology of the protozoa. Alternate years (a). 

(Rothman.) 

Zool. 253. Physiology of Symbiosis. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and two three-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Prerequisites, Chem. 161 and 163, and permission of instructor. A considera- 
tion of the biology of symbiotic organisms, especially the physiological concert 
existing between host and symbiont. Alternate years (b). (Rothman.) 

Zool. 260. Quantitative Zoology. (3) 

First semester. Two lectures and one discussion period a week. Prerequisite, 
Math. 19 or the equivalent, or permission of the instructor. A consideration of 
the statistical techniques of principal importance in the analysis of biological 
data. Alternate years (a). (Crenshaw.) 

Zool. 399. Research. (Credit to be arranged) 

First and second semesters. Summer session. Work on thesis project only. 
1. cytology; 2. embryology; 3. fisheries; 4. genetics; 5. parasitology; 6. physiology; 
7. systematics; 8. ecology; 9. behavior; and 10. invertebrate zoology. (Staff.) 



238 



Dentistry 

SCHOOL OF DENTISTRY 

ANATOMY 

Professor: Hahn. 
Associate Professor: Pi avis. 
Lecturer: Lindenberg. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Anat. hi. Human Gross Anatomy. (8) 

First semester. Two lectures and three laboratories a week. Second semester. 
Two lectures and two laboratory periods for eight weeks. This course consists of 
dissections and lectures supplemented by frequent conferences and practical 
demonstrations. The entire human body is dissected. The subject is taught with 
the purpose of emphasizing the principles of the body structure, the knowledge of 
which is derived from a study of its development, its organs and tissues and the 
action of its parts. (Hahn, Piavis, Staff.) 

Anat. 112. Human Neuroanatomy. (2) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two laboratory periods for eight weeks. 
Prerequisite, Anat. 11 1 or equivalent. The work consists of a study of the 
brain and spinal cord by gross dissections and microscopic methods. Correlation 
is made, whenever possible, with the student's work in the histology and physi- 
ology of the central nervous system. (Hahn, Piavis, Lindenberg, Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Anat. 211. Human Gross Anatomy. (8) 

Same as Anat. Ill but with additional work on a more advanced level. 

(Hahn, Piavis, Staff.) 

Anat. 212. Human Neuroanatomy. (2) 

Same as Anat. 1 1 2 but with additional instruction of a more advanced nature. 

(Hahn, Piavis, Lindenberg, Staff.) 

Anat. 214. The Anatomy of the Head and Neck. (3) 

One conference and two laboratory periods per week for one semester. This 
course is designed to provide the student with a detailed study of the basic 
anatomy of the region and to correlate this knowledge with the various aspects 
of clinical practice. (Hahn, Piavis.) 

Anat. 399. Research. 

(Credit determined by amount and quality of work performed.) (Staflf.) 



239 



Dentistry 

BIOCHEMISTRY 

Professor: Vanden Bosche. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Biochem. 111. Principals of Biochemistry. (6) 

First year. Prerequisites, inorganic and organic chemistry, with additional train- 
ing in quantitative and physical chemistry desirable. Two lectures and one 
laboratory period throughout the year. (Vanden Bosche.) 

Biochem 211. Advanced Biochemistry. (6) 

Prerequisite, Biochem. 111. Two lectures, one conference and one laboratory 
period throughout the year. (Vanden Bosche.) 

Biochem. 399. Research. 

(Number of hours and credit by arrangement.) (Vanden Bosche.) 

HISTOLOGY 

Professor: Provenza. 

Assistant Professor: Barry. 

Instructor: Seipp. 

HisTOL. 111. Mammalian Histology and Embryology. (8) 

First year. The course embraces the thorough study of the cells, tissues and 
organs of the various systems of the human body. Although certain aspects 
of the dental histology phase of the course are given strictly as special entities, 
many are included in the instruction in general histology, since the two areas 
are so intimately related when functional and clinical applications are considered. 
The instruction in embryology is correlated with that in histology. It covers the 
fundamentals of development of the human body, particular emphasis being 
given to the head and facial regions, the oral cavity, and the teeth and their 
adnexa. Specific correlations are also made with the other courses in the dental 
curriculum. (Provenza, Barry, Seipp.) 

For Graduates 

Histol. 212. Mammalian Histology and Embryology. (4-2) 

This course is the same as Hist. Ill, except that it does not include the dental 
phases of Histol. Ill, but does include additional instruction and collateral read- 
ing of an advanced nature. (Provenza, Barry, Seipp.) 

Histol. 213. Mammalian Oral Histology and Embryology. (2) 
Prerequisite, Histol. Ill or 212, or an equivalent course. This course covers the 
dental aspects of Histol. Ill, and includes additional instruction in the relations 
of histologic structure and embryologic development of the teeth, their adnexa, 
and the head and facial regions of the human body. (Provenza, Barry, Seipp.) 

240 



Dentistry 
HiSTOL. 216. Inheritance and Development Biology. (6) 

This course is concerned with the study of the embryogeny and fetal develop- 
ments of vertebrate animals with special emphasis on mammalian embryology. 
In addition to tracing the development pattern, lectures are devoted to the dis- 
cussion of inheritance mechanisms, gametogenesis and fertilization. (Provenza.) 

HiSTOL. 217. Comparative Animal Histology. (6) 

Prerequisite, Histol. Ill, 212-213, or an equivalent course. This course is con- 
cerned with a comparative study of the morphology, structure and function of the 
cells, tissues and organs as found in representative members of the animal 
kingdom. Special emphasis is placed on techniques and research methods. 

(Provenza.) 

Histol. 218. Experimental Embryology. (4) 

Second semester of every year. Prerequisite, Histol. 216, or an equivalent course. 
This course is concerned with the historical and recent aspects of experimental 
embryology from both the applied and theoretical standpoint. Each student 
will be assigned a special problem in addition to the scheduled lectures. 

(Provenza.) 

Histol. 219. Radiation Biology. (4) 

First semester of odd numbered years. The primary aim of this course is to 
familiarize the student with the techniques of handling radioactive isotopes as 
applied in biological research. The topics covered in the course are: the physics 
of radioactivity from the standpoint of the biological researcher; the selection 
of isotopes for specific investigations; the effects of radioactivity on cells, tissues 
and systems; the effect of radioactivity on inheritance; the role of environment 
on the effectiveness of radioactivity; and certain phases of laboratory health 
physics. The laboratory will be concerned with the use and location as well as 
recording and interpreting data of isotopes as applied to biological research. 

(Barry.) 

Histol. 220. Physical Methods in Histology. (4) 

Second semester of even numbered years. The course introduces the graduate 
student to some of the more frequently employed techniques in cytological and 
histological research. Exercises are designed for the operation and interpretation 
of data derived from the use of available research tools. Two one-hour lectures 
and one four-hour laboratory period per week. Consent of department head 
required. (Barry.) 

Histol. 320. Seminar. (2) 

(Staff.) 

Histol. 399. Research. 

(Number of hours and credit by arrangement.) (Provenza, Barry.) 

MICROBIOLOGY 

Professor: Shay. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Micros. 115. Serology and Immunology. (4) 

Second semester. Two lectures and two laboratory periods a week. Protective 
reactions of the animal body against pathogenic microorganisms and their 
products; cellular and humoral immunity; anaphylaxis and allergies. (Shay.) 

241 



Dentistry 

MiCROB. 121. Dental Microbiology and Immunology. (4) 

First semester. Consideration is given to pathogenic bacteria, viruses, yeasts and 
molds. Special attention is given to those organisms which produce lesions 
of the oral cavity. Immunological principles are studied with emphasis on hyper- 
sensitivity resulting from antibiotics, antigens and vaccines. Laboratory teach- 
ing includes cultural characteristics, disinfection, sterilization, asepsis, animal 
inoculation, antibiotics assay and virus techniques. In all phases of the course 
emphasis is placed on dental applications. (Shay.) 

For Graduates 
MiCROB. 200, 201. Chemotherapy. (1, 1) 

Offered in alternate years. Prerequisites, Microb. 121 or equivalent, Biochem. 
Ill or equivalent. Lectures which deal with the chemistry, toxicity, pharma- 
cology and therapeutic value of drugs employed in the treatment of disease. 

(Shay.) 

MiCROB. 202, 203. Reagents and Media. (1, 1) 

Offered in alternate years. Consideration of media for special procedures, such 
as, antibiotic assays, blood cultures, spinal fluid, exudates and other materials. 
Anaerobiosis, differential media, biochemical reactions, sensitivity and sterility 
testing are considered in detail. Emphasis is placed on growth requirements on 
specific groups of microorganisms. (Shay.) 

MiCROB. 210. Special Problems in Microbiology. 

(Credit determined by amount and quality of work performed.) Laboratory 
course. Special studies in the various divisions of microbiology. (Shay.) 

Microb. 211. Public Health. (2) 

Prerequisite, Microb. 121 or equivalent. A demonstration of public health facil- 
ities in the community and their relation to the practices of the health sciences 
carried on through lectures and discussion groups. The application of statistical 
and epidemiological methods to health problems is illustrated through lectures 
and demonstrations. (Shay.) 

Microb. 399. Thesis Research. 

(Credit determined by amount and quality of work performed.) Open only to 
candidates for advanced degrees in microbiology. (Shay.) 

ORAL SURGERY 
Professor: Dorsey. 

For Graduates 
Surg. 201. Clinical Anesthesiology. (6) 

Forty hours a week for thirteen weeks. (Heldrich, Staff.) 

Surg. 220. General Dental Oral Surgery. (4) 

Two lectures and two laboratory periods a week for one semester. 

(Dorsey, Staff.) 

242 



Dentistry 
Surg. 221. Advanced Oral Surgery. (4) 

Two lectures and two laboratory periods a week for one semester. 

(Dorsey, Staff.) 

Surg. 399. Research. 

Time and credit by arrangement. (Staff.) 

PATHOLOGY 

Professor: M. Aisenberg. 
Associate Professor: A. Gardner. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Path. 121. General Pathology. (4) 

Two lectures and two laboratory periods per week for one semester. 

(Aisenberg, Gardner.) 

For Graduates 
Path. 211. Advanced Oral Pathology. (8) 

Two lectures and two laboratory periods throughout the year. This course is 
presented with the objective of correlating a knowledge of histopathology with 
the various aspects of clinical practice. Studies of surgical and biopsy specimens 
are stressed. (Aisenberg, Gardner.) 

Path. 399. Research. 

Time and credit by arrangement. (Aisenberg, Gardner.) 

PHYSIOLOGY 

Professor: White. 

Associate Professors: Shipley and Pollack. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Physiology 121. Principles of Physiology. (6) 

Second year. 132 hours. TTiree lectures and one laboratory period in first 
semester, two lectures in second semester. The study of the functions of major 
mammalian organ systems is coordinated with basic cellular neural and hor- 
monal physiology in relation to the integrated activity of the human body. 

(White, Shipley, Pollack, Staling.) 

Physiology 211. Principles of Mammalian Physiology. (6) 

Prerequisite, permission from the Department. Same as Physiology 121 but with 
collateral reading and additional instruction. Each student is required to write 
a review paper on some special phase of physiology. (White.) 

Physiology 212. Advanced Physiology. 

Hours and credit arrangement. Prerequisite, Physiology 121 or its equivalent. 
Lectures and seminars on special problems and recent advances in physiology 
during the second semester. (White.) 

243 



Medicine 

Physiology 213. Research. 

By arrangement with the Head of the Department. (White.) 

Physiology 399. Thesis Research. 

By arrangement with the Head of the Department. (White.) 

SCHOOL OF MEDICINE 

ANATOMY 

Professors: FiGGE, Krahl and Nauta. 

Associate Professor: Leveque. 

Assistant Professor: Crispens. 

The graduate degrees offered by the Department of Anatomy are the 
Master of Science and the Doctor of Philosophy. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Anat. 101. Human Gross Anatomy. (8) 

Four conferences or lectures, 12 laboratory hours per week throughout the first 
semester. Laboratory fee, $25.00. This course gives the student an opportunity 
to develop a basic concept of the morphology of the human body. It is 
closely interwoven with the study of neuroanatomy, histology and embryolgy, 
and some time is devoted to roentgen anatomy. The entire human body is 
dissected. (Figge, Krahl, Leveque, Mech, Crispens.) 

Anat. 103. Clinical Anatomy. (4) 

Second semester. Laboratory fee, $20.00. Two lectures and two two-hour labora- 
tories per week for 16 weeks. This course is designed to bridge the gap 
between abstract anatomy and clinical anatomy as applied to the study and 
practice of medicine and surgery. It will be required of all majors in anatomy. 
The study of surface anatomy will be correlated with physical diagnosis. 

(Atkins, Brantigan, Martin, Walker, Bowie, Settle, Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Anat. 201. General Anatomy of the Human Body. (8) 

Same course as Anat. 101, but on a more advanced level. It can be taken by 
graduate as well as post- graduate students. Laboratory fee, $25.00 (Figge, Staff.) 

Anat. 203. Clinical Anatomy. (4) 

Same course as Anat. 103 but on a more advanced level. Laboratory fee, 
$25.00. (Figgle, Brantigan, Staff.) 

Anat. 204. Fetal and Infant Anatomy. (2) 

Second semester. Laboratory fee, $10.00. Fifteen periods of three hours each, 
every Thursday from 2 to 5 p.m. for 15 weeks. This course is open to graduate 
students and post-graduates interested in pediatrics. (Krahl.) 

244 



Medicine 
Anat. 399. Research in Anatomy. 

Maximum credits, 12 per semester. Research work may be taken in any one of 
the branches of anatomy. (Figge, Staff.) 

NEUROANATOMY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Neuroanat. 101. Human Neuroanatomy. (4) 

First semester. Two lectures and four laboratory hours per week for 16 weeks. 
Laboratory fee, $15.00. The study of the detailed anatomy of the central 
nervous system is coordinated with structure and function of the entire nervous 
system. The dissection of the human brain and the examination of stained 
microscopic sections of various levels of the brain stem are required. 

(Figge, Nauta.) 

For Graduates 
Neuroanat. 201. Human Neuroanatomy. (4) 

Same course as Neuroanat. 101, but with additional work of a more advanced 
nature. Laboratory fee, $15.00. (Figge, Nauta.) 

Neuroanat. 399. Research in Neuroanatomy. 

Maximum credits, 12. Research work involving the central or peripheral nervous 
system. (Figge, Nauta, Leveque.) 

MICRO-ANATOMY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
MiCROANAT. 101. Mammalian Histology. (6) 

First semester. Three lectures and six laboratory hours a week for 16 weeks. 
Laboratory fee, $15.00. This course presents an integrated study of the histology 
and embryology of the human body. An attempt is made to correlate this with 
gross anatomy as well as other subjects in the medical curriculum. Special 
emphasis is placed on the dynamic and functional aspects of the subject. 

(Figge, Leveque.) 

For Graduates 
MiCROANAT. 201. Mammalian Histology. (6) 

Same course as Microanat. 101, but with additional work of a more advanced 
nature. Laboratory fee, $15.00. (Figge, Leveque and Crispens.j 

MiCROANAT. 202. Normal and Atypical Growth. (2) 

Lectures in problems of growth. Two hours per week, time to be arranged. 
Sixteen weeks. (Figge.) 

MiCROANAT. 203. Morphological Micro-techniques. (2) 

Second semester. One lecture and two laboratory hours a week for one 
semester. The aim of this course is to study the theoretical and practical ap- 
plications of a variety of microanatomical techniques and their utilization in 
research. (Leveque.) 

245 



Interdepartmental Courses 
MicROANAT. 399. Research. 

Maximum credits, 12. Research work may be taken in any one of the branches 
which form the subject of micro-anatomy (including cancer research). 

(Figge, Leveque and Crispens.) 



INTERDEPARTMENTAL COURSES 

ID. 101. Man and His Environment. (2) 

One-hour lecture and one-hour panel discussion Saturday mornings from 9 to 
11 a.m. throughout the year. Distinguished leaders in American medicine par- 
ticipate in the presentation of these weekly sessions. The course is broad in 
scope, stressing the cultural aspects of anthropology with emphasis directed 
toward the sociological, psychological, physiological, and geneological relation- 
ships of man and his surroundings. All departments of the School of Medi- 
cine participate. 

P.M. 101. BlOSTATISTICS. (1) 

(Staflf.) 

BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY 

Professor: Adams. 

Associate Professors: Emery and Bessman. 

Assistant Professors: Duda, Pomerantz and Stevens. 

Instructor: Brown. 

Graduate degrees offered by the Department of Biological Chemistry 
are the Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. 

For Graduates 
BiocHEM. 201. Principles of Biochemistry. (8) 

Second semester. Five lectures and two four and one-half hour laboratory pe- 
riods a week. Prerequisites, inorganic, organic and quantitative or physical 
chemistry. Laboratory fee, $20.00. Studies of the composition of living organ- 
isms and the chemical and physical processes which occur during health and in 
disease. (Staff.) 

BiocHEM. 202. Special Topics in Biochemistry. (1, 1) 

Prerequisite, Biochem. 101 or 201. Reading assignments and written summaries 
of the classical research literature in biochemistry. (Adams.) 

Biochem. 204, 205. Seminar. (1, 1) 

First and second semesters. Reports on the current literature or on research in 
progress. (Adams.) 

Biochem. 206. Enzymes and Metabolism. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures per week on enzyme kinetics and intermediary 
metabolism. Prerequisite, Biochem. 201. (Staff.) 

246 



Interdepartmental Courses 
BiocHEM. 207. Enzymes and Metabolism Laboratory. (3) 

First semester. Three three-hour laboratory periods per week on radioactive 
tracer methods, cell fractionation, enzyme preparation and assay procedures. 
To be taken concurrently with Biochem. 206. (Staff.) 

BiocHEM. 208. Biochemical Preparations. (1-4) 

Credit according to work assigned. The preparation of biochemicals by methods 
of illustrating useful techniques for the isolation and purification of natural 
products. (Staff.) 

Biochem. 399. Research. 

Maximum credits, 12 hours per semester. (Staff.) 



BIOPHYSICS 

Professor: Mullins. 

Associate Professors: Sjodin and Stern. 



The Department of Biophysics offers graduate courses of study leading 
to the degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. The study 
programs are flexible and depend on the preparation and interests of the 
student. Detailed requirements are available from the Department of 
Biophysics. 

It is recommended that students studying for the degree of Doctor of 
Philosophy select a minor in either physics, chemistry, or mathematics. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
BioPHYS. 100. Introduction to Biophysics. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 1, 3, Phys. 10, 11, 
Math. 18, 19. An introduction to the study of living systems applying the 
methods of physics and chemistry. The cell as a physical-chemical system and 
experimental methods for investigation, nerve impulse conduction and excitation, 
the interaction of radiation with living material the structure and properties of 
muscle tissue, connective tissue, and their proteins. (Millins, Sjodin, Stem.) 

Biophys. 101. Physical Chemistry of Membranes. (2) 

First or second semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 1, 3, Phys. 
10, II, Math. 18, 19. Diffusion in and through membranes developed from first 
principles with special reference to problems of ion transport in biological mem- 
branes. (Sjodin.) 

Biophys. 102. Biophysics of Radiation. (2) 

Second semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 1, 3, Phys. 10, 11. 
An advanced study of the interaction of radiation with living matter and with 
molecules of biological interest. (Mullins.) 

247 



Interdepartmental Courses 

BioPHYS. 103. Laboratory Techniques in Membrane Biophysics (3) 

First semester. One lecture and one laboratory period a week. Prerequisites, 
Biophys. 100 & 101 or 105, or consent of the staff. Training in the use of 
instruments applied to the study of membranes, viscosity, optical rotation, 
protein titrations, spectroscopy, conductivity, as applied to fiber forming proteins. 

(Mullins, Sjodin, Stem.) 

Biophys. 104. Seminar in Biophysics. (1) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Biophys. 100, Biophys. 101, or consent of the 
staff. Seminar on various biophysical topics given by the staff, graduate students, 
and guest speakers. 

Biophys. 105. Biophysical Chemistry. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 187, 189, Phys. 10, 
11, Math. 18, 19. A survey of the application of physico-chemical theory to 
the methods used in studying the properties of proteins, nucleic acids and other 
macromolecules and their component parts, and of the fibers and other bio- 
logical fabrics derived from these macromolecules. The properties surveyed 
will be molecular weight, size, shape, charge, intramolecular configuration, and 
intermolecular interaction, intra and inter molecular forces. The methods sur- 
veyed will include ultracentrifuge, light scattering, viscosity and other hydro- 
dynamic methods, optical rotation and rotary dispersion, infra red analysis, and 
electrophoresis. (Stern.) 

For Graduates 

Biophys. 200. Advanced and Theoretical Biophysics. (3) 

First semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Biophys. 100 or consent of 
staff. An advanced and critical analysis of experimental findings in terms of 
biophysical theory. (Mullins, Sjodin.) 

Biophys. 201. Advanced Membrane Physics. (2) 

First semester. Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Chem. 1, 3, Phys. 10, 11, 
Math. 20, 21. The subject matter of Biophys. 101 at an advanced level for 
students planning research on biological membranes. (Sjodin.) 

Biophys. 204. Advanced Biophysical Chemistry, (3) 

Second semester. Three lectures a week. Prerequisites, Biophys. 105. The sub- 
ject matter of Biophys. 105 at an advanced level for students planning research 
in the Biophysical Sciences. Detailed analysis of the theory and techniques 
discussed in Biophys. 105 as applied to particular biological systems such as 
the fiber forming macromolecules, the nucleic acids and enzymes. (Stem.) 

Biophys. 205. Colloquium in Biophysics. (1) 

Second semester. Prerequisites, Biophys. 104 or consent of the staff. CoUoquia 
on various biophysical topics given by the staff, graduate students, and guest 
speakers. 

Biophys. 399. Research. (3-6) 

First and second semesters. Required of students planning to take the Master of 
Science degree or the Doctor of Philosophy degree in Biophysics. (Staff.) 



248 



Interdepartmental Courses 
MICROBIOLOGY 

Professors: Wisseman, Traub. 

Associate Professors: Eylar, Smith. 

Assistant Professors: Myers, Rosenzweig, Snyder. 

The Department of Microbiology offers the degree of Doctor of Philoso- 
phy. While the degree of Master of Science may be offered in special 
instances, priority for research facilities will be given aspirants to the 
Ph.D. degree. This Department encourages students who wish to enroll 
in the combined M.D.-Ph.D. program. 

Emphasis is placed upon medical aspects of microbiology. Research 
programs are available in virology, rickettsiology, medical bacteriology 
and mycology, microbial physiology and bacterial cytology. Opportun- 
ities are open for experience in teaching and in diagnostic bacteriology 
and serology. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
MiCROB. 101. Medical Microbiology and Immunology. (8) 

First semester. Four lecture hours and eight hours in laboratory and group 
conferences per week. Laboratory fee, $10.00. This course begins with an intro- 
duction to basic principles of microbiology and immunology and then proceeds 
to consider the major groups of bacteria, spirochetes, fungi, rickettsiae and 
viruses that cause human disease. Emphasis is placed upon an analysis of the 
properties of microorganisms thought to be important in disease production, 
pathogenesis of infection and interaction with host defense mechanisms, 
epidemiology and control measures. (Wisseman, Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Microb. 201. Medical Microbiology and Immunology. (8) 

First semester. Four lecture hours and eight hours in laboratory and group 
conferences per week. Laboratory fee, $10.00. This course, intended for the 
serious advanced student of medical microbiology, is built upon the frame- 
work of Microb. 101 supplemented with advanced readings and laboratory work. 

(Wisseman, Staff.) 

Microb. 203. Microbial Physiology. (3) 

Second semester, alternate years. Three lectures per week supplemented with 
demonstrations. By consent of instructor. This course surveys the metabolic 
processes of bacteria, fungi, rickettsiae, viruses and parasitic protozoa. 

(Myers, Wisseman.) 

Microb. 205. Cytology and Genetics of Microorganisms. (2) 

Second semester, alternate years. One lecture and one laboratory per week. 
Laboratory fee, $10.00. Registration by consent of instructor. The structure of 
microorganisms will be studied by various means, including the electron micro- 

249 



Interdepartmental Courses 

scope, in a sequence leading to the ultimate analysis of the nucleus, which, in 
turn, will be related to the genetics of the cell and its capabilities for mutation. 
The recognition, origin and importance of bacterial, viral and fungal mutants 
will be considered. (Smith, Staff.) 

MiCROB. 206, 207. Seminar. (1, 1) 

First and second semesters. One session per week. Graduate students, staff and 
guests participate in comprehensive and critical reviews of subjects of special 
interest or pertinent to graduate training program. (Wisseman, Staff.) 

MicROB. 208. Medical Mycology. (2) 

Second semester, alternate years. One lecture and one laboratory per week. 
Laboratory fee, $10.00. Registration by consent of instructor. Consists of a 
review of the fundamentals of elementary mycology; a consideration of methods 
for the isolation, cultivation and identification of actinomycetes, yeasts and fungi; 
and a study of the etiological agents and of the immunology, epidemiology, 
prognosis and treatment of the medical mycoses. (Smith.) 

MiCROB. 209. Special Topics. 

(Permission and credit arranged individually.) This course provides the oppor- 
tunity for the graduate student to pursue under supervision subjects of special 
interest not offered in other formal courses. A study program is worked out with 
the instructor prior to registration and may consist of special readings, con- 
ferences, reports and, on occasion, laboratory experience. (Wisseman, Staff.) 

MiCROB, 210. Advanced Virology and Rickettsiology Lecture. (3) 

This course considers the general properties of viruses and rickettsiae, methods 
for studying them and finally concentrates on agents of medical importance. 
Special emphasis is placed on the host-parasite relationship, characterization of 
the various viral and rickettsial agents and on biological and ecological factors. 
Registration is by permission of instructor only. The course will be given as 
the average on alternate years in the Spring semester. There are two weekly 
sessions of 90 minutes each. Prerequisites: Microb. 201 or equivalent. 

(Eylar, Wisseman, Staff.) 

MiCROB. 211, Virology and Rickettsiology Laboratory. (1) 

This course is the laboratory counterpart of Microbiology 210. It is designed to 
familiarize the student with the major techniques for the study of virus and 
rickettsial agents and to give him first hand experience with a variety of the 
more common agents. Registration is by permission of instructor only. Because 
of the limited facilities and the nature of the work, it may be necessary to 
restrict registration in this course according to the following priority: students 
majoring in medical microbiology, then students minoring in microbiology and, 
finally, others. The laboratory consists of one formal session per week; however, 
the nature of the work frequently requires additional participation throughout 
the week. (Eylar, Wisseman, Staff.) 

MiCROB. 399. Research. 

Maximum credits, 12 hours per semester. (Wissemann, Staff.) 



250 



INTERDEPARTMENTAI, COURSES 

LEGAL MEDICINE 

Professor: Fisher. 

Associate Professor: Freimuth. 

Assistant Professor: Petty. 



Leg, Med. 201. Legal Medicine. (1) 

One hour of lecture for twelve weeks, 4 hours assigned reading. This course 
embraces a summary of medical jurisprudence including the laws governing the 
practice of medicine, industrial compensation and malpractice, proceedings 
in criminat and civil prosecution, medical evidence and testimony, including 
medicolegal toxicology. (12 hours) (Fisher, Freimuth, Petty.) 

Leg. Med. 202. Toxicology. (10) 

Two hours lecture, 8 laboratory hours per week for 1 year. There is also included 
some discussion of industrial toxicology relating industrial exposures to toxic 
substances to effects produced in the worker using these materials. The lectures 
include discussion of mechanism of action of poisons, lethal doses, antidotes 
and methods of detection and quantitation of poisons in tissues and body fluids. 
The laboratory work embraces practical application of analytical procedures for 
the detection and estimation of poisons in post mortem tissue samples. 

(Fisher, Freimuth.) 

Leg. Med. 203. Gross Pathologic Anatomy as Related to 
Toxicology. (2) 

Two hours per week for one year. This course includes elementary anatomy with 
normal histology and selected histopathology as it will be seen by the toxicologist. 
It is a correlated course embracing anatomy, basic physiology and the alterations 
in function as well as structure brought about by disease and poisoning. 

(Fisher, Petty.) 

Leg. Med. 399. Research in Toxicology. 

(Number of hours and credit arranged.) (Fisher, Freimuth.) 

This Department offers schedules leading to the degrees of Master of 
Science and Doctor of Philosophy in toxicology. Candidates are expected 
to have completed undergraduate work as follows: Eight semester hours 
each in general chemistry, organic chemistry, analytical chemistry (quali- 
tative and quantitative), physical chemistry, physics, biology and four 
semester hours in organic quahtative analysis. 

Candidates for the Master's degree must complete the following or 
equivalent courses: 

Leg. Med. 201, 202, 203 and 399. 
Pharm. 101 f. s., and Chem. 258. 



251 



Interdepartmental Courses 

Candidates for the doctorate must complete the following or equivalent 
courses: 

Leg. Med. 201, 202, 203, 399. 

Pharm. 100 f. s., Physiol. 102, Bact. 101, Bact. 102, 
Biochem. 206, Chem. 206, 208, Chem. 221, 223, Chem. 258, 
Chem. 150, Pharm. Chem. Ill, 113, Pharm. Chem. 112, 114. 

Part of the above work is offered at College Park with the remainder to 
be done at the Baltimore Schools. Some of the course work in legal 
medicine and toxicology will be given at the laboratories of the Division 
of Legal Medicine located at the Office of the Chief Medical Examiner, 
700 Fleet Street, Baltimore, Maryland. 



PHARMACOLOGY 

Professors: Krantz and Truitt. 
Associate Professors: Burgison and O'Niell. 
Assistant Professors: Musser and Bryant. 
Instructor: Rozman. 

All students majoring in the Department of Pharmacology with a view 
to obtaining the degree of Master of Science or Doctor of Philosophy 
should secure special training in anatomy, mammalian physiology, organic 
chemistry, and physical chemistry. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Pharmacol. 101, f.s. General Pharmacology. (8) 

Three lectures and one laboratory. This course consists of 105 lectures and 32 
laboratory periods of three hours each, offered each year. Laboratory fee, 
$20.00. 

(Krantz, Bryant, Burgison, Cascorbi, Musser, O'Neill, Rozman, Truitt.) 

For Graduates 
Pharmacol. 201, f.s. General Pharmacology. (8) 

Same as Pharmacol. 101, for students majoring in pharmacology. Additional 
instruction and collateral reading are required. Laboratory fee, $20.00 

(Krantz, Bryant, Burgison, Cascorbi, O'Neill, Rozman, Truitt.) 

Pharmacol. 206, f.s. Pharmacologic Methodology. (4) 

Prerequisite, Pharmacol. 201, f.s. (Truitt.) 

Pharmacol. 207, 208. Chemical Aspects of Pharmaco- 
dynamics. (2, 2) 

(Burgison.) 

252 



Interdepartmental Courses 
Pharmacol. 209. Biochemical Pharmacology. (2) 

(O'Niell.) 

Pharmacol. 399. Research. 

Maximum credits, 12. Credit in accordance with the amount of work accom- 
plished. (Krantz, Bryant, Burgison, Cascorbi, O'Neill, Rozman, Truitt.) 

PHYSIOLOGY 

Professors: Blake and Smith. 

Associate Professors: Adelman, Barraclough, Coleman, Glaser, 
AND Merlis. 

Assistant Professors: Greisman and Karpeles. 



The graduate program in physiology is designed primarily for students 
oriented toward an academic career in the field of mammalian physiology, 
basic or applied. Some background in mathematics, physics and/or 
physical chemistry is considered essential and ordinarily only those wish- 
ing to complete the requirements for the Ph.D. degree will be considered. 

In the usual case a student majoring in physiology will be expected to 
take Physiol, courses 201 to 208 below. Such a student will extend his 
program by taking courses in other departments of this University. 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Physiol. 101. The Principles of Physiology. (9) 

Second semester. Five lectures, two conferences and two 4-hour laboratory 
periods per week for 16 weeks. Laboratory fee, $15.00. The lectures cover the 
major fields of physiology, including the following areas: central and peripheral 
nervous systems, neuro-muscular apparatus, heart and circulation, respiration, 
kidney and body fluids, gastro-intestinal tract, endocrines and reproduction. The 
laboratory includes experiments with frog and turtle heart and nerve-muscle 
preparations, mammalian operative work and observations on the human 
subject. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Physiol. 201. Principles of Physiology. (9) 

Same as Physiol. 101, for graduate students taking physiology. Additional reading 
will be required. Laboratory fee $15.00 (Staff.) 

Physiol. 202. Cardiovascular Physiology. (2) 

Two hours a week for 15 weeks. Reading assignments, seminars, conferences on 
current research in the cardio-vascular field. (Karpeles.) 

253 



Interdepartmental Courses 

Physiol. 203. Pulmonary Physiology. (2) 

Two hours a week for 15 weeks. Reading assignments, lectures, seminars on 
current research in pulmonary physiology. (Staflf.) 

Physiol. 204. Physiological Techniques. 

Time and credit by arrangement. The various technical procedures currently 
operating in the Department will be demonstrated and opportunity will be 
given for acquiring experience with them. (Staff.) 

Physiol. 205. Physiology of Kidney and Body Fluids. (2) 

Two hours a week, lectures, seminars and conferences, for 15 weeks. Considera- 
tion will be given to the current status of knowledge of renal function and body 
fluids in vertebrates, with particular reference to mammals. (Blake.) 

Physiol. 206. Seminar. 

Credit according to work done. Weekly meetings are held to discuss recent 
literature and results of departmental research. (Staff.) 

Physiol. 207. Physiology of the Central Nervous System. (2) 

Two hours a week for 15 weeks. Lectures, seminars and reading assignments on 
current knowledge of central nervous system function. (Merlis.) 

Physiol. 208. Physiology of the Autonomic Nervous System. (2), 

Two hours a week for 15 weeks. Lectures, seminars and reading assignments on 
current knowledge of autonomic nervous system function. (Blake.) 

Physiol. 209. General Physiology. (2) 

Two hours a week for 15 weeks. Lectures, reading assignments, and seminars on 
selected topics in general, cellular and neurophysiology. (Adelman.) 

Physiol. 210. Physiological Systems. (3) 

Three or four hours a week for 15 weeks. Lectures, conferences, and labora- 
tory sessions on the theoretical principles of biological control systems. 

(Glaser.) 

Physiol. 211. Sensory Physiology. (3) 

Two hours lecture and conference, one laboratory period a week for 15 weeks 
on sensory systems. (Coleman.) 

Physiol. 212. Physiology of Reproduction. (2) 

Lectures, two hours a week for 15 weeks. A comprehensive survey of repro- 
ductive endocrinology. (Barraclough.) 

Physiol. 213. Seminar in Neuroendocrinology. (2) 

Two hours a week for 15 weeks. Lectures and seminars on recent advances 
in nervous regulation of endocrine function. (Barraclough.) 

Physiol. 399. Research. 

By arrangement with Head of the Department. (Staff.) 



254 



Nursing 
SCHOOL OF NURSING 

NURSING ADMINISTRATION 

GENERAL PSYCHIATRIC NURSING 

NURSING OF CHILDREN WITH PSYCHIATRIC DISORDERS 

MATERNAL AND CHILD NURSING. MEDICAL-SURGICAL 

NURSING 

PUBLIC HEALTH NURSING 

Professors: GiPE, Carl and Grenell. 

MAJOR OBJECTIVES OF THE GRADUATE PROGRAM 

The Graduate Program in Nursing leading to the degree of Master of 
Science is designed primarily to prepare registered nurses in adminis- 
tration in nursing education and nursing services. This program in- 
cludes a graduate clinical core of maternal and child health, medical 
and surgical nursing or psychiatric nursing. Graduates of these pro- 
grams are prepared as administrators, consultants, supervisors and 
teachers. 

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS 

Admission to the graduate program in nursing requires the applicant 
to be a registered nurse who has completed an undergraduate degree 
with academic standing which is recognized by the Graduate School of 
the University of Maryland. The applicant must have completed basic 
college or university courses in physical and natural sciences (i.e., chem- 
istry, microbiology, anatomy and physiology); and in the behavioral 
sciences (i.e., psychology, sociology, anthropology). In addition, the 
applicant must have clinical experience in medical and surgical nursing, 
psychiatric nursing, maternal and child nursing, and public heaUh nurs- 
ing which is comparable to the requirements in the basic undergraduate 
program in nursing at the University of Maryland. 

CURRICULUM REQUIREMENTS 

Requirements for the Master of Science Degree in Administration in 
Nursing include the satisfactory completion of forty semester hours of 
graduate work. The forty semester hours of study and field experience 
extend through three college semesters and include clinical nursing and 
directed field experience either in University of Maryland Hospital or 
an associated hospital in Baltimore. The forty semester hour program 
includes thirty-four semester hours of course work and six semester 
hours for the thesis. Twenty-two semester hours must be taken in the 
major field, and a minimum of twelve semester hours in the minor field. 

255 



Nursing 

It is required that at least twenty-two semester hours of course work be 
taken in courses numbered in the catalogue as 200 or above. 

Requirements for the Master of Science Degree in General Psychiatric 
Nursing include the satisfactory completion of thirty-eight semester hours 
of graduate work. The program extends through three college semesters, 
and includes clinical study and supervised experience in intensive nurse- 
patient interaction, and nursing care of groups of mentally ill patients 
through nurse intervention and the use of the therapeutic community. 
The student is provided supervised learning experiences in teaching of 
psychiatric nursing or supervising psychiatric nursing services. The pro- 
gram includes thirty-two hours of course work and six semester hours 
of thesis. Eight semester hours are required in the minor field. It is 
required that at least twenty semester hours of course work be taken 
in courses numbered in the catalogue as 200 or above. 

Requirements for the Master of Science Degree in Nursing of Chil- 
dren with Psychiatric Disorders include the satisfactory completion of 
fifty-three semester hours of graduate work. The program extends 
through four college semesters, and includes clinical study and super- 
vised experience in establishing and maintaining intensive nurse-child 
relationships; working as a member of a psychiatric inter-disciplinary 
team; establishing, maintaining, and providing a continuity of therapeutic 
relationships in the home setting with families of the children who are 
receiving intensive treatment; and guided observation and participation 
with individual, and groups of, disturbed pre-school children who attend 
the Children's Guild, Inc. The student is provided supervised learning 
experiences in administering, teaching, supervising, and consulting with 
reference to nursing of children with psychiatric disorders. 

Requirements for the Master of Science Degree in Medical and Surgical 
Nursing include the satisfactory completion of at least thirty semester 
hours of graduate work. The thirty hour program includes twenty-four 
semester hours of course work and six semester hours for the thesis. At 
least twelve semester hours must be taken in the major field, and at 
least eight semester hours must be taken in the minor field. It is required 
that at least tweleve semester hours of course work be taken in courses 
numbered in the catalogue as 200 or above. 

Requirements for the Master of Science Degree in Maternal and Child 
Nursing include the satisfactory completion of at least thirty semester 
hours of graduate work. The thirty hour program includes twenty- 
four semester hours of course work and six semester hours for the 
thesis. At least twelve semester hours must be taken in the major field, 
and at least eight semester hours must be taken in the minor field. It is 
required that at least twelve semester hours of course work be taken 
in courses numbered in the catalogue as 200 or above. 

Requirements for the Master of Science Degree in Public Health Nurs- 
ing include the satisfactory completion of thirty-seven semester hours of 

256 



Nursing 

graduate work. The program extends through three college semesters, 
and includes clinical study and supervised experience in public health 
nursing. The student is provided supervised learning experience in teach- 
ing public health nursing or supervising public health nursing. The 
program includes thirty-one hours of course work and six semester hours 
of thesis. Eight semester hours are required in the minor field. It is 
required that at least twenty semester hours of course work be taken in 
courses numbered in the catalogue as 200 or above. 

THESIS 

A thesis representing research in the major field must be approved by the 
advisor of the student and presented to the Dean of the Graduate School 
as partial requirement for the Master of Science Degree. Final approval 
of the thesis is given by the examination committee appointed by the 
Dean of the Graduate School. 

LEARNING EXPERIENCES 

Through graduate study the student broadens and deepens understandings 
built first upon knowledge and then greater understanding of a particular 
specialty of study and work. Having the privilege of studying with 
graduate students in other disciplines, the graduate student in nursing has 
opportunities to transfer knowledge from other areas to enrich her 
understandings in her particular field of specialty. The graduate student 
is given opportunity to learn to pursue, evaluate and apply results of 
research in nursing in order to find better ways of improving patient 
care. 

The extensive clinical facilities of the University of Maryland and asso- 
ciated institutions provide an excellent chmate where this dynamic learn- 
ing can occur. Seminars, workshops, institutes and conferences also 
provide opportunities for extending the scope of understanding of the 
graduate student. Depending upon the functional interest, the student 
receives practice in administration, teaching, supervision, and consul- 
tation under guidance. 

For Graduates 
NuRS. 201. Trends of Higher Education in Nursing. (2) 

First semester. The central objective of this course is to bring to the student 
in nursing education a knowledge and an understanding of the current status 
of nursing in institutions of higher learning and what nursing must have as a 
goal before it can become a universally accepted profession. (Conley.) 

NuRS. 202. Interpersonal Interaction. (2) 

First semester. One lecture and one two-hour laboratory period a week. The 
course is primarily concerned with the application of psychodynamics and 
psychoanalytic understandings to the nurses relationships with patients. 

(Carl, Cohelan, Eischler.) 

257 



Nursing 

NuRS. 203. Nursing in Somatic Therapies. (2) 

First semester. One lecture and one two-hour laboratory period a week. This 
course is planned to provide ( 1 ) increased knowledge and understanding of 
neuro-physiological aspects of behavior of the psychiatric patient and (2) in- 
creased ability in application of mental health concepts to the nursing care of 
patients in all clinical areas. (Cohelan, Miller.) 

NuRS. 204, 205. Psychiatric Nursing. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. One lecture and two four-hour laboratory periods 
a week. The course includes dynamics of human behavior, including formation 
of personality, the techniques of problem solving and the skills of communica- 
tion in relation to therapeutic nursing care of psychiatric patients. 

(Carl, Cohelan.) 

NuRS. 206. Philosophical Concepts in Health. (2) 

Second semester. Two-hour lecture a week. The course is planned with a con- 
temporary approach to the problem of philosophical concepts in health. The 
discussions begin with general considerations and progress to the application 
of these concepts to more specific situations. (Staff.) 

NuRS. 207, 208. Nursing in Child Health Services. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. One lecture and two four-hour laboratory periods 
a week. This course is concerned with extensive knowledge and understanding 
of the place of nursing in the society's total program of child health services 
and increased skill in the nursing of children. (Reed.) 

NuRS. 209, 210. Nursing in Maternal and Newborn 
Services. (2, 2) 

First and second semester, one lecture and two four-hour laboratory periods 
a week. This course is concerned with extensive knowledge and understanding 
of maternal care and the opportunity to make application in varying nursing 
situations which relate to the patient, to the family and to the community. 

(Hydorn.i 

NuRs. 211. Seminar in Maternal and Child Health 
Services. (2) 

Second semester. One two-hour period a week. This course is concerned with 
understanding and purposeful application of maternal and child health nursing 
as it normally exists within the family. The influence of the nurse on maternal 
and child health is traced through the many institutions and agencies where she 
contacts the mother and child, or the family as a whole. 

(Borlick, Hydorn, Reed.) 

NuRS. 212, 213. Medical and Surgical Nursing. (2, 2) 

First and second semester. One lecture and two four-hour laboratory periods a 
week. Nurs. 212 is available during the fall semester and is prerequisite to 
Nurs. 213 which is available during the spring semester. The selected course 
activities are arranged by each student and a teacher to comprise a program of 
study which will best prepare the student for the purposive improvement of 
medical and surgical nursing practice. (Hosfeld, De Haven.) 

Nurs. 214. Application of Principles of Physical and 

Social Sciences in Nursing. (2) 

First semester. One lecture and one two-hour laboratory period a week. The 
course is designed to apply physical and social science principles in life situations 

258 



Nursing 

in such a way that similar situations will be recognized by the learners in their 
day to day application. (Smith, Staff.) 

NuRS. 215. Nursing Care of the Emotionally Disturbed 
Pre-School Child. (2) 

Second semester. One lecture and two four-hour laboratory periods a week. 
Requisite-Concurrent enrollment in Nurs. 208 — Nursing in Child Health Serv- 
ices (2). This course is designed to extend the knowledge and understanding 
of the graduate nurse at the Master's level in the principles of management 
and guidance of the emotionally disturbed pre-school child. Learning experiences 
will include guided observations, staff consultations and seminars to acquaint 
nurses with the professional activities of a Therapeutic Pre-School Center. 

(Reed, Kanner, Clarke.) 

NuRS. 220, 221. Public Health Nursing. (2, 2) 

First and second semesters. One lecture and two four-hour laboratory periods 
a week. This course is designed to extend knowledge, understanding, and com- 
petencies of the nurse at the Master's level in comprehensive public health nurs- 
ing, including total planning to meet the health needs of individuals and families 
in the community. Learning experiences will include selected clinical observa- 
tions and participation in public health nursing, selected activities such as com- 
munity health conferences, and interdisciplinary health consultations in a variety 
of community health settings. (Borlick.) 

NuRS. 222. Public Health Administration. (2) 

First semester. Two-hour lecture a week. This course is designed to extend 
knowledge and understanding of the nurse at the Master's level of the principles 
of organization and administration of public health services, including budgetmg. 
program planning, coordination, interpersonal relationships, and medical care 
practices, so as to increase the competencies of practice in teaching or super- 
vising public health nursing. (Beard, Borlick.) 

Nurs. 250. Comprehensive Nursing of Children with 
Psychiatric Disorders. (4) 

First semester. Two two-hour lectures and four four-hour laboratory periods a 
week. Prerequisite, Nurs. 202 — Interpersonal Interaction (2), and Nurs. 204- 
205 — Psychiatric Nursing (2, 2). 

This course includes planning and implementation of nursing care of children 
who are mentally ill and who are receiving intensive care in a residential treat- 
ment center. Learning experiences include seminars in psychodynamic theory 
of mental illness of children, intensive nursing-child relationships, working as a 
member of a psychiatric interdisciplinary team, establishing, maintaining, and 
providing continuity of therapeutic relationships in the home setting with fam- 
ilies of the children who are receiving intensive treatment. (Charlton, Rafferty.) 

Nurs. 251. Nursing of Pre-School Children with Deviate 
Behavior. (4) 

Second semester. Two two-hour lectures and four four-hour laboratory periods 
a week. Prerequisite, Nurs. 250 — Comprehensive Nursing of Children with 
Psychiatric Disorders (4). This course includes guided observation and partici- 
pation with individual and groups of disturbed pre-school children who attend 
the Children's Guild, Inc. Learning experiences include participation in psycho- 
logical consultations and staff conferences, analysis and evaluation of problems 
of individual children and group therapy. Each student receives individual guid- 
ance throughout the course. (Charlton, Kanner, Kraft.) 

259 



Nursing 

NuRS. 252. Nursing of Children with Normal Behavior. (2) 

Second semester. One lecture and one two-hour laboratory period a week. This 
course provides a basis of comparison of the behavior of pre-school children 
with deviate and normal behavior. Learning experiences will be provided at 
the Children's Guild, Inc. and will include guide observation of normal child- 
hood play and learning in the nursery, kindergarten, and day care centers. 
Laboratory study of normal physical and motor development, social relation- 
ships, language skills, the meaning of play, and use of intellectual and creative 
media. (Charlton, Kanner, Clarke.) 

NuRS. 285. Curriculum Development in Nursing. (2) 

First semester. One two-hour lecture a week. Prerequisite; Psych. 110 — Educa- 
tional Psychology (3) or its equivalent. This course is designed to assist the 
student in curriculum planning, improvement, and evaluation including the 
formulation of objectives and the selection and organization of content and 
learning activities in nursing education. (Hovet, Marriott.) 

NuRS. 286. Research Methods and Materials in Nursing. (2) 

First semester. One two-hour lecture or conference period a week. The course 
deals with basic understandings of philosophical aspects as they relate to re- 
search, including the nature of scientific thinking, methods of research, and re- 
search literature in nursing. (Gipe, Carl.) 

NuRS. 287. Seminar in Nursing — Teaching or Supervision. (2) 

Second semester. The purpose of this course is to develop the necessary knowl- 
edge, understanding, and skill in instruction or supervision in nursing. (Staff.) 

Nurs. 288S. Special Problems in Nursing. (1-6) 

Prerequisites, Nurs. 204-205; or Nurs. 207-208; or Nurs. 209-210. The major 
objective of this course is to develop further clinical and research competencies 
in selected students who have completed a graduate core of clinical nursing. 
Registration upon consent of adviser. (Staff.) 

Nurs. 290. Administration in Nursing. (3, 3) 

The purpose of this course is to provide opportunities for professional nurses, 
with experience in teaching in schools of nursing and /or nursing services, to 
gain further competence, through planned study and experience, in the area of 
nursing administration. If previous preparation in teaching or supervision in 
some clinical area is inadequate, student will be obliged to select graduate courses 
in the area of Psychiatric Nursing, Maternal and Child Health Nursing, or 
Medical and Surgical Nursing. (Gipe, Staff.) 

Nurs. 399. Research Thesis. (1-6) 

(Staflf.) 



260 



Pharmacy 

SCHOOL OF PHARMACY 

Professors: Foss, Doorenbos, Ichniowski, Miller, Purdum, 
Shay and Slama. 

Associate Professors: Allen, Costello, Shangraw and Zenker. 

PHARMACOGNOSY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Pharmacognosy 101, 102. Taxonomy of the Higher Plants. (2, 2) 

Given in alternate years. One lecture and one laboratory. Prerequisite, Pharma- 
cognosy 41, 42. A study of the kinds of seed plants and ferns, their classifi- 
cation, and field work on local flora. Instruction will be given in the prepara- 
tion of an herbarium. (Slama.) 

Pharmacognosy 111, 113. Plant Anatomy. (2, 2) 

Two lectures a week. Prerequisites, Pharmacognosy 41, 42. 

(Slama.) 

Pharmacognosy 112, 114. Plant Anatomy. (2, 2) 

Two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, Pharmacognosy 41, 42; Pharma- 
cognosy 111, 113. Laboratory work covering advanced plant anatomy with 
special emphasis placed on the structure of roots, stems, and leaves of vascular 
plants. (Slama.) 

For Graduates 

Pharmacognosy 201, 202. Advanced Study of Vegetable 
Powders. (4, 4) 

Given in alternate years. Two lectures and two laboratories. Prerequisites. 
Pharmacognosy 111, 113. A study of powdered vegetable drugs and spices from 
the structural and microchemical standpoints, including practice in identifi- 
cation and detection of adulterants. (Slama.) 

Pharmacognosy 211, 212. Advanced Pharmacognosy. (4, 4) 

Two lectures and two laboratories. Prerequisites, Pharmacognosy 111, 113. A 
study of many crude drugs not ordinarily studied in other pharmacognosy 
courses. Special attention will be given to practical problems and to the identi- 
fication and detection of adulterants. (Slama.) 

Pharmacognosy 399. Research in Pharmacognosy. 

Credit according to the amount and quality of work performed. (Slama.) 

MATHEMATICS 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Math. 130. Probability. (3) 

First semester. Prerequisite, Math. 21 or equivalent. Combinatory analysis, 
total, compound, and inverse probability, continuous distributions, theorems 
of Bernoulli and Laplace, theory of errors. (Staff.) 

261 



Pharmacy 

Math. 132. Mathematical Statistics. (3) 

Second semester. Prerequsite, Math. 21 or equivalent. Frequency distributions 
and their parameters, multivariate analysis and correlation, theory of sampling, 
analysis of variance, statistical inference. (Staff.) 

MICROBIOLOGY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

MiCROB. 146. Serology, Immunology, Public Health .\nd 
Parasitology. (4) 

Prerequisite, Microbiology 41 or its equivalent. Two lectures and two laboratories. 
A study of the principles of immunity, including the preparation and use of 
biological products employed in the prevention and treatment of infectious dis- 
eases. Attention is given to hypersensitivity of humans and animals. Part of 
the course is devoted to the study of public health. Time is given to the study 
of medical parasitology, pathology and parasitic infections. (Shay.) 

For Graduates 
MiCROB. 200, 201. Chemotherapy. (1, 1) 

Alternate years. Prerequisites, Microbiology 121 or equivalent. Biochemistry 
111 or equivalent. Lectures which deal with the chemistry, toxicity, pharma- 
cology and therapeutic value of drugs in the treatment of disease. (Shay.) 

MiCROB. 202, 203. Reagents and Media. (1, 1) 

Offered in alternate years. Consideration of media for special procedures such 
as antibiotic assays, blood cultures, spinal fluid, exudates and other materials. 
Anaerobiosis, differential media, biochemical reactions, sensitivity and sterility 
testing are considered in detail. Emphasis is placed on growth requirements of 
specific groups of micro-organisms. (Shay.) 

Micros. 210. Special Problems in Microbiology. 

Laboratory course. Special studies in the various divisions of microbiology. 
Credit determined by amount and quality of work performed. (Shay.) 

MiCROB. 211. Public Health. (2) 

Prerequisite, Microbiology 121 or equivalent. A demonstration of public health 
facilities in the community and their relation to the practices of the health 
sciences carried on through lectures and discussion groups. The applications 
of statistical and epidemiological methods to health problems is illustrated 
through lectures and demonstration. (Shay.) 

MiCROB. 221. Research in Microbiology, 

Credit determined by amount and quality of work performed. Open only to 
candidates for advanced degrees in microbiology. (Shay.) 

MiCROB. 399. Thesis Research. 

(Shay.) 

262 



Pharmacy 

PHARMACEUTICAL CHEMISTRY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Chem. 141, 143. Advanced Organic Chemistry. (2, 2). 

Two lectures. Prerequisites, Chemistry 35, 36, 37, 38. An advanced study of 
the compounds of carbon. (Miller.) 

Chem. 144. Advanced Organic Laboratory. (2). 

Two laboratories. Prerequisite, Chemistry 37, 38 or equivalent. Laboratory 
work devoted to more complicated organic preparations. (Miller.) 

Chem. 146, 148. Identification of Organic Compounds. (2, 2). 

One lecture, two laboratories. Prerequisite, Chemistry 141, 143, or equivalent. 
The systematic identification of organic compounds. (Miller and Doorenbos.) 

Pharm. Chem. 149. Principles of Biochemistry. (5). 

Four lectures and one laboratory. Prerequisites, Pharmaceutical Chemistry 32, 
34. Lectures and laboratory exercises devoted to the composition of living 
organisms and the chemical and physical processes which occur during health 
and in disease. (Zenker.) 

Pharm. Chem. 151, 152. Chemistry of Medicinal Products. (3, 3) 

Three lectures. Prerequisite, Pharmaceutical Chemistry 30, 32, 34. A survey 
of the structural relationships, synthesis and chemical properties, principally 
of organic medicinal products. (Doorenbos.) 

Chem. 187, 189. Physical Chemistry. (3, 3). 

Three lectures. Prerequisites, Chemistry 19, 35, 37, Physics 20, 21 and Math- 
ematics 20, 21. A study of laws and theories of chemistry, including the gas 
laws, kinetic theory, liquids, solutions, elementary thermodynamics, thermo- 
chemistry, equilibrium, chemical kinetics and electro-chemistry. (Leslie.) 

Chem. 188, 190. Physical Chemistry. (2, 2). 

Two laboratories. Prerequisites, Chemistry 187, 189 or may be taken simul- 
taneously with Chemistry 187, 189. Quantitative experiments are performed 
which demonstrate physio-chemical principles, and acquaint the student with 
precision apparatus. (Leslie.) 

For Graduates 
Pharm. Chem. 230. Seminar. (1). 

Each semester. Required of students majoring in pharmaceutical chemistry. 
Reports of progress and survey of recent developments in chemistry. (Staff.) 

Pharm. Chem. 232. Advanced Organic Synthesis. (2). 

Two laboratories. Prerequisite, Chemistry 144. Library and laboratory work 
designed to offer experience in the more difficult organic syntheses and in new 
techniques. (Miller.) 

Pharm. Chem. 235. Principles of Stereochemistry. (2) 

Two lectures. Prerequisite, Chemistry 141, 143. A study of the principles of 
stereo-chemistry of organic compounds. (Miller.) 

263 



Pharmacy 

Pharm. Chem. 242. Heterocyclic Chemistry. (2). 

Two lectures. Prerequisite, Chemistry 141, 143. A study of the chemistry and 
synthesis of heterocyclic compounds. (Doorenbos.) 

Pharm. Chem. 250. Steroids. (2). 

Two lectures. Prerequisite, Chemistry 141, 143. A study of the synthesis and 
structure determination of steroids and the application of modern chemical 
concepts to the chemistry of steroids. (Doorenbos.) 

Pharm. Chem. 252. Alkaloids. (2). 

Two lectures. Prerequisite, Chemistry 141, 143. A study of the principles in- 
volved in structure determination, chemistry and synthesis of the major alka- 
loidal classes. (Miller.) 

Pharm. Chem. 253, 254. Advanced Chemistry of Medicinal 
Products. (2, 2). 

Two lectures. Prerequisite, Pharmaceutical Chemistry 151, 152 and Chemistry 
141, 143 or permission of the instructor. A study of structural relationships 
and basic principles concerned with the physical and chemical mechanisms of 
drug action, e.g., structure-activity relationships, physical properties and bio- 
logical activity, cellular transport, drug, protein binding, biological receptors, 
lipid storage and physico-chemical mechanisms of drug action. (Doorenbos.) 

Pharm. Chem. 255. Instrumental Methods of Analysis. (2). 

Either semester, two laboratories. Prerequisite, Chemistry 187, 188, 189, 190 
or equivalent. (Zenker.) 

Pharm. Chem. 271, 272. Selected Topics in Physical 
Chemistry. (2, 2). 

Two lectures. Prerequisites, Chemistry 189. A discussion of selected topics of 
particular interest in the pharmaceutical sciences, including colloids, surface 
chemistry, kinetics, absorption spectroscopy, dipole moments and the behavior 
of molecules in electric and magnetic fields. (Leslie.) 

Pharm. Chem. 274. Advanced Physical Chemistry 
Laboratory. (1). 

One laboratory. Prerequisite, Chemistry 190. Selected experiments which are 
necessary for, and a part of, a larger research effort. (Leslie.) 

Phar. Chem. 281. Pharmaceutical Biochemistry. (2). 

Two lectures. Prerequisite, Pharmaceutical Chemistry 149. A discussion of the 
relationships between drugs and enzymes, with emphasis on drug action at the 
enzymatic level and on drug metabolism. (Zenker.) 

Pharm. Chem. 282. Pharmaceutical Biochemistry 
Laboratory. (2). 

Two laboratories. Prerequisites, Pharmaceutical Chemistry 281 or permission 
of the instructor. Laboratory experiments designed to illustrate the use of 
modern techniques and metabolic methods in the study of drug action and 
drug metabolism. (Zenker.) 

Pharm. Chem. 399. Research in Pharmaceutical Chemistry. 

Credit determined by the amount and quality of work performed. (Staff.) 

264 



Pharmacy 

PHARMACOLOGY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 
Pharmacology 155, 156. General Pharmacology. (4, 5). 

Three lectures, one laboratory first semester; four lectures, one laboratory sec- 
ond semester. Prerequisites, Physiology 142, Pharmaceutical Chemistry 149 or 
consent of the instructor. A study of the pharmacology, toxicology, posology, 
untoward effects, precautions and therapeutic applications of medicinal sub- 
stances. (Ichniowski.) 

Pharmacology 171. Official Metheds of Biological Assay. (4). 

First semester. Two lectures and two laboratory periods a week. Prerequisites, 
Pharmacology 155, 156. A study of the official methods of biological assay 
of the United States Pharmacopoeia and the National Formulary. (Ichniowski.) 

For Graduates 

Pharmacology 201, 202. Methods of Biological Assay. (4, 4) 

First and second semesters. Laboratory and conferences. Prerequisite, Pharma- 
cology 171, A study of the more important unofficial methods used in the 
quantitative evaluation of therapeutic substances. (Ichniowski.) 

Pharmacology 211, 212. Special Studies in Pharmacodynamics. 
(4,4) 

First and second semesters. Laboratory and conferences. Prerequisites, Pharma- 
cology 155, 156 and the approval of the instructor. Offered in alternate years. 
A study of the methods used in the evaluation of drug action. (Ichniowski.) 

Pharmacology 221, 222. Special Studies in Biological Assay 
Methods. (2-4, 2-4) 

Credit according to the amount of work undertaken after consultation with the 
instructor. First and second semester. Laboratory and conferences. Prere- 
quisite, Pharmacology 171, 201, 202. Special problems in the development of 
biological assay methods. (Ichniowski.) 

Pharmacology 399. Research in Pharmacology 

Properly qualified students may arrange with the instructor for credit and hours. 

(Ichniowski.) 

PHARMACY 

For Graduates and Advanced Undergraduates 

Pharmacy 153, 154. Advanced Dispensing Pharmacy. (3, 3) 

Senior year, two lectures and one laboratory. Prerequisites, Pharmacy 43, 44. 
A study of the compounding of new medicinal ingredients and dispensing aids 
used in modem professional pharmacy, including the preparation of some 
important classes of pharmaceuticals on a commercial scale. (Allen.) 

Pharmacy 156. Cosmetics and Dermatological Preparations. (3) 
Second semester. Senior year. Two lectures and one laboratory. Prerequisites, 
Pharmacy 21, 22, 51, 52, and 101. A study of the composition and manufacture 

265 



Pharmacy 

of cosmetic and dermatological preparations including laboratory work in the 
formulation of these products. (Allen.) 

Pharmacy 157. Hospital Pharmacy Administration. (2) 

First semester. Senior year. Two lectures. A Giudy of hospital pharmacy 
practice and administration. (Purdum.) 

Pharmacy 158. Orientation to Hospital Administration. (2) 

Two lectures. Second semester. Senior year. A study of the organization of 
hospitals, including functions and correlation of various departments. (Staff.) 

For Graduates 
Pharmacy 201, 202. Industrial Pharmacy. (3, 3) 

Given in alternate years. Two lectures. Prerequisites, Pharmacy 153, 154. A 
study of manufacturing processes, control procedure and equipment employed in 
the manufacture of pharmaceuticals on a commercial scale, including new drug 
applications and the Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act. (Shangraw.) 

Pharmacy 203, 204. Industrial Pharmacy. (2, 2) 

Two laboratories. Prerequisites, Pharmacy 201, 202, or may be taken simultane- 
ously with Pharmacy 201, 202. Laboratory work dealing with the preparation 
of useful and important pharmaceuticals in large quantities. (Shangraw.) 

Pharmacy 207, 208. Physical Pharmacy. (2, 2) 

Two lectures a week. Prerequisite, consent of the instructor; Physical Chemistry 
187, 188, 189, 190 recommended. A study of pharmaceutical systems utilizing 
the fundamentals of physical chemistry. (Shangraw.) 

Pharmacy 211, 212. Survey of Pharmaceutical Literature. (1, 1) 

Given in alternate years. One lecture. Lectures and topics on the literature 
pertaining to pharmacy, with special reference to the origin and development 
of the works of drug standards and the pharmaceutical periodicals. (Allen.) 

Pharmacy 215, 216. Product Development. (2, 2) 

Two laboratories. Prerequisites, Pharmacy 153, 154, 156. A study of the de- 
velopment of new pharmaceutical preparations and cosmetics suitable for 
marketing. (Allen.) 

Pharmacy 221, 222. History of Pharmacy. (2, 2) 

Given in alternate years. Two lectures. Lectures and assignments on the de- 
velopment of pharmacy in America and the principal countries of Europe. 

(Purdum.) 

Pharmacy 230. Pharmaceutical Seminar. (1) 

Each semester. Required of students majoring in pharmacy. Reports of pro- 
gress in research and surveys of recent developments in pharmacy. (Allen.) 

Pharmacy 231, 232. Special Problems in Pharmaceutical 
Technology. (2, 2) 

Two 1; boratories. A study of technical problems in the stabilization and preser- 
vation of pharmaceuticals and the various methods of compounding special 
prescriptions. (Allen.) 

266 



Social Work 
Pharmacy 399. Research iin Pharmacy. 

Credit and hours to be arranged. (Foss, Purdum, Allen, Shangraw.) 

PHYSIOLOGY 

Physiol. 245. Cellular Physiology and Cytogenetics. (3) 

First semester, three lectures. Prerequisites, Pharmaceutical Chemistry 149, 
Physiology 142, consent of instructor. The lectures will relate to the physical 
and chemical properties of protoplasm to the functional problems of the plasma 
membrane, cytoplasm, golgi apparatus, microsomes, nucleus, mitochondrial struc- 
ture and their contributions to the integrated cellular activity. The physical and 
chemical phenomena of cell division and inheritance will be discussed. 

(Costello.) 

Physiol. 246. Radioisotope Techniques. (3) 

Second semester, one lecture and two laboratories. Prerequisites, consent of 
instructor. A course concerned with the practical use of isotopes particularly 
as tracers in metabolic investigations. (Costello.) 

Physiol. 399. Research in Physiology. 

Credit determined by the amount and quality of work performed. (Costello.) 



SCHOOL OF SOCIAL WORK 

Professor: Lewis. 

Research Professor: Bodkin. 

Associate Professors: McGinnis, Stein, Thursz. 

Assistant Professors: Buttrick, Chaiklin. 

Lecturers: Conner, Klein, Lichtenberg, Lisansky, Mohr, Patton, 
Rosenman. 

For Graduates 
THE SOCIAL SERVICES 

SW 200, 20L Social Services and Social Policy. (2, 2) 

Both semesters. Identification of social needs and analysis of social services 
with particular reference to political, social, and economic forces affecting their 
development. The social control and melioration functions of social welfare 
programs. Examination of the growth, organization and function of govern- 
mental and voluntary services. Open to qualified part-time students with con- 
sent of instructor. (Buttrick.) 

SW 202. The Social Work Profession. (2) 

Second year. The historical background and development of the profession. 
Current trends in professional practice. Professional concerns with social 
policy. Professional values and ethical behavior. (Thursz.) 

267 



Social Work 

SW 203. Community Social Welfare Services. (2) 

First semester, concurrent with SW 200. Participant observation of community 
provision for control of selected social problems: dependency, disordered 
behavior, indigent disability. Consideration of social work roles in alleviation 
and control of selected problems. Open to qualified part-time students enrolled 
in SW 200. (Buttrick.) 

SW 205. Social Welfare History. (2) 

The changing concept of charity from Biblical to modem times. Origin of 
English and American poor laws. Charity organization and the growth of 
voluntary efforts. Origins and development of welfare state concept. Open to 
qualified part-time students with consent of instructor. (Lewis.) 

GROWTH AND BEHAVIOR 
SW 210. Human Behavior I. (2) 

First semester. Concepts basic to understanding adult social functioning with 
particular reference to characteristic ways of responding to stressful situations 
arising out of economic disadvantage, sociocultural conflict, illness and dis- 
ability. Attention to the family as a social system and the social roles of family 
members in the patterning of relationships. (McGinnis.) 

SW 211. Human Behavior II. (2) 

Second semester. Elaboration of concepts introduced in SW 210. Introduction 
of psychodynamic concepts used in assessment of psychosocial disorders. 

(McGinnis.) 

SW 212. Human Behavior III. (2) 

First semester, second year. Discriptive and dynamic considerations in psycho- 
social disorders and psychopathology likely to be encounted in social work 
practice, i.e., indigency, marital disorder, delinquent and criminal behavior, 
personality disorders, retardations, illegitimate parenthood, child neglect and 
placement, neuroses, and phychoses. (Lichtenberg, McGinnis.) 

SW 213. Human Behavior IV. (2) 

Second semester, second year. Concepts basic to an understanding of per- 
sonality development in childhood and adolescence. Application of psycho- 
dynamic formulations in differential diagnosis and planning use of casework 
and groupwork techniques appropriate to the client's needs. Analysis of 
social work, sociological and biographical case materials utilizing psychosocial 
concepts. (Patton, McGinnis.) 

SW 214. Nature and Ecology of Health and Illness. (1) 

Introduction to causes, symptoms, treatment, distribution, prevention and con- 
trol of disease. Social and psychological aspects of illness, emphasizing factors 
influencing response to stress. Socio-economic problems of health care. Co- 
ordination of health and social resources as relevant to social work practice. 

SW 215. Behavior of Human Groups. (2) 

Examination of concepts underlying social work practice as drawn from 
theory of social systems. Special reference to families, small groups, neigh- 
borhoods, communities, to social institutions and to culture. Reference also to 

268 



Social Work 

leadership theory and related formulations useful in understanding interpersonal 
relationships in families, committees, clubs, social agencies and special interest 
groups. Open to qualified part-time students with consent of instructor. 

(Chaiklin.) 

SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE 

SW 220, 221. Social Casework. (2, 2) 

Both semesters, first year. Fundamental concepts and principles of the case- 
work method. Emphasis on understanding the person presenting the social 
problem, the environment, especially the family setting, in which it occurs, 
and the roles of the social agency and the social worker in using community 
resources in helpful ways. The relationship of study and history to psycho- 
social diagnosis and the formulation of appropriate treatment plans. 

(Conner, Stein.) 

SW 222, 223. Social Casework. (2, 2) 

Both semesters, second year. Further elaboration of basic concepts and intro- 
duction of more complex ideas. Case analysis directed toward development of 
skill in psychosocial diagnosis. Emphasis on selection of casework treatment 
techniques consistent with treatment objectives. Short-term and long-term case- 
work treatment problems. Similarities and differences in casework practices 
in such varied settings as family and children's agencies, public assistance 
agencies, school social work departments, clinical (medical and psychiatric) 
services, correctional programs, etc. (Stein.) 

SW 235. Group Method in Social Work. (2) 

Elementary concepts of social groupwork practice essential for the informed 
use of social groupwork resources in the community by social workers using 
casework methods. Application of theories of group behavior to understanding 
committee and other group processes within social agencies and professional 
and related organizations. Open to qualified part-time students with consent 
of instructor. (Klein.) 

SW 240. Community Organization and Development. (2) 

Basic concepts useful in facilitating citizen participation in neighborhood and 
community organization for social welfare. Analysis of methods used to achieve 
social objectives in community provision of needed services and prevention and 
control of psychosocial disorders. (Klein, Thursz.) 

SW 242, 243. Community Organization Methods. (2, 2) 

(Both semesters, second year). Elaboration of basic concepts and methods of 
application. The role of the social worker in developing leadership and en- 
abling neighborhood groups to identify and solve problems. Emphasis upon 
community organization process in intergroup relations in urban renewal, 
housing and settlement situations. (Thursz.) 

SW 250. Social Welfare Administration. (2) 

Second year. Elementary concepts of administration applicable to social wel- 
fare agencies. Staff participation in decision-making, policy formulation, and 
communication. Role relationships within administrative structures. Open to 
qualified part-time students with consent of instructor. (Klein, Roseman.) 

269 



Social Work 

SW 260. Social Investigation. (2) 

Second semester. Methods of research in social work. Problem formulation, 
data collection and analysis, presentation of findings, and conclusions. Atten- 
tion to classic and recent studies. The relationships of research to social work 
knowledge. Open to qualified part-time students with consent of instructor. 

(Chaiklin.) 

SW 261, 262. Social Work Research. (2, 2) 

Both semesters, second year. Analysis of significant social work studies and 
related social science research. A research report of substantial dimensions and 
high standards, presenting and analyzing findings of a study of some professional 
problem is required. (Chaiklin, Staff.) 

SW 280, 281. Field Work: Basic Social Casework. (4, 4) 

Both semesters, first year. Placement in community agencies for practice in- 
struction in social casework method. (Staff.) 

SW 282, 283. Field Work: Advanced Social Casework. (6, 4) 

Both semesters, second year. Placement in community agencies for practice 
instruction in social casework method. (Staff.) 

SW 285, 286. Field Work: Community Organization and 
Neighborhood Development. (5, 5) 

Both semesters, second year. Placement in community agencies for practice 
instruction in community organization method. Prerequisite, successful com- 
pletion of SW 280, 281 and related first-year courses. (Staflf.) 

SW 290. Special Social Work Problems. (1-3) 

Individually planned study of selected substantial area of professional interest 
as arranged to meet special needs. Extensive reading, written and oral report- 
ing as arranged by instructor. 



210 



Graduate Council 

The Graduate Council 

Ex-Officio Members 

ELKINS, Wilson H., D.Phil., President of the University 

BYRD. Harry C. LL.D.. D.Sc. President Emeritus 

HORN BAKE. R. Lee, Ph.D., Vice President for Academic Affairs 

BAMFORD, Ronald. Ph.D.. Dean of the Graduate School 

APPLEMAN. Charles O., Ph.D., Dean Emeritus 

PRAHL, Augustus J.. Ph.D.. Associate Dean and Secretary of the Graduate 
Facn't^ Assembly 

Appointed Members 

ANASTOS, George, Ph.D.. Professor of Zoology 1966 

COHEN. Leon W.. Ph.D.. Professor of Mathematics 1964 

GRUCHY. Allan G., Ph.D.. Professor of Economics 1967 

LASTER. Howard. Ph.D.. Associate Professor of Physics 1965 

Elected Members 

ANDREWS, Thomas G., Ph.D., Professor of Psychology 1965 

BECKMANN, Robert Bader, Ph.D., Professor of Chemical Engineering . . 1967 

BODE, Carl, Ph.D.. Professor of English 1967 

HOVET. Kenneth O.. Ph.D., Professor of Education 1967 

HUMPHREY, James H., Ph.D., Professor of Physical Education 1965 

JACKSON, Stanley. Ph.D.. Professor of Mathematics 1966 

KRAUSS, Robert W., Ph.D.. Professor of Botany 1965 

LAND, Aubrey C, Ph.D., Professor of History 1964 

MILLER, Francis M., Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry (Baltimore) 1964 

PELCZAR, Michael J.. Ph.D.. Professor of Microbiology 1964 

THOMPSON, Arthur H., Ph.D., Professor of Pomology 1966 

WHITE, Charles E., Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry 1965 

WHITE. John I., Ph.D.. Professor of Physiology (Baltimore) 1966 

Administrative Officers 

BAMFORD, Ronald, Professor of Botany and Dean of the Graduate School 

B.S., University of Connecticut, 1924; M.S., University of Verm.ont, 1926; Ph.D,. 
Columbia University, 1931. 

PRAHL, Augustus J., Professor of Foreign Languages and Associate Dean of the 
Graduate School 
M.A., Washington University, 1928; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University, 1933. 

LYNHAM, Lucy A., Assistant to the Dean 
B.A., University of Maryland, 1933. 

277 



THE FACULTY 



Professors 

ADAMS, Elijah, Professor and Head of Department of Biological Chemistry 

B.A., The Johns Hopkins University, 1938; M.D., University of Rochester, 1942. 

ALDEN, DOUGLAS W., Professor and Head of the Department of Foreign 
Languages 
A.B., Dartmouth College, 1933; Ph.D., Brown University, 1938. 

ALDRIDGE, Alfred O., Professor of English and Director of Comparative Literature 
B.S., Indiana University, 1937; M.A., University of Georgia, 1938; Ph.D., Duke 
University, 1942; Docteur de I'Universite de Paris, 1955. 

ALLEN, Redfield W., Professor of Mechanical Engineering 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1937; Ph.D., 1949. 

ALLEN, Russell B., Professor of Civil Engineering and Assistant Dean of College of 

Engineering 

B.S., Yale University, 1923. 

ANASTOS, George, Professor of Zoology 

B.S., University of Akron, 1942; M.A., Harvard University, 1947; Ph.D., 1949. 

ANDERSON, Vernon E., Professor and Dean of the College of Education 

B.S., University of Minnesota, 1930; M.A., 1936; Ph.D., University of Colorado, 
1942. 

ANDREWS, Thomas G., Professor and Head of Department of Psychology 

B.A., University of Southern California, 1937; M.A., University of Nebraska, 1939; 
Ph.D., 1941. 

ARBUCKLE, Wendell S., Professor of Dairy Science 

B.S.A., Purdue University, 1933; A.M., University of Missouri, 1937; Ph.D., 1940. 

AVERY, William T., Professor and Head of Classical Languages and Literatures 
B.A., Western Reserve University, 1934; M.A., 1935; Ph.D., 1937; Fellow of the 
American Academy in Rome, 1937-1939. 

BAMFORD, Ronald, Professor of Botany and Dean of the Graduate School 

B.S., University of Connecticut, 1924; M.S., University of Vermont, 1926; Ph.D., 
Columbia University, 1931. 

BAUER, Richard H., Professor of History 

Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1923; M.A., 1928; Ph.,D., 1935. 

BEAL, George M., Professor of Agricultural Economics and Marketing 

B.S., Utah State Agricultural College, 1934; M.S., University of Wisconsin, 1938; 
Ph.D., 1942. 



272 



Faculty 

BECKMANN, Robert Bader, Professor and Head of Department of Chemical Engi- 
neering 

B.S., University of Illinois, 1940; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, 1944. 

BICKLEY, William E., Professor and Head of Department of Entomology 

B.S., University of Tennessee, 1934; M.S., 1936; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 
1940. 

BLAKE, William Dewey, Professor and Head of Department of Physiology 
A.B., Dartmouth College, 1940; M.D., Harvard Medical School, 1943. 

BLOUGH, Glenn O., Professor of Education 

A.B., University of Michigan, 1929; A.M., 1932; LL.D., Central Michigan College 
of Education, 1950. 

BODE, Carl, Professor of English 

Ph.B., University of Chicago, 1933; M.A., Northwestern University, 1938; Ph.D., 
1941; Fellow of the Royal Society of Literature of the United Kingdom. 

BONNEY, Donald T., Professor of Chemical Engineering 
B.E., Johns Hopkins University, 1926; Ph.D., 1935. 

BRACE, John W., Professor of Mathematics 

B.A., Swarthmore College, 1949; A.M., Cornell University, 1951; PH.D., 1953. 
BRADY, Joseph Vincent, Professor of Psychology (P.T.) 

B.S., Fordham University, 1943; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1951. 

BURDETTE, Franklin L., Professor of Government and Politics and Director of 

the Bureau of Governmental Research 

A.B., Marshall College, 1934; A.M., University of Nebraska, 1935; A.M., 
Princeton University, 1937; Ph.D., 1938; LL.D., Marshall College, 1959. 

BYRNE, Richard H., Professor of Education 

A.B., Franklin and Marshall College, 1938; M.A., Columbia University, 1947; 
Ed.D., 1952. 

CAIRNS, Gordon M., Professor of Dairy Science and Dean of College of Agriculture 
B.S., Cornell University, 1936; M.S., 1938; Ph.D., 1940. 

CARDOZIER, V. R., Professor and Head of Department of Agricultural and Ex- 
tension Education 

B.S., Louisiana State University, 1947; M.S., 1950; Ph.D., Ohio State University, 
1952. 

CARL, Mary K., Professor of Nursing 

B.S., Johns Hopkins University, 1946; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 195L 

CHATELAIN, Verne E., Professor of History 

B.A., Nebraska State Teachers College, 1917; M.A., University of Chicago, 1925; 
Ph.D., University of Minnesota, 1943. 

CLEMENS, Eli W., Professor of Business Organization 

B.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute, 1930; M.S., University of Illinois, 1934; Ph.D., 
University of Wisconsin, 1940. 

273 



Faculty 

COHEN, Leon W., Professor and Head of Department of Mathematics 

B.A., Columbia University, 1923; M.A., 1925; Ph.D., University of Michigan, 
1928. 

COMBS, Gerald F., Professor of Poultry Nutrition 

B.S., University of Illinois, 1940; Ph.D., Cornell University, 1948. 

COOK, J. Allen, Professor of Marketing 

A.B., College of William and Mary, 1928; M.B.A., Harvard University, 1936; 
'^hU., Columbia University, I "^8. 

COOLEY, Franklin D., Professor of English 

A.B., Johns Hopkins University, 1927; M.A., University of Maryland, 1933; Ph.D., 
Johns Hopkins University, 1940. 

CORNING, Gerald, Professor of Aeronautical Engineering 

B.S., New York University, 1937; M.S., Catholic University, 1954. 

CURTIS, John M., Professor and Head of Department of Agricultural Economics 
B.S., North Carolina State, 1947; M.S., 1949; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 
1961. 

DAVIS, Richard P., Professor and Head of Dairy Science 

B.S.. University of New Hampshire, 1950; M.S., Cornell University, 1952; Ph.D., 
1953. 

DE VOLT, Harold M., Professor of Veterinary Science 

B.S.. Cornell University, 1936; D.V.M., 1923; M.S., 1926. 

DILLARD, Dudley, Professor and Head of Department of Economics 
B.S., University of California, 1935; Ph.D., 1940. 

DILLON, Conley H., Professor of Government and Politics 

A.B., Marshall College. 1928; A.M., Duke University, 1933; Ph.D., 1936. 

DITMAN, Lewis P., Professor of Entomology 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1926; M.S., 1929; PH.D., 1931. 

DOETSCH, Raymond N., Professor of Microbiology 

B.S., University of Illinois, 1942; A.M., Indiana University, 1943; Ph.D., Uni- 
versity of Maryland, 1948. 

DOORENBOS, NORMAN J., Professor of Pharmaceutical Chemistry 
B.S., University of Michigan, 1950; M.S., 1951; Ph.D., 1953. 

DORSEY, Brice M., Professor and Head of Department of Oral Surgery 
D.D.S., University of Maryland, 1927. 

DOUGLIS, Avron, Professor of Mathematics 
A.B., University of Chicago, 1938; M.A., New York University, 1949; Ph.D., 
1949. 

DUFFEY, Dick, Professor of Chemical Engineering 
B.S., Purdue University, 1939; M.S., University of Iowa, 1940; Ph.D., University 
of Maryland, 1956. 

274 



Faculty 

EDGERTON, Harold A., Professor of Psychology (P.T.) 

B.S., Kansas State Teachers College, 1924; M.A., Ohio State University, 1926; 
Ph.D., 1928. 

ELKINS, Wilson H., President, University of Maryland 

B.A., University of Texas, 1932; M.A., 1932; LITT.B., Oxford University, 1936; 
D.PHIL., 1936. 

ESTABROOK, Gaylord B., Professor of Physics 
B.Sc, Purdue University, 1921; M.Sc, Ohio State University, 1922; Ph.D., Uni- 
versity of Pittsburgh, 1932. 

FABER, John E., Jr., Professor and Head of Department of Microbiology 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1926; M.S., 1927; Ph.D., 1937. 

FALLS, William F., Professor of Foreign Languages 

A.B., University of North Carolina, 1922; Certificate d'Etudes Francaises, Uni- 
versity of Toulouse, 1926; M.A., Vanderbilt University, 1928; Ph.D., University 
of Pennsylvania, 1932. 

FERRELL, Richard A., Professor of Physics 

B.S., California Institute of Technology, 1948; ^* ^., 1949; Ph.D., Princeton 
University, 1952. 

FIGGE, Frank H. J., Professor and Head of Department of Anatomy 
A.B., Colorado College, 1927; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 1934. 

FISHER, Allan J., Professor of Accounting and Finance 

B.S., University of Pennsylvania, 1928; LITT.M., University of Pittsburgh, 1936; 
Ph.D., 1937. 

FISHER, Russell S., Professor of Legal Medicine, School of Medicine 

B.S., Georgia School of Technology. 1937; M.D., Medical College of Virginia, 
1942. 

FOSS, Noel E., Professor and Dean of School of Pharmacy 

Ph.C, B.S., South Dakota State College, 1929; M.S., University of Maryland, 
1932; Ph.D., 1933. 

FOSTER, John E., Professor and Head of Department of Animal Science 

B.S., North Carolina State College, 1926; M.S., Kansas State College, 1927; Ph.D., 
Cornell University, 1937. 

FRALEY, Lester M., Professor and Dean of College of Physical Education, Recrea- 
tion and Health 

A.B., Randolph-Macon College, 1928; M.A., Peabody College, 1937; Ph.D., 1939. 

FRIEDMAN, Herbert, Professor of Physics (P.T.) 

B.A., Brooklyn College, 1936; Ph.D., The Johns Hopkins University, 1940. 

GAUCH, Hugh G., Professor of Plant Physiology and Acting Head of the Depart- 
ment of Botany 

B.S., Miami University, 1935; M.S., Kansas State College, 1937; Ph.D., University 

of Chicago, 1939. 

275 



Faculty 

GENTRY, Dwight L., Professor of Marketing 

A.B., Elon College, 1941; M.B.A., Northwestern University, 1947; Ph.D., Uni- 
versity of Illinois, 1952. 

GERBERICH, J. Raymond, Professor of Education 

B.S., University of Iowa, 1922; M.A., 1928; Ph.D., 1929. 

GIPE, Florence M., Professor and Dean of the School of Nursing 

B.S., Catholic University, 1937; M.S., University of Pennsylvania, 1940; ED.D., 
University of Maryland, 1952. 

GLASSER, Robert Gene, Visiting Professor of Physics (P.T.) 

A.B., University of Chicago, 1948; B.S.. 1950; M.S., 1952; Ph.D., 1954. 

GOLDHABER, J. K., Professor of Mathematics 

B.A., Brooklyn College, 1944; M.A., Harvard University, 1945; Ph.D., University 
of Wisconsin, 1950. 

GOOD, Richard A., Professor of Mathematics 

A.B., Ashland College, 1939; M.A., University of Wisconsin, 1940; Ph.D., 1945. 

GOODWYN, Frank, Professor of Spanish and Latin American Civilization 

B.A., Texas College of Arts and Industries, 1940; M.A., 1941; Ph.D., University 
of Texas, 1946. 

GORDON, Donald C, Professor of History 

A.B., College of William and Mary, 1934; M.A., Columbia University, 1937; 
Ph.D., 1947. 

GREEN, Robert L., Professor and Head of Department of Agricultural Engineering 
B.S.A.E., University of Georgia, 1934; M.S., Iowa State College; Ph.D., Michigan 
State University, 1953. 

GREEN, Willard Wynn, Professor of Animal Science 

B.S., University of Minnesota, 1933; M.S., 1934; Ph.D., 1939. 

GRENELL, Robert G., Professor of Psychiatry 
A.B., College of the City of New York, 1935; M.Sc, New York University, 1936; 
Ph.D., University of Minnesota, 1943. 

GRENTZER, Rose Marie, Professor of Music 

B.A., Carnegie Institute of Technology, 1935; B.A., 1936, M.A., 1939. 

GRIEM, Hans, Professor of Physics 
Ph.D., Universitat Kiel, 1954. 

GRUCHY, Allan G., Professor of Economics 

B.A., University of British Columbia, 1926; M.A., McGill University, 1929; Ph.D., 
University of Virginia, 1931. 

HAHN, William E., Professor of Anatomy 

A.B., University of Rochester, 1938; M.S., 1939; D.D.S., 1931. 

276 



Faculty 

HANSEN, P. Arne, Professor of Microbiology 

Ph.D., University of Copenhagen, 1922; M.S., Royal Technological College, Den- 
mark, 1926; Ph.D., Cornell University, 1934. 

HARRISON, Horace V., Professor of Government and Politics 

B.A., Trinity University, 1932; M.A., University of Texas, 1941; Ph.D., 1951. 

HARRISON, Paul E., Jr., Professor of Industrial Education 

B.ED., Northern Illinois State College, 1942; M.A., Colorado State College, 1947; 
Ph.D., University of Maryland, 1955. 

HARVEY, Ellen E., Professor of Physical Education, Recreation and Health 

B.S., Columbia University, 1935; M.A., 1941; Ed.D., University of Oregon, 1951. 

HAUT, I. C, Professor of Horticulture, Director, Agricultural Experiment Station 
B.S., University of Idaho, 1928; M.S., State College of Washington, 1930; Ph.D., 
University of Maryland, 1933. 

HENDRICKS, Richard, Professor of Speech 

A.B., Franklin College of Indiana, 1937; M.A., Ohio State University, 1939; 
Fh.D., 1956. 

HOFFSOMMER, Harold C, Professor and Head of Department of Sociology 
B.S., Northwestern University, 1921; M.A., 1923; Ph.D., Cornell University, 1929. 

HORNjAKE, R. Lee. Vice President for Academic Affairs, Professor of Industrial 
Education 

B.S., California State College, Pa., 1934; M.A., Ohio State University, 1936; 

Ph.D., 1942. 

HORNYAK, William Frank, Professor of Physics 

B.E.E., College of the City of New York, 1944; M.S., California Institute of 
Technology, 1949; Ph.D., 1949. 

HORVATH, John, Professor of Mathematics 
Ph.D., University of Budapest, 1947. 

HO VET, Kenneth O., Professor of Education 

B.A., St. Olaf College, 1926; Ph.D., University of Minnesota, 1950. 

HU, Charles Y., Professor of Geography 

B.S., University of Nanking, 1930; M.A., University of California, 1936; Ph.D., 
University of Chicago, 1941. 

HUMMEL, James A., Professor of Mathematics 

B.S., California Institute of Technology, 1949; M.A., Rice Institute, 1953; Ph.D., 
1955. 

HUMPHREY, James H., Professor of Physical Education and Health 

B.A., Denison University, 1933; M.A., Western Reserve University, 1946; Ed.D., 
Boston University, 1951. 

ICHNIOWSKI, Casimir T., Emerson Professor of Pharmacology 

Ph.G., University of Maryland, 1929; B.S., 1930; M.S., 1932; Ph.D., 1936. 

211 



Faculty 

JACKSON, John W., Professor of Mechanical Engineering 

B.S.M.E., University of Cincinnati, 1934; M.E., 1937; M.S.M.E., California Insti- 
tute of Technology, 1940. 

JACKSON, Stanley B., Professor of Mathematics 

A.B., Bates College, 1933; A.M., Harvard University, 1934; Ph.D., 1937. 

JOHNSON, Warren R., Professor of Physical Education 

B.A., University of Denver, 1942; M.A., 1946; Ed.D., Boston University, 1950. 

JONES, George Fenwick, Professor of Foreign Languages 

A.B., Emory University, 1938; M.A., Oxford University, 1943; Ph.D., Columbia 
University, 1950. 

JORDAN, H. Bryce, Professor of Music 

B.Mus., University of Texas, 1948; M.Mus., 1949; Ph.D., University of North 
Carolina, 1956. 

KEENEY, Mark, Professor of Dairy Science 

B.S., Pennsylvania State College, 1942; M.S., Ohio State University, 1947; Ph.D., 
Pennsylvania State College, 1950. 

KRAHL, Vernon E., Professor of Anatomy 

B.S., University of Pittsburgh, 1939; M.S., 1940; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 
1946. 

KRAMER, Amihud, Professor of Horticulture 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1938; M.S., 1939; Ph.D., 1942. 

KRANTZ, John C, Jr., Professor of Pharmacology 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1923; M.S., 1924; Ph.D., 1928. 

KRAUSS, Robert W., Professor of Botany 

B.A., Oberlin College, 1947; M.S., University of Hawaii, 1949; Ph.D., University 
of Maryland, 1951. 

KUHN, Albin O., Professor'of Agronomy and Executive Vice President 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1938; M.S., 1939; Ph.D., 1948. 

KURODA, Sigekatu, Professor of Mathematics 

Bachelor, University of Tokyo, 1928; Dr. of Sc, 1945. 

KURTZ, John J., Professor of Education 

B.A., University of Wisconsin, 1935; M.A., Northwestern University, 1940; Ph.D., 
University of Chicago, 1949. 

LAND, Aubrey C, Professor and Head of Department of History 

B.Ed., Southern Illinois University, 1934; M.A., Iowa State University, 1938; 
Ph.D., 1948. 

LANGFORD, George S., Professor of Entomology 

B.S., Clemson College, 1921; M.S., University of Maryland, 1924; Ph.D., Ohio 
State University, 1929. 



278 



Faculty 

LA VINE, Thelma Z., Professor of Philosophy 
A.B., Radcliffe, 1936; A.M., 1937; Ph.D., 1939. 

LEJINS, Peter P., Professor of Sociology 

Ph.M., University of Latvia, 1930; LL.M., 1933; Ph.D., University of Chicago, 
1938. 

LEMBACH, John, Professor and Acting Head of Art 

B.A., University of Chicago, 1934; M.A., Northwestern University, 1937; Ed.D., 
Columbia University, 1946. 

LEPPER, Henry A., Jr., Professor of Civil Engineering 
B.S., George Washington University, 1936; M.S., University of Illinois, 1938; 
D.Eng., Yale University, 1947. 

LEWIS, Verl S., Professor of Social Work and Dean of the School of Social Work 
A.B., Huron College, 1933; M.A., University of Chicago, 1938; D.S.W., Western 
Reserve University, 1954. 

LINK, Conrad B., Professor of Floriculture 

B.Sc, Ohio State University, 1933; M.Sc, 1934; Ph.D., 1940. 

LIPPEATT, Selma F., Professor and Dean of the College of Home Economics 
B.S., Arkansas State Teachers College, 1938; M.S., University of Tennessee, 1945; 
Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University, 1953. 

LIPPINCOTT, Ellis R., Professor of Chemistry 

B.A., Earlham College, 1943; M.S., Johns Hopkins University, 1944; Ph.D., 1947. 

L.OONEY, Charles T. G., Professor and Head of Department of Civil Engineering 
B.S., Carnegie Institute of Technology, 1932; M.S., in C.E., University of Illinois, 
1934; Ph.D., in Engineering, 1940. 

MAC DONALD, William M., Professor of Physics 

B.S., University of Pittsburgh, 1950; Ph.D., Princeton University, 1955. 

MAGOON, Thomas M., Professor of Psychology 

B.A., Dartmouth College, 1947; M.A., University of Minnesota, 1951; Ph.D., 1954. 

MALEY, DONALD, Professor and Head of the Department of Industrial Education 
B.S., Pennsylvania State Teachers College, California, Pa., 1943; M.S., University 
of Maryland, 1947; Ph.D., 1949. 

MANNING, Charles, Professor of English and Acting Dean of the College of Arts 
and Sciences 

B.S., Tufts College, 1929; M.A., Harvard University, 1931; Ph.D., University of 

North Carolina, 1950. 

MARION, Jerry B., Professor of Physics 

B.A., Reed College, 1952; M.A., Rice Institute, 1953; Ph.D., 1955. 

MARTIN, Monroe H., Professor of Mathematics and Director of Institute for Fluid 
Dynamics and Applied Mathematics. 
B.S., Lebanon Valley College, 1928; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University, 1932. 

279 



Faculty 

MASON, Edward A., Professor of Molecular Physics 

B.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute, 1947; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Tech- 
nology, 1950. 

MASSEY, Benjamin H., Professor of Physical Education 

A.B., Erskine College, 1938; M.S., University of Illinois, 1947; Ph.D., 1950. 

MAVIS, Frederic Theodore, Professor of Civil Engineering and Dean of College of 

Engineering. 

B.S., University of Illinois, 1922; M.S., 1926; C.E., 1932; Ph.D., 1935. 

MAYOR, John R„ Professor of Mathematics and Education 

B.S., Knox College, 1928; M.A., University of Illinois, 1929; Ph.D., University 

of Wisconsin, 1933. 
MCCLURE, L. Morris, Professor and Assistant Dean of Education 

A.B., Western Michigan University, 1940; M.A., University of Michigan, 1946; 

Ed.D., Michigan State University, 1953. 

MC GINNIES, Elliott M., Professor of Psychology 

B.A., University of Buffalo, 1943; M.A., Brown University, 1944; Ph.D., Harvard 
University, 1948. 

MC MAN AW AY, James G., Professor of English (P.T.) 

B.A., University of Virginia, 1919; M.A., 1920; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University, 
1931. 

MERRILL, Horace S., Professor of History 

B.E., Wisconsin State Teachers' College, River Falls, 1932; Ph.M., University of 
Wisconsin, 1933; Ph.D., 1942. 

MERSHON, Madelaine, Professor of Education 

B.S., Drake University, 1940; M.A., University of Chicago, 1943; Ph.D., 1950. 

MILLER, Francis M., Professor of Chemistry and Head of Department of Pharma- 
ceutical Chemistry 

B.S., Western Kentucky State College, 1946; Ph.D., Northwestern University, 1949. 

MITCHELL, T. Faye, Professor and Head of the Department of Textiles and 

Clothing 

B.S., Missouri State Teachers College, Springfield, 1930; M.A., Columbia Univer- 
sity, 1939. 

MORGAN, Delbert T., Jr., Professor of Botany 

B.S., Kent State University, 1940; M.A., Columbia University, 1942; Ph.D., 1948. 

MORGAN, Hugh G., Professor of Education and Assistant Director of Institute of 
Child Study 

B.A., Furman University, 1940; M.A., University of Chicago, 1943; Ph.D., 1946. 

MULLINS, L. J., Professor and Head, Department of Biophysics 
B.S., University of California, 1937; Ph.D., 1940. 

MURPHY, Charles D., Professor and Head of Department of English 
B.A., University of Wisconsin, 1929; M.A., Harvard University, 1930; Ph.D., 
Cornell University, 1940. 

280 



Faculty 

MYERS, Ralph D., Professor of Physics 

A.B., Cornell University, 1934; A.M., 1935; Ph.D., 1937. 

NAUTA, Walle J. H., Professor of Anatomy (P.T.) 

M.S., University of Leiden (Holland), 1942; Ph.D., University of Utrecht (Hol- 
land), 1945. 

NELSON, Boyd L., Professor of Business Organization 

B.A., University of Wisconsin, 1947; M.A., 1948; Ph.D., 1952. 

NEWELL, Clarence A., Professor of Education 

A.B., Hastings College, 1935; A.M., Columbia University, 1939; Ph.D., 1943. 

O'CONNELL, Donald W., Professor of Economics and Dean of the College of Bus- 
iness and Public Administration 

B.A., Columbia University, 1937; M.A., 1938; Ph.D., 1953. 

OPIK, Ernst J., Professor of Astrophysics 

Cand. Astro., Moscow Imperial University, 1916; D. Phil. Nat., University of 
Estonia, 1923. 

OTTS, Louis E., Jr., Professor of Civil Engineering 

B.A., East Texas State Teachers College, 1933; B.S., Agricultural and Mechanical 
College of Texas, 1946; M.S., 1946. 

PATRICK, Arthur S., Professor of Business Education 

B.S., Wisconsin State College, 1931; M.A., University of Iowa, 1940; Ph.D., Amer- 
ican University, 1956. 

PELCZAR, Michael J., Jr., Professor of Microbiology 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1936; M.S., 1938; Ph.D., University of Iowa, 1941. 

PERKINS, Hugh V., Professor of Education 

A.B., & Sch. Mus.B., Oberlin College, 1941; A.M., University of Chicago, 1946; 
Ph.D., 1949; Ed.D., New York University, 1956. 

PLISCHKE, Elmer, Professor and Head of Department of Government and Politics 
Ph.B., Marquette University, 1937; M.A., American University, 1938; Ph.D., 
Clark University, 1943; Certificate, Columbia University, Naval School of Military 
Government, 1944. 

POFFENBERGER, Paul R., Professor of Agricultural Economics and Assistant 
Dean of Instruction, College of Agriculture 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1935; M.S., 1937; Ph.D., American University, 1953. 

PRAHL, Augustus J., Professor of Foreign Languages and Associate Dean of the 
Graduate School 

M.A., Washington University, 1928; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University, 1933. 

PRANGE, Gordon W., Professor of History 

A.B., University of Iowa, 1932; A.M., 1934; Ph.D., 1937. 

PRATT, Ernest F., Professor of Chemistry 

A.B., University of Redlands, 1937; M.S., Oregon State College, 1939; M.A., 
University of Michigan, 1941; Ph.D., 1942. 

2S1 



Faculty 

PRESCOTT, Daniel A., Professor of Education and Director of Institute for Child 
Study 

B.S., Tufts College, 1920; Ed.M., Harvard College, 1922; Ed.D., 1923. 

PROVENZA, D. Vincent, Professor of Histology and Embryology 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1939; M.S., 1941; Ph.D., 1952. 

PURDUM, W. Arthur, Professor of Hospital Pharmacy 

Ph.G., University of Maryland, 1930; B.S., 1932; M.S., 1934; Ph.D., 1941. 

QUYNN, William R., Professor of Foreign Languages 

B.A., University of Virginia, 1922; M.A., 1923; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University, 
1934; Officer D' Academic (1951). 

RADO, George T., Professor of Physics (P.T.) 

S.B., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1939; S.M., 1941; Ph.D., 1943. 

RAND, Marguerite C, Professor of Foreign Languages 

B.A., Pomona College, 1919; M.A., Stanford University, 1921; Ph.D., University 
of Chicago, 1951. 

REED, Henry R., Professor of Electrical Engineering, Registered Professional En- 
gineer 

B.S., University of Minnesota, 1925; M.S., 1927; E.E., South Dakota State College, 

1930; Ph.D., University of Iowa, 1941. 

REEVE, Wilkins, Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., Drexel Institute of Technology, 1936; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, 1940. 

RHEINBOLDT, Werner C, Research Professor of Computer Science and Director of 
the Computer Science Center 

Dipl. Math., Heidelberg, 1952; Dr. rer. nat., Freiburg, 1955. 

RISINGER, Robert G., Professor of Education 

B.S., Ball State Teachers College. 1940; M.A., University of Chicago, 1947; Ed.D., 
University of Colorado, 1955. 

ROLLINSON, Carl L., Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., University of Michigan, 1933; Ph.D., University of Illinois, 1939. 

ROTHGEB, Russell G., Professor of Agronomy 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1924; M.S., Iowa State College, 1925; Ph.D., Univer- 
sity of Maryland, 1928. 

SALLEY, John J., Professor of Oral Pathology and Dean of the School of Dentistry 
D.D.S., Medical College of Virginia, 1947; Ph.D., University of Rochester School 
of Medicine and Dentistry, 1954. 

SCHAMP, Homer W., Jr., Professor of Molecular Physics 

A.B., Miami University, 1944; M.Sc, University of Michigan. 1947; Ph.D., 1951. 

SCHINDLER, Alvin W., Professor of Education 

B.A., Iowa State Teachers' College, 1927; M.A., Iowa State University, 1929; 
Ph.D., 1934. 

282 



Faculty 

SCHOENBORN, Henry W., Professor of Zoology 

A.B., DePauw University, 1933; Ph.D., New York University, 1939. 

SCHROEDER, Wilburn C, Professor of Chemical Engineering 
B.S., University of Michigan, 1930; M.S.E., 1931; Ph.D., 1933. 

SCHULTZE, Charles Louis, Professor of Economics 

B.A., Georgetown University, 1948; M.A., 1950; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 
1960. 

SCOTT, Leland E., Professor of Horticultural Physiology 

B.S., University of Kentucky, 1927; M.S., Michigan State College, 1929; Ph.D., 
University of Maryland, 1943. 

SHAFFNER, Clyne S., Professor and Head of Department of Poultry Science 
B.S., Michigan State University, 1938; M.S., 1940; Ph.D., Purdue University, 1947. 

SHANKS, James B., Professor of Floriculture 

B.Sc, Ohio State University, 1939; M.Sc, 1946; Ph.D., 1949. 

SHAY, Donald E., Professor and Head of Department of Bacteriology and Immu- 
nology 

B.S., Lebanon Valley College, 1937; M.S., University of Maryland, 1938; Ph.D., 

1943. 

SHERWOOD, A. Wiley, Professor of Aerodynamics and Head of Department of 
Aeronautical Engineering 

M.S., Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, 1935; M.S., University of Maryland, 1943. 

SHREEVE, Charles A., Jr., Professor and Head of Department of Mechanical En- 
gineering 

B.E., Johns Hopkins University, 1935; M.S., University of Maryland, 1943. 

SINGER, S. P., Professor of Physics 

B.E.E., Ohio State University, 1943; A.M., Princeton University, 1944; Ph.D., 1948. 

SLAMA, Frank J., Professor of Pharmacognosy 

Ph.G., University of Maryland, 1924, Ph.C, 1925; B.S., 1928; M.S., 1930; Ph.D., 
1935. 

SLAWSKY, Zaka I., Professor of Physics (P.T.) 

B.S., Renssalaer Polytechnic Institute, 1933; M.S., California Institute of Tech- 
nology, 1935; Ph.D., University of Michigan, 1938. 

SMITH, Dietrich C, Professor of Physiology and Associate Dean of the School of 
Medicine 

A.B., University of Minnesota, 1923; A.M., 1924; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1928. 

SMITH, Harold D., Professor of Agricultural Economics and Marketing 

B.A., Bridgewater College, 1943; M.S., University of Maryland, 1947; Ph.D., 
American University, 1952. 

SMITH, Leon P., Professor of Foreign Languages and Dean Emeritus of the College 
of Arts and Sciences 

B.A., Emory University, 1919; M.A., University of Chicago, 1928; Ph.D., 1930: 

Diplome de ITnstitute de Touraine, 1932. 

283 



Faculty 

SNOW, George A., Professor of Physics 
B.S., College of the City of New York, 1945; M.A., Princeton University, 1947; 
Ph.D., 1949. 

STARK, Francis C, Jr., Professor of Vegetable Crops 

B.S., Oklahoma Agriculture and Mechanical College, 1940; M.S., University of 
Maryland, 1941; Ph.D., 1948. 

STEINMEYER, Reuben G., Professor of Government and Politics 
A.B., American University, 1929; Ph.D., 1935. 

STELLMACHER, Karl L., Professor of Mathematics 
D.Phil., University of Gottingen, 1936. 

STONE, William S., Dean of the School of Medicine and Director of Medical Edu- 
cation and Research 

B.S., University of Idaho, 1924; M.S., 1925; M.D., University of Louisville, 1929; 

Ph.D., (hon.) 1946. 

STRAUSBAUGH, Warren L., Professor and Head of Department of Speech 
B.S., Wooster College, 1932; M.A., State University of Iowa, 1935. 

STREET, Orman E., Professor of Agronomy 

B.S., South Dakota State College, 1924; M.S., Michigan State College, 1927; Ph.D., 
1933. 

SVIRBELY, William J., Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., Carnegie Institute of Technology, 1931; M.S., 1932; D.Sci., 1935. 

SWEENEY, Charles T., Professor of Accounting 

B.S., Cornell University, 1921; M.B.A., University of Michigan, 1928; C.P.A., 
Iowa, 1934; C.P.A., Ohio, 1936. 

SYLVESTER, Harold Frederic, Professor of Business Organization 
Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University, 1938. 

TAFF, Charles A., Professor of Transportation and Head of Business Organization 
B.S., University of Iowa, 1937; M.A., 1941; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 1952. 

THOMPSON, Arthur H., Professor of Pomology 

B.S., University of Minnesota, 1941; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 1945. 

THOMPSON, Fred R., Professor of Education 

B.A., University of Texas, 1929; M.A., 1935; Ed.D., University of Maryland, 1952. 

TOLL, John, Professor and Head of Department of Physics and Astronomy 
B.S., Yale University, 1944; M.A., Princeton University, 1948; Ph.D., 1952. 

TOMPKINS, Howard E., Professor and Head of Electrical Engineering 

B.A., Swarthmore, 1942; M.S., University of Pennsylvania, 1947; Ph.D., 1957. 

TRAUB, Robert, Professor of Microbiology 

B.S., College of the City of New York, 1938; M.S., Cornell University, 1939; 
Ph.D., University of Illinois, 1947. 

284 



Faculty 

TRUITT, Edward B., Jr., Professor of Pharmacology 

B.S., Medical College of Virginia, 1943; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 1950. 

ULMER, Melville Jack, Professor of Economics 

B.S., New York University, 1937; M.A., 1938; Ph.D., Columbia University, 1948. 

ULRICH, Homer, Professor and Head of the Department of Music 
A.M., University of Chicago, 1939. 

VANDEN BOSCHE, E. G., Professor of Biochemistry 

A.B., Lebanon Valley College, 1922; M.S., University of Maryland, 1924; Ph.D., 
1927. 

VANDERSLICE, Joseph T., Professor of Molecular Physics 

B.S., Boston College, 1949; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1953. 

VAN ROYEN, William, Professor and Head of Department of Geography 
M.A., Rijksuniversiteit te Utrech, 1925; Ph.D., Clark University, 1928. 

VAN ZWOLL, James A., Professor of Education 

A.B., Calvin College, 1933; M.A., University of Michigan, 1937; Ph.D., 1942. 

VEITCH, Fletcher P., Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1931; M.S., 1934; Ph.D., 1936. 

WAETJEN, Walter B., Professor of Education 

B.S., Pennsylvania State Teachers College, Millersville, 1942; M.S., University of 
Pennsylvania, 1947; Ed.D., University of Maryland, 1951. 

WAGNER, T. C. Gordon, Professor of Electrical Engineering 

B.S., Harvard University, 1937; M.A., University of Maryland, 1940; Ph.D., 1943. 

WALDROP, Robert S., Professor of Psychology 

B.A., University of Oklahoma, 1934; Ph.D., University of Michigan, 1948. 

WALKER, William P., Professor of Agricultural Economics 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1921; M.S., 1925. 

WESKE, John R., Professor of Aeronautical Engineering and in the Institute of 
Fluid Dynamics and Applied Mathematics 

Deipl., Ing., Technical University, Germany, 1923; M.A., Harvard University, 

1932; Sc.D., 1934. 

WESTERHOUT, Gart, Professor of Astronomy 
Doct., University of Leiden, 1954; Ph.D., 1958. 

WHITE, Charles E., Professor and Head, Chemistry Department 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1923; M.S., 1924; Ph.D.. 1926. 

WHITE, John I., Professor and Head of Physiology 

B.A., University of Illinois, 1939; Ph.D., Rutgers University, 1950. 

WIGGIN, Gladys A., Professor of Education 

B.S., University of Minnesota, 1929; M.A., 1939; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 
1947. 

285 



Faculty 

WISSEMAN, Charles L., Jr., Professor and Head of Department of Microbiology 
B.A., Southern Methodist University, 1941; M.S., Kansas State College, 1943; 
M.D., Southwestern Medical College, 1946. 

WOODS, G. Forrest, Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., Northwestern University, 1935; M.S., Harvard University, 1937; Ph.D., 1940. 

WRIGHT, Howard W., Professor of Accounting 

B.S.C., Temple University, 1937; M.A., University of Iowa, 1940; Ph.D., 1947. 

ZEEVELD, W. Gordon, Professor of English 

A.B., University of Rochester, 1924; M.A., Johns Hopkins University, 1929; Ph.D., 
1936. 

Research Professors 

BAILEY, William J., Research Professor of Chemistry 

B. Chem., University of Minnesota, 1943; Ph.D., University of Illinois, 1946. 

BUERGERS, Johannes Martanus, Research Professor in Institute for Fluid Dynamics 

and Applied Mathematics 

Doctor of Mathematics and Physics, University of Leiden, 1918; Doctor Honoris 
Causa, Universite Libre de Bruxelles, 1948; Doctor Honoris Causa, Universite de 
Poitiers, 1950; Doctor of Science in Technology, The Technion, 1955. 

BURKHARDT, George J., Research Professor in Agricultural Engineering 
B.S.A., University of Wisconsin, 1933; B.S.M.E., 1934; M.S.A.E., 1935. 

DIAZ, Joaquin Basilio, Research Professor of Mathematics in the Institute for Fluid 
Dynamics and Applied Mathematics. 

B.A., University of Texas, 1940; Ph.D., Brown University, 1945. 

PAI, Shih-I, Research Professor in Institute for Fluid Dynamics and Applied Mathe- 
matics 

B.Sc, National Central University, China, 1935; M.S., Massachusetts Institute of 
Technology, 1938; Ph.D., California Institute of Technology, 1940. 

PAYNE, Lawrence E., Research Professor in Institute for Fluid Dynamics and 
Applied Mathematics 

B.S., Iowa State College, 1946; M.S., 1948; Ph.D., 1950. 

ROTERUS, Victor, Consulting Professor of Geography (P.T.) 
Ph.B., University of Chicago, 1930; M.S., 1931. 

SHORB, Mary S., Research Professor of Poultry Science 
B.S., The College of Idaho, 1928; Sc.D., Johns Hopkins University, 1933. 

WEINSTEIN, Alexander, Research Professor in Institute for Fluid Dynamics and 
Applied Mathematics 

Ph.D., University of Zurich, 1921; D.Sc, Math., University of Paris, 1937. 

286 



Faculty 

Associate Professors 

ADELMAN, William J., Jr., Associate Professor of Physiology 

B.S., Fordham University, 1950; M.S., University of Vermont, 1952; Ph.D., Uni- 
versity of Rochester, 1955. 

AHNERT, Frank Oswald, Associate Professor of Geography 
Ph.D., University of Heidelberg, 1953. 

ALLEN, Benjamin F., Associate Professor of Pharmacy 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1937; Ph.D., 1949. 

ALTER, Jean V., Associate Professor of Foreign Languages 
Lie. University of Brussels, 1949; Doc. de I'Universite, University of Paris, 1951; 
Ph.D., University of Chicago, 1956. 

ANDERSON. Frank Gibbs, Associate Professor of Sociology 

A.B., Cornell University, 1941; Ph.D., University of New Mexico, 1951. 

ANDERSON, Nancy S., Associate Professor of Psychology 

B.A., University of Colorado, 1952; M.S., Ohio State University, 1953; Ph.D., 
1956. 

ANDERSON, Thornton H., Associate Professor of Government and Politics 

A.B., University of Kentucky. 1937; M.A., 1938; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin. 
1948. 

ASHMEN, Roy, Associate Professor of Business Organization 

B.S., Drexel Institute, 1935; M.S., Columbia University, 1936; Ph.D., Northwestern 
University, 1950. 

AUSLANDER, Joseph, Associate Professor of Mathematics 

S.B., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1952; M.S., University of Pennsylva- 
nia, 1953; Ph.D., 1957. 

AXLEY, John H., Associate Professor of Agronomy 
B.A., University of Wisconsin, 1937; Ph.D., 1945. 

BARBER, Edward S., Associate Professor of Civil Engineering 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1935; C.E., 1952. 

BARRACLOUGH, Charles A., Associate Professor of Physiology 

B.A., St. Joseph's College, 1947; M.S., Rutgers University, 1952; Ph.D., 1953, 

BARTLETT, Claude Jackson, Associate Professor of Psychology 

B.S., Denison University, 1954; M.A., Ohio State University, 1956; Ph.D., 1958. 

BEALL, Otho T., Jr., Associate Professor of English 

A.B., Williams College, 1930; M.A., University of Minnesota, 1933; Ph.D., Uni- 
versity of Pennsylvania, 1952. 

BESSMAN, Samuel P., Associate Professor of Pediatrics and Biochemistry 
M.D., Washington University Medical School, 1944. 

BINGHAM, Alfred Jepson, Associate Professor of Foreign Languages 
B.A., Yale University, 1933; Ph.D., Columbia University, 1939. 

287 



Faculty 

BOWIE, Blanche Lucille, Associate Professor of Education 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1942; M.A., Columbia University, 1946; Ed.D., 
University of Maryland, 1957. 

BRANDT, Richard M., Associate Professor of Education 

B.M.E., University of Virginia, 1943; M.A., University of Michigan, 1949; Ed.D., 
University of Maryland, 1954. 

BRAUCHER, Pela F., Associate Professor of Foods and Nutrition 

B.A., Goucher College, 1927; M.S., Pennsylvania State University, 1929. 

BROWN, Helen I., Associate Professor of Home Economics 
B.S., University of Vermont, 1938; M.A., Columbia University, 1948; Ph.D., 
Michigan State University, 1960. 

BROWN, Joshua R. C, Associate Professor of Zoology 
A.B., Duke University, 1948; M.A., 1949; Ph.D., 1953. 

BROWN, Russell G., Associate Professor of Botany 

B.S., AGR., West Virginia University, 1929; M.S., 1930; Ph.D., University of 
Maryland, 1934. 

BURGISON, Raymond M., Associate Professor of Pharmacology 

B.S., Loyola College, 1945; M.S., University of Maryland, 1948; Ph.D., 1950. 

CHAVES, Antonio F., Associate Professor of Geography 

Doctor, Law, University of Havana, 1941; Doctor of Filosofia & Letras, 1946; 
M.A., Northwestern University, 1948. 

CLINE, Marvin C, Associate Professor of Psychology 

B.A., Dartmouth College, 1948; M.A., Cornell University, 1950; Ph.D., 1954. 

COLEMAN, Paul David, Associate Professor of Physiology 

A.B., Tufts University, 1948; Ph.D., University of Rochester, 1953. 

COMPTON, Norma, Associate Professor of Textiles and Clothing 

A.B., George Washington University, 1950; M.S., University of Maryland, 1957; 
Ph.D., 1962. 

CONKIN, Paul Keith, Associate Professor of History 
B.A., Milligan College, 1951; M.A., Vanderbilt University, 1953; Ph.D., 1957. 

CORREL, Ellen, Associate Professor of Mathematics 

B.S., Douglass College, 1951; M.S., Purdue University, 1953; Ph.D., 1958. 

COSTELLO, Leslie C, Associate Professor of Anatomy and Physiology 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1952; M.S., 1954; Ph.D., 1957. 

COURNYN, John B., Associate Professor of Civil Engineering 
B.S., University of Alabama, 1946; M.S., 1948. 

CREEK, Richard D., Associate Professor of Poultry Nutrition 
B.S.A., Purdue University, 1951; M.S., 1954; Ph.D., 1955. 

288 



Faculty 

CRENSHAW, John Walden, Jr., Associate Professor of Zoology 

B.A., Emory University, 1948; M.S., University of Georgia, 1951; Ph.D., Univer- 
sity of Florida, 1955. 

CUSSLER, Margaret T., Associate Professor of Sociology 

M.A., New York State College of Teachers, 1932; M.A. Radcliffe College, 1941; 
Ph.D., 1943. 

DASTON, Paul George, Associate Professor of Psychology 

A.B., Northeastern University, 1948; M.A., Michigan State University, 1950; 
Ph.D., 1952. 

DAWSON, Townes L., Associate Professor of Business Law 

B.B.A., University of Texas, 1943; B.S., U. S. Merchant Marine Academy, 1946; 
M.B.A., University of Texas, 1947; Ph.D., 1950; LL.B., 1954; Member Texas Bar. 

DAY, Thomas B., Associate Professor of Physics 

B.S., University of Notre Dame, 1952; Ph.D., Cornell University, 1957. 

DECKER, A. Morris, Jr., Associate Professor of Agronomy 

B.S., Colorado Agricultural and Mechanical College, 1949; M.S., Utah State Col- 
lege, 1951; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 1953. 

EHRLICH, Gertrude, Associate Professor of Mathematics 

B.S., Georgia State College of Women, 1943; M.A., University of North Carolina, 
1945; Ph.D., University of Tennessee, 1953. 

EMERY, Arthur James, Jr., Associate Professor of Biological Chemistry 
B.S., Bucknell University, 1946; Ph.D., University of Rochester, 1954. 

EYLAR, Ollie R., Jr., Associate Professor of Microbiology 
B.A., University of Minnesota, 1952; M.S., 1955; Ph.D., 1959. 

EYLER, Addison Bernard, Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1947; M.S., 1950. 

EYLER, Marvin Howard, Associate Professor of Physical Education 

A.B., Houghton College, 1942; M.S., University of Illinois, 1948; Ph.D., 1956. 

FERGUSON, E. James, Associate Professor of History 

B.A., University of Washington, 1939; M.A., 1941; Ph.D., 1951. 

FLEMING, Rudd, Associate Professor of English 

B.S., University of Chicago, 1930; Ph.D., Cornell University, 1934. 

FOSTER, Phillips W., Associate Professor of Agricultural Economics 

B.S., Cornell University, 1953; M.S., University of Illinois, 1956; Ph.D., 1958. 

FREIMUTH, Henry C, Associate Professor of Legal Medicine 

B.S., College of the City of New York, 1932; M.S., New York University, 1933; 
Ph.D., 1938. 

GARDNER, Alvin F., Associate Professor of Pathology 

A.A., University of Florida, 1940; D.D.S., Emory University, 1943; M.S., Univer- 
sity of Illinois. 1957; Ph.D., Georgetown University, 1959. 

289 



Faculty 

GLOVER, Rolfe Eldridge. Associate Professor of Physics 
A.B., Bowdoin, 1948; B.S., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1948; Ph.D., 
University of Gottingen, 1953. 

GOLLUB, Lewis R., Associate Professor of Psychology 

A.B., University of Pennsylvania, 1955; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1958. 

GOMEZPLATA, Albert, Associate Professor of Chemical Engineering 

B.Ch.E., Brooklyn Polytechnic Institute, 1952; M.Ch.E., Rensselaer Polytechnic 
Institute, 1954; Ph.D., 1958. 

GRAMBS, Jean D., Associate Professor of Education 

B.A., Reed College, 1940; M.A., Stanford University, 1941; Ed.D., 1948. 

GRAMLEY, Lyle E., Associate Professor of Economics 

B.A., Beloit College, 1951; M.A., Indiana University, 1952; Ph.D., 1956. 

GREENBERG, Oscar Wallace, Associate Professor of Physics 

B.S., Rutgers University, 1952; A.M., Princeton University, 1954; Ph.D., 1956. 

GROLLMAN, Sidney, Associate Professor of Zoology 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1947; M.S., 1949; Ph.D., 1952. 

HALEY, A. James, Associate Professor of Zoology 

B.S., University of New Hampshire, 1949; M.S., 1950; Sc.D., Johns Hopkins Uni- 
versity, 1955. 

HATHORN, Guy B., Associate Professor of Government and Politics 

A.B., University of Mississippi, 1940; M.A., 1942; Ph.D., Duke University, 1950. 

HAYLECK, Charles Raymond, Jr., Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering. 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1943; M.S., 1949. 

HELBACKA, Norman V., Associate Professor of Poultry Products Technology 
B.A., University of Minnesota, 1952; M.S., 1954; Ph.D., 1956. 

HEMKEN, Roger W., Associate Professor of Dairy Science 

B.S., University of Illinois, 1950; M.S., 1954; Ph.D., Cornell University, 1957. 

HENDERSON, Hubert, Associate Professor of Music 
A.B., University of Norjh Carolina, 1941; M.A., 1950. 
I 
HERING, Christoph, Associate Professor of Foreign Languages 

Ph.D., University of Bonn, 1950. 

HIGHTON, Richard T., Associate Professor of Zoology 

B.A., New York University, 1950; M.S., University of Florida, 1953; Ph.D., 1956. 

HIRZEL, Robert K., Associate Professor of Sociology 

B.A., Pennsylvania State University, 1956; M.A., 1950; Ph.D., Louisiana State 
University, 1954. 

HOLMGREN, Harry D., Associate Professor of Physics 

B. of Phys., University of Minnesota, 1949; M.A., 1950; Ph.D., 1954. 

290 



Faculty 

HOVEY, Richard B., Associate Professor of English 
A.B., University of Cincinnati, 1942; M.A., Harvard University, 1943; Ph.D., 1950. 

HUSMAN, Burris F., Associate Professor of Physical Education 

B.S., University of Illinois, 1941; M.S., 1948; Ed.D., University of Maryland, 
1954. 

ISHEE, Sidney, Associate Professor of Agricultural Economics 

B.S., Mississippi State College, 1950; M.S., Pennsylvania State College, 1952; 
Ph.D., 1957. 

JAQUITH, Richard H., Associate Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., University of Massachusetts, 1940; M.S., 1942; Ph.D., Michigan State Uni- 
versity, 1955. 

JASHEMSKI, Wilhelmina, Associate Professor of History 

A.B., York College, 1931; A.M., University of Nebraska, 1933; Ph.D., University 
of Chicago, 1942. 

JERMAN, Bernard R., Associate Professor of English 

B.A., Ohio State University, 1946; M.A., 1948; Ph.D., 1951. 

JONES, Jack Colvard, Associate Professor of Entomology 

B.S., Alabama Polytechnic Institute, 1942; M.S., 1947; Ph.D., Iowa State Uni- 
versity, 1950. .' 

KANTZES, James G., Associate Professor of Botany 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1951; M.S., 1954; Ph.D., 1957. 

KARP, Carol R., Associate Professor of Mathematics 

B.A., Manchester College, 1948; M.A., Michigan State University, 1950; Ph.D., 
University of Southern California, 1959. 

KELSEY, Roger B., Associate Professor of Education 

B.A., St. Olaf College, 1934; M.A., University of Minnesota, 1940; Ed.D., George 
Peabody College for Teachers, 1954. 

KING, Raymond L., Associate Professor of Dairy Science 
A.B., University of California, 1955; Ph.D., 1958. 

KNIGHT, Robert E. L., Associate Professor of Economics 

A.B., Harvard University. 1948; Ph.D., University of California, 1958. 

LAFFER, Norman C, Associate Professor of Microbiology 

B.S., Allegheny College, 1929; M.S., University of Maine, 1932; Ph.D., University 
of Illinois, 1937. 

LASTER, Howard, Associate Professor of Physics 

A.B., Harvard College, 1951; Ph.D., Cornell University, 1957. 

LEFFEL, Emory C, Associate Professor of Animal Science 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1943; M.S., 1947; Ph.D., 1953. 

LEHNER, Guydo R., Associate Professor of Mathematics 

B.S., Loyola University, 1951; M.S., University of Wisconsin, 1953; Ph.D., 1958. 

29J 



Faculty 

LEVEQUE, Theodore F., Associate Professor of Anatomy 

B.A., University of Denver, 1949; M.S., 1950; Ph.D., University of Colorado, 
1954. 

LINDER, Harris Joseph, Associate Professor of Zoology 

B.S., Long Island University, 1951; M.S., Cornell University, 1955; Ph.D., 1958. 

l.UTWACK, Leonard, Associate Professor of English 
B.A., Wesleyan University, 1939; M.A., 1940; Ph.D., Ohio State University, 1950. 

MARCHELLO, Joseph M., Associate Professor, Chemical Engineering 

B.S., University of Illinois, 1955; Ph.D., Carnegie Institute of Technology, 1959, 

MARIL, Herman, Associate Professor of Art 
Maryland Institute of Fine Art, 1928. 

MARX, George L., Associate Professor of Education 

B.A., Yankton College, 1953; M.A., State University of Iowa, 1958; Ph.D., 1959. 

MATTICK, Joseph F., Associate Professor of Dairy Science 
B.S., Pennsylvania State University, 1942; Ph.D., 1950. 

McGINNIS, Mannon, Associate Professor of Social Work 

B.A., Westhampton College, University of Richmond, 1927; Diploma, Pennsylvania 
School of Social Work, 1929. 

McNELLY, Theodore, Associate Professor of Government and Politics 

B.Sc, University of Wisconsin, 1941; M.A., 1942; Ph.D., Columbia University, 
1952. 

MERLIS, Jerome K., Associate Professor of Physiology 

B.S., University of Louisville, 1933; M.D., 1937; M.S., 1938. 

MILLER, James R., Associate Professor and Head of the Department of Agronomy 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1951; M.S., 1953; Ph.D., 1956. 

MISH, Charles C, Associate Professor of English 

B.A., University of Pennsylvania, 1936; M.A., 1946; Ph.D., 1951. 

MURRAY, Ray A., Associate Professor of Agricultural Economics 

B.Sc, University of Nebraska, 1934; M.S., Cornell University, 1938; Ph.D., 1949. 

MYERS, Robert Mason, Associate Professor of English 

B.A., Vanderbilt University, 1941; M.A., Columbia University, 1942; M.A., Har- 
vard University, 1943; Ph.D., Columbia University, 1948. 

NEMES, Graciela P., Associate Professor of Foreign Languages 

B.S., Trinity College, 1942; M.A., University of Maryland, 1949; Ph.D., 1952. 

O'NEILL, John J., Asso'"'-^te Professor of Pharmacology 

B.S., St. Francis College, 1942; M.S., University of Maryland, 1953; Ph.D., 1955. 

PARSONS, Arthur C, Associate Professor of Foreign Languages 
A.B., University of Maryland, 1926; M.A., 1928. 

292 



Faculty 

PATERSON, Robert A., Associate Professor of Botany. 

B.A., University of Nevada, 1949; M.A., Stanford University, 1951; Ph.D., Uni- 
versity of Michigan, 1957. 

PASCH, Alan, Associate Professor of Philosophy 

B.A., University of Michigan, 1949; M.A., New School for Social Research, 1952; 
Ph.D., Princeton University, 1955. 

PEARL, Martin Herbert, Associate Professor of Mathematics 

B.A., Brooklyn College, 1950; M.A., University of Michigan, 1951; Ph.D., Uni- 
versity of Wisconsin, 1955. 

PECK, Bernard, Associate Professor of Education 
A.B., Indiana University, 1939; M.A., Columbia University, 1942; Ed.D., Uni- 
versity of Maryland, 1957. 

PIAVIS, George W., Associate Professor of Anatomy 
A.B., Western Maryland College, 1948; M.Ed., 1952; Ph.D., Duke University, 
1958. 

PICKARD, Hugh B., Associate Professor of Chemistry 

A.B., Haverford College, 1933; Ph.D., Northwestern University, 1938. 

PIPER, Harry W., Associate Professor of Civil Engineering 
B. Arch. E., Catholic University, 1940; M.C.E., 1961. 

POLLACK, Burton R., Associate Professor of Physiology 
D.D.S., University of Maryland, 1946. 

PRICE, Henry W., Jr., Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1943; M.S., 1950. 

PUMROY, Donald K., Associate Professor of Psychology 

B.A., University of Iowa, 1949; M.S., University of Wisconsin, 1951; Ph.D., Uni- 
versity of Washington, 1954. 

PURDY, William C, Associate Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., Amherst College, 1951; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1955. 

RAMM, Gordon M., Associate Professor of Zoology 

B.A., University of Buffalo, 1949; M.A., 1950; Ph.D., New York University, 1954. 

RAPPLEYE, Robert D., Associate Professor of Botany 
B.A., Lehigh University, 1952; M.A., Princeton University, 1954; Ph.D., 1956. 

REINHART, Bruce, Associate Professor of Mathematics 

B.A., Lehigh University, 1952; M.A., Princeton University, 1954; Ph.D., 1956. 

REYNOLDS, Charles W., Associate Professor of Vegetable Crops 

A.B., University of Alabama, 1941; B.S., Alabama Polytechnic Institute, 1947; 
M.S., 1949; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 1954. 

RIVELLO, Robert M., Associate Professor of Aeronautical Engineering 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1943; M.S., 1948. 

293 



Faculty 



RIVLIN, Helen Anne, Associate Professor of History 

Unlv'eJiurits °' ^°^'"^^^' ''''' ^•^•' ""^'^'^'^ ^-"^^e, 1950; Ph.D.. Oxford 

ZTT':^r^:r'' ^' ^""'^^^ ^'^^^^^^^ °^ ^°-^" languages 
B.A., Smith College, 1930; A.M., Columbia University, 1931; Ph.D., 1940 

"" pln''''!p?'°''r' ^' ^''°'''^' '*^°''^^°'- °^ ^'^'^^"^^^ Engineering ' 
i^n.U., (Physics), University of Palmero 193?- Ph n /-ci *• , r^ . 
Polytechnic Institute of Turin, 1928 (Elecrtical Engineering), 

'^b'^S^'m F "n".' n"'' '"' ^"°"''' ^^°'"^°'- °^ ^^^^-'-1 Engineering 
B.S.M.E., Duke University, 1947; M.S., Stevens Institute of Technology 1950 

D^p" rtt^entTp^^^^^^^^ ^''^^'^'^ ^-^-- ^^ P'^i'osophy and Head of the 

Untr^irrpt ''°"^^^' ''''-' ^•^•' ^"--^y °^ "'-ois, 1942; Ph.D., Cornel, 

SHANGRAW, Ralph F., Associate Professor of Pharmacy 

B^S Massachuetts College of Pharmacy, 1952- MS 1954- Ph n it ■ • 
Michigan, 1958. ' ^ ' ^^^^' PhD., University of 

'"p^^r^I^'m^"' '"''"' '^- ''"'"''"^ ''-f--' of Sociology 

^t ref sS, ■■'.s. pro: ^^'-T. s^ci^Mr 

SHIPLEY, E. Roderick, Associate Professor of Physiology 

SIMONS David Elie. Associate Professor of E.eCrical Engineering 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1949; M.S., 1951. 

SISLER, Hugh D., Associate Professor Botany 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1949; M.S., 1951; Ph.D., 1953. 

SILVERMAN Joseph Associate Professor of Chemical Engineering 
B.A., Brooklyn College, 1944; A.M., Columbia University, ,948; Ph.D., 1951. 

SJODIN, Raymond A., Associate Professor of Biophysics 
^S., California Institute of Technology, 1951; Ph.D., University of California. 

SMITH^Andrew George, Associate Professor of Medical Microbiology 
Ph^. T9'?o'.''^"" ''^'^ ^"^^^^^^^^' ^^^«= ^S- University of Pennsylvania, 1947; 

'"^'^0?,°^' ^•' ^^^°^'^^^ P^°f«««°r of Agricultural Education 
B.J>., Oklahoma A & M College, 1950- MS iQss- r» c^ ^ 
1960. ^ ' ^•^•' '^^5' D.Ed., Cornell University, 

SPARKS, David S., Associate Professor of History 
A.B., Grinnell College. 1944; A.M., University of Chicago, 1945; Ph.D., 1951. 

294 



Faculty 

SPENCER, Mabel S.. Associate Professor of Home Economics Education 

B.S., University of West Virginia, 1925; M.S., 1946; Ed.D., American University, 
1959. 

SPIVEY, Clinton, Associate Professor of Business Organization 
B.S., University of Illinois, 1946; M.S., 1947; Ph.D., 1957. 

STEIN, Irma Leona, Associate Professor of Social Work 

A.B., Hunter College, 1941; M.A., New York School of Social Work, 1943. 

STEINBERG, Phillip H., Associate Professor of Physics 

B.S., University of Cincinnati, 1954; Ph.D., Northwestern University, 1960. 

STERN, Edward A., Associate Professor of Physics 

B.S., California Institute of Technology. 1951; Ph.D., 1955. 

STEVENS, George A., Associate Professor of Agricultural Economics 

B.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute, 1941; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 1957. 

STEWARD, Wolcott E., Associate Professor of Dairy Science 
B.S., Cornell University, 1953; M.S., 1956; Ph.D., 1957. 

STRICKLING, Edward, Associate Professor of Agronomy 
B.S., Ohio State University, 1937; Ph.D., 1949. 

STROMBERG, Roland N., Associate Professor of History 

A.B., University of Kansas City, 1939; M.A., American University, 1946; Ph.D., 
University of Maryland, 1952. 

STUNTZ, Calvin F., Associate Professor of Chemistry 
B.A., University of Buffalo, 1939; Ph.D., 1947. 

SUCHER, Joseph, Associate Professor of Physics 

B.S., Brooklyn College, 1952; Ph.D., Columbia University, 1958. 

SWOPE, Daniel Augustus, Associate Professor of Agricultural Economics. 

B.S., Pennsylvania State University, 1942; M.S., Cornell University, 1953; Ph.D., 
Pennsylvania State University, 1958. 

SYSKI, Ryszard, Associate Professor of Mathematics 

Dipl. Ing., P.U.C, London, 1950; D.I.C., Imperial College, 1951; B.Sc, Univer- 
sity of London, 1954; Ph.D., Chelsea College, 1961. 

TIERNEY, William Francis, Associate Professor of Industrial Education 

B.S., Teachers College of Connecticut, 1941; M.A., Ohio State University, 1949; 
Ed.E., University of Maryland, 1952. 

ULRY, Orval L., Associate Professor of Education 

B.Sc, Ohio State University, 1938; M.A., 1944; Ph.D., 1953. 

WAGGONER, Margaret Ann, Visiting Associate Professor of Physics 
B.A., State University of Iowa, 1946; M.S., 1948; Ph.D., 1950. 

WALDER, Leopold O., Associate Professor of Psychology 

A.B., Boston University, 1949; M.A., University of Hawaii, 1951; Ph.D., Stale 
University of Iowa, 1954; Diploma, American Board of Examiners, 1960. 

295 



Faculty 

WEAVER, Carl H., Associate Professor of Speech 
B.A., BluflFton College, 1936; M.A., Ohio State University, 1950; Ph.D., 1957. 

WEDDING, Presley A., Associate Professor of Civil Engineering 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1937; M.S., 1952. 

WILCOX, Frank Herbert, Jr, Associate Professor of Poultry Science 

B.S., University of Connecticut, 1951; M.S., Cornell University, 1953; Ph.D., 1955. 

WILEY, Robert C, Associate Professor of Horticulture 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1949; M.S., 1950; Ph.D., Oregon State College, 
1953. 

WILLIAMS, Walter P., Associate Professor of Dairy Science 
A.B., University of Missouri, 1951; M.S., 1952; Ph.D., 1955. 

WILSON, Leda Amick, Associate Professor of Home Economics 

B.S., Lander College, 1943; M.S., University of Tennessee, 1950; Ph.D., 1954. 

WINN, Howard E., Associate Professor of Zoology 

A.B., Bowdoin College, 1948; M.S., University of Michigan, 1950; Ph.D., 1955. 

WONNACOTT, Paul, Associate Professor of Economics 

B.A., University of Western Ontario. 1955; M.A., Princeton University, 1957; 
Ph.D., 1959. 

WYSONG, John Wright, Associate Professor of Agricultural Economics 

B.S., Cornell University, 1953; M.S., University of Illinois, 1954; Ph.D., Cornell 
University, 1957. 

YARCZOWER, Mathew, Associate Professor of Psychology 

B.B.A., City College of New York, 1953; M.A., University of Maryland, 1955; 
Ph.D., 1958. 

YODH, Gaurang B.. Associate Professor of Physics 

B.S., University of Bombay, 1948; M.S., University of Chicago, 1951; Ph.D., 1955, 

ZEDEK, Mishael, Associate Professor of Mathematics 

M.Sc, Hebrew University, 1952; Ph.D., Harvard University, 1956. 

ZENKER, Nicholas, Associate Professor of Pharmaceutical Chemistry 
M.A., University of California. 1953; Ph.D., 1958. 

ZIPOY, David M., Associate Professor of Physics 
B.S., University of Minnesota, 1954; Ph.D., 1957. 

Associate Research Professors 

CAUSEY, G. Donald, Associate Research Professor of Speech 
B.A., University of Maryland, 1950; M.A., 1951; Ph.D., 1954. 

GLASER, Edmund M., Associate Research Professor of Medical Physiology 

B.E.E., Cooper Union, 1944; M.S.E., The Johns Hopkins University, 1954; 
Dr. Eng., 1960. 

296 



Faculty 

TIDMAN, Derek Albert, Associate Research Professor in Institute of Fluid Dynamics 
B.Sc., London University, 1952; Ph.D., 1955. 

WEISS, George, Associate Research Professor, Institute of Fluid Dynamics 

A.B., Columbia University, 1951; M.A., University of Maryland, 1953; Ph.D., 
1958. 

WINN, Paul N., Jr., Associate Research Professor of Agricultural Engineering 
B.S.A.E., Virginia Polytechnic Institute, 1947; M.S.A.E., 1958. 

Assistant Professors 

ARMSTRONG, James C, Assistant Professor of Physics 

B.S., Duke University, 1953; Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh, 1960. 

ANDERSON, J. Paul, Assistant Professor of Education 

B.S., University of Minnesota, 1942; M.A., 1948; Ph.D., 1960. 

ATKINSON, Gordon, Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., Lehigh University, 1952; Ph.D., Iowa State College, 1956. 

BARRY, Sue-ning Chu, Assistant Professor of Histology and Embryology 
B.A., Barat College, 1955; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 1961. 

BHAGAT, Satindar M., Assistant Professor of Physics 

B.A., Jannu and Kashimir University of India, 1950; M.S., University of Delhi, 
1953; Ph.D., 1956. 

BOYD, Alfred C, Jr., Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., Canisius College, 1951; M.S., Purdue University, 1953; Ph.D., 1957. 

BROWN, Frederick A., Assistant Professor of Education 

B.S., Lock Haven State College, 1942; A.M.. Columbia University, 1947; D.Ed., 
Pennsylvania State University, 1960. 

BROWN, Samuel E., Assistant Professor of English 

A.B., Indiana University, 1934; M.A.. 1946; Ph.D., Yale University, 1955. 

BURNSTEIN, Rafe Aaron, Visiting Assistant Professor of Physics 

B.S., University of Chicago, 1952; M.S.. University of Washington, 1956; Ph.D., 
University of Michigan, 1960. 

BUTTRICK, Shirley Miller, Assistant Professor of Social Work 

B.A., Brooklyn College, 1945; M.A., University of Michigan, 1946; M.A., Uni- 
versity of Chicago, 1951. 

BYRD, Elbert M., Jr., Assistant Professor of Government and Politics 
B.S., The American University, 1953; M.A., 1954; Ph.D., 1959. 

CALLCOTT, George H., Assistant Professor of History 

A.B., University of South Carolina, 1950; M.A., Columbia University, 1951; 
Ph.D., University of North Carolina, 1956. 

297 



Faculty 

CHAIKLIN, Harris, Assistant Professor of Social Work 

fo?.' University of Connecticut, 1950; M.A., 1952; M.S., University of Wisconsin, 
1953; Ph.D., Yale University, 1961. 

CLARK, Neri A., Assistant Professor of Agronomy 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1954; Ph.D., 1959. 
COAXES, Charles H., Assistant Professor of Sociology 

f952- Pho'^ 195? '^"'^^'^ Academy, 1924; M.A., Louisiana State University, 

DIXON, Jack, Assistant Professor of Physics (P.T.) 

B^S.^ Western Reserve University, 1948; M.S., 1950; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 

DODGE, Norton T., Assistant Professor of Economics 

A.B., Cornell University. 1948; M.A., Harvard University, 1951; Ph.D., I960. 
EHEART, Mary S., Assistant Professor of Food and Nutrition 

A.B., Park College, 1933; A.M., University of Chicago, 1935. 
FALK, David W., Assistant Professor of Physics 

R^Eng. Phys., Cornell University, 1954; A.M., Harvard University. 1955; Ph.D.. 

FARQUHAR. David M., Assistant Professor of History 

f960'. ^"'''^'■''^^ °^ Washington, 1952; M.A., 1955; Ph.D., Harvard University, 

FICKEN, Robert W., Assistant Professor of Zoology 
B.S., Cornell University, 1953; Ph.D., I960. 

FRANZ, Jacob G., Assistant Professor of Sociology 

GALLOWAY, Raymond A., Assistant Professor of Botany 
B.S., University of Maryland, 1952; M.S., 1956; Ph.D.. 1958. 

GATELL. Frank Otto, Assistant Professor of History 

?9^'. ^''^ ^°^^'^^' ^^^ ^°'^' ^^^^'' ^•^•' "^'^^^d University, 1958; Ph.D.. 

SL™b'en!^"/' ^"'^'^"^ '"'"^°^ "^ ^^"^^*-" -'^ Assistant Director of the 

B^A George Washington University, 1947; M.A., University of Minnesota 1952- 
Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania, 1960. Minnesota, 1952, 

CLICK. Arnold J.. Assistant Professor of Physics 

B.A.. Brooklyn College. 1955; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 1959. 

GOERING, Jacob D., Assistant Professor of Education 
Mt;^!Tmt''' ''''-' '•^- "^^^^"^ ^-'"-y- 1^^^= Ph.D.. Unive.ity of 

298 



Faculty 

GORDON, Gilbert, Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., Bradley, 1955; Ph.D., Michigan State University, 1959. 

GREISMAN, Sheldon E., Assistant Professor of Physiology 
M.D., New York University, 1949. 

GRIM, Samuel O., Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., Franklin and Marshall, 1956; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 
1960. 

GRUBAR, Francis S., Assistant Professor of Art 

B.A., University of Maryland, 1948; M.A., 1949; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins Univer- 
sity, 1952. 

HARRIS, Wesley Lamar, Assistant Professor of Agricultural Engineering 

B.S.A.E., University of Georgia, 1953; M.S., 1958; Ph.D., Michigan State Uni- 
versity, 1960. 

HARRISON, Floyd P., Assistant Professor of Entomology 

B.S., Louisiana State University, 1951; M.S., 1953; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 
1955. 

HAVILAND, Elizabeth E., Assistant Professor of Entomology 

B.A., Wilmington College, 1923; M.A., Cornell University. 1926; M.S., University 
of Maryland, 1936; Ph.D., 1945. 

HEIM, Norman Michael, Assistant Professor of Music 

B.M.Ed., Evansville College, 1951; M.M., Eastman School of Music, University 
of Rochester, 1952; D.M.A., University of Rochester, 1962. 

HENERY-LOGAN, Kenneth R., Assistant Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., McGill University, 1954; Ph.D., 1946. 

JACOBS, Walter Dranell, Assistant Professor of Government and Politics 
B.S., Columbia University, 1955; M.A., 1956; Ph.D., 1961. 

KARPELES, Leo M., Assistant Professor of Physiology 

B.S., University of North Carolina, 1941; M.D., University of Washington, 1955. 

KEHOE, Brandt, Assistant Professor of Physics 

B.A. Cornell University, 1956; M.S., University of Wisconsin, 1959; Ph.D., 1962. 

KIM, Young Suh, Assistant Professor of Physics 

B.S.,Carnegie Institute of Technology, 1958; Ph.D., Princeton University. 1961. 

KLEPPNER, Adam, Assistant Professor of Mathematics 

B.S., Yale University, 1953; M.A., University of Michigan, 1954; Ph.D., Harvard 
University, 1960. 

KRESGE, Conrad Buehler, Assistant Professor of Agronomy 

B.S., Pennsylvania State University, 1953; M.S., 1956; Ph.D., 1959. 

KRUSBERG, Lorin R., Assistant Professor of Botany 

B.S., University of Delaware, 1954: M.S., North Carolina State College. 1956; 
Ph.D., 1959. 

299 



Faculty 

KYLE, David G., Assistant Professor of Education 

A.D., University of Denver, 1952; M.A., 1953; Ed.D., University of Maryland, 
1961. 

LAKSHMANAN, Sitarama, Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

B.Sc, Annamalai University, 1946; M.A., 1949; Ph.D., University of Maryland, 
1954. 

LAWSON, John Richard, Assistant Professor of Education 

B.A., Long Beach State College, 1958; M.A., 1958; Ed.D., University of Nebraska, 
1962. 

LOCKARD, J. David., Assistant Professor of Botany and Education 
B.S., Pennsylvania State University, 1951; M.Ed., 1955; Ph.D., 1962. 

LUETKEMEYER, Joseph P., Jr., Assistant Professor of Industrial Education 
B.S., Stout State College, 1953; M.S., 1954; Ed.D., University of Illinois, 1961. 

MARSHALL, James Paxton, Assistant Professor of Agricultural Economics 

B.S., University of Kentucky, 1947; M.A., Michigan State University, 1957; Ph.D., 
1962. 

MARTIN, James E., Assistant Professor of Agricultural Economics 

B.A., Auburn University, 1954; M.S., North Carolina State College, 1956; Ph.D., 
1962. 

MASSEY, William J., Assistant Professor of Education 

A.B., Louisiana State Normal College, 1936; M.Ed., University of Missouri, 1954; 
Ed.D., 1955. 

MC INTIRE, Roger Warren, Assistant Professor of Psychology 

A.A., N. Park College, 1956; B.A., Northwestern University, 1958; M.A., Louisiana 
State University, 1960; Ph.C, 1962. 

MIKULSKI, Piotr Witold, Assistant Professor of Mathematics 

Diploma, Main School of Plan. & Stat., Warsaw, Poland, 1951; Masters, 1952; 
Ph.D., University of California, 1961. 

MOTZ, Annabelle B., Assistant Professor of Sociology 

B.S., University of Wisconsin, 1941; M.A., University of Chicago, 1943; Ph.D., 
1950. 

MYERS, William F,, Assistant Professor of Microbiology 
A.B., University of Kansas, 1949; M.A., 1955; Ph.D., 1958. 

NELSON, Richard C, Assistant Professor of Physical Education 

B.A., St. Olaf College, 1954; M.Ed., Houston University, 1957; Ph.D., Michigan 
State University, 1960. 

O'DONNELL, Maurice E., Assistant Professor of Government and Politics 

B.S., Eastern Illinois State, 1948; M.S., University of Wisconsin, 1951; Ph.D., 1954. 

PENNINGTON, Kenneth D., Assistant Professor of Music 
A.B., and Bm. Mus., Friends University, 1950; M.A., New York University, 1953; 
D. Mus., Indiana University, 1961. 

300 



Faculty 

PETTY, Charles S., Assistant Professor of Legal Medicine 

B.S., University of Washington, 1941; M.S., 1946; M.D., Harvard Medical School, 
1950. 

PORTZ, John, Assistant Professor of English 

B.A., Duke University, 1937; M.A., Harvard University, 1941; Ph.D., 1957. 

RAY, Philip Bend, Assistant Professor of Education 

B.A., Antioch College, 1950; M.S., University of Pennsylvania, 1955; Ph.D., Uni- 
versity of Minnesota, 1962. 

RODBERG, Leonard S., Assistant Professor of Physics 

A.B., Johns Hopkins University, 1954; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Technol- 
ogy, 1956. 

ROTHMAN, Alvin H., Assistant Professor of Zoology 

B.A., University of California, 1952; M.A., 1954; Sc.D., Johns Hopkins University, 
1958. 

ROSENZWEIG, Edward C, Assistant Professor of Microbiology 

A.B., Centre College, 1951; M.Sc, University of Maryland, 1956; Ph.D., 1959. 

SMITH, Gayle S., Assistant Professor of English 

Ph.B., University of Chicago, 1946; B.S., Iowa State College, 1948; M.A., Cornell 
University, 1951; Ph.D., 1958. 

SNYDER, Merrill J., Assistant Professor of Microbiology 

B.S., University of Pittsburgh, 1940; M.S., University of Maryland, 1950; Ph.D., 
1953. 

STEINHAUER, Allen L., Assistant Professor of Entomology 

B.S.A., University of Manitoba, 1953; M.S.. Oregon State College, 1955; Ph.D.. 
1958. 

STEWART, James M., Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

B.A., West Washington College, 1953; Ph.D., University of Washington, 1958. 

STROSS, Raymond G., Assistant Professor of Zoology 

B.S., University of Missouri, 1952; M.S., University of Idaho, 1955; Ph.D., Uni- 
versity of Wisconsin, 1958. 

VANDERSALL, John M., Assistant Professor of Dairy Science 
B.S., Ohio State University, 1950; M.S., 1954; Ph.D.. 1959. 

WIJK, Uco Van, Assistant Professor of Astronomy 
B.S., Harvard University, 1948; Ph.D., 1952. 

WEAVER, V. Phillips, Assistant Professor of Education 

A.B., College of William and Mary, 1951; M.Ed., Pennsylvania State University, 
1956; D.Ed., 1962. 

WILBUR, June C, Assistant Professor of Textiles and Clothing 

B.S., University of Washington, 1936; Educ, 1937; M.S., Syracuse University, 1940. 

301 



Faculty 

YANEY, George L., Assistant Professor of History 

B.Mgt.E., Rensselaer Polytechnical Institute. 1952; M.A., University of Colorado, 
1956; Ph.D., Princeton University, 1961. 

YOUNG, Edgar Paul, Assistant Professor of Animal Science 
B.S., Ohio State University, 1954; M.S., 1956; Ph.D., 1958. 

ZORN, B. Sechi, Assistant Professor of Physics 
Ph.D., Universita di Cagliari, 1951. 

Lecturers 

AITKEN, Alfred H., Lecturer in Physics (P.T.) 

B.S., Lehigh University, 1949; M.S., Indiana University, 1950; Ph.D., 1955. 

BARBER, Willard P., Lecturer in Government and Politics 
A.B., Stanford University, 1928; M.A., 1929; Diploma, The War College, 1948. 

CHU, Yaohan, Lecturer in Electrical Engineering 

B.S., Chiao-Tung University, 1942; M.S., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 
1945; Sc.D., 1953. 

HOGAN, Douglas LeRoy, Lecturer in Electrical Engineering 

B.S., George Washington University, 1950; S.M., Massachusetts Institute of Tech- 
nology, 1954; Electrical Engineering, 1961. 

LEMONS, Hoyt, Lecturer in Geography 

B.Ed., Southern Illinois University, 1936; M.A., University of Nebraska, 1938; 
Ph.D., 1941. 

LINDENBERG, Richard, Lecturer in Anatomy 

Graduation, University of Munich Medical School, 1934; M.D., University of 
Berlin, 1944. 

LOBB, R. Kenneth, Lecturer in Aeronautical Engineering 

B.S., University of Alberta; M.S., University of Toronto, 1948; Ph.D., 1950. 

MECKLER, Alvin, Lecturer in Physics 

B.S., City College of New York, 1947; Ph.D., Massachusetts Institute of Tech- 
nology, 1952. 

NICOLAIDES, John Dudley, Lecturer in Aeronautical Engineering 
B.A., Lehigh University, 1946; M.S.E., Johns Hopkins University, 1952. 

SCHUCHARD, Earl A., Lecturer in Electrical Engineering 

B.S., University of Washington, 1933; M.S., 1934; Ph.D., 1940. 

SEIGEL, Arnold E., Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering 

B.S., University of Maryland, 1944; S.M., Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 
1947; Ph.D., University of Amsterdam, 1952. 

SHUTTS, R. Edwin, Lecturer in Audiology and Speech Pathology 

A.B., Indiana State Teachers' College, 1933; M.A., Northwestern University, 1947; 
Ph.D., 1950. 

302 



Faculty 

STADTMAN, Earl R., Lecturer in Microbiology 
B.S., University of California, 1942; Ph.D., 1949. 

TRENT, Horace M., Lecturer in Electrical Engineering 

B.A., Berea College, 1928; M.A., Indiana University, 1929; Ph.D., 1934. 

VANDERSLICE, John L., Lecturer in Electrical Engineering 

B.S., University of Pennsylvania, 1928; A.M., 1930; Ph.D., Princeton University, 
1934. 

WILSON, Robert E., Lecturer in Aeronautical Engineering 

B.S., Georgia Institute of Technology, 1941; M.S., 1942; Ph.D., University of 
Texas. 1952. 

Instructors 

DUDA, George D., Instructor of Biological Chemistry 

B.S., The City College of New York, 1951; Ph.D., Duke University, 1958. 

SEIPP, Joseph H., Jr., Instructor in Histology 

A.B., Loyola College; D.D.S., University of Maryland, 1955; M.S.. University of 
Pittsburgh, 1959. 

WISE, Walter R., Jr., Instructor in Mechanical Engineering 

B.S.M.E., Duke University, 1952; M.S., University of Maryland, 1955; Ph.D., 1959. 



303